Enfocus PitStop Pro 12 software Action Manual

•

Check for empty layers

on page 196

•

Flatten annotations

on page 111

•

on page 95

•

Select form if content is selected

on page 74

PitStop Pro

•

Rename layer

on page 98

•

on page 260

•

on page 267

•

on page 268

•

on page 269

Improved Actions

• The user interface of a number of Actions for working with layers has been modified. You should now select the layers concerned using another Action in the same Action List. Refer to:

•

Remove empty layers

on page 96

•

on page 97

•

on page 197

•

•

Note:

Part of the functionality (e.g. removing empty layers) has been moved to the

new Action

•

on page 97 (previously called

Remove selected objects from layers

)

•

on page 92.

Note:

Part of the functionality (e.g. selecting layers by name) has been moved to the new Action

on page 91.

•

Add separation names

on page 59 has been changed as follows:

• The

Stack separation name

checkbox has been replaced with a list (

Layout

) with three options:

•

Stack

= one separation per line (= selected

Stack separation name

checkbox in the previous version)

•

Reflow

= all separations on one line (= cleared

Stack separation name

checkbox in the previous version)

•

On same location

= all separations on top of each other (= new; useful if you're working with color plates)

• From now on, you can print

both the color name and the color patches in color

(in the previous version, color patches were always combined with the color name in black).

• You can now add a (black) border to the color patches (new option

Add stroke on color patches

PitStop Pro

New text variable: %Page Box Dimensions%

The new variable

%Page Box Dimensions%

allows you to add the width and height of the preferred page box to your document. This variable is available in the

on page 56

Action (when adding text), and in the Global Changes

Add Printer Marks

and

Add Variable Text

2.2 New and changed Actions in PitStop 12 update 2

The PitStop 12 release includes the following new features related to Actions:

New Actions

The following new Actions have been added:

•

Add separation names

on page 59

•

•

•

on page 63

•

Apply Lab curve

on page 64

PitStop Pro

•

Apply RGB curve

on page 65

•

Change initial view

on page 82

Support for regular expressions

From this version onwards, regular expressions can be used when configuring the following

Actions:

•

on page 202

•

Check font by name

on page 235

•

Check number of separations

on page 197

•

on page 177

•

Check spot color by name

on page 180

•

•

Remap spot color

on page 76

•

Remove empty layers

on page 96

•

Rename spot color

on page 78

•

on page 275

•

Select fonts by name

on page 300

•

•

Select spot color

on page 256

PitStop supports Boost Regular Expressions. For an overview of the options, refer to

http:// www.boost.org/doc/libs/1_55_0/libs/regex/doc/html/boost_regex/syntax/perl_syntax.html

Note:

• To enable the use of regular expressions, you must select the

Use regular expresssions

checkbox.

• This checkbox is only available in combination with

equal/not equal

operators.

Page scaling factor and page rotation taken into account (if relevant)

PitStop now allows you to take into account the page scaling factor and page rotation whenever it is relevant, for example when moving certain elements inside the PDF to a new position.

As a consequence, in some Actions, the

Use page rotation

checkbox has been renamed to

Use page rotation and scaling factor

Some examples of Actions having this option:

•

Move page content

on page 125

•

Replace page content by bitmap

on page 133

PitStop Pro

Other changes

The following Action has improved functionality:

•

on page 85: it's now possible to choose the compression

method, which affects the quality and size of the resulting image.

PitStop Pro

3. Automating tasks with Action Lists

Read this chapter if you want to know what Actions and Action Lists are, and how you can use them to automate your work.

3.1 About Actions and Action Lists

One of the main reasons for using PitStop Pro is editing PDF documents. For example, you may want to change text (or its formatting) or objects, or you may want to change the page layout or to prepare your document for either print or screen viewing,...

You can make these changes manually, one by one, but if you have to perform these tasks a number of times, either within a single PDF document or in multiple PDF documents, it may be preferable to

automate

them,

using Actions and Action Lists

Actions

Actions

are

pre-defined tasks

provided to you by PitStop Pro. You can use them as they are, or you can adjust them to your needs (by changing the attributes) or you can even record your own

Actions and re-use them later on.

Some examples:

• Change font color

• Normalize line weight

• Add background

The listed Actions are examples of Actions that allow you to change and edit a PDF, but you can also use Actions for making selections, gathering information and checking if a PDF conforms to certain standards.

Action Lists

Actions are always included in

Action Lists

. Action Lists are

sequences of one or more tasks

. As most of the time, several tasks have to be performed one after the other, and often in a fixed order, these Action Lists allow you to perform complex operations on PDF files.

For example, if you change the layout of the text in your document, you will probably carry out 4 different tasks (4 "Actions"): first you'll select the text, and then you'll change the font, the font size, and the font color as required. You can group them into one Action List, and run this Action

List only once. If you later have to do the same, for example in another PDF, you can simply reuse the Action List.

PitStop Pro

Note that you can use Action Lists in other Enfocus products as well, for example in a PDF

Queue in Enfocus Instant PDF, in a Connector in Enfocus Connect and in a hot folder in Enfocus

PitStop Server.

3.1.1 Actions and Action Lists: An example

About the job

Suppose you have a line art object in several PDF documents. In all these PDF documents, you want to:

• Change the fill colors of a number of areas of this object.

• Change the line weight of all lines in the object that are thinner than a given line weight.

Automating the job using an Action List

This job consists of a number of sequential tasks or "Actions" (as shown in the table below).

These individual tasks can be grouped into one Action List "Changing the properties of line art", which can then be applied to a range of pages in one or more PDF documents or to complete

PDF documents.

Step

Action

Select the fill color of an object.

Illustration

2 Change the selected fill color of an object.

Step

Action

Select another fill color of the object.

Illustration

4 Remove the selected fill color of the object.

5 Select lines of an object with a given line weight.

6 Change the selected line weight.

PitStop Pro

3.2 Where to find Actions and Action Lists

Actions and Action Lists can be accessed via the

Action Lists

dialog in PitStop Pro. Its location depends on your Acrobat version.

The following table explains how you can open the Action Lists dialog.

OS/Acrobat

Acrobat 8 and 9

Do one of the following

• In the menu bar, click

Document

Run Action List

• In the menu bar, click

Plug-Ins

Enfocus PitStop Pro

Run Action List

•

In the

Enfocus Control Panels

toolbar, click .

Acrobat X and XI

• In the menu bar, click

PitStop Pro

Action Lists

PitStop Pro

OS/Acrobat

Windows

Mac OS

Do one of the following

•

In the

Tools

pane, click

PitStop Process

Action

Lists

Press Alt+Ctrl+A.

Press A.

3.2.1 The Action Lists dialog

The

Action Lists

dialog allows you to organize, access and run Action Lists:

• You can open an existing Action List or a blank Action List (to create a new one).

• You can import, export, duplicate, and group Action Lists

• You can run Action Lists, i.e. apply them to one or more pages of the PDF you're editing.

PitStop Pro

The

Action Lists

dialog consists of the following screen parts:

# Description

Buttons to switch between Action Lists ( ) and other "presets" (Preflight Profiles ,

Global Changes and QuickRuns ).

2 A search field (allowing you to search for a particular Action List) and an Action menu

(allowing you to organize the Action Lists).

3 A workspace, which displays the available Action Lists. The Action Lists are organized in folders, called "databases". By default, the following folders can be found:

PitStop Pro

# Description

•

Favorites

: Action Lists marked as your favorites. This provides you fast access to the

Action Lists you need often.

•

Recent

: The 10 most recently used Action Lists.

•

Standard

: The default Action Lists installed with PitStop Pro (grouped in subfolders, such as Color, Fonts, Image,...).

Tip:

To learn what an Action List can do, double-click it, and check the content (the Actions it contains) and the description.

•

Local

: Action Lists edited and created by you, and saved locally.

The bottom part of the dialog allows you to

run the Action List selected in the upper part of the dialog

.You must indicate on which page(s) the Action List should run and whether or

not the results should be shown in

Using operators in Action Lists

on page 42.

3.2.2 The Action List Editor

The

Action List Editor

is accessible from within the Action List dialog: when double-clicking an

Action (or selecting

New

from the contex menu), this dialog appears. It allows you to change the

content of an Action List

• You can change the description of the Action List or protect the Action List with a password.

• You can add Actions to the Action List or remove them.

• You can organize the Actions within the Action List (e.g. group them or change the sequence).

• You can change the attributes of each of the Actions within the Action List.

The

Action List Editor

consists of the following screen parts:

# Description

1 A list of available Actions. This list is collapsed by default, but can be easily expanded by clicking . All these Actions can be used in your Action List.

PitStop Pro

# Description

2 The center and right part of the dialog apply to the selected (or new) Action List. It contains:

•

General information

, for example the name of the Action List and a description

•

Locking information

, indicating whether or not the Action List is password protected

• An overview of the

Actions

included in the Action List.

Note:

Clicking an item under

Properties

Actions

, displays the corresponding information at the right side of the dialog. In the example above, the right-hand pane shows the attributes of the selected Action

("Select embedded fonts").

3 A number of buttons allowing you to manipulate the content of the Action List. The meaning of these buttons is explained in the table below.

Buttons

Button Click to

Display the list of Actions that can be added to the current Action List. See

Actions overview

on page 29.

Import a complete Action List into the current Action List. See

on page 37.

Add an Action (selected in the list of available Actions) to the Action List.

Duplicate an Action selected in the Action List.

Remove a selected Action from the Action List.

Move the selected Action

in the Action List.

Move the selected Action

down

in the Action List.

Start recording.

Stop recording.

Note:

Most of these manipulations can also be performed using the context menu (e.g.

duplicating Actions, or moving Actions up or down).

3.2.3 Actions overview

All Actions that can be used in Action Lists are listed in the left panel of the Action List Editor. As there are more than 500 different Actions, and to make it easier to find the Action(s) you need,

Actions are

sorted by type and category

PitStop Pro

Action types

Tip:

You can use the buttons at the top of the dialog to switch between the different

Action types. The first button displays

all

Action types.

•

Selections

Before you can change something in a PDF document, you evidently have to select it. All

Actions that allow you to select something in a PDF document are listed in the

Selections

category, together with the logical operators (“AND”, “NOT, “OR”, ...).

•

Changes

A lot of Actions allow you to make changes. The list of changes includes almost anything which professional PDF editing tools like PitStop Pro can do, including:

• Adding objects, or page numbers

• Changing a wide variety of properties, including page boxes

• Color conversions

• Removing objects

• Rotating and scaling page content

• Font- and color-related changes

Note:

For each "change" Action; you can decide whether or not to log the changes in a Report.

•

Checks

Action Lists do not necessarily have to change PDF documents. You can also create them to check various properties in PDF documents or detect specific objects or elements. For example, an Action List can check font-related properties or detect empty pages in a PDF document.

Note:

For each “check” Action, you can decide whether or not to log it in a Report, and if you log it, you can assign it a status (“Warning”, “Sign-Off Error” or “Error”).

For more information, refer to

Enfocus Navigator. Refer to

on page 42.

•

Informs

Action Lists can also gather information from PDF documents. This can be information about fonts, colors, OPI, etc. This information will be presented in a Report, available via the

First you have to create a new or edit an existing Action List. See

on page 42.

•

Settings

Action Lists can also be used to change certain default PitStop Pro settings like the image recompression, page box, and color management settings, or the number of decimal places that is taken into account when checking values.

PitStop Pro

Action Categories

The Actions are further grouped into different Categories, referring to the domain they apply to (e.g. Color, Page, Prepress). The Action Categories are represented as subfolders of the

"Standard" database.

Search field

To find the Actions you need, you can can type a key word in the Search field at the top of the pane. Note that the search is limited to the selected Action Type; for example, if you've clicked the "Checks" icon at the top of the pane, PitStop Pro will only search for the entered keywords in the list of "check" Actions.

If you don't want to limit your search to a specific Action type, make sure to switch to the

All

Actions

view ( ).

3.3 Working with Action Lists

This chapter explains everything you should know to be able to edit, create and run Action Lists.

3.3.1 Working with Action Lists - how to proceed

Working with Action Lists includes the following steps:

Creating and editing an

Checking the results of an Action List

on page 32.

PitStop Pro

This means that you have to select an existing Action List or open a new, blank one and adapt it to your needs. You will hardly ever be able to use an Action List without having to change anything.

Next, you have to design your Action List:

• Add or remove any Actions as required. Alternatively you can record Actions or import an other Action List. You can organize the Actions inside your Action List as required (e.g. by grouping them).

• Make sure to use the correct operators (AND, OR, NOT).

• Set the attributes of each of the Actions in your Action List:

• Enter the required values, optionally using variables or regular expressions; in some cases you can "grab" values from the document you're editing.

• Enter the required log level ("check" Actions only) or indicate whether or not the changes should be logged ('change' Actions).

Once the Action List is ready, you can save and run it, to see if it works as expected. See

Running an Action List

on page 41.

Next, you can check the results of your Action List, using the Enfocus Navigator, and export a

Report as required. See

on page 42.

If applicable, you can fix the problems that were reported by the Enfocus Navigator or in the

Preflight Report.

Fixing problems

on page 47

Remark

Most Action Lists start with a

selection

(e.g. the Action "Select all") followed by on or more

checks

changes

(e.g. check the colors of the selected objects, change the font of the selected text, ...).

By default, when selecting objects, objects that are completely clipped away (hence are invisible) are selected as well. If you don't want this, we recommend removing them first. You can use the

Actions "Select objects that are completely clipped away" and "Remove selection" to do so.

3.3.2 Creating and editing an Action List

Why edit an Action List

Most of the time, you will not be able to use the pre-defined Action Lists without adapting them to your needs. For example, you probably don't want to add an

Enfocus

background to your

PDFs (using the "Add Enfocus Background" Action List), but your own company background.

The easiest way to do so, is by editing the existing "Add Enfocus Background" Action List and replacing the Enfocus background image with your own background image.

Why create a new Action List

Although PitStop Pro provides a lot of default Action Lists, there are so many things you can do with a PDF, that you'll probably need other combinations and sequences of tasks than the ones that are predefined.

Ways to create Action Lists

You can create an Action List in different ways:

PitStop Pro

• “Manually”, from scratch or based on an existing Action; either by adding/removing Actions

(selections, changes and operators) to your Action List or by changing them one by one. See

Creating an Action List

on page 34.

• By Recording. This is a very intuitive way of creating an Action List. Just open a PDF document, perform a number of tasks and record these tasks. As soon as you stop recording, the Actions will be added to your Action List.

• By downloading examples from the Enfocus Action List Library on the Enfocus website

(

www.enfocus.com

) and importing them into your copy of PitStop Pro. You can then edit and change them, just like the Actions provided by default with PitStop Pro.

• By saving a Global Change as an Action List. For more information, refer to Global Changes

Manual available on the

www.enfocus.com>Enfocus website

The Action List Editor

Action Lists can be created and edited via the

Action List Editor

. You can open this dialog in different ways:

• To open a

new

Action List, in the Action List dialog, click >

New

• To open an

existing

Action List, just double-click it in the Action List dialog.

3.3.2.1 Editing an Action List

Often you can use an existing Action List and only make minor changes, for example change the predefined values.

To edit an existing Action List

Open the

Action Lists

dialog.

on page 25.

Double-click the Action List concerned.

Note:

Alternatively, select the Action List you want to edit and click >

Edit

If the Action List is fully locked, you will be asked to enter a password before you can see the content of the Action List.

If it is partially locked, you will be able to view the content of the Action List, but you'll have to click the Lock icon and enter the password, before you can make any changes. Refer to

Locking an Action List

on page 50.

Fill in the

Properties

section as required:

• Select

General Information

and set the Action List name, your name and company and a description of the Action List.

• Select

Locking Information

and choose the appropriate options. Refer to

Locking an

on page 50.

Design your Action List, i.e. add or remove Actions or change the attributes of an Action as required.

Designing an Action List

on page 34.

PitStop Pro

If you have made all required changes, click

Note:

If you want to change the attributes of

multiple

Actions, do not click

until you have changed them all. Clicking

will close the Action List Editor!

The changed Action List will be saved in the Local database (folder).

You can now run the Action List.

3.3.2.2 Creating an Action List

To create a new Action List

Open the

Action Lists

dialog.

on page 25.

Open the

Action List Editor

• To create a new Action List based on an existing one, click >

New

New From/New from File

and select the Action List you want to start from.

The option

New from

allows you to select an existing Action List from the Standard database;

New from file

allows you to select a file (*.eal) from your computer.

• To create a new Action List from scratch, click >

New

Fill in the

Properties

section as required:

• Select

General Information

and set the Action List name, your name and company and a description of the Action List.

• Select

Locking Information

and choose the appropriate options. Refer to

Locking an

on page 50.

Design your Action List, i.e. add or remove Actions or change the attributes of an Action as required.

Designing an Action List

on page 34.

If you have made all required changes, click

Note:

If you want to change the attributes of

multiple

Actions, do not click

until you have changed them all. Clicking

will close the Action List Editor!

You can now run the Action List.

3.3.2.3 Designing an Action List

You can adjust an existing or a new, blank Action List to your needs:

• You can add or remove Actions as required.

• You can group them, change the order or use operators.

• You can change the attributes, i.e. using variables or regular expressions.

PitStop Pro

Adding Actions to an Action List

There are three ways to add Actions to an Action List:

• You can manually add them, by selecting them from the list of available Actions (left part of the Action List Editor).

• You can record them while performing them (once) one in a sample PDF document. In that case, you should have opened a (sample) PDF document in which you can do the Actions you wish to record.

• You can import an existing Action List that contains some of the Actions you want to perform with the new Action List.

This topic assumes you have opened an Action List in the Action List Editor.

To manually add Actions

To view all available Actions, click the

Expand

button

Search and select the appropriate Action.

Double-click the Action you want to add.

as required.

Alternatively, you can click or drag the Action onto the Action List.

Do this for all Actions you need.

Note:

• Remember that operators (AND, OR, NOT, available under Selections) must be entered

after

the selections. Refer to

Using operators in Action Lists

on page 37.

• You can use the buttons at the bottom of the pane to remove or duplicate

Actions, or to change the order of the Actions in the Action List. Alternatively, you can drag the Actions to a new position. Be careful, because changing the order may produce a different result.

To record the Actions for your Action List

Click the

Start Recording

button .

The

Start Recording

button is grayed out and the

Stop Recording

button becomes available. From now on, all Actions you perform using the PitStop Pro tools will be recorded.

Note:

Make sure that you only use PitStop Pro tools and commands to perform

Actions. All operations you do using Adobe Acrobat tools or other plug-ins will not be recorded!

Choose the commands, and perform the Actions you want to record.

To stop recording, click the

Stop Recording

button .

The Actions you performed are now added to the section under

Actions

. You can still change the attributes of these Actions if necessary.

To import an Action List, i.e. to add the Actions of this Action List to your Action List

PitStop Pro

Click .

Select an Action List

From database

(i.e. from the Action List dialog) or

From file

, i.e. a file on your computer.

Click

When importing an Action List that is locked, you need to enter the password when importing it. This will unlock the Action List.

The Action List is imported

as a group

(using the name of the imported Action List) preceded by an icon . Once imported, you can change these Actions as any other group or Action in the Action List.

Removing Actions from an Action List

If you want to remove Actions that were added by accident, or Actions you don't need after all, you can simply remove them from the Action List.

To remove an Action

In the Action List Editor, select the Action(s) you want to remove.

Do one of the following

• Right-click and select

Remove

•

Click .

The Action is removed from the Action List.

Note:

Remember that you can put the Action back, by selecting it from the list of available Actions. However, if you had made any changes to the attributes, these haven't been saved, so you will have to set them again.

Organizing the Actions in an Action List

As the order of the Actions in an Action List is important, especially in elaborate Action Lists, we recommend proceeding as follows:

Add the Actions you need, preferably starting with the "select" Actions, e.g. Select All or

Select Annotations, ...

Specify the logical operators (AND, NOT, OR, ...) if required. See

Using operators in Action Lists

on page 37.

Add the "change", "check",... Actions that should apply to the selections.

Note: Changes only apply to selections

. Therefore, make sure that you make the proper selections in your Action List first. If you have made no selections, some changes will be applied to everything in your PDF document (for example fonts) or changes will not be applied at all.

Move the Actions up or down as required.

Try to group the Actions (as explained below).

PitStop Pro

Note:

Grouping does not have any influence on the result of the Action List.

To move Actions up and down, do one of the following

• Right-click the Action concerned and select

Move Up

Move Down

•

Select the Action concerned and click or .

• Select the Action concerned and drag and drop it to the desired location.

To group Actions that belong together

Select the Actions concerned.

Right-click and select

Make Group

The selected Actions are moved to a folder called

Group Actions

Select

Group Actions

and, in the right-hand pane, enter a name and a description for this Group.

Alternatively, you can add the

Group Actions

Action to your Action List and drag the appropriate Actions to that Group. For more information, refer to the description of this

Action in the Action Manual.

Using operators in Action Lists

About operators in PitStop Pro

PitStop Pro provides a number of operators, allowing you to combine several Actions in a logical way.

These operators can be found in the Action List Editor, under

Selections

(in the folder

Operators).

Currently, following operators are available:

•

AND

NOT

- explained below.

•

Select all

- is added automatically to new Action Lists, to avoid that you forget to select anything.

•

Select last added objects

- allows you to use the result of a previous "add" Action.

•

Duplicate/Remove top of selection stack

- are mainly used internally by PitStop Server and should not be used when manually creating Action Lists.

Rules of thumb

• The operators AND, NOT, OR) must not be entered

between

two or more selections, but

after

these selections (postfix notation)! These operators

apply to the preceding selections

• If an operator is selected in the Action List Editor, the Actions (or group of Actions) it affects, will be represented using a green and purple

indicator

PitStop Pro

In the example above, the selected "OR" operator affects the "Select font Times New Roman" action (purple) and the combination of the first two lines and their "OR" operator (green).

• The operators AND, NOT, and OR are

logical

operators, which means that they have to be used in a strictly logical way. For example, if you want to select the fonts Times-Roman

(Adobe Type 1)

and

Times New Roman (TrueType), you should not use the AND operator, but the OR operator (a font cannot be both Times-Roman and Times New Roman at the same

time). You could use the AND operator, for example, to select all text in Times-Roman

and

the color of which is blue. Your Action List would then look as follows:

• The OR and AND operators

only apply to two preceding selections

. Therefore, if you want to make more than two selections, you have to insert multiple operators at the appropriate places in the “stack” of selections. For example, if you want to select the fonts Times-Roman

(Adobe Type 1), Times New Roman (TrueType) and their bold variants, your Action List should

look as follows:

• The NOT operator

applies only to the preceding selection

and can be used to

exclude something from a selection

. Unlike the OR and AND operators, the NOT operator only

requires one selection. For example, if you want to change all fonts but Times-Roman in a

PDF document to Times-Bold, your Action List would look as follows:

PitStop Pro

In the above example, the Action List will change all fonts in PDF document to Times-Bold, but leave Times-Roman (regular) unchanged.

Setting the attributes of an Action

The attributes you can set depend on the selected Action. Some Actions do not require any attributes; for others you should enter the preferred values, for example a length or a version number, pick a color, select an option from a list, select a checkbox, ... Setting the attributes is in most cases quite obvious.

Note:

If an attribute of an Action requires a unit, for example a length, the unit specified in the PitStop Pro Preferences (Units & Guides Category) is used. For example, if you're using the

Select size

Action, you have to determine minimum or maximum width or the height of the objects you want to select. If you have selected "cm" in the PitStop Pro

Preferences, you will have to specify a value in "cm".

This topic explains the "special cases":

• How to use variables instead of fixed values.

• How to use regular expressions

• How to log "check" Actions

• How to use the

Use page rotation (and scaling factor)

checkbox (which is available in a number of Actions)

To use

variables instead of fixed values

Click the

Actions

link and select

Enable Variable Names

Click .

Select the variable you want to use.

Repeat steps b-c for each variable you want to use.

Click

You must have defined a Variable Set. For more information, refer to the chapter about

Smart Preflight and the topic Creating a Variable set in the PitStop Pro Reference Guide.

To use

regular expressions instead of fixed strings

Enable the

Use regular expressions

checkbox.

Create rules using regular expressions. The most commonly used symbols can be used.

Regular expressions provide a way to find patterns within a text. This is useful in many contexts, for example to check whether a piece of text meets certain criteria, or to find and/or replace strings with a particular pattern. In PitStop Pro, regular expressions are used to configure the attributes of certain Actions (but only available in combination with

PitStop Pro

equal/not equal

operators). For an overview of the Actions concerned, refer to the Action manual on the Enfocus website.

PitStop supports Boost Regular Expressions. For more information, refer to

http:// www.boost.org/doc/libs/1_47_0/libs/regex/doc/html/boost_regex/synt ax/perl_syntax.html

Examples:

Rename spot color

is an Action that allows you to change the name of spot colors in a document.

• To rename variants of the same color, e.g. to rename “Varnish0”, “Varnish1”,

“Varnish23” (i.e. "Varnish" followed by one or more digits) to “Varnish” (without any digits), you could create a rule that renames "Varnish([0-9])+" to "Varnish".

• To replace "Pantone" (regardless of the case) with "Separation" in all spot color names used in your document, create the following rule:

This rule will allow you to rename "Pantone 0123 U" to "Separation 0123 U", "PANTONE

9324 U" to "Separation 9324 U", ...

In case of Actions of the type "Check", you should determine if and how the result of the

Action should be logged (in the Enfocus Navigator and in the Report).

•

Don't Log

: Nothing will be logged.

•

Log as warning

: If the check is positive, it will be logged as a warning ( ). This allows you distinguish between severe and less severe issues.

•

Log as error and allow Sign-Off

( ): If the check is positive, it will be logged as an error that can be "signed-off", i.e. can be "approved" or evaluated as a minor error which doesn't fail PDF certification. This is only relevant if you're running Actions in the context of Certified PDF.

•

Log as error

( ): If the check is positive, it will be logged as an error. If you're running

Actions in the context of Certified PDF, this kind of problems will prevent the file from being certified OK. The problem must be fixed, before the file can be certified.

PitStop Pro

If the Action you're configuring has the

Use page rotation

or the

Use page rotation and scaling factor

checkbox:

• To take into account page rotation and/or scaling factor, select this checkbox. The Action will be applied to the actual position of the page content.

• To ignore page rotation and/or scaling factor, clear this checkbox. The Action will be applied to the original position of the page content (i.e. BEFORE applying page rotation and/or scaling factor).

3.3.3 Running an Action List

This topic describes how to run an Action List. The procedure is identical, regardless of whether you have created the Action List yourself, or if you're using a standard Action List provided by

PitStop Pro or an imported Action List.

To run an Action List

Open the

Action Lists

dialog.

a PDF document that displays general file information as well. See

on page 25.

Select the Action List you want to run.

Determine if you want to run the selected Action on the whole document, or on a page range:

•

Complete document

: All pages in the document. You can further specify to run it on all pages, or only on even or odd pages.

•

User selection

: The area or object(s) selected using the PitStop Select Object tool.

•

Current page

: Only the page which is currently displayed.

•

Pages

: All pages or a page range as specified.

Indicate if you want to view the results of the Action List in the Enfocus Navigator or in a

Preflight Report, after you have run the Action List.

It depends on your PitStop Pro Preferences if the Enfocus Navigator or the Preflight Report will be shown (See

Edit (Windows) or Adobe (Mac)

PitStop Pro Preferences

General

The Enfocus Navigator is a dialog that gives an overview of the changes performed by the selected Action List and enables you to generate a (Preflight) Report. This Preflight Report is

Checking the results of an

the Action List, Global Change or Preflight Profile. See also

on page 42.

Select the appropriate option:

•

Always

: The Enfocus Navigator dialog or the Report will always appear.

•

Never

: The Enfocus Navigator dialog or the Report will never appear.

•

On Error

: The Enfocus Navigator or the Preflight Report will only appear if an Error is detected.

Errors can only be detected for Actions of the type "Check", if you have selected

Log as error

Log as error and allow Sign-off

(in the attributes of the "check" Action).

PitStop Pro

If you have chosen an "inform" Action, the requested information will be included in the

Report, so make sure to select

Always

Click .

The Action List runs with the selected options. You can now check the results of the Action List in the Enfocus Navigator or the Preflight Report (if you have chosen to do so) or in the PDF itself.

3.3.4 Checking the results of an Action List

When you run an Action List, you may want to check what exactly has been changed or what the result of the Action is. This information is accessible via the Enfocus Navigator. You can also generate a Report with all this information.

Note:

The Enfocus Navigator and the Report also show the results of Global Changes and Preflight Checks. For more information about Global Changes and preflighting of PDF documents, refer to the corresponding chapters in the PitStop Pro Reference

Guide.

3.3.4.1 The Enfocus Navigator

The Enfocus Navigator allows you to check the results of the performed Action List, Global

Change and/or Preflight check if applicable. Depending on your PitStop Pro preferences (under

General), the Enfocus Navigator may pop up immediately after you have run an Action List,

Global Change and/or Preflight Profile.

Tip:

If it doesn't appear, you can open the Enfocus Navigator via

Tools

PitStop

Process

Navigator

(Acrobat X and XI) or

Windows

Show Enfocus Navigator

(older Acrobat versions).

PitStop Pro

The Enfocus Navigator consists of the following screen parts:

Description

Name of the Action List, Global Change or Preflight Profile and the number of changes. In the above example, only one change has been carried out.

The icon indicates that the change was successful. In case of problems, you may see (Warning), (Error which can be signed-off) or (Error).

Click the

Actions

link and select

Show Report

to view a Report with information about the PDF being processed (e.g. document properties, security information, the performed Actions,...).

Note:

If you have used an Action of the type "informs", you should open the

Report to find the information you wanted to collect with the Action List!

Select the checkboxes if you want to highlight and/or select the objects that have been affected by the performed Actions, Global Change, or Preflight check.

PitStop Pro

Description

The

Description

section indicates which objects have been changed. Select a line to see the corresponding details in the

Details

section below. This way you can browse through the results.

Note:

It may be handy to use this browser in combination with the Enfocus

Inspector to see more details about a particular problem or to correct the problem immediately. For more information, refer to "Browsing throught the results" in the PitStop Pro Reference Guide.

The

Details

section provides information about the items selected under

Description

The Solution section allows you to fix problems, in case of warnings or errors. For example, if an Action of the type "Check" has detected a font problem, you will get the possibility to select an alternative font and change the font immediately.

3.3.4.2 The Report

If you have run an Action List, a Global Change or a Preflight Profile, you have the possibility to create a report (in PDF format) with information about what has or has not changed. In case of

Actions of the type "Informs", you need to generate such a report in order to see the information you asked for.

Note:

If you want to generate a report, choose "Always show results", when running

Generating a Report

on page

46.

Content of a Report

A Report usually contains the following sections:

Section

Errors, Warnings & Fixes

General File Information

Font Information

Image Information

OPI Information

Color Information

Content

(Potential) problems and changes. It depends on the log level of the "check" Actions in the Action List whether or not something is tagged as an Error or Warning.

Properties of the PDF document, such as PDF version, title, author, etc. and security information.

All fonts used in the PDF document, along with their attributes (type of font, embedded or subset, etc.).

All images in the PDF document, along with additional information (for example physical and effective resolution, page, angle, custom color functions, etc.).

OPI usage in the PDF document.

All color spaces (RGB, CMYK, etc.) used in the PDF document, with additional information where required.

Fixes, warnings, and errors

The results of the Action List, Global Change or Preflight Check can be found in the Preflight

Report section. Errors, warnings and fixes are grouped and preceded by a number of icons:

PitStop Pro

•

A magnifying glass icon . Clicking this icon opens the Enfocus Navigator and allows you to browse through the list of affected objects.

•

An information icon (in case of a warning or error) . Clicking this icon opens a Help topic with information about the problem concerned.

• A green, orange or red bullet, indicating the type of problem:

•

Green for a fix

•

Orange for a warning

•

Red for an error

Report styles

When generating a report, you can choose the report layout style that suits your needs.

There are four "annotated" reports (first four in the table below). An annotated report is a combination of the original document and the report. The report information is integrated in the original document as a number of notes and bookmarks, allowing to easily navigate to the errors and warnings, in Acrobat Reader or in a browser, without using any Enfocus software.

The three other report styles (Regular, Minimum, Continuous) do not include a copy of the original document.

Report style

Annotated Report

Low Resolution Annotated

Report

Secured Annotated Report

Description

Report with annotations. The report is a copy of the processed PDF; checks and changes are annotated.

Report with annotations and with low resolution images, which reduces the file size of the report.

Report with annotations and protected with a password.

Users are not allowed to edit the report.

Note:

When selecting this report style, you are asked to enter a password. With this password,

PitStop Pro

Report style

Scaled Low Resolution

Annotation Password (max A4)

Regular

Minimum

Continuous

Description

you can still change the security settings of the report as required.

Report with annotations. The entire document is scaled and has a low resolution. The size of the pages in the report will not exceed the A4 size and the images are also compressed to a smaller size.

Note:

This may be useful if you want to send reports for large format documents through email.

Report which does NOT include the processed PDF. It contains general file information and an overview of the fixes, failures, warnings, and errors (if any).

Regular report with minimal information.

Regular report, but without page breaks between the topics (information about the fixes and general file information, font information, ...) as in the Regular Report.

Printed in grayscale.

3.3.4.3 Generating a Report

This topic explains how to generate a Report using the Enfocus Navigator. If you have configured the PitStop Pro Preferences (under General) to always display the Preflight Report (with a chosen report style), you only must run the Action List, Global Change or Preflight Profile with the option

Show results: Always

To generate a Report which gives an overview of the results of your Action List, Global Change or Preflight Check

Run the Action List, Global Change or Preflight Check on your document.

Make sure to select

Always

from the

Show results

list. Otherwise the Enfocus Navigator won't pop up. If you have forgotten to do so, you can open the Enfocus Navigator via

Tools

PitStop Process

Navigator

(Acrobat X and XI) or

Windows

Show Enfocus Navigator

(older Acrobat versions).

The Enfocus Navigator appears. Here you can already see the result of the Action List,

Global Change or Preflight Check you performed. Refer to

42.

Click the

Actions

link (in the top right corner of the Enfocus Navigator).

From the list, select

Show Report

Select a Report style and click

Show Report

For more information about the Report styles, refer to

The Report

on page 44.

The Report appears and the errors, warnings and fixes are listed on the first page.

Using the Adobe Acrobat

Hand Tool

, you can now:

PitStop Pro

•

Click the magnifying glass next to an error, warning or fix to select and highlight the corresponding object in the PDF document. Remember that you can browse through the affected objects in the Enfocus Navigator. It may be a good idea to open at the same time the Enfocus Inspector to see more details about a particular problem or to correct the problem immediately.

•

Click the information icon next to an error, warning or fix to see a Help topic. A dialog box may appear, asking you where you wish to view the Help topic (Open Weblink). If so, select

In Web Browser

Click

File

Save

and save the file.

3.3.5 Fixing problems

If problems (warnings, errors) are reported, you may want to solve them.

• In some cases, you will find a solution in the

Enfocus Navigator

. You can use this fix for all problem instances in the file, or you can browse to a particular object and only fix that one.

Note that it may be handy to use the PitStop Inspector to learn more about the problem concerned.

• If no solution is recommended, you can generate a

Report

(see

Generating a Report

46) and click the information icon to find a solution for the problem concerned. In many cases, you can just run another Action List to fix the problem. For example:

• Layer problems found with the "Check layers" Action can be solved with the "Fix layers"

Action.

• Font problems found with "Check corrupt font widths" can be solved with "Change corrupt font width", ...

3.3.5.1 Fixing problems - use case

This is an example of how you can fix problems reported by the Enfocus Navigator.

Problem:

You have run an Action List which includes the Check resolution Action. You get an error saying that the resolution of some images in your PDF document is too high.

Solution:

Check and resample the images as required.

To simulate this use case, proceed as follows

Open a PDF (with images) and create an Action List which contains the Check resolution

Action. Make sure to set a resolution lower than the one in your PDF and select Log as

Error.

Run the Action List, with Show results set to

Always

Do one of the following, depending on what's shown after you have run the Action List (the

Report or the Enfocus Navigator):

PitStop Pro

•

If the Report is displayed, click the icon preceding the warning "Resolution of color or grayscale image is more than x ppi (3x on pages y-z)"

• If the Enfocus Navigator is displayed, select the warning "Resolution of color or grayscale image is more than x ppi (3x on pages y-z)".

In the Enfocus Navigator, to view and highlight the images in question, click icon preceding the message concerned.

You now see a list of objects in question (in this example: images of which the resolution is too low).

Do one of the following:

• To resample all images concerned in one go:

In the Solution section, enter the appropriate values

Click

Fix

• To resample the images one by one:

Click the object concerned.

In the Solution section, enter the appropriate values.

Click

Fix

• To first check the resolution of the images concerned:

Click the object concerned.

Choose

Window

Show Enfocus Inspector

or click the

Show Inspector

button to display the Enfocus Inspector.

In the Enfocus Inspector, click the

Image

Properties

category to see the actual resolution of the selected image.

Click the

Resample

tab and decrease the resolution of the image to the required value.

Click

Apply

Run the Action List again.

If you have fixed all problems, the Enfocus Navigator and the Report will contain a message that no errors or warnings were found, and that no fixes are required.

3.4 Managing Action Lists

This chapter explains how to import, export, and lock Action Lists.

Note:

Next to that, you can also duplicate and refresh the Action Lists in the Action Lists dialog, and add them to your favorites, using the context menu.

PitStop Pro

3.4.1 Exporting an Action List

You can export your Action Lists, for example to share them with other users, or to use them on another computer.

To export an Action List

Open the

Action Lists

dialog.

lock the Action List, refer to

on page 25.

Click >

Import/Export

Export

You may get a warning if the Action List is not protected with a password. If you would like to

Locking an Action List

on page 50.

Select a download location.

Click

Save

3.4.2 Importing an Action List

A lot of Action Lists can be downloaded from the Enfocus Action List Library on the Enfocus website (

www.enfocus.com

). Action Lists have file extension .eal.

To import an Action List

Open the

Action Lists

dialog.

PitStop Pro

on page 25.

Click >

Import/Export

Import

If you want to import multiple Action Lists, you may want to group them into a folder and import this entire folder into the application. In that case, choose

Import Group

and select the appropiate folder on your system.

Select the appropriate Action List.

Click

Open

The imported Action List appears in the Local folder in the Action Lists dialog. You can run and/ or edit this Action List as required.

3.4.3 Locking an Action List

You can secure your Action List with a password to prevent others from changing it. This may be convenient when the Action List is shared among multiple users. You can lock an Action List with a password when you create the Action List or you can add a password afterwards.

To lock an Action List

Open the

Action Lists

dialog.

Select registration marks

on page 25.

Select an Action List and double-click it.

Under Properties, select

Locking Information

Select the appropriate option:

• To allow everyone to

run, view, and edit

this Action List, select

Not locked

• To allow everyone to

run

the Action List and

view

the Actions in the Action List, select

Partially locked

Users will not be able to change the individual Actions and their respective attributes in the Action List. This is useful to give the users a precise idea of what the Action List will do.

• To allow users to

run

the Action List only, select

Locked

Users will not be able to see or change the Actions in the Action List without filling in the password first.

If you haven chosen to (partially) lock the Action List, fill in a password and confirm it.

The password can include:

• Uppercase and lowercase letters

• Any character on the keyboard

• Spaces

Click

Apply

PitStop Pro

3.5 Action Lists in practice - a use case

The following real life example is used to illustrate in detail how to create an Action List. It shows:

• Which selections to make.

• Which operators to use.

• Which changes to apply.

3.5.1 Given: PDF documents of booklets with creep

Suppose you have PDF documents of booklets that are almost press-ready. The pages are to be printed double-sided, folded and trimmed. You want to make sure that the page numbers, which are close to the edge of the page, do not get trimmed off. Indeed, when pages are folded for saddle-stitch binding, the printed area slightly moves outward. This is known as

creep

in the publishing world. The more pages in a booklet, the larger the shift of the area of the inner pages will be.

Figure 1: Creep moves the printed area of the inner pages outwards, which may cause page numbers near the outer edges of the pages to be trimmed off.

To compensate for this creep, you can create an Action List that does the following:

• Shift the printed area of the left-hand (even-numbered) pages 5 mm to the right.

• Shift the printed area of the right-hand (odd-numbered) pages 5 mm to the left (closer to the binding).

• Leave the first page unchanged (for example because this page is not numbered).

Figure 2: Changing the page layout: move the printed area of the inner pages (

and

) towards the binding to compensate for creep, but leave the first page (

) unchanged.

PitStop Pro

3.5.2 Creating an Action List that changes the page layout of a PDF document

Using the

Enfocus Action List Editor

, create an Action List that looks as follows:

Select all

Select odd pages

Select first page

NOT

AND

Move page content (horizontal: 5.0 mm, vertical: 0.0 mm)

Select all

Select even pages

Select first page

NOT

AND

Move page content (horizontal: – 5.0 mm, vertical: 0.0 mm)

Click

View

Zoom

Zoom to Page Level

to see the pages on the complete media size.

To open the Action Lists dialog, click

PitStop Pro

Action Lists

Select the respective Action List and click

Run

PitStop Pro will apply the Action List in the following steps:

Step

Action

Select all

It's good practice to start Action Lists with a

Select all

Action, to reset previous selections if any.

Select odd pages

Content on odd pages should move to the left, whereas content on even pages should move to the right. First, the odd pages will be processed.

Select first page

NOT

Step

PitStop Pro

Action

NOT excludes the first page from your selection, because it should remain unchanged.

AND

AND at this point combines the selections of steps 1 and 2 with the exclusion of step 4.

Move page content 5.0 mm horizontally.

This change moves the page content 5 mm to the left.

Select all

Resets the previous selection.

Select even pages

Select first page

NOT

NOT excludes the first page from your selection, because it should remain unchanged.

AND

AND at this point combines the selections of steps 7 and 8 with the exclusion of step 10.

Move page content –5.0 mm horizontally

This change moves the page content 5 mm to the right.

PitStop Pro

4. Actions sorted per Type

4.1 Changes

The following Actions allow you to make changes to PDF documents, such as adding objects or page numbers, removing objects, rotating and scaling page content, ...

4.1.1 Add

4.1.1.1 Add background

Belongs to

•

Category:

Add

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Adds a background to the selection that preceeds this Action in your Action List.

You can choose a color for the background and define a size (size of one of the page boxes or the same size as the bounding box of all objects).

4.1.1.2 Add color bar

Belongs to

•

Category:

Add

•

Type:

Changes

•

Since version:

12 update 3

What it does

Adds color patches to your PDF document. The color patches are individually created for each page and show all separations including any spot colors.

How to proceed

On the

Color Patches

tab, indicate how many tint values per separation you want to add.

By default, a 100% tint of the color is added.

• To change a value, double-click it in the

Tint values (%)

box and type an alternative value.

PitStop Pro

•

To add another value, click and enter the required value.

•

To remove a value, select it and click .

Enter the required size of the color patches, i.e. the preferred height or width. This depends on the device you're using.

Select the preferred options:

•

Repeat color patches

: The color patches are repeated till the end of the line (= right border of the page box). If this checkbox is cleared, each tint value of each color is added only once.

•

Don't add process colors (C, M, Y, K)

: For process colors no color patches are added.

•

Don't add if tint is 0%

: If a color is defined but not used in the PDF, no color patch will be added.

Switch to the

Position

tab.

Determine the position of the color bar relative to one of the page boxes.

Examples

Example 1:

This document contains two spot colors, which are each added once, in 2 tint values

(100% + 50%). Chosen position: relative to the top of the trim box (blue line). Process colors are

not added.

Example 2:

Same options as in the first example, but with

Repeat color patches

enabled.

PitStop Pro

4.1.1.3 Add copied graphics

Belongs to

•

Category:

Add

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Copies graphic elements and positions them on the page.

How to proceed

Select the graphic(s) by using the PitStop Select Objects tool .

Click

Grab Selection

To see the graphic that will be copied, switch to the

Preview

tab.

To specify how the graphics must be displayed, switch back to the

Attributes

tab and select the appropriate options.

Graphics can be rotated, put in the foreground or background. You can place them at any position on the page and use the offset feature to more precisely position the graphic.

4.1.1.4 Add object

Belongs to

•

Category:

Add

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Inserts a chosen object (a line, a rectangle, an ellipse or a text) and positions it relative to one of the page boxes. This can be useful to add information to be trimmed off later.

Note:

If you're inserting text, you can make use of predefined variables, such as the name of the document, the author, the page number, page count, the page box dimensions, ...See the example below.

The

Fill

and

Stroke

tabs allow you to define the color of the objects you are inserting.

Example

To add the width and height of the media box to your document, proceed as follows:

In the attributes for the Add object Action, on the

Object and position

tab, choose

Add text in foreground

Click the

Variable

button.

Select

%Page Box Dimensions%

Select the page box of which you want to insert the dimensions, in this example

Media Box

The current value is shown.

PitStop Pro

Click

Insert

Select a font and a font size and determine where the text must be inserted in the document, for example in the center of the media box with a particular offset.

Specify whether or not to take into account page rotation and page scaling factor if applicable.

Below is an example of the dialog that allows you to insert predefined text variables.

4.1.1.5 Add page box marks

Belongs to

•

Category:

Add

•

Type:

Changes

PitStop Pro

What it does

Allows you to add trim marks and/or bleed marks to your document in the style of your preference (InDesign or QuarkXPress).

4.1.1.6 Add page number

Belongs to

•

Category:

Add

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Adds page numbers (including section and chapter numbers) to a PDF.

Note:

The Global Change

Add Page Number

provides the same functionality.

How it works

You must first create a sample piece of text, which will be used to determine the format and style used for page numbering (font, color, size etc):

• If you want to add a page number only, the sample should only be a number, e.g. "3".

• If you want to add a page number with more information (for example: include the word

"Page" and the total number of pages) add this to the sample, e.g. "Page 1 of 10".

The text strings (including spaces and punctuation) in this sample will be used as they are. For the numbers in this sample, you should indicate which one refers to the page number, hence should be considered a variable. For example, if your sample is "Page 1 of 10", "1" refers to the page number (Page %pagenr% of 10) and will be different on each page. "10" will not be changed, as it is not possible to use variables for other information than page numbers.

How to proceed

Create an example piece of text.

Select the sample by using the PitStop Select Objects tool .

In the attributes of the Action, click the

Grab Sample from Selection

button.

The sample text appears in the Sample field.

Specify the position of the page numbers relative to the text and one of the page boxes. You can use a default offset, manually enter offset values or grab the document's offset values.

To start numbering on a different page than the first page of the document, enter the page number. For example, if you want to start numbering after the table of contents, for example on the third page of the document, enter "3".

If your sample text contains numbers, the

Variable number sequence

list is activated.

This list allows you to indicate which number should be considered a variable (indicated by

"%pagenr%").

For example, if your sample text is "Page 2, Section 1", you will have three options:

• "Page 2, Section 1" will insert "Page 2, Section 1" on every page.

• "Page %pagenr%, Section 1" will insert "Page 1, Section 1" on page 1, "Page 2, Section

1" ...(Section 1 will not change)

PitStop Pro

• "Page 2, Section %pagenr%" will insert "Page 2, Section 1" on page 1, "Page 2, Section

2" ...(Page 2 will not change)

Switch to the

Options

tab and select the appropriate checkbox:

•

Remove any overlapping text

will remove existing page numbers.

•

Only number pages that already have a number

will not add page numbers to pages that currently don't have any.

•

Add white background

ensures that the page numbers are visible, even if the PDF has a dark background.

4.1.1.7 Add pages

Belongs to

•

Category:

Add; Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to insert either empty pages or pages from a particular PDF file.

You can choose the number of pages to add, the location of the new pages in the PDF ...

4.1.1.8 Add registration marks

Belongs to

•

Category:

Add

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to add registration marks to your document in the style of your preference (InDesign or QuarkXPress).

Registration marks ensure that the different separations in a color document are properly aligned.

Related Actions

4.1.1.9 Add separation names

Belongs to

•

Category:

Add

•

Type:

Changes

•

Since version:

12 update 2

PitStop Pro

What it does

Allows the names of color separations to be generated and positioned within a PDF file. The separation names are individually created for each page and show all separations including any spot colors.

You have several options. You can specify:

•

How

the separation names should be displayed (stacked (i.e. one per line), inline (

reflow

) or all on top of each other (

on same location

- useful for color plates); in color or with color patches, rotated, …). You can also determine the font and the font size.

•

Where

exactly they should be placed on the page (position of the color names relative to a page box).

• Whether or not

process colors

and

separations with 0% tint

should be displayed.

• If you have chosen to add color patches, whether or not they should have a border (

Add stroke on color patches

Examples

• Example 1: Layout:

Stack

and Color:

Separation names in black + color patches

are selected.

• Example 2: Layout:

Overflow

and Color:

Separation names in black + color patches

are

selected. The color patches have a border, because

Add stroke on color patches

is enabled.

• Example 3: Layout:

Overflow

and Color:

Separation names in color

are selected.

4.1.1.10 Put selection in form

Belongs to

•

Category:

Add

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to gather all selected objects in a form (a so-called XObject form).

Forms are rectangular frames in a PDF document that contain objects. The way in which you edit these forms and the objects inside them is different from regular objects in a PDF

PitStop Pro document. For example, you can select a regular object and move it to a random position on the page in your PDF document. Objects in forms can only be moved inside the form and thus, you can use the form to crop the object.

Note that you can use PitStop's Edit Form tool in order to edit the form and the objects it contains.

4.1.2 Color

4.1.2.1 Add default color spaces for color spaces that are not compliant to the Output Intent

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

If you are using an Output Intent that does not support a certain color space, you can use this

Action to replace it with another color space that does comply.

You can select an alternative color space for Gray, RGB, and/or CMYK.

The following PDF/X and PDF/A standards are supported:

• PDF/X-1a:2001

• PDF/X-3:2002

• PDF/X-1a:2003

• PDF/X-3:2003

• PDF/X-4

• PDF/X-4p

• PDF/A-1

• PDF/A-2

4.1.2.2 Apply CMYK curve

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

•

Since version:

12 update 2

What it does

This Action allows color curves to be applied to selected CMYK objects, either on all four channels, or on individual C, M, Y, or K channels.

Curves can be created by adding points, and dragging them to the preferred position, or by entering values in the

Input

and

Output

field below the curve.

PitStop Pro

Example

4.1.2.3 Apply color curve

Belongs to

•

Application:

PitStop Pro

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

•

Since version:

12 update 2

What it does

This Action allows color curves to be applied on separations of selected objects.

The default separations are C, M, Y, K, and Other (= all other separations in the file except for

CMYK), but you can also add a curve for another spot color or varnish separation, which will be used if that color appears in the processed file.

Curves can be created by adding points, and dragging them to the preferred position, or by entering values in the

Input

and

Output

field below the curve.

Note:

Apply color curve is also available as a Global Change!

Example

The

button allows you to add a curve for an additional color.

PitStop Pro

4.1.2.4 Apply DeviceLink

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to convert the color of the selected objects to Gray, CMYK or RGB using a DeviceLink profile (instead of a ICC profile).

DeviceLink Profiles are device specific profiles, converting colors from one color space to another, without converting to LAB or any other device independent color space in between.

You can convert only the stroke or fill of the objects, or both.

4.1.2.5 Apply Gray curve

Belongs to

•

Application:

PitStop Pro

•

Category:

Color

PitStop Pro

•

Type:

Changes

•

Since version:

12 update 2

What it does

This Action allows a curve to be applied to selected Gray objects.

Curves can be created by adding points, and dragging them to the preferred position, or by entering values in the

Input

and

Output

field below the curve.

Example

4.1.2.6 Apply Lab curve

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

•

Since version:

12 update 2

What it does

This Action allows color curves to be applied to selected Lab objects on individual lightness, a, or b channels.

Curves can be created by adding points, and dragging them to the preferred position, or by entering values in the

Input

and

Output

field below the curve.

PitStop Pro

Example

4.1.2.7 Apply RGB curve

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

•

Since version:

12 update 2

What it does

This Action allows color curves to be applied to selected RGB objects, either on all three channels, or on individual R, G, or B channels.

Curves can be created by adding points, and dragging them to the preferred position, or by entering values in the

Input

and

Output

field below the curve.

Example

PitStop Pro

4.1.2.8 Apply transfer function

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress;Text;LineArt;Color;Image

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Adds a transfer function to paths, text, images or all these types of objects. You can exclude spot colors or apply the transfer function on tint values or alternate values only.

Transfer functions are used for creative purposes, artistic effect and to correct the characteristics of a specific, maybe poorly calibrated, output device. For example, a file that is intended for output on a particular image setter may contain transfer functions that compensate for the dot gain inherent to that printer.

Note:

Transfer functions are not allowed in PDF/X compliant documents.

Related Actions

•

on page 231

PitStop Pro

•

on page 152

4.1.2.9 Change color

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to change the fill and/or stroke colors in a PDF.

How to proceed

Define the target colors as follows:

Select the appropriate checkbox, depending on what you want to change (Fill color or Stroke color).

Select the appropriate target color in one of the following ways:

Select an object with the PitStop Select Objects tool and use the icon to grab the fill or stroke color (depending on what you're defining).

Click the color picker icon

Select the required color space:

and select the appropriate color.

• Device colors can be Gray, RGB or CMYK

• Calibrated colors can be Gray or RGB

• User Swatch (= user-defined colors)

Fine tune the color by moving the sliders.

Related Actions

on page 74

4.1.2.10 Change default color spaces

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

PitStop Pro

What it does

Allows you to set the default color spaces for Gray, RGB and CMYK objects in a PDF. These spaces are chosen from the list of available profiles (or you can browse for profiles on your system) and can be applied to all objects or only to objects with absent color spaces.

4.1.2.11 Change Gray to CMYK Black

Belongs to

•

Application:

PitStop Pro

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Remaps the device grayscale color space to the device CMYK color space, keeping overprint.

4.1.2.12 Change blending color space

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color; Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows to change the blending color space and/or the luminosity softmask blending color space

(if defined in the PDF document).

You can:

• Change the color to CMYK, gray or RGB, or

• Remove the blending color space, by selecting "none" from the first list, or

• Leave one of the color spaces unchanged, by selecting

Do not change

About blending color spaces

When Adobe Acrobat interprets transparent objects and attempts to create a preview of the flattened artwork, it needs to do so using a single color space for all the items involved in the transparency group. This color space is called the

blending color space

The blending color space for soft masks (masks with soft transitions) is called the

luminosity softmask blending color space

. It is usually gray.

Related Actions

•

on page 175

PitStop Pro

•

on page 247

4.1.2.13 Change Output Intent

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color; Metadata

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes a PDF's output intent to comply with a particular PDF/X or PDF/A version, using a particular ICC profile and/or ICC characterization.

Related Actions

4.1.2.14 Change rendering intent

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress;Color

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Modifies the rendering intent of an object to one of the following:

• Absolute Colorimetric

• Relative Colorimetric

• Perceptual

• Saturation

About rendering intents

A rendering intent is a remapping method, allowing to remap colors so that they best match the intended use. ‘Remapping’ means that colors from one output device’s color space are mapped to the color space of another device.

For more information and examples, refer to

the PitStop Pro Reference Guide on the Enfocus website

(See Chapter "Rendering intents to remap colors").

Related Actions

•

•

on page 178

PitStop Pro

•

4.1.2.15 Change spot color suffix

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Modifies a selected spot color's suffix to one of the following standard suffixes: CV; CVC; CVU;

CVS; CVP; C; U; or M (or None of the above).

About spot color suffixes

Suffixes represent the

apparent

color of the color when printed on different types of paper. For example, PANTONE 3258

and PANTONE 3258

refer to the same color, but when printed on

oated, respectively

ncoated paper, they will look different, although the same ink formula was used.

Besides C (coated), U (uncoated) and M (matte), in software color palettes, you can find suffixes that refer to on-screen simulations of how colors will look when printed on different paper types. For example, PANTONE 3258 CVU is an on-screen indication of how PANTONE 3258 will look like when printed on uncoated paper.

Suffix overview

Suffix

CVC

CVU

Meaning

Computer video (electronic simulation)

Computer video - coated

Computer video - uncoated

Coated paper

Uncoated paper

Matte paper

Related Actions

•

•

on page 180

4.1.2.16 Convert alternate color space to CMYK

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the alternate color space for a spot to CMYK.

PitStop Pro

If you want to change all alternate color spaces except for gray, select the

Do not convert if alternate color space is gray

checkbox.

About alternate color spaces

The alternate color space is used as a ‘backup’ color space when the original spot color is not available on a specific output device, and when converting the spot color into CMYK. If this alternate color space is defined as anything other than CMYK or plain gray, the output results may not be up to standards.

4.1.2.17 Convert color

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the color space of an object to gray, RGB, CMYK or a given spot color.

You can convert the fill and/or stroke color as required.

4.1.2.18 Convert color to shading color space

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Converts the colors in a PDF to their shading counterparts.

4.1.2.19 Convert images to indexed color space

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color;Image

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the color of images to the indexed color space.

About the indexed color space

The indexed color space uses no more than 256 colors, and is as such particularly suited for use in Web applications. Images are typically converted to indexed color mode in order to

decrease their file sizes

. When an image is converted to indexed color, a color lookup table is created,

PitStop Pro in which the colors that were used in the image are stored and indexed. Using an indexed color table lets you reduce the file size of an image while maintaining the visual quality that you need.

4.1.2.20 Convert indexed color space to base color space

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the indexed color space back to the original colors.

About the indexed color space

The indexed color space uses no more than 256 colors, and is as such particularly suited for use in Web applications. Images are typically converted to indexed color mode in order to

decrease their file sizes

. When an image is converted to indexed color, a color lookup table is created, in which the colors that were used in the image are stored and indexed. Using an indexed color table lets you reduce the file size of an image while maintaining the visual quality that you need.

4.1.2.21 Convert process to DeviceN

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Converts all instances of device CMYK to DeviceN.

You must indicate what is most important to you:

• Reducing the number of color plates to a minimum, or

• Keeping the overprint settings

4.1.2.22 Convert shading color space to solid color

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Converts shading colors ("gradients") in the corresponding solid colors. You can convert the fill, the stroke or both as required.

Shadings represent complex mathematical functions. That's why certain output devices may not be able to correctly interpret them. Shadings can also cause problems during color conversions.

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

Select shading objects

Check for NChannel colors with non-trivial process dictionary

4.1.2.23 Convert spot color to equivalent CMYK color

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the color of a spot color object to its CMYK equivalents (for example to save on ink).

You can do this for all spot colors, or only for spot colors of which the alternate color is CMYK or

Gray (less risk of getting small color variations).

4.1.2.24 Create varnish

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Creates a varnish on top of the selected object.

This varnish is a user-defined spot color with the same shape of the selected object.

How to proceed?

Enter a name to recognize this spot color by, and indicate whether or not you wish to set it to overprint.

4.1.2.25 Make DeviceN without NChannel information

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Converts the color space to DeviceN without NChannel information.

About NChannel

NChannel is an extension of the DeviceN color space, a multi-component, device-dependent color space. NChannel color spaces give applications greater flexibility when representing colors that are not available on a target device.

PitStop Pro

NChannel is supported from PDF 1.6 (Acrobat 7.x) onwards. If you are opening a PDF in an earlier version of Adobe Acrobat, colors can print or display incorrectly.

About converting NChannel to DeviceN

This Action will convert NChannel to DeviceN, so the object looks as it will be printed when using devices not supporting PDF 1.6 features.

Note that there are three options. You can convert the color space to:

•

DeviceN

•

NChannel with regular DeviceN color information only

•

NChannel with color information additional to regular DeviceN

Note:

This Action will have no visual effect if all colors are available on the target device.

PitStop provides an Action List with the same functionality: Convert NChannel Color Space to

DeviceN

Related Actions

•

on page 171

•

on page 253

4.1.2.26 Match fill and stroke colors

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

•

Since version:

12 update 3

What it does

Changes the stroke color to match the fill color or vice versa.

Use case

Suppose you want to print very small text. To improve the readability, you convert the text to outlines and add a stroke. However, the stroke color is black by default. This may not be desired, e.g. if your text is in color. In that case, you can run this Action with the option

Change the stroke color to match the fill color

Related Actions

on page 67

4.1.2.27 Remap alternate color space to CMYK

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

PitStop Pro

What it does

Remaps the alternate color spaces of the chosen spot colors to the preferred CMYK values.

How to proceed

To add the spot colors of which you want to remap the alternate color space, do one of the following:

• To select the desired spot color from the list of spot colors (Spot color picker)

Click .

Select the preferred spot color and click

. The selected color is shown in the table, with the corresponding CMYK values.

• To define a new spot color

Click the

Add New Color

button.

In the table, in the first column (Name), replace "Color name" with the name of the new spot color.

• To select the desired spot color from the Spot library picker

Click the

Add Colors

button.

Select the preferred spot color and click

. The selected color is shown in the table, with the corresponding CMYK values.

Add or change the CMYK values as required.

To remove colors from the table

• Use the

Remove All

button, or

•

Select a color and click to remove only the selected color.

4.1.2.28 Remap color

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Remap color is a complex but powerful Action that allows the remapping of colors from one color space to another.

For each color in the document you can specify whether or not you want to map it to another color (by means of "remapping rules"), and whether or not the overprint settings should change.

Note:

• Use the

Analyze page

Analyze document

buttons to get an overview of the colors in the document being processed.

• To change a remapping rule, click

Change

and make the required changes; to add a new one, click

Add

PitStop Pro

• Keep in mind that the order of the rules is important. You can change the order by selecting a rule and clicking

Down

• You can remap colors, color spaces, color ranges and channels.

Example

Suppose you have a CMYK PDF that you want to print in a single spot color, MySpot.cv.

To remap all the colors to this spot:

Under Attributes for Remap color, select the row that mentions

All other

and click

Change

In the

Color Remap Rule

popup, under

To:

, select

Color

Select the repository color MySpot.cv. You should have specified this color earlier in PitStop.

Select the desired overprint setting:

•

Keep

the overprint settings as they are, do not change.

• Enable overprint:

• Disable overprint:

Off

Click

To remap everything except, for example, 100% black text and objects to the selected target color MySpot.cv, you need a slightly more elaborated action:

Click

Add

Under

Remap

, select

Color

and

Device CMYK

Set the values to: C 0% M 0% Y 0% K 100%.

Under

To:

, select

Keep

Select the desired overprint setting.

Click

Select

Add

In the

Color Remap Rule

popup, under

Remap

, select

Device CMYK

Under

To:

, select

Color

10.

Select the repository color MySpot.cv. You should have specified this color earlier in PitStop.

11.

Click

The above Actions must be performed in the correct order. Under

Attributes for Remap color

, you should have three lines:

• The rule for "keep 100% Black" at the top

• Then the rule for "remap to MySpot.cv"

• "All other" at the bottom

4.1.2.29 Remap spot color

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

PitStop Pro

What it does

Allows you to remap all spot colors in a document, or one particular spot color to:

• Gray

• The color's CMYK equivalent

• A custom CMYK equivalent

• Another spot color

You can apply the Action to either the fill or stroke color, or to both.

Note:

From version 12 update 2 onwards, you can use regular expressions to define the color that should be remapped.

4.1.2.30 Remove ICC tag

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes the ICC tags either from the selected objects or from the whole document (if no selection is defined). You can remove the ICC tags from fill and/or stroke colors as required.

About ICC tagging

Every input and output device reproduces color and grayscales in a slightly different way. As a result, the colors you see in a PDF file on your screen may not match the colors produced when you print the PDF to an output device.

ICC color profiles are used to avoid this. An ICC color profile is a mathematical description of the color space used by a specific device. In other words, the color profile describes how the colors produced by the device relate to the reference CIE LAB color space (a device-independent color space). As such, they allow you to set up a workflow in which all devices use color management to compensate for their individual color reproduction characteristics, based on the information in the ICC profiles.

In some workflows, e.g. without color management, ICC profiles are unwanted and may cause inconsistent color reproduction. In that case, you can use this Action to remove the ICC tags.

Related Actions

•

•

on page 251

•

Check if ICC profile differs from ICC profile in PDF/X output intent

on page 80

•

Select objects of which ICC profile is equal to ICC profile in PDF/X output

•

•

PitStop Pro

4.1.2.31 Remove rendering intent

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color; Prepress

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Strips rendering intents from color managed objects in a PDF.

About rendering intents

For more information and examples, refer to

the PitStop Pro Reference Guide on the Enfocus website

(See Chapter "Rendering intents to remap colors").

Related Actions

•

•

on page 178

•

on page 69

4.1.2.32 Rename spot color

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to change the name of spot colors in a document.

Note:

From version 12 update 2 onwards, you can use regular expressions to define the source and target color. This is useful to rename variants of the same color, e.g. to rename “Varnish0”, “Varnish1”, “Varnish23” (i.e. "Varnish" followed by one or more digits) to “Varnish” (without any digits). To do so, build a rule that renames

"Varnish([0-9])+" to "Varnish".

How to proceed

To rename one or more spot colors in a document

Select

Rename spot color

Optionally, select the

Use regular expressions

checkbox.

Click

Add

PitStop Pro

In the Rename

Spot Color Rule

dialog:

• In the left part (under

From

), enter the name of the spot color that should be renamed.

• In the right part (under

), enter a new name for the selected spot color.

Click

To create another rule (i.e. to rename another spot color), repeat steps 3-5.

Example

The above rule will rename

Pantone

Separation

in spot color names like Pantone 0123 U

(which will then become Separation 0123 U).

4.1.2.33 Snap color to color set

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to remap any colors that vary a little from your desired colors back to the desired color. This Action can also remap images to Black or CMYK.

PitStop Pro

Snap color to color set can be useful to keep tight control over the range of colors in a document.

How to proceed

Define the color set to which the colors in the PDF must be changed as follows:

To remap variants of black to 100% black, select

Black

Note:

If you want to remap

all colors

in your document to black,

only

select the

Black

checkbox. Do not add any other color.

To add another color the colors in the document should be remapped to if they are close to it:

Click

New

. A new entry appears in the text box.

If you want to use a spot color (optionally), select the

Spot color

checkbox and type the name of the spot color in the text field. You should define a CMYK equivalent too (see next step). The name of the spot color is shown in the text box.

Enter the required values for CMYK (expressed in %) in the fields below the New/Remove button. Your changes are shown in the text box.

From the

Map images to

list, select the preferred color space for images. You can choose between black, CMYK, and (if applicable) the spot color(s) defined in the previous step.

4.1.2.34 Tag object with an ICC profile

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Tags objects with a Gray, RGB, CMYK or Lab color space with a chosen ICC profile.

You can only tag the stroke or fill color or both. If an object is tagged already, the ICC tag will not be modified, unless you select the

Change ICC profile if object is already tagged

checkbox.

About ICC tagging

Related Actions

•

on page 77

•

on page 251

•

Check if ICC profile differs from ICC profile in PDF/X output intent

PitStop Pro

•

Select objects of which ICC profile is equal to ICC profile in PDF/X output

•

•

Check document unique IDs

4.1.3 Document

4.1.3.1 Add unique document IDs

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Adds a unique document ID (generated at random) to your document.

Related Actions

4.1.3.2 Change document encoding

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the PDF encoding to binary or ASCII.

About document encoding

ASCII encoding was formerly required to ensure that PDF files could be safely transported via email or the Internet. However, most e-mail software in use today handles non-ASCII documents normally, eliminating the need to ASCII-encode your document.

ASCII versus Binary encoding

ASCII encoding may increase the file size, but allows you to edit the file manually.

Binary encoding makes the file smaller, but does not allow you to edit the file manually.

Related Actions

•

•

Check PDF/X viewer preferences

on page 258

PitStop Pro

4.1.3.3 Change initial view

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Changes

•

Since version:

12 update 2

What it does

Allows the initial view settings of a PDF to be set or adjusted. The initial view is the way the PDF appears when it is opened in Adobe Acrobat or Adobe Reader (also when it is opened within a browser).

You can make a lot of changes, for example choose a particular page layout or magnification level, turn on or off certain window options, hide application toolbars or window controls ...

Note:

The attributes for this Action, correspond to the Initial View options in Adobe

Acrobat (See

File

Properties

, select the

Initial View

tab). If you do not change the attributes, these settings will be used. For a detailed overview of the meaning of each option, refer to the

Adobe help files

PitStop Pro

4.1.3.4 Make viewer preferences PDF/X compliant

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to change the viewer preferences of the PDF document, to make them PDF/X compliant.

PDF/X-1a:2003 and PDF/X-3:2003 require the view area, view clip, print area and print clip to be set to the media (or bleed) box.

Related Actions

on page 187

4.1.3.5 Optimize document structure

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Guarantees that the underlying document structure of your PDF is efficient, for example by improving the compression of the document as required.

4.1.4 General

4.1.4.1 Change object order

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the layer position of an object in a PDF.

PitStop Pro

You can choose to move the object forwards, backwards, to the front, or to the back depending on where you want your object to appear in the layer stack.

4.1.4.2 Normalize line weight

Belongs to

•

Category:

General; LineArt; Position and size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Normalizes paths where a transformation matrix caused distortions, by removing the distortion, giving the path a uniform line weight equal to the average reported in the Inspector. The Action also works on sheared paths.

Related Actions

•

•

•

on page 199

4.1.4.3 Rasterize page content, keeping text

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to rasterize complex graphics in PDF, for example to reduce the rendering complexity for a file for viewing on the iPad.

You can set the resolution of the generated bitmap (ppi), the preferred compression (JPEG,

JPEG2000, ZIP, None), the required quality (maximum, high...), and decide whether or not to keep line art unchanged.

4.1.4.4 Remove file specification from streams

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes links to embedded or external files from PDF streams.

PDF streams are holders of large amounts of data, such as image pixels, page contents, embedded fonts, etc. In some instances, the streams do not contain the data inside the PDF but point to embedded or even external files. This Action will remove the link to these files.

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

•

on page 188

•

4.1.4.5 Remove PostScript

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes all fragments of embedded PostScript in a PDF document.

Embedded PostScript fragments do not show up in the screen preview, but could change the appearance of the printed document. They are generally undesirable in a print production environment.

Related Actions

See also

•

on page 189

•

on page 259

4.1.4.6 Replace page content by bitmap

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Converts the page content to a bitmap. You can choose the resolution of the generated bitmap

(ppi), the compression method (JPEG, JPEG2000, ZIP, none) and the quality level.

4.1.5 Image

4.1.5.1 Add alternate images

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Changes

PitStop Pro

What it does

If you are working with PDFs that contain very high resolution images and render slowly on screen, you can speed up rendering by adding alternate images and then clicking the PitStop

Speed Up Image Display

button (available in the Enfocus View Modes toolbar (Acrobat 8 and 9) or the PitStop View Panel (Acrobat X and XI)).

You can use this Action to add low resolution alternate images.

How to proceed

Select the preferred downsampling.

Bicubic looks best but is slowest; subsampling looks worst but is fastest.

Specify the preferred resolution.

72dpi is good for screen viewing.

Set

Resample above

to a higher value than the dpi chosen above.

PitStop suggests a value, but you can change it as required.

Select

Convert to RGB

for even faster on screen rendering, but in RGB color values.

Related Actions

•

on page 263

•

on page 192

•

on page 89

4.1.5.2 Apply a gaussian blur to an image

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to apply a Gaussian blur to the selected images.

You can define the radius of the blur, by moving the slider. A higher radius will result in a higher amount of blur.

Applying a Gaussian blur is useful to reduce image noise and detail.

4.1.5.3 Apply transfer function

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress;Text;LineArt;Color;Image

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Adds a transfer function to paths, text, images or all these types of objects. You can exclude spot colors or apply the transfer function on tint values or alternate values only.

PitStop Pro

Note:

Transfer functions are not allowed in PDF/X compliant documents.

Related Actions

•

on page 231

•

on page 152

4.1.5.4 Change image brightness and contrast

Belongs to

•

Application:

PitStop Pro

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to make brightness and contrast adjustments to pixel images of all color spaces (e.g.

RGB) and image types (e.g. JPEG).

Note:

This option is also available in the PitStop Inspector (by selecting

4.1.5.5 Change image compression

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Change image compression changes the compression of selected images.

Color and Gray images can be compressed with JPEG, JPEG2000 or ZIP compression (ZIP is lossless, JPEG lossy).

Monochrome images can be compressed with CCIT Group 3 & 4, ZIP or RunLength compression.

PitStop Pro

In addition, an ASCII Hex or 85 filter can be applied.

4.1.5.6 Change OPI info

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Updates the OPI information of the document, for example if you have changed an OPI path with the PitStop Inspector in PitStop.

Note:

This Action is mainly meant for OEMs, who can change OPI dictionaries through the PitStop Library. If an image with OPI information is encountered during processing,

PitStop Library will call the OEM's code to replace it with the OEM's values.

About OPI

OPI (Open Prepress Interfaces) replaces high resolution images with "preview" images; low resolution substitutes which are stored in the PDF, together with the path to the high resolution images. This facilitates data storage and data transfer of PDFs with a large number of images.

Related Actions

•

•

on page 195

•

•

•

4.1.5.7 Convert images to indexed color space

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color;Image

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the color of images to the indexed color space.

About the indexed color space

The indexed color space uses no more than 256 colors, and is as such particularly suited for use in Web applications. Images are typically converted to indexed color mode in order to

decrease their file sizes

. When an image is converted to indexed color, a color lookup table is created,

4.1.5.8 Crop images

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to crop images to match a clip mask and/or a particular page box.

4.1.5.9 Remove alternate images

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes alternate images from a PDF.

If you are working with PDFs that contain very high resolution images and render slowly on screen, you can speed up rendering by adding alternate images and then clicking the PitStop

Speed Up Image Display

button (available in the Enfocus View Modes toolbar (Acrobat 8 and 9) or the PitStop View Panel (Acrobat X and XI)).

As these alternate images are not necessary for print, you may use this Action to remove them and only keep one version. You can choose between:

• Default for printing

• Lowest resolution

• Highest resolution

Related Actions

•

on page 192

•

on page 263

•

4.1.5.10 Remove OPI

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Changes

PitStop Pro

What it does

Removes OPI (Open Prepress Interface) information from a PDF.

OPI images are treated special as they are assumed to be preview images. They will for example not be preflighted as other images would be. If you don't use OPI in your workflow, run this Action to remove irrelevant OPI information and get correct editing and preflighting of documents.

About OPI

Related Actions

•

•

on page 195

•

•

•

4.1.5.11 Resample image

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Resamples, i.e. changes the resolution of the selected image(s).

How to proceed

Select the preferred resampling or interpolation method:

•

Average Resampling

: computes the average pixel color of the pixels in the sample area, and replaces the entire area with this average.

•

Bicubic resampling

: calculates the values of the new dots on the basis of a weighted average of the pixels in the same area.

•

Bicubic B-Spline resampling

: is a modified bicubic interpolation with more sharpening effects and is recommended for upsampling.

•

Bilinear resampling

: uses weighted interpolation between 4 pixels in the original image.

Note:

Bicubic gives the best result for photographs (but takes the longest to compute).

Enter the preferred resolution, for example 72 ppi for screen viewing.

PitStop Pro

To only resample images with a resolution below a particular threshold, select the

Resample above ... ppi

checkbox and enter a value.

For example, if you enter 150 ppi, only images with a resolution above 150 ppi will be resampled.

4.1.5.12 Sharpen an image with unsharp mask

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to sharpen edges in pixel images by applying the unsharp mask filter.

This filter:

• Compares adjacent pixels (specified by

Radius

and

Threshold

) to determine which pixels to correct.

• Increases the contrast of these pixels (specified by

Amount

You can modify the amount of contrast to be applied when correcting pixels (Amount), the distance (Radius) and the brightness difference (Threshold) between adjacent pixels.

The effects of the unsharp mask filter are far more pronounced on-screen than in highresolution output. For print, experiment to determine which options work best for your image.

Note:

This option is also available in the PitStop Inspector (by selecting

4.1.6 Layers

4.1.6.1 Add objects to layer with name

Belongs to

•

Category:

Layers

•

Type:

Changes

•

Since version:

12 update 3

What it does

Allows you to add any selected objects to a specific layer. You can identify the layer concerned by entering a string (e.g. Layer1). Optionally, you can at the same time remove the added objects from the other layers.

PitStop Pro

How to proceed

Add a "select" Action to the Action List, to select the objects you want to add, for example

on page 283.

Add

Add objects to layers

to the Action List.

Enter the name of the layer.

Optionally, select

Remove from other layers

Example

To add all annotations to a particular layer and remove them from another layer, use the following Actions:

Add objects to layers <!-- Enter a name, e.g. AnnotationLayer and select Remove from

other layers-->

Related Actions

•

•

on page 97

4.1.6.2 Add objects to layer

Belongs to

•

Category:

Layers

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to add any selected objects to a specific layer. You can identify the layer concerned by selecting it using another Action in the same Action List.

Optionally, you can at the same time remove the added objects from the other layers.

How to proceed

Add a first "select" Action to the Action List, to select the

layer

to which you want to assign the objects.

Add a second "select" Action to the Action List, to select the

objects

to be added.

Note:

You don't have to specify operators in between the two "select" Actions.

However, you can also use

combined

"Select" Actions to specify the layer or the objects concerned (see example 2).

Add

Add objects to layers

and select the

Add to selected layers

radio button.

Examples

Example 1:

The following Action List will add all annotations to Layer1 and remove them from the other layers:

Select layers by name <!--

on page 268 and set the layer name to

Layer1 -->

Add objects to layers

PitStop Pro

Example 2:

The following Action List will add XObjects and annotations to LayerA and LayerB:

Select layers by name <!--

on page 268 and set the layer name to

"equals [AB]"; enable Use regular expressions -->

Select XObjects <!--

Add objects to layers

Related Actions

•

•

4.1.6.3 Change layer properties

Belongs to

•

Category:

Layers

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to change certain properties, i.e. default visibility and presence in the Layers panel

("layer configuration") of the layers selected by another Action in the same Action List.

Example

To change the properties of

all

layers in the PDF, create the following Action List:

Change layer properties

Related Actions

•

on page 197

•

on page 268

4.1.6.4 Fix layers

Belongs to

•

Category:

Layers

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to perform a number of fixes to the layers in a PDF.

Options:

• Remove alternate layer configurations, only keep default configuration

• Add missing layer configuration names (e.g. "config_1", "config_2", ...)

• Make layer configuration names unique

PitStop Pro

• Remove order from layer configuration if layers are missing

• Remove AS (AutoState) entry from layer configurations. (AutoState entries are application specific usage entries).

Note:

Layer configuration refers to the Layers panel.

About PDF layers

Layered content usually comes from applications such as InDesign, AutoCAD or Visio. When converted to PDF, the layers are retained and can be viewed and navigated in Adobe Acrobat.

However, if you print a PDF file that contains layers, only the content that is visible on-screen is printed. This may or may not be desired.

"Conventional" layers versus PDF layers

Layers in digital image editing

("conventional" layers) are used to separate the different elements of an image. Each element is drawn on exactly one layer. The different layers are stacked on top of each other, and the order of the layers defines how the image looks like.

Layers in PDF

have a different meaning. They are used to hide or show page content:

• Turning

a layer, all objects on this layer are shown on-screen.

• Turning

off

a layer, all objects on this layer are hidden, i.e. they become invisible.

As such, layers are also called "optional content groups": groups of objects that can be selectively viewed or hidden by the author of the document. Objects can belong to different layers, and the order of the layers is of no importance.

To work with layers in a PDF document in Adobe Acrobat, select

View

Show/Hide

Navigation Panes

Layers

For more information, refer to the Adobe Acrobat help.

Related Actions

Check layers

on page 197

4.1.6.5 Flatten layers

Belongs to

•

Category:

Layers

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes the selected layers. You can choose whether or not to remove the objects on these layers as well:

• To keep all objects, regardless of their visibility, select

Make all elements visible

. All objects

(including hidden objects) will become visible after the layers have been removed.

• To keep all objects

based on their default visibility

, select

Preserve the initial view of the

PDF

. Objects on layers with

default

visibility turned on are preserved (and remain visible). All other objects (i.e. by default hidden objects) are removed.

PitStop Pro

• To keep all objects

based on their current visibility

, select

Preserve the current view of the

PDF

. Objects on visible layers are preserved, regardless of their default visibility state. All other objects (i.e. currently hidden objects) are removed.

About PDF layers

Layered content usually comes from applications such as InDesign, AutoCAD or Visio. When converted to PDF, the layers are retained and can be viewed and navigated in Adobe Acrobat.

However, if you print a PDF file that contains layers, only the content that is visible on-screen is printed. This may or may not be desired.

"Conventional" layers versus PDF layers

Layers in digital image editing

Layers in PDF

have a different meaning. They are used to hide or show page content:

• Turning

a layer, all objects on this layer are shown on-screen.

• Turning

off

a layer, all objects on this layer are hidden, i.e. they become invisible.

To work with layers in a PDF document in Adobe Acrobat, select

View

Show/Hide

Navigation Panes

Layers

For more information, refer to the Adobe Acrobat help.

Related Actions

4.1.6.6 Flatten objects in layer

Belongs to

•

Category:

Layers

•

Type:

Changes

•

Since version:

12 update 3

What it does

Removes the selected objects from ALL layers and at the same time removes all empty layers.

You can choose whether or not to remove hidden objects:

• To keep all objects, regardless of their visibility, select

Make all elements visible

. All objects

(including hidden objects) will become visible after the layers have been removed.

• To keep all objects

based on their default visibility

, select

Preserve the initial view of the

PDF

. Objects on layers with

default

visibility turned on are preserved (and remain visible). All other objects (i.e. by default hidden objects) are removed.

• To keep all objects

based on their current visibility

, select

Preserve the current view of the

PDF

. Objects on visible layers are preserved, regardless of their default visibility state. All other objects (i.e. currently hidden objects) are removed.

PitStop Pro

About PDF layers

Layered content usually comes from applications such as InDesign, AutoCAD or Visio. When converted to PDF, the layers are retained and can be viewed and navigated in Adobe Acrobat.

However, if you print a PDF file that contains layers, only the content that is visible on-screen is printed. This may or may not be desired.

"Conventional" layers versus PDF layers

Layers in digital image editing

Layers in PDF

have a different meaning. They are used to hide or show page content:

• Turning

a layer, all objects on this layer are shown on-screen.

• Turning

off

a layer, all objects on this layer are hidden, i.e. they become invisible.

To work with layers in a PDF document in Adobe Acrobat, select

View

Show/Hide

Navigation Panes

Layers

For more information, refer to the Adobe Acrobat help.

Related Actions

on page 94

4.1.6.7 Remove empty layers

Belongs to

•

Category:

Remove; Layers

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes empty layers selected by another Action in the same Action List.

Example

The following Action List will remove

all

empty layers in the PDF:

Remove empty layers

To remove Layer1 and 2, if they are empty:

Select layers by name <!--

on page 268 - Choose "equals Layer

[12]" and "Use regular expressions" -->

Remove empty layers

About PDF layers

Layered content usually comes from applications such as InDesign, AutoCAD or Visio. When converted to PDF, the layers are retained and can be viewed and navigated in Adobe Acrobat.

PitStop Pro

However, if you print a PDF file that contains layers, only the content that is visible on-screen is printed. This may or may not be desired.

"Conventional" layers versus PDF layers

Layers in digital image editing

Layers in PDF

have a different meaning. They are used to hide or show page content:

• Turning

a layer, all objects on this layer are shown on-screen.

• Turning

off

a layer, all objects on this layer are hidden, i.e. they become invisible.

To work with layers in a PDF document in Adobe Acrobat, select

View

Show/Hide

Navigation Panes

Layers

For more information, refer to the Adobe Acrobat help.

Related Actions

on page 97

4.1.6.8 Remove objects from layers

Belongs to

•

Category:

Layers

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to remove objects from the selected layers in a PDF document.

About PDF layers

Layered content usually comes from applications such as InDesign, AutoCAD or Visio. When converted to PDF, the layers are retained and can be viewed and navigated in Adobe Acrobat.

However, if you print a PDF file that contains layers, only the content that is visible on-screen is printed. This may or may not be desired.

"Conventional" layers versus PDF layers

Layers in digital image editing

Layers in PDF

have a different meaning. They are used to hide or show page content:

• Turning

a layer, all objects on this layer are shown on-screen.

• Turning

off

a layer, all objects on this layer are hidden, i.e. they become invisible.

PitStop Pro

To work with layers in a PDF document in Adobe Acrobat, select

View

Show/Hide

Navigation Panes

Layers

For more information, refer to the Adobe Acrobat help.

How to proceed

Add a first "select" Action to the Action List, to select the

layer

from which you want to remove objects.

Add a second "select" Action to the Action List, to select the

objects

to be removed.

Note:

You don't have to specify operators in between the two "select" Actions.

However, you can also use

combined

"select" Actions to specify the layer or the objects concerned (see example 2).

Add

Remove objects from layers

Examples

Example 1:

The following Action List will remove all objects from Layer1:

Select layers by name <!--

on page 268 and set the layer name to

Layer1 -->

Select all <!--

on page 283 -->

Remove objects from layers

Example 2:

The following Action List will remove XObjects and annotations from LayerA and

LayerB:

Select layers by name <!--

on page 268 and set the layer name to

equals [AB]; enable "Use regular expressions" -->

Select XObjects <!--

Remove objects from layers

Related Actions

•

•

4.1.6.9 Rename layer

Belongs to

•

Category:

Layers

•

Type:

Changes

•

Since version:

12 update 3

What it does

Allows you to change the name of the layers in a document.

Note:

You can also use regular expressions to define the source and target layer name.

Example

Suppose you want to rename the layers that are visible in your document, in this example

Layer1 and Layer3 (but not Layer2, Layer12 or any other layer).

PitStop Pro

Proceed as follows:

Select the

Rename Layer

Action.

Under Attributes for Rename layer, configure the source and target layer as follows:

•

From

: Layer([13])

•

: VisibleLayer$1

Select the

Use regular expessions

checkbox.

Click

Run the Action List.

Result:

PitStop Pro

4.1.7 Line Art

4.1.7.1 Apply transfer function

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress;Text;LineArt;Color;Image

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Adds a transfer function to paths, text, images or all these types of objects. You can exclude spot colors or apply the transfer function on tint values or alternate values only.

Note:

Transfer functions are not allowed in PDF/X compliant documents.

Related Actions

•

on page 231

•

on page 152

4.1.7.2 Change dash pattern

Belongs to

•

Category:

Line Art

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the pattern of dashed lines or converts them to continuous lines.

How to proceed

To use continuous lines, click .

To create a dashed pattern, click and configure the following fields:

• In the

fields, enter the desired length of the dashes.

• In the

Off

fields, enter the desired size of the spaces between the dashes.

100

PitStop Pro

• In the

Phase

field, enter a value to indicate where the dash pattern should begin. For example, if you have chosen dashes of 5 cm each, if you have specified a phase of 2 cm, the first dash will have a length of 3 cm (5 cm - 2 cm).

4.1.7.3 Change fill and/or stroke

Belongs to

•

Category:

LineArt;Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to turn on or off the fill and/or stroke for the selected objects.

4.1.7.4 Change fill type

Belongs to

•

Category:

LineArt;Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to change the fill type of the selected objects to either Non-Zero Winding (Fill) or

Even-odd (Eofill).

About the fill type

The fill type is an attribute of polygons and loops: compound paths with intersecting lines. To determine whether a point is part of the shape, two different rules can be applied:

• The

Non-Zero Winding

rule (or standard rule). This rule supposes that you draw a line from a point inside the shape to the outside of the shape, without passing through a vertex. You must now count the number of times edges wind around the point inside the shape, in a counter-clockwise direction:

• For every edge that crosses the line from the point inside the shape in one direction, add 1 to the winding number.

• For every edge that crosses the line in the opposite direction, subtract 1.

If the winding number is not equal to zero, the shape area to which the point belongs, is filled. For more information, refer to

http://www.wikipedia.org/wiki/nonzero-rule

• The

Even-odd rule

: This rule also supposes that you draw a line between a point inside the shape outline and a point outside its outline.

• If that line crosses the line of the shape an odd number of times, the shape area to which the point belongs, is filled.

• If the number of crossings is even, the area is not filled.

Checking the fill type of line art

To see which rule is applied, check the object's fill attributes:

101

PitStop Pro

Select the object, using the Enfocus Select tool .

Click to display the Enfocus Inspector and select

At the bottom, check which button is selected:

•

Fill

is selected, the

Non-zero Winding rule

applies.

•

Eofill

is selected, the

Even-odd

rule applies.

4.1.7.5 Change flatness

Belongs to

•

Category:

LineArt;Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to set the flatness of a PostScript curve.

The flatness determines how the objects in a document are printed on a PostScript printer.

The default setting for flatness is 1. Increasing this value will speed up printing, but can reduce the print quality (resulting in visible segments in the curve). Decreasing this value will slow down printing, but will improve the print quality.

Related Actions

•

•

4.1.7.6 Change line cap

Belongs to

•

Category:

LineArt;Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes how the end of a vector line looks like.

How to proceed

•

To have the line end exactly, click

•

To put a round end on the line, click

butt

round

102

PitStop Pro

•

To have corners projected beyond the length of the line, click

projecting square

4.1.7.7 Change line join

Belongs to

•

Category:

LineArt; Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes how a corner on a vector line looks like.

How to proceed

•

To have a sharp corner, click

•

miter

To put a round corner on the line, click

•

To flatten the corners, click

bevel

round

4.1.7.8 Change line weight

Belongs to

•

Category:

LineArt;Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the thickness of a selected line to the desired line weight.

Related Actions

•

on page 84

•

•

on page 199

4.1.7.9 Change miter limit

Belongs to

•

Category:

LineArt; Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the length of the extension of a corner on a vector line.

103

PitStop Pro

The miter limit is the limit when a join switches from mitered (pointed) to beveled (squared-off).

To allow “pointier” angles, you can increase the miter limit.

For more information on how to calculate the miter limit, refer to the topic "Stroke attributes:

Miter limit" in

the PitStop Pro Reference Guide on the Enfocus website

4.1.7.10 Change stroke adjustment

Belongs to

•

Category:

LineArt; Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to enable or disable stroke adjustment.

Stroke adjustment takes care of the rendering of paths on a raster device (printing device, computer monitor, etc.).

Example

If stroke adjustment is

turned off

, the device will draw the pixel only if it covers the path for more than 50%.

This means that a 1 pixel wide line can be drawn in different ways:

• If the line is drawn nicely on top of a pixel of the screen, the line will look fine.

• If the line is spread over 2 pixels of the screen, the width will be 2 pixels on some places and

1 pixel on other places, turning the line into an ugly, jaggy line.

If stroke adjustment is

turned on

, a correction will be made in such a way that the line looks nice and has the same width (1 pixel) everywhere.

4.1.7.11 Close path

Belongs to

•

Category:

Line Art

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Joins the connection between the first and the last anchor point of a path (as required).

4.1.7.12 Combine subpaths

Belongs to

•

Category:

Line Art

•

Type:

Changes

104

PitStop Pro

What it does

Combines two selected paths.

About subpaths

A path is considered the combination of the path itself which represents most graphic state properties such as color, line-weight, etc. and the subpaths which represent the lines. For example, a doughnut is a single path with a single fill and stroke color, which consists of two subpaths (=two circles).

Related Actions

•

on page 272

•

4.1.7.13 Normalize line weight

Belongs to

•

Category:

General; LineArt; Position and size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Related Actions

•

•

•

on page 199

4.1.7.14 Open path

Belongs to

•

Category:

Line Art

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes the connection between the first and the last anchor point of a path.

4.1.7.15 Split in subpaths

Belongs to

•

Category:

Line Art

•

Type:

Changes

105

PitStop Pro

What it does

Allows you to split any compound path into separate paths, for example to give them a different color.

Splitting compound paths in PitStop Pro

In PitStop Pro, you can as well split compound paths. Proceed as follows:

Select the compound path (by using the PitStop Select Objects tool ).

Right-click it.

Click

Path

Compound Path

Release Compound Path

Related Actions

•

on page 104

•

Check creation and modification date

on page 272

4.1.8 Metadata

4.1.8.1 Add missing creation and modification date

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Inserts the creation and modification date.

In some legacy PDF applications it was possible to create a PDF file without a creation or modification date. This Action fixes this issue.

Related Actions

on page 202

4.1.8.2 Change annotations print setting

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Change annotations' print setting allows you to set the selected annotations to

Printing

Non-

Printing

106

PitStop Pro

4.1.8.3 Change binding

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to redefine a document's binding; you can set binding to the right or to the left.

Most European language documents are bound on the left.

Note:

To check a document's binding, in Adobe Acrobat, go to

File

Properties

and switch to the

Advanced

tab. The document's binding property (Left Edge or Right Edge) is displayed under Reading Options.

Related Actions

•

on page 201

•

Select by binding

on page 274

4.1.8.4 Change document info

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the document information as found in the document properties in Acrobat.

You can change, remove or replace the following details:

• Producer

• Title

• Subject

• Author

• Creator

• Keywords

If you want to replace document info, you can make use of fixed strings and/or variables, such as the user name, company, date ...

Example

To replace the current keywords in your document with the document title and the word "PDF", proceed as follows:

Run the Change document info Action to remove the current keywords:

Change document keywords

107

PitStop Pro

Run the Change document info Action to insert the new keywords:

Change document keywords

Related Actions

•

on page 202

•

on page 275

4.1.8.5 Change Output Intent

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color; Metadata

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes a PDF's output intent to comply with a particular PDF/X or PDF/A version, using a particular ICC profile and/or ICC characterization.

Related Actions

4.1.8.6 Change PDF version

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the Acrobat and PDF version of a PDF.

The Acrobat version is the sum of the two numbers that make up the PDF version, for example:

PDF 1.4 = Acrobat 5.

Note:

Changing the PDF version will not change the attributes of a higher version PDF to those of a lower one - it only changes the version

number

. As higher versions of

Acrobat always save the PDF version number up to their version, even if nothing has changed, this Action can be useful to reset the PDF version to the one used to create the

PDF.

Example

If you configure this Action to change the PDF version to PDF 1.5, both the PDF version and the

Acrobat version will be changed. The new PDF version will be PDF 1.5; the new Acrobat version will be 6.0.

108

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

Select by PDF version

on page 276

4.1.8.7 Change PDF/A version key

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the version key tag in a PDF/A document to another version key.

The following version keys are supported:

• PDF/A-1a

• PDF/A-1b

• PDF/A-2a

• PDF/A-2b

• PDF/A-2u

About PDF/A version keys

PDF/A is a specialized subset of the PDF specification, also known as "PDF for

rchive".

The PDF/A version key identifies the version of the PDF/A standard the document complies with.

If the version key is not set correctly, the document is not PDF/A compliant. Note that changing the

key

does not change the compliance of the document! It will only allow you to continue with your workflow.

Related Actions

•

Check PDF/A version key

•

on page 212

4.1.8.8 Change PDF/X version key

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the version key tag in a PDF/X document to another version key.

The following version keys are supported:

• PDF/X-1a:2001

• PDF/X-32002

• PDF/X-1a:2003

• PDF/X-3:2003

109

PitStop Pro

• PDF/X-4

• PDFX/-4p

About PDF/X version keys

PDF/X is a specialized subset of the PDF specification, also known as "PDF for Exchange".

The PDF/X version key identifies the version of the PDF/X standard the document complies with.

If the version key is not set correctly, the document is not PDF/X compliant. Note that changing the

key

does not change the compliance of the document! It will only allow you to continue with your workflow.

Related Actions

•

on page 212

•

on page 115

4.1.8.9 Change trapped flag

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Modifies the trapped flag.

About trapping

The trapped flag indicates whether or not a file has been "trapped", i.e. has been corrected for slight color misregistrations. The trapped flag must be defined in PDF/X documents.

The flag can be set to:

•

True

: the document has been trapped, or the creator of the document has decided that it should not be trapped.

•

False

: the document has not been trapped

•

Unknown

: it's not known whether or not the document has been trapped. Note that this status should be avoided.

Related Actions

•

•

on page 276

•

on page 214

4.1.8.10 Fix PDF/A extension schema definitions in document XMP metadata

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

110

PitStop Pro

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Fixes issues with the PDF/A extension schema definitions in document XMP metadata.

About XMP metadata

XMP metadata is descriptive information about the file embedded in the PDF, for example the name of the author, keywords, copyright information... XMP refers to labeling technology that is used, i.e. Adobe's Extensible Metadata Platform. You can view the XMP metadata in a file's

Document Properties in Acrobat (Click the

Additional Metadata

button, then select

Advanced

About XMP schema definitions

PDF/A supports the predefined schema definitions of the XMP 2004 specification. However, as these only cover general metadata requirements, custom XMP schemas ("extension schemas") are also supported to meet company- or industry-specific requirements, on condition that a description of these extension schemas is embedded in the XMP.

4.1.8.11 Flatten annotations

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Changes

•

Since version:

12 update 3

What it does

Allows you to flatten the annotations in a PDF document. The annotations (often interactive elements such as sound clips, callouts, stamps,...) are converted to simple graphics that can be selected, changed, removed, ...

Example

Before:

The PDF contains five annotations: a stamp, a sticky note, a sound clip, a text note and an attachment.

111

PitStop Pro

After:

The PDF does not contain any annotations anymore; the Comments List is empty.

The graphics in the PDF can be selected and removed or modified (e.g. the color, size,...) as

required. Note that the callouts are removed.

4.1.8.12 Flatten form fields

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to convert form fields to normal objects in a document.

This Action is useful if you have output issues with form fields as content, for example because the output device or the PDF renderer does not support form fields.

Related Actions

•

on page 205

•

4.1.8.13 Make document metadata consistent

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Makes sure that the metadata in the different metadata locations has the same values. In case of inconsistencies, the most recent value is used.

If multiple creators are not considered an inconsistency, select the

Allow multiple creators

checkbox. In that case, the "Creator" property will not be changed, even if it is not the same in the different metadata locations.

112

PitStop Pro

How it works

There are two metadata locations in a PDF file:

• The

info dictionary

contains information about the file, such as the title, the author, the creation date ... and is visible through the file's Document properties. It's not in XML format.

• The

XMP metadata stream

also contains information about the file, but this information is represented as XMP metadata - XMP referring to Adobe's labeling technology

xtensible

etadata

latform. All information in the info dictionary is also represented in the XMP metadata stream dictionary, in the form of XMP properties.

Inconsistencies may occur when only one of the metadata locations has been updated.

Related Actions

•

on page 209

•

on page 278

4.1.8.14 Remove action dictionaries

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes action dictionaries ("actions") from a PDF.

About action dictionaries

Action dictionaries are actions that are executed when you click a bookmark or a link, hover over an annotation, open a file ... There are several types of actions, e.g. a music track can be played, a specific page or website can opened ...

You may want to remove these actions, as they are not allowed in a PDF/X file. The Remove action dictionaries Action will only remove the

action

; the object (the bookmark, annotation) the actions are linked to will not be removed. For example, if you remove the action from a bookmark, the bookmark is still visible, but not clickable anymore.

Related Actions

on page 205

4.1.8.15 Remove form fields

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes any PDF form fields from a document.

113

PitStop Pro

You may lose data if you do this.

Related Actions

•

on page 205

•

on page 112

4.1.8.16 Remove Javascript

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes JavaScript code (which might perform unwanted actions) from a PDF.

This language is often used to add interactive functionality to PDF files. However, in a print production environment, these scripts serve no purpose and may result in increased file sizes.

Related Actions

Check for Javascript

on page 207

4.1.8.17 Remove marked content

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Strips PDF generator defined content from a PDF.

Marked content is content tagged with special messages so that the application that opens it can read it in a particular way.

Related Actions

Check marked content

4.1.8.18 Remove metadata

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Changes

114

What it does

Removes the selected metadata from a PDF.

You can remove the following types of metadata:

• Annotations

• Thumbnails

• Article threads

• Page labels

• Acrobat capture info

• Bookmarks

• Structural information

• Job ticket

• Named destinations (includes annotations and bookmarks)

4.1.8.19 Remove PDF/A version key

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

This Action removes the PDF/A version key from the PDF file.

Related Actions

•

•

4.1.8.20 Remove PDF/X version key

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

This Action removes the PDF/X version key from the PDF file.

Related Actions

•

on page 109

PitStop Pro

115

PitStop Pro

•

Check unused destinations

on page 212

4.1.8.21 Remove unused destinations

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Destinations identify locations or views in a PDF you can point to using bookmarks or links. As destinations increase the file size, you may want to remove the destinations that are not used, to reduce the file size.

See also:

on page 215

4.1.8.22 Set correct document XMP name spaces

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

The XMP metadata standard (used for labeling metadata in PDFs) defines namespaces for defined sets of core properties. This Action checks if the correct document XMP namespaces are used, and fixes issues as required.

on page 210

4.1.8.23 Set XMP file identifiers

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Adds missing file identifiers to the PDF's XMP metadata stream, for example: the Version ID, the

DocumentID, the RenditionClass.

116

PitStop Pro

4.1.9 Page

4.1.9.1 Add pages

Belongs to

•

Category:

Add; Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to insert either empty pages or pages from a particular PDF file.

You can choose the number of pages to add, the location of the new pages in the PDF ...

4.1.9.2 Apply page rotation

Belongs to

•

Category:

Position/Size;Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Sets the page rotate key defined in the PDF to 0 °. This may have a visual effect.

Related Actions

•

•

on page 285

•

4.1.9.3 Apply page scaling factor

Belongs to

•

Category:

Position/Size;Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Apply page scaling factor removes the page scaling factor and scales the page to compensate.

117

PitStop Pro

A page of 10 by 10 inches and a page scaling factor 2 will be displayed and printed as a page of

20 by 20 inches. By applying the page scaling factor, the actual page size will become 20 by 20 inches.

Page scaling has been introduced in PDF 1.6. If the page scaling factor is not removed or applied, the page size can only be displayed correctly in Acrobat 7 or higher.

Related Actions

•

on page 219

•

4.1.9.4 Center page content

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page;Position/Size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Places all objects in the center of the page.

You can:

• Center the objects horizontally, vertically or both.

• Center the content relative to a page box and set margins (left, right, top and bottom).

• Use page rotation and scaling factor as required.

• Only center the visible part of the content.

4.1.9.5 Change art box

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to create or resize an art box.

You must choose one of the following options:

• To create a new art box, select

Define new rectangle

and enter the required values. Note that boxes are defined from lower left to upper right.

• To resize the art box relative to the axes of the existing art box, select

Resize

and enter the required values.

• To re-use the dimensions from another box, select

Use box size

and select the appropriate page box.

• To determine the size of the art box based on a selection, select

Resize page box to fit the selection

and enter the offset values.

118

PitStop Pro

4.1.9.6 Change bleed box

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to create or resize a bleed box.

You must choose one of the following options:

• To create a new bleed box, select

Define new rectangle

and enter the required values. Note that boxes are defined from lower left to upper right.

• To resize a bleed box relative to the axes of the existing bleed box, select

Resize

and enter the required values.

• To re-use the dimensions from another box, select

Use box size

and select the appropriate page box.

• To determine the size of a bleed box based on a selection, select

Resize page box to fit the selection

and enter the offset values.

4.1.9.7 Change blending color space

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color; Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows to change the blending color space and/or the luminosity softmask blending color space

(if defined in the PDF document).

You can:

• Change the color to CMYK, gray or RGB, or

• Remove the blending color space, by selecting "none" from the first list, or

• Leave one of the color spaces unchanged, by selecting

Do not change

About blending color spaces

blending color space

The blending color space for soft masks (masks with soft transitions) is called the

luminosity softmask blending color space

. It is usually gray.

Related Actions

•

on page 175

119

PitStop Pro

•

on page 247

4.1.9.8 Change crop box

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to create or resize a crop box.

You must choose one of the following options:

• To create a new crop box, select

Define new rectangle

and enter the required values. Note that boxes are defined from lower left to upper right.

• To resize a crop box relative to the axes of the existing crop box, select

Resize

and enter the required values.

• To re-use the dimensions from another box, select

Use box size

and select the appropriate page box.

• To determine the size of a crop box based on a selection, select

Resize page box to fit the selection

and enter the offset values.

4.1.9.9 Change media box

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to create or resize a media box.

You must choose one of the following options:

• To create a new media box, select

Define new rectangle

and enter the required values. Note that boxes are defined from lower left to upper right.

• To resize a media box relative to the axes of the existing media box, select

Resize

and enter the required values.

• To re-use the dimensions from another box, select

Use box size

and select the appropriate page box.

• To determine the size of a media box based on a selection, select

Resize page box to fit the selection

and enter the offset values.

4.1.9.10 Change objects that are close to the page edge

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

120

PitStop Pro

What it does

Changes objects that are close to the page edge, but do not bleed enough.

You must specify the required distance to the trim box and the distance into the bleed.

Optionally, you can choose to treat subpaths of compound paths individually. In that case, each of the subpaths will be changed separately.

See also:

•

on page 217

•

on page 287

4.1.9.11 Change page box layout

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the page box layout in a PDF to Press, Screen viewing or PDF/X Layout.

The attributes depend on the chosen layout:

•

Press layout

(typically used for print)

If you select this layout, the trim box will be derived from the first page box (out of the list below) that is present on the page. Use the

and

Down

button to move the preferred page box to the top of the list. For example, if

bleed box

is the first item in the list, and

art box

is the second, the trim box will be derived from the bleed box, if found; if there is no bleed box found, the trim box will be derived from the art box; if there is no art box, the Action will search for the third page box in the list, and so on.

You must also define the minimum distance between the media and bleed boxes and between the bleed and trim boxes.

To get the PDF to display at the size of the media it will be printed on, select the appropriate option:

•

Crop box must equal trim box

, or

•

No crop box must be defined or the crop box equals the media box

. This means that, if the crop box is not defined yet, it will not be added by this Action; if the crop box is defined, it will get the same size and position as the media box.

•

Screen viewing

If you select this layout, the page is defined solely by the crop box, which should have the same size as the media box. No other page boxes are allowed. The crop box/media box is derived from the first page box (out of the list below) that is present on the page. Use the

and

Down

button to move the preferred page box to the top of the list. For example, if

bleed box

is the first item in the list, the crop box/media box will be derived from the bleed box if found in the PDF; if the bleed box is not found, the second page box in the list will be searched for, ...

•

PDF/X layout

If you select this layout, a page may only contain a trim box or an art box, not both.

121

PitStop Pro

You must also select the preferred PDF/X version. If you have chosen PDF/X-1a:2003 or PDF/

X-3:2003, the art box or trim box shall not extend beyond the boundaries of the bleed box and the crop box.

To define the trim box relative to the media box, define the desired margins.

Related Actions

on page 222

4.1.9.12 Change page format

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Snaps the page box of your choice to a multiple of either columns or rows.

This Action is useful for newspapers or magazines with content displayed in columns and rows.

How to proceed

To configure the Change page format Action

Select the page box you wish to define.

Select

A multiple of columns

and/or

A multiple of rows

as required.

Set the preferred column or row width.

Add column/row spacing as required.

Check page format

on page 223

4.1.9.13 Change page orientation

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the page layout to either portrait, landscape or the orientation that is used most in the

PDF.

The page orientation is based on the selected page box. If you don't want to change the page orientation in case all pages have already the same orientation, enable the

Only apply if not all pages have the same orientation

checkbox.

Related Actions

•

on page 285

•

122

PitStop Pro

4.1.9.14 Change trim box

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to create or resize a trim box.

You must choose one of the following options:

• To create a new trim box, select

Define new rectangle

and enter the required values. Note that boxes are defined from lower left to upper right.

• To resize a trim box relative to the axes of the existing trim box, select

Resize

and enter the required values.

• To re-use the dimensions from another box, select

Use box size

and select the appropriate page box.

• To determine the size of a trim box based on a selection, select

Resize page box to fit the selection

and enter the offset values.

4.1.9.15 Flip content

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page;Position/Size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Flips the contents of a selected object horizontally or vertically.

You can flip the content relative to the center of one of the page boxes. Note that you can take page rotation into account as required.

Related Actions

4.1.9.16 Move media box to 0.0

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the coordinates of the media box, so that the lower left corner of the media box is located at coordinates 0,0. This won't change the way the file looks.

123

PitStop Pro

The media box is the largest page box and defines the size of the physical medium on which the page will be printed or displayed. Some applications don't give the lower left 0,0 coordinates, but for example 100,100, which will cause problems when preflighting the file.

Related Actions

•

•

4.1.9.17 Move objects into the page box

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page;Position/Size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Moves the selected objects into a particular page box.

You can include annotations as required.

Related Actions

•

on page 138

•

on page 124

4.1.9.18 Move objects out of the page box

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page; Position/Size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Moves the selected objects out of a particular page box.

You can can include annotations as required.

Related Actions

•

on page 138

•

on page 124

4.1.9.19 Move page box

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

124

PitStop Pro

What it does

Allows you to move one of the page boxes to the desired position.

You can choose which page you want to move, and define the target position in one of the following ways:

• By specifying the position relative to one of the other page boxes, based on the anchor point.

• By specifying the target X and Y coordinates.

• By specifying the values by which the X and Y axis should be moved.

You can take into account page rotation and scaling factor as required.

4.1.9.20 Move page content

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page; Position/Size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Moves the contents of a page in the preferred direction (horizontally or vertically) by the specified distance:

• A positive value, e.g. "1 cm" will move the content to the right (horizontally) or to the top of the page (vertically).

• A negative value, e.g. "-1 cm" will move the content to the left (horizontally) or to the bottom of the page (vertically).

Note:

Remember that the unit used in Actions (in this example "cm") is defined in the

PitStop Pro Preferences (Units & Guides Category).

You can choose whether or not to take into account page rotation and scaling factor (if applicable).

4.1.9.21 Move page content to corner

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page; Position/Size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Moves the contents of a page to a chosen corner.

This Action does not center the object on the corner but moves the closest objects to that corner and moves the other objects by the same distance towards the corner (horizontally or vertically).

Example

To move the page content to the lower left

Select Move page content horizontally to

Left Side

125

PitStop Pro

Select Move page content vertically to

Bottom Side

Select the page box to be used as a reference, for example the

media box

Optionally, set

margins

to be added to the media box.

Select the

Use page rotation and scaling factor

checkbox, if page rotation and scaling factor should be taken into account.

4.1.9.22 Normalize page boxes

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Normalizes page boxes, i.e. makes sure they are all positioned correctly and are placed in the right order, e.g. the media box should be the largest box, the bleed box should be inside the bleed marks, ...

4.1.9.23 Normalize Page Rotate Key

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to manipulate page rotate keys in a PDF.

You can do one of the following:

• Flatten a rotate key into the page content (no visual effect)

• Introduce a rotate key for landscape pages and flatten it for portrait pages.

You can indicate which page box determines the page orientation. For example, if you select

"trim box" and the trim box is 4 units wide and 3 units tall, the page is considered to have a landscape orientation.

• Remove a rotate key without flattening it into the page content. This may have a visual effect.

Related Actions

•

•

on page 285

•

4.1.9.24 Remove art box

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

126

PitStop Pro

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes the art box from a PDF.

The art box delimits the size a PDF will display in a page layout application like QuarkXPress. An art box is not essential to a PDF's structure and may be removed.

4.1.9.25 Remove bleed box

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes the bleed box from a PDF.

The bleed box delimits the size the area beyond the final cut size of a document onto which ink may be printed in order to provide a bleed effect (which is where ink goes right to the edge of the page). A bleed box is not essential to a PDF's structure and may be removed.

4.1.9.26 Remove crop box

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes the crop box from a PDF.

The crop box is the PDF page box that defines the frame of a PDF as it is displayed on screen. If you remove this box, the PDF will display at Media Box size.

4.1.9.27 Remove empty page

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Deletes any pages in a PDF document that contain no objects.

You can specify that elements outside of a specific page box should be ignored. This way you can make sure that pages containing only registration marks (which are graphic elements outside the visible or printable page area, i.e. the trim box) are considered empty.

127

PitStop Pro

Tip:

When you’ve removed the empty pages, check whether the page numbering is still consistent. If necessary, you can correct the page numbering using

Add page number

page 58. Also check other references to page numbers such as the table of contents, the index or cross-references. If these page numbers are incorrect, you will need to update your source files and create a new PDF document.

Related Actions

•

•

4.1.9.28 Remove page scaling factor

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page; Position and size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes the page scaling factor an reverts the page to its original size.

A page of 10 by 10 inches and a page scaling factor 2 will be displayed and printed as a page of

20 by 20 inches. By removing the page scaling factor, the page size will be at 10 by 10 inches again.

Page scaling has been introduced in PDF 1.6. If the page scaling factor is not removed or applied, the page size can only be displayed correctly in Acrobat 7 or higher.

Related Actions

•

on page 219

•

on page 117

4.1.9.29 Remove trim box

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes the trim box from a PDF document. The trim box defines the final cut size of a printed

PDF document.

4.1.9.30 Rotate content

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page; Position/Size

128

PitStop Pro

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Rotates the page content at a particular angle around a particular point.

You could for example rotate the page content at an angle of 90° relative to the center of the media box.

You can choose whether or not to take into account page rotation.

Related Actions

•

on page 227

•

on page 141

•

4.1.9.31 Rotate page

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to set page rotation to -90, 0, 90 or 180 degrees (clockwise).

Related Actions

on page 128

4.1.9.32 Scale page boxes

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page; Position and size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to scale all page boxes simultaneously.

Specify X and Y scaling percentages. You can anchor the page boxes at a certain corner in the

PDF, for instance at the lower left corner of the media box. You can also choose whether or not to use the page rotation.

Note:

If you want to scale the page boxes proportionally, you need to specify the same values for X and Y.

Related Actions

•

129

PitStop Pro

•

•

on page 130

•

on page 133

4.1.9.33 Scale page content

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page;Position/Size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Scales page content along the X and/or Y axis by a certain percentage.

Note:

If you want to scale the page content proportionally, you need to specify the same values for X and Y.

Example

Suppose you have an A4-size PDF document (210 x 297 mm). You want to keep the page size “as is”, but need to make the page content narrower. You also wish to move the page content to the

upper right corner of the crop box.

How to proceed

Enter the preferred scaling percentage for the X and Y axis.

Do one of the following:

• To define an anchor point, select

Anchored at

• To define the target position of the page contents, select

Moving page content to

Define the anchor point or target position, for example (anchored at/moving to) the upper right of the crop box.

Related Actions

•

130

PitStop Pro

•

•

•

on page 133

4.1.9.34 Scale page content to fit

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page; Position/Size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Scales the page content to fit the size of a particular page box. You can add extra margins, if necessary.

You should also define the target position of the page content inside the page box, e.g. "page content should move to the upper right".

You can choose whether or not to take into account the page rotation and scaling factor.

Example

In the example below, the page content is scaled to fit the size of the trim box (A).

Related Actions

•

on page 130

•

•

•

on page 133

4.1.9.35 Scale to fit page size

Belongs to

•

Category:

Position/Size; Page

131

PitStop Pro

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Scales all page boxes (and optionally all page content as well) until the specified page box fits the target size.

The target size can be specified by defining the target width and height or a percentage for the X and Y axis.

Note:

If you want to scale the page boxes proportionally, you need to specify the same values for X and Y.

You can choose what proportions to keep into account when performing this scaling:

• The proportions of both the page content and the page boxes

• The proportions of the page content only

• No proportions should be taken into account: both the page content and the page boxes can be scaled non-proportionally to match the target page size.

Related Actions

•

•

on page 130

•

•

on page 133

4.1.9.36 Set page size to the largest in document

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Increases the size of smaller pages in a PDF document, so they are all equal to the size of the largest page.

If a PDF contains pages of different sizes, this may cause problems during the printing process.

You can use this Action to fix this problem.

on page 132

4.1.9.37 Set page size to the smallest in document

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

132

PitStop Pro

What it does

Decreases the size of larger pages in a PDF document, so that they are all equal to the size of the smallest page.

If a PDF contains pages of different sizes, this may cause problems during the printing process.

You can use this Action to fix this problem.

on page 132

4.1.9.38 Shrink page content to fit

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page; Position/Size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Shrinks page content to fit the size of a particular page box. You can add extra margins, if necessary. You should also define the anchor point, for example "anchored at the lower left of the media box".

You can choose whether or not to take into account page rotation and scaling factor.

Related Actions

•

•

•

on page 130

•

4.1.9.39 Split pages in half

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Splits pages in half in a certain direction (horizontally, vertically, or orientation dependent), based on the desired page box.

Orientation depending means that the landscape pages are split vertically and portrait pages are split horizontally.

Note:

PitStop provides three Actions Lists, allowing you split A4, A5 and US Letter documents in half.

133

PitStop Pro

This Action can be useful if you scanned two pages of a book as a single page, but want to have them as separate pages (e.g. for better readability); or if you have an image spread over two pages which has to be split in two for printing purposes.

4.1.9.40 Use trim marks to set page box

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page; Position and size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to set the trim box and/or the bleed box based on the trim or bleed marks found in the PDF.

Note:

• Crop marks with a

dash pattern

cannot be used to set the page box.

• Crop marks generated with Illustrator, InDesign and QuarkXpress are supported.

How to proceed

Indicate which page box you want to set: the trim box, the bleed box or both.

Specify the color of the trim marks by choosing one or more of the following:

• 400% CMYK

• Separation All (registration)

• 100% black

• A specific color.

If desired, specify how much the marks are allowed to deviate from the expected position:

• The unit is the unit set in the PitStop Pro Preferences (Units & Guides category), for example: cm or pt

• The maximum value is 2.7 pt; if you enter a higher value, it is automatically reset to 2.7 pt or an equivalent value (if you're using a different unit).

Example

In the image below, the red marks are detected as trim marks and used to set the trim box (blue box). The position of the vertical marks in the top and bottom left corner is not as expected (they are not exactly on one vertical line), but the deviation (= difference between the position of both marks) is less than the specified threshold.

134

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

•

•

4.1.10 Position and size

4.1.10.1 Apply page scaling factor

Belongs to

•

Category:

Position/Size;Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Apply page scaling factor removes the page scaling factor and scales the page to compensate.

A page of 10 by 10 inches and a page scaling factor 2 will be displayed and printed as a page of

20 by 20 inches. By applying the page scaling factor, the actual page size will become 20 by 20 inches.

Page scaling has been introduced in PDF 1.6. If the page scaling factor is not removed or applied, the page size can only be displayed correctly in Acrobat 7 or higher.

Related Actions

•

on page 219

135

PitStop Pro

•

4.1.10.2 Apply page rotation

Belongs to

•

Category:

Position/Size;Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Sets the page rotate key defined in the PDF to 0 °. This may have a visual effect.

Related Actions

•

•

on page 285

•

4.1.10.3 Center page content

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page;Position/Size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Places all objects in the center of the page.

You can:

• Center the objects horizontally, vertically or both.

• Center the content relative to a page box and set margins (left, right, top and bottom).

• Use page rotation and scaling factor as required.

• Only center the visible part of the content.

4.1.10.4 Change position

Belongs to

•

Category:

Position/Size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Moves selected objects to a new position.

You can define an absolute or a relative target position:

•

Move absolute to

moves either all selected objects in one go or each of the selected objects individually to a new position relative to the page they are on.

136

PitStop Pro

•

Move relative by

moves an object in relation to itself.

Indicate whether page rotation and/or the page scaling factor (if applicable) should be taken into account when moving the selection.

4.1.10.5 Flip content

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page;Position/Size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Flips the contents of a selected object horizontally or vertically.

You can flip the content relative to the center of one of the page boxes. Note that you can take page rotation into account as required.

Related Actions

4.1.10.6 Move objects into the page box

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page;Position/Size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Moves the selected objects into a particular page box.

You can include annotations as required.

Related Actions

•

on page 138

•

on page 124

4.1.10.7 Move objects out of the page box

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page; Position/Size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Moves the selected objects out of a particular page box.

You can can include annotations as required.

137

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

•

on page 138

•

on page 124

4.1.10.8 Move objects to corner

Belongs to

•

Category:

Position/Size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Moves the selected graphic elements to the defined corner of the selected page box.

How to proceed

Proceed as follows:

Select the anchor point of the object you want to use for positioning the object, for example

"upper left".

Select the anchor point of the specified page box you want to use for positioning, for example

"center".

Select the page box itself, for example "crop box".

Select the

Use page rotation

checkbox as required.

Example

To move the images in your document to the lower right corner of the page, without cutting off the images, use:

Select images

Move objects to corner

<!-- settings (example): Place the lower right corner of the graphic elements

relative to the lower right corner of the trim box -->

If you have chosen to place the center of the graphic elements relative to the lower right corner of the trim box, the center point of the image will be positioned on the lower right corner point of the trim box, meaning that the right hand side and lower half of the image will lie outside of the trim box.

Related Actions

•

on page 124

•

on page 124

4.1.10.9 Move page content

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page; Position/Size

•

Type:

Changes

138

PitStop Pro

What it does

Moves the contents of a page in the preferred direction (horizontally or vertically) by the specified distance:

• A positive value, e.g. "1 cm" will move the content to the right (horizontally) or to the top of the page (vertically).

• A negative value, e.g. "-1 cm" will move the content to the left (horizontally) or to the bottom of the page (vertically).

Note:

Remember that the unit used in Actions (in this example "cm") is defined in the

PitStop Pro Preferences (Units & Guides Category).

You can choose whether or not to take into account page rotation and scaling factor (if applicable).

4.1.10.10 Move page content to corner

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page; Position/Size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Moves the contents of a page to a chosen corner.

This Action does not center the object on the corner but moves the closest objects to that corner and moves the other objects by the same distance towards the corner (horizontally or vertically).

Example

To move the page content to the lower left

Select Move page content horizontally to

Left Side

Select Move page content vertically to

Bottom Side

Select the page box to be used as a reference, for example the

media box

Optionally, set

margins

to be added to the media box.

Select the

Use page rotation and scaling factor

checkbox, if page rotation and scaling factor should be taken into account.

4.1.10.11 Normalize line weight

Belongs to

•

Category:

General; LineArt; Position and size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

139

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

•

•

•

on page 199

4.1.10.12 Remove page scaling factor

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page; Position and size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes the page scaling factor an reverts the page to its original size.

A page of 10 by 10 inches and a page scaling factor 2 will be displayed and printed as a page of

20 by 20 inches. By removing the page scaling factor, the page size will be at 10 by 10 inches again.

Page scaling has been introduced in PDF 1.6. If the page scaling factor is not removed or applied, the page size can only be displayed correctly in Acrobat 7 or higher.

Related Actions

•

on page 219

•

on page 117

4.1.10.13 Rotate content

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page; Position/Size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Rotates the page content at a particular angle around a particular point.

You could for example rotate the page content at an angle of 90° relative to the center of the media box.

You can choose whether or not to take into account page rotation.

Related Actions

•

on page 227

•

on page 141

•

140

PitStop Pro

4.1.10.14 Rotate page

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to set page rotation to -90, 0, 90 or 180 degrees (clockwise).

Related Actions

on page 128

4.1.10.15 Rotate object

Belongs to

•

Category:

Position/Size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Rotates an object at a certain amount of degrees around a particular point.

Related Actions

•

on page 227

•

•

4.1.10.16 Rotate objects as group

Belongs to

•

Category:

Position/Size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Rotates a selection of objects at a particular angle around a particular point.

You could for example rotate the selection around the center of the media box at an angle of 90 degrees.

Note:

Rotating objects as a group means that all of the selected objects act as one large object during the rotation.

141

PitStop Pro

How to proceed

Select what specific place in the page box you want to use as the rotation point (center, lower left ...).

Specify the page box of your choice.

Define the rotation angle.

Select the

Use page rotation

checkbox as required.

Related Actions

•

on page 227

•

•

on page 141

4.1.10.17 Scale page boxes

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page; Position and size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to scale all page boxes simultaneously.

Specify X and Y scaling percentages. You can anchor the page boxes at a certain corner in the

PDF, for instance at the lower left corner of the media box. You can also choose whether or not to use the page rotation.

Note:

If you want to scale the page boxes proportionally, you need to specify the same values for X and Y.

Related Actions

•

•

•

on page 130

•

on page 133

4.1.10.18 Scale page content

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page;Position/Size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Scales page content along the X and/or Y axis by a certain percentage.

142

PitStop Pro

Note:

If you want to scale the page content proportionally, you need to specify the same values for X and Y.

Example

Suppose you have an A4-size PDF document (210 x 297 mm). You want to keep the page size “as is”, but need to make the page content narrower. You also wish to move the page content to the

upper right corner of the crop box.

How to proceed

Enter the preferred scaling percentage for the X and Y axis.

Do one of the following:

• To define an anchor point, select

Anchored at

• To define the target position of the page contents, select

Moving page content to

Define the anchor point or target position, for example (anchored at/moving to) the upper right of the crop box.

Related Actions

•

•

•

•

on page 133

4.1.10.19 Scale page content to fit

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page; Position/Size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Scales the page content to fit the size of a particular page box. You can add extra margins, if necessary.

143

PitStop Pro

You should also define the target position of the page content inside the page box, e.g. "page content should move to the upper right".

You can choose whether or not to take into account the page rotation and scaling factor.

Example

In the example below, the page content is scaled to fit the size of the trim box (A).

Related Actions

•

on page 130

•

•

•

on page 133

4.1.10.20 Scale to fit page size

Belongs to

•

Category:

Position/Size; Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Scales all page boxes (and optionally all page content as well) until the specified page box fits the target size.

The target size can be specified by defining the target width and height or a percentage for the X and Y axis.

Note:

If you want to scale the page boxes proportionally, you need to specify the same values for X and Y.

You can choose what proportions to keep into account when performing this scaling:

• The proportions of both the page content and the page boxes

• The proportions of the page content only

• No proportions should be taken into account: both the page content and the page boxes can be scaled non-proportionally to match the target page size.

144

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

•

•

on page 130

•

•

on page 133

4.1.10.21 Shrink page content to fit

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page; Position/Size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

You can choose whether or not to take into account page rotation and scaling factor.

Related Actions

•

•

•

on page 130

•

4.1.10.22 Use trim marks to set page box

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page; Position and size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to set the trim box and/or the bleed box based on the trim or bleed marks found in the PDF.

Note:

• Crop marks with a

dash pattern

cannot be used to set the page box.

• Crop marks generated with Illustrator, InDesign and QuarkXpress are supported.

How to proceed

Indicate which page box you want to set: the trim box, the bleed box or both.

145

PitStop Pro

Specify the color of the trim marks by choosing one or more of the following:

• 400% CMYK

• Separation All (registration)

• 100% black

• A specific color.

If desired, specify how much the marks are allowed to deviate from the expected position:

• The unit is the unit set in the PitStop Pro Preferences (Units & Guides category), for example: cm or pt

• The maximum value is 2.7 pt; if you enter a higher value, it is automatically reset to 2.7 pt or an equivalent value (if you're using a different unit).

Example

Related Actions

•

•

4.1.11 Prepress

4.1.11.1 Apply transfer function

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress;Text;LineArt;Color;Image

•

Type:

Changes

146

PitStop Pro

What it does

Adds a transfer function to paths, text, images or all these types of objects. You can exclude spot colors or apply the transfer function on tint values or alternate values only.

Note:

Transfer functions are not allowed in PDF/X compliant documents.

Related Actions

•

on page 231

•

on page 152

4.1.11.2 Change overprint

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the overprint for a selected object's fill and/or stroke.

How to proceed

Proceed as follows:

To change the Fill/Stroke overprint, select the Fill/Stroke overprint checkbox.

Note:

The checkbox only indicates

what

you want to change,

not how

you want it to change. If none of the checkboxes has been selected, the name of the Action will change into "Do not change overprint".

To enable or disable Fill/Stroke overprint, click the buttons:

•

Overprint is off.

•

Overprint is on.

Tip:

Check the Actions field, to see if the Action is configured appropriately. For example, if you selected the Fill overprint checkbox and clicked the button next to it, the name of the Action should change into "Set fill overprint to off."

Related Actions

•

•

Select by overprint

on page 295

147

PitStop Pro

4.1.11.3 Change overprint mode

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to change the overprint mode of a selection to Standard overprint (OPM 0) or

Illustrator overprint mode (OPM 1).

About overprint modes

• In

Standard overprint mode

(OPM 0), the tint value 0 of one of the CMYK inks in the foreground object has a knockout effect on the color rendering of the underlying object.

In other words, a foreground ink with a C, M, Y or K value of 0 % erases the corresponding background ink. Here, the “foreground inks win” principle applies.

• In

Illustrator overprint mode

(OPM 1), the tint value 0 is neutral: it is ignored (as if it were

“not specified”) and has therefore no effect on the color rendering of the underlying object.

For more information and examples, refer to

the PitStop Pro Reference Guide on the Enfocus website

Related Actions

•

on page 233

•

4.1.11.4 Change rendering intent

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress;Color

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Modifies the rendering intent of an object to one of the following:

• Absolute Colorimetric

• Relative Colorimetric

• Perceptual

• Saturation

About rendering intents

148

PitStop Pro

For more information and examples, refer to

the PitStop Pro Reference Guide on the Enfocus website

(See Chapter "Rendering intents to remap colors").

Related Actions

•

•

on page 178

•

4.1.11.5 Change rendering parameter

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the rendering parameter of your choice to the corresponding rendering parameter of the grabbed object.

Example

To apply a transfer curve from an object to the objects of your selection in the Action List

Select an object in your PDF document, by using the PitStop Select Objects tool .

In the attributes of the Change rendering parameter Action, select Change

transfer

Click

Grab Transfer From Selection

4.1.11.6 Change smoothness

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the value of smoothness of a selected PostScript curve.

A value of 1 is a good default.

4.1.11.7 Change transparency

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Changes

149

PitStop Pro

What it does

Allows you to modify the transparency of the objects in a PDF file.

You can:

• Modify the alpha channel of a fill and/or stroke, by moving the sliders to the desired percentage. Note that, to gain full opacity, you should move the slider to 100%.

• Change the blending modes.

This will change the way in which the colors of a transparent object on top blend with the colors of underlying objects.

To select the blending modes you want to apply, proceed as follows:

Select a blending mode under

Available

Click

Add

to move it to the

Selected

list.

Repeat steps 1-2 as required.

The blending modes will be applied in the order as they appear in the Selected list.

• Turn on or off

Alpha is Shape

as required. This may affect anti-aliasing. (Do not turn it on, unless you really need it.)

• Turn on or off

Text Knockout

If Text Knockout is enabled, the inks of underlying objects, if any, will be cut out on the other separations. This option may be useful in case of overlapping characters.

Related Actions

•

on page 228

•

•

on page 298

•

Check for custom black generation

4.1.11.8 Clean up unused resources

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes resources that are not used, for example embedded images or fonts, to reduce the file size.

4.1.11.9 Convert PDF/X-4p output intent to PDF/X-4

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Converts PDF/X-4p output intent to PDF/X-4.

150

PitStop Pro

PDF/X-4p is used when the ICC profile in the output intent is supplied externally.

In PDF/X-4, the ICC profile in the output intent must be supplied internally, so this Action embedds the external ICC profile.

4.1.11.10 Make mask

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Creates a mask from at least two selected objects (line art or text).

Related Actions

Release mask

on page 151

4.1.11.11 Overprint on all separations

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Ensures that if an object is set to overprint, it overprints on all separations. You can apply the overprint to the fill color and/or the stroke color.

The overprint rules in PDF are clearly defined but sometimes very surprising. For example, a gray object that is set to overprint will overprint on underlying Pantone colors, but it will not overprint on Cyan, Magenta and Yellow. This Action will ensure that the document will still print as Black, but with overprint on CMY.

4.1.11.12 Release mask

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes a selected mask.

In PitStop masks refer to clipping paths, i.e. objects (line art or text) of which the shape (partly) masks other artwork. Only areas inside the clipping objects are visible. This Action allows you to remove the mask, so that the different objects become visible again.

151

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

Make mask

on page 151

4.1.11.13 Remove black generation

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to remove black generation settings.

Black generation is a custom setting that tries to replace CMYK-mixed blacks and grays with a greater percentage of black to save on colored ink and give a clearer black. As many printers prefer to set these settings themselves, they can use this Action to remove them from a PDF.

Related Actions

on page 230

4.1.11.14 Remove custom transfer function

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Remove a custom transfer function applied to an object in a PDF.

Note:

Transfer functions are not allowed in PDF/X compliant documents.

Related Actions

•

on page 66

•

Check for custom halftone

on page 152

4.1.11.15 Remove halftone

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

152

PitStop Pro

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes any custom halftone information from a document.

Halftoning is a method of printing shades using a single color ink. By varying the size or density of dots, the eye can see a shade somewhere between the solid color and the color of the background paper. Custom halftones are mostly used for screening frequency and angles.

Associated with every output device is a default halftone definition that is appropriate for that device. Only relatively sophisticated documents need to define their own halftones to achieve special effects. In general, when a PDF document provides its own halftone specifications, it sacrifices portability: they may lead to unpredictable printed output when the same document is sent to different printers. This is why they are generally undesirable.

Related Actions

on page 230

4.1.11.16 Remove halftone phase

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes all halftone phases from a PDF document.

A halftone phase is a shift in the alignment of halftone and pattern cells in device space, to compensate for window system operations that involve scrolling. It is no longer used, but may still be found in documents containing artwork from older source applications.

Note:

It may be interesting to remove halftone phases, because halftone curves, when defined, overrule general transfer curves.

Related Actions

Check halftone phase

4.1.11.17 Remove non-PDF/X compliant halftone

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes any instances of halftones that are not compliant with the PDF/X specification.

153

PitStop Pro

Halftoning is a method of printing shades using a single color ink. By varying the size or density of dots, the eye can see a shade somewhere between the solid color and the color of the background paper. Some of these halftones are not allowed according to the PDF/X specification, which is why you might want to remove them.

4.1.11.18 Remove rendering intent

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color; Prepress

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Strips rendering intents from color managed objects in a PDF.

About rendering intents

For more information and examples, refer to

the PitStop Pro Reference Guide on the Enfocus website

(See Chapter "Rendering intents to remap colors").

Related Actions

•

•

on page 178

•

on page 69

4.1.11.19 Remove transparency

Belongs to

•

Category:

Remove; Prepress

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes transparency from the objects in a PDF file.

You can remove transparency from

all

objects in the PDF, or from objects for which:

• Fill is set to overprint, and/or

• Stroke is set to overprint, and/or

• Spot colors are used.

154

PitStop Pro

About transparency in PDF

Transparency can cause some problems if you view documents in Adobe Acrobat 4.0 or earlier: transparent objects can be rendered incorrectly.

A transparent layer can also cause problems when you transpose the PostScript code of your

PDF document to the halftone information of your printer (the 'ripping').

A typical example is saving graphics with transparent elements as PDF compatible with Acrobat

5.0 in Adobe Illustrator 9.0 or Adobe InDesign 2.0. In Adobe Acrobat 4.0, transparent objects in your PDF document are displayed and printed opaque, but transparency is not removed. If you open the same PDF document in Adobe Acrobat 5.x, the transparent objects will look (and print) fine again.

It can be useful to make the distinction between spot colors and CMYK colors when checking the transparency settings in your documents, because different rules govern the overprinting of spot colors.

Related Actions

•

on page 228

•

•

on page 298

•

Check for custom undercolor removal

4.1.11.20 Remove undercolor removal

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes any custom undercolor removal information from a PDF.

Undercolor removal is the process of removing large percentages of cyan (C), magenta (M), and yellow (Y) ink prior to printing, and replacing them with black (K) ink, in order to achieve a clearer black color in print, and to save on color inks.

Related Actions

on page 231

4.1.12 Remove

4.1.12.1 Remove Certified PDF workflow information

Belongs to

•

Category:

Remove

155

PitStop Pro

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes Certified PDF workflow information from a PDF.

Certified PDF workflow information is extra information that is added to a PDF when it's processed as part of an Enfocus Certified PDF workflow. This information can include save states of previous versions, a PDF Profile and other metadata.

For more information and examples, refer to

the PitStop Pro Reference Guide

(Chapter: Working with Certified PDF documents).

Related Actions

Check Certified PDF state

on page 181

4.1.12.2 Remove empty layers

Belongs to

•

Category:

Remove; Layers

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes empty layers selected by another Action in the same Action List.

Example

The following Action List will remove

all

empty layers in the PDF:

Remove empty layers

To remove Layer1 and 2, if they are empty:

Select layers by name <!--

on page 268 - Choose "equals Layer

[12]" and "Use regular expressions" -->

Remove empty layers

About PDF layers

Layered content usually comes from applications such as InDesign, AutoCAD or Visio. When converted to PDF, the layers are retained and can be viewed and navigated in Adobe Acrobat.

However, if you print a PDF file that contains layers, only the content that is visible on-screen is printed. This may or may not be desired.

"Conventional" layers versus PDF layers

Layers in digital image editing

Layers in PDF

have a different meaning. They are used to hide or show page content:

• Turning

a layer, all objects on this layer are shown on-screen.

• Turning

off

a layer, all objects on this layer are hidden, i.e. they become invisible.

156

PitStop Pro

To work with layers in a PDF document in Adobe Acrobat, select

View

Show/Hide

Navigation Panes

Layers

For more information, refer to the Adobe Acrobat help.

Related Actions

Check for invisible objects without fill and stroke

on page 97

4.1.12.3 Remove invisible objects without fill and stroke

Belongs to

•

Category:

Remove

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes objects that have no fill or stroke color associated with them.

Designers sometimes leave such objects in a document rather than deleting them.

Related Actions

•

on page 190

•

on page 261

4.1.12.4 Remove object compression

Belongs to

•

Category:

Remove

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes the object compression from a PDF.

About object compression

In a PDF, objects have content streams that define (a part of) the object. These content streams can be compressed in order to create smaller files, so this is mostly used if a PDF is to be put on a website. As older RIPS may have problems with this compression, this Action allows you to remove this compression.

Related Actions

•

on page 187

157

PitStop Pro

•

on page 191

4.1.12.5 Remove selection

Belongs to

•

Category:

Remove

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes any currently selected object in a PDF.

4.1.12.6 Remove transparency

Belongs to

•

Category:

Remove; Prepress

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes transparency from the objects in a PDF file.

You can remove transparency from

all

objects in the PDF, or from objects for which:

• Fill is set to overprint, and/or

• Stroke is set to overprint, and/or

• Spot colors are used.

About transparency in PDF

Transparency can cause some problems if you view documents in Adobe Acrobat 4.0 or earlier: transparent objects can be rendered incorrectly.

A transparent layer can also cause problems when you transpose the PostScript code of your

PDF document to the halftone information of your printer (the 'ripping').

A typical example is saving graphics with transparent elements as PDF compatible with Acrobat

It can be useful to make the distinction between spot colors and CMYK colors when checking the transparency settings in your documents, because different rules govern the overprinting of spot colors.

Related Actions

•

on page 228

•

•

on page 298

158

PitStop Pro

•

4.1.13 Text

4.1.13.1 Add font metadata

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Adds font information to the PDF's metadata (based on the font resource).

About font metadata

Font metadata is descriptive information about the fonts used in a PDF, for example the name of the font, its type and encoding. You can find the font metadata of a file in Adobe Acrobat by selecting

File

Document Properties

and switching to the

Fonts

tab.

Related Actions

Check font metadata

4.1.13.2 Apply transfer function

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress;Text;LineArt;Color;Image

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Adds a transfer function to paths, text, images or all these types of objects. You can exclude spot colors or apply the transfer function on tint values or alternate values only.

Note:

Transfer functions are not allowed in PDF/X compliant documents.

Related Actions

•

on page 231

•

on page 152

159

PitStop Pro

4.1.13.3 Change character spacing

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the amount of space between two characters in a selected text string.

The amount of space is expressed in 'em' units. An 'em' refers to the width of the capital M in the current font.

4.1.13.4 Change corrupt font widths

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes corrupt font widths.

Corrupt font widths may occur in a PDF, when "artificial" bold or italic was used instead of the

"bold" or "italic" version of the font concerned. For example, if "Futura" is used in your PDF, the

"Futura-Bold" and "Futura-Oblique" fonts should be used instead of applying bold and italics on the regular Futura font. Artificial font may cause problems when printing the PDF.

Related Actions

•

on page 235

•

4.1.13.5 Change fill and/or stroke

Belongs to

•

Category:

LineArt;Text

•

Type:

Changes

160

PitStop Pro

What it does

Allows you to turn on or off the fill and/or stroke for the selected objects.

4.1.13.6 Change fill type

Belongs to

•

Category:

LineArt;Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to change the fill type of the selected objects to either Non-Zero Winding (Fill) or

Even-odd (Eofill).

About the fill type

The fill type is an attribute of polygons and loops: compound paths with intersecting lines. To determine whether a point is part of the shape, two different rules can be applied:

• The

Non-Zero Winding

• For every edge that crosses the line from the point inside the shape in one direction, add 1 to the winding number.

• For every edge that crosses the line in the opposite direction, subtract 1.

If the winding number is not equal to zero, the shape area to which the point belongs, is filled. For more information, refer to

http://www.wikipedia.org/wiki/nonzero-rule

• The

Even-odd rule

: This rule also supposes that you draw a line between a point inside the shape outline and a point outside its outline.

• If that line crosses the line of the shape an odd number of times, the shape area to which the point belongs, is filled.

• If the number of crossings is even, the area is not filled.

Checking the fill type of line art

To see which rule is applied, check the object's fill attributes:

Select the object, using the Enfocus Select tool .

Click to display the Enfocus Inspector and select

At the bottom, check which button is selected:

•

Fill

is selected, the

Non-zero Winding rule

applies.

161

PitStop Pro

•

Eofill

is selected, the

Even-odd

rule applies.

4.1.13.7 Change flatness

Belongs to

•

Category:

LineArt;Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to set the flatness of a PostScript curve.

The flatness determines how the objects in a document are printed on a PostScript printer.

Related Actions

•

•

4.1.13.8 Change font

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to replace the current font with another one.

Choose the font that should replace the current font:

• To combine a font name with the preferred type and subtype, select

Search for a font by name

Click

Select Font Name

and select the appropriate font. Click

Select the preferred type and subtype.

Select the

Embed

checkbox as required.

• To use an existing font, select

Select an existing font

Click

Create Font Resource

Select the appropriate font.

Select

Embed

Don't embed

Embed Subset

Click

You should also indicate how the embedded composite font should be handled.

162

PitStop Pro

4.1.13.9 Change line cap

Belongs to

•

Category:

LineArt;Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes how the end of a vector line looks like.

How to proceed

•

To have the line end exactly, click

•

To put a round end on the line, click

•

butt

round

To have corners projected beyond the length of the line, click

projecting square

4.1.13.10 Change line join

Belongs to

•

Category:

LineArt; Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes how a corner on a vector line looks like.

How to proceed

•

To have a sharp corner, click

•

miter

To put a round corner on the line, click

•

To flatten the corners, click

bevel

round

4.1.13.11 Change line weight

Belongs to

•

Category:

LineArt;Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the thickness of a selected line to the desired line weight.

163

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

•

on page 84

•

•

on page 199

4.1.13.12 Change miter limit

Belongs to

•

Category:

LineArt; Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the length of the extension of a corner on a vector line.

The miter limit is the limit when a join switches from mitered (pointed) to beveled (squared-off).

To allow “pointier” angles, you can increase the miter limit.

For more information on how to calculate the miter limit, refer to the topic "Stroke attributes:

Miter limit" in

the PitStop Pro Reference Guide on the Enfocus website

4.1.13.13 Change point size

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the point size of a selection by or to a given amount.

4.1.13.14 Change stroke adjustment

Belongs to

•

Category:

LineArt; Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to enable or disable stroke adjustment.

Stroke adjustment takes care of the rendering of paths on a raster device (printing device, computer monitor, etc.).

Example

If stroke adjustment is

turned off

, the device will draw the pixel only if it covers the path for more than 50%.

164

PitStop Pro

This means that a 1 pixel wide line can be drawn in different ways:

• If the line is drawn nicely on top of a pixel of the screen, the line will look fine.

• If the line is spread over 2 pixels of the screen, the width will be 2 pixels on some places and

1 pixel on other places, turning the line into an ugly, jaggy line.

If stroke adjustment is

turned on

, a correction will be made in such a way that the line looks nice and has the same width (1 pixel) everywhere.

4.1.13.15 Change word spacing

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the word spacing of a selected text string to a given value (in em).

4.1.13.16 Convert text to outlines

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to outline the text segments in your selection.

This means you turn the text characters into a set of compound paths. In other words, your text will no longer be a true font, but it will be replaced with a graphical representation of the characters. You can then for example change the fill or stroke color as required.

This can be useful to make sure that your text is printed exactly "as is" or, if you cannot embed the font, for example due to font licensing restrictions.

Note:

By default, invalid characters (often represented as a small box containing an X or a question mark) are not converted, unless you select the

Outline invalid characters

(.notdef glyph)

checkbox.

4.1.13.17 Embed font

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Embeds a selected font if it is available on the system of the machine PitStop is running on.

165

PitStop Pro

You can include the entire font or only embed a subset.

About embedding fonts

Embedding fonts

in a PDF document means that every character of this font is copied and stored in the PDF document. This is useful if you create PDF documents to be displayed on different systems and to be printed on different devices: these are often systems that do not contain exactly the same fonts.

Embedding a font as a

subset

means that only those characters of the font that are actually used in the text are embedded. This reduces the file size by not including superfluous font information.

Related Actions

•

on page 168

•

on page 299

•

4.1.13.18 Fix invalid characters (.notdef usage)

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Fixes invalid .notdef glyphs in a PDF.

.notdef glyphs are replacement characters for undefined characters in a PDF; they often look like a small box containing an X or a question mark and are not PDF/X compliant.

on page 240

4.1.13.19 Fix non well-formed XMP metadata

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Corrects badly formed XMP metadata and optionally removes it, if it cannot be fixed, ensuring that PDF files can be made PDF/X-4 compliant.

About XMP metadata

XMP metadata is descriptive information about the file embedded in the PDF, for example the name of the author, keywords, copyright information... XMP refers to labeling technology that

166

PitStop Pro is used, i.e. Adobe's Extensible Metadata Platform. You can view the XMP metadata in a file's

Document Properties in Acrobat (Click the

Additional Metadata

button, then select

Advanced

Related Actions

on page 211

4.1.13.20 Merge into text lines

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to merge text into text lines.

This Action merges all text that occurs on one line and has the same font into one text object.

This is useful if you want to change text (e.g. the font) on a line by line basis.

Related Actions

•

on page 167

•

on page 167

4.1.13.21 Split in characters

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to split text objects in a PDF in separate characters.

This allows you to change for example the font or format of single characters (e.g. increase the size of capital letters).

Related Actions

•

on page 167

•

4.1.13.22 Split in words

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

167

PitStop Pro

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to split the text objects in a PDF in separate words, for example to modify the spacing.

Related Actions

•

on page 167

•

4.1.13.23 Strip OpenType embedded fonts

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to remove the font's OpenType

info

from the PDF.

An OpenType embedded font is a PDF font resource that has its font embedded in the 'FontFile3' key with as 'SubType' the value 'OpenType'. This is not supported by older software. Running this

Action will convert the PDF font resource to a format that is supported by older software as well.

4.1.13.24 Unembed font

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes embedded fonts from a document.

This can make the PDF lighter for internet distribution but risks messing up formatting if the font is not present on the end user's machine.

Optionally, you can choose not to execute this Action if the resulting font is unsafe.

About embedding fonts

Embedding fonts

Embedding a font as a

subset

means that only those characters of the font that are actually used in the text are embedded. This reduces the file size by not including superfluous font information.

168

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

Embed font

on page 165

4.2 Checks

The following Actions allow you to check various properties in PDF documents (for example font-related properties) or detect specific objects or elements (for example empty pages).

Each of these Actions can be logged as "Warning", "Sign-Off" or "Error" in the Preflight report.

4.2.1 Color

4.2.1.1 Check color type

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if a particular color space is used for particular objects.

For example, check if the

device-specific color space

is used for

text and line-art

You can ignore process colors in DeviceN color spaces, as required. (It may not be required to check for the presence of process colors, as they are by default available on the printer.)

4.2.1.2 Check default color spaces

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks whether default color spaces are used and whether or not they are PDF/X-3 compliant.

4.2.1.3 Check DeviceN attributes

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

169

PitStop Pro

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the PDF's color space is DeviceN or NChannel with a particular attribute.

You can check the following attributes:

• Spot color definitions

• Process color mapping

• Mixing hints

• Solidities

• Printing order

• Dot gain

Related Actions

Select undefined DeviceN colorants

on page 253

4.2.1.4 Check DeviceN colorants

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the non-process colors used in the DeviceN color space are defined in the colorants dictionary, so that they can be used on other devices.

About the DeviceN color space

The DeviceN color space is defined as a list of names. These names can refer to the process colors (CMYK, RGB or Gray) or spot colors. Spot colors can have an alternate in CMYK for output devices that do not recognize their name, or they can just be a name without color definition. If the color is just a name (for example: "Silver" or "MySpot"), it cannot be used on other devices.

Checking the colorants dictionary

You can use the Enfocus PitStop Inspector to check whether a particular spot color has been defined in the colorants dictionary. The colorants dictionary describes the colorants used in the

DeviceN color space. Proceed as follows:

Select an object with the color you want to check (using the Enfocus Select Object Tool ).

Click to display the Enfocus Inspector and select > . Next to the Fill icons, you will see "DeviceN (Spot + process colors)". Below you will see the number of components and their names.

Click the

Actions

link (in the top right corner) and select

Color Picker

In the left part of the Color Picker dialog, navigate to the

Document Spot Colors

folder. This folder contains all spot colors used in the document (not only the ones used for the selected object).

170

PitStop Pro

Select the spot color you want to check. If the color is just a color name, without a color definition, the Alternate Color Space is Gray.

Related Actions

on page 257

4.2.1.5 Check DeviceN for process color spaces

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks whether the DeviceN process color space matches the PDF/X output intent color space, i.e. whether the DeviceN color space contains only process colors.

About the DeviceN color space

4.2.1.6 Check for NChannel colors with non-trivial process dictionary

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks whether the PDF contains NChannel colors with non-trivial process dictionary.

About NChannel

NChannel is supported from PDF 1.6 (Acrobat 7.x) onwards. If you are opening a PDF in an earlier version of Adobe Acrobat, colors can print or display incorrectly.

About process dictionaries

NChannel requires a process dictionary which maps the names used in the colorants list to device colors. This allows giving aliases for process colors.

171

PitStop Pro

A "trivial" process dictionary uses aliases that are easy to understand, e.g. maps "Cyan" to the process color "Cyan".

A "non-trivial" process dictionary would use custom aliases, such as "My Process color".

Related Actions

•

Make DeviceN without NChannel information

on page 73

•

on page 253

4.2.1.7 Check for pre-separated pages

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color; Page

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the PDF document contains any pages that already have been separated.

A pre-separated PDF contains pages that have been separated into their CMYK components.

In offset printing each of these colors is printed with a separate plate. This means that each page in a PDF document is separated into its four constituent colors: cyan, magenta, yellow and black. For example, a pre-separated PDF file for a two-page CMYK print job, results in a PDF file with 8 pages.

This separation process is usually carried out by the RIP, and not in the source PDF document.

4.2.1.8 Check for spot color ambiguity

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Searches for ambiguous spot colors. Spot colors are considered ambiguous if the name of the spot color refers to more than one set of color values.

You can set a number of options, to make the check less strict. You can also include a check on

DeviceN color spaces.

4.2.1.9 Check ICC tagging

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Checks

172

PitStop Pro

What it does

Checks objects to see whether or not they are ICC tagged or tagged with a particular ICC profile in a particular color space. You can check if the fill and/or stroke of the objects are ICC tagged.

About ICC tagging

Related Actions

•

on page 77

•

on page 251

•

Check if ICC profile differs from ICC profile in PDF/X output intent

on page 80

•

Select objects of which ICC profile is equal to ICC profile in PDF/X output

•

•

4.2.1.10 Check ICC profile version

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the ICC profile version is equal to or lower than a particular version number.

About ICC tagging

Related Actions

•

on page 77

173

PitStop Pro

•

on page 251

•

Check if ICC profile differs from ICC profile in PDF/X output intent

•

Select objects of which ICC profile is equal to ICC profile in PDF/X output

•

•

on page 80

4.2.1.11 Check if DeviceN printing order is consistent

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Check whether the DeviceN printing order is consistent and whether all colorants are defined in the DeviceN printing order.

4.2.1.12 Check if ICC profile differs from ICC profile in PDF/X output intent

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks whether the fill and/or stroke ICC profile differs from the ICC profile in the PDF/X output intent.

About ICC tagging

Related Actions

•

on page 77

•

on page 251

174

PitStop Pro

•

•

Select objects of which ICC profile is equal to ICC profile in PDF/X output

on page 80

•

•

4.2.1.13 Check if blending color space is defined

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color; Page

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the page blending color space has been defined in the PDF document.

You must set the required blending color space and the required luminosity softmask blending color.

About blending color spaces

blending color space

The

page blending color space

is the blending color space assigned to a page; it is used when individual artwork does not have a blending color space.

The blending color space for soft masks (masks with soft transitions) is called the

luminosity softmask blending color space

. It is usually gray.

Related Actions

•

on page 68

•

on page 247

4.2.1.14 Check if solidities of DeviceN colorants are consistent

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Check if solidities of DeviceN colorants are consistent.

Solidity refers to how spot colors are shown on screen. 100% solidity means that the colors are completely opaque on screen in areas where it is printed at 100% ink density. This Action checks if the solidities are the same for all colors in the DeviceN color space.

175

PitStop Pro

4.2.1.15 Check if the color spaces used match the blend colorspaces

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the color spaces used in the PDF match the blend colorspaces.

4.2.1.16 Check ink coverage (basic object check)

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color;Prepress

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks the total CMYK ink coverage of the color of the

objects

in the PDF.

You can for example check if the ink coverage is at least 300%.

When including images in the ink coverage check, the threshold will determine the minimum area in which the ink coverage has to be exceeded before reporting an error or warning. For example, when entering '0', even 1 dot exceeding the maximum ink coverage will be reported.

4.2.1.17 Check ink coverage (total page check)

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color;Prepress

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks the total CMYK ink coverage of all colors on a page (inside a particular page box).

You can for example check if the total ink coverage in the media box is at least 300%.

176

PitStop Pro

It's also possible to ignore small areas, for example areas smaller than 1 inch.

4.2.1.18 Check number of separations

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks the number of separations that occur in a PDF file. You can set a precise number (e.g.

5 separations) or a range (e.g. less than 5) and choose whether or not to exclude certain colors

(e.g. CMYK plates, spot color All ...).

Note:

From version 12 update 2 onwards, you can use regular expressions to indicate which separations should not be counted.

Checking ICC tagged objects

ICC tagging is a way to specify colors independent from the output device: objects are tagged with an ICC profile that contains the transformation from the object's color to a deviceindependent color. When outputting this on a specific device, that device-independent color is in turn converted to the output device's color space.

Because this conversion depends on the output device, and because it will rarely (if ever) result in less than 4 color plates being used, checking the number of separations on an ICC tagged object will always result in 4 separations.

For example, if you have a black (100% K) ICC tagged object, the number of separations reported by this Action will be 4 (C, M, Y, K) instead of 1 (only K) because some ink will be used on all plates in order to reproduce the color correctly.

4.2.1.19 Check number of spot colors

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks the number of spot colors in a document.

You must enter the number of spot colors the document must have.

If you select the option

Spot colors whose names differ only by their suffix are counted as one

, spot colors with the same name but with a different suffix (e.g. PANTONE 3258 C, PANTONE

177

PitStop Pro

3258 U, PANTONE 3258 M) are counted as one color instead of different (3 in this example) colors. For more information about suffixes, refer to

on page 70.

4.2.1.20 Check Output Intent

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the desired color management output intent is used in a PDF document.

You can check for compliance with a particular PDF/X version and/or check if a particular ICC profile or ICC characterization is used.

Related Actions

Change Output Intent

on page 69

4.2.1.21 Check rendering intent

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color; Prepress

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Allows you to check the rendering intent of particular objects (Paths, Text, Paths or Text,

Images, or all Rendering objects) in a PDF.

You can check whether or not they use rendering, and if they do, which type:

• Absolute Colorimetric

• Relative Colorimetric

• Perceptual

• Saturation

About rendering intents

For more information, refer to the chapter "Rendering intents to remap colors" in

the PitStop

Pro Reference Guide on the Enfocus website

Related Actions

•

•

on page 69

178

PitStop Pro

•

Snap color to color set

4.2.1.22 Check required color set

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks for a restrictive range of tints in a PDF.

How to proceed

Define the color set to be checked:

To allow the use of 100% black, select

Black

Note:

If only black is allowed in the PDF,

only

select the

Black

checkbox. Do not add any other color.

To add another color that is allowed in the PDF:

Click

New

A new entry appears in the text box.

To allow a spot color (optionally), select the

Spot color

checkbox and type the name of the spot color in the text field. You should define a CMYK equivalent too (see next step).

The name of the spot color is shown in the text box.

Enter the required values for CMYK (expressed in %) in the fields below the New/Remove button.

Your changes are shown in the text box.

If only one color should be used for images, select that color from the

Images must use only

list.

Related Actions

on page 79

4.2.1.23 Check spot color by alternate color space

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Searches for spot colors with an alternate color space definition.

You can search for the following alternate color spaces:

• Device CMYK

179

PitStop Pro

• Device gray

• Device RGB

• ICC tagged gray

• ICC tagged RGB

• ICC tagged CMYK

• ICC tagged Lab

• Calibrated gray

• Calibrated RGB

• Lab

4.2.1.24 Check spot color by name

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if a particular spot color is present in the document.

In the text field, enter the name of the spot color to check for.

Note:

From version 12 update 2 onwards, you can use regular expressions to define the spot color name.

4.2.1.25 Check spot color suffix

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks whether the spot colors in the PDF have a given suffix.

You can choose one of the following suffixes: CV; CVC; CVU; CVS; CVP; C; U; or M (or None of the above).

About spot color suffixes

Suffixes represent the

apparent

color of the color when printed on different types of paper. For example, PANTONE 3258

and PANTONE 3258

refer to the same color, but when printed on

oated, respectively

ncoated paper, they will look different, although the same ink formula was used.

Suffix overview

180

PitStop Pro

Suffix

CVC

CVU

Meaning

Computer video (electronic simulation)

Computer video - coated

Computer video - uncoated

Coated paper

Uncoated paper

Matte paper

Related Actions

•

•

4.2.2 Document

4.2.2.1 Check access control

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks whether the document is protected in any way, for example with passwords, certificate

IDs or file permission settings.

4.2.2.2 Check Certified PDF state

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks the Enfocus Certified PDF status of a PDF.

You can log whether

The Certified Preflight Profile matches a particular Profile. You can select a Profile from the database on your computer or from your disk/network (which hasn't been imported yet in

PitStop).

The PDF being checked is Preflighted or Preflighted without errors.

All saved sessions or only the last saved session must be valid.

Note:

A session is invalid if it refers to changes made by an external program.

181

PitStop Pro

For more information, refer to the chapter "Working with Certified PDF documents" in

the

PitStop Pro Reference Guide on the Enfocus website

Related Actions

on page 155

4.2.2.3 Check contents compression

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the PDF contains streams that are not compressed with some content compression method (CCITT, Flate, DCT or JBIG2). Compression allows you to make the file smaller.

4.2.2.4 Check data format

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the data format of a PDF is either Binary (=non-ASCII) or ASCII.

ASCII-encoding increases the file size, but allows files to be sent through older network protocols that cannot handle non-alphanumeric characters.

ASCII versus Binary encoding

ASCII encoding may increase the file size, but allows you to edit the file manually.

Binary encoding makes the file smaller, but does not allow you to edit the file manually.

Related Actions

•

on page 258

•

Add unique document IDs

on page 81

4.2.2.5 Check document unique IDs

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Changes

182

PitStop Pro

What it does

Allows you to check if the PDF has a unique document ID.

Related Actions

on page 81

4.2.2.6 Check file identifiers in document XMP metadata

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks the PDF for missing file identifiers in the document metadata, for example: VersionID,

DocumentID or RenditionClass.

About XMP metadata

Document Properties in Acrobat (Click the

Additional Metadata

button, then select

Advanced

Related Actions

•

Check if date is present in document XMP metadata

on page 213

•

on page 208

•

on page 116

4.2.2.7 Check for alternate presentations

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks whether the PDF contains alternate presentations.

183

PitStop Pro

This mechanism is used for slideshow displays and is therefore not desired in a print document.

4.2.2.8 Check for garbage after the PDF End-Of-File marker %

%EOF

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks whether the PDF contains undesired characters after the end-of-file marker EOF.

If this is the case, the PDF is malformed. The last line of a PDF should only contain the EOF marker.

To solve this problem, you can do one of the following:

• Open the PDF in Adobe Acrobat and save it (using

File

Save As

• Process the PDF with PitStop Server (with the option

Full Save

enabled).

4.2.2.9 Check for PDF/A file structure problems

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks whether the structure of the PDF conforms to the file structure as defined by the PDF/A specification.

4.2.2.10 Check for unreadable data in front of the PDF header signature

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks for unreadable data in front of the PDF header signature.

184

PitStop Pro

4.2.2.11 Check if compression filters are PDF/X compliant

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks whether compression filters used in the PDF are compliant with a specific PDF/X version.

Select the desired PDF/X version:

• PDF/X-1a:2001

• PDF/X-3:2002

• PDF/X-1a:2003

• PDF/X-3:2003

• PDF/X-4

• PDF/X-4p

• PDF/A-1

• PDF/A-2

4.2.2.12 Check if document does not need repair

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks whether a PDF is damaged and needs to be repaired when it is opened.

A PDF file can be damaged, for example, if you downloaded it from the Internet and the file transfer was incomplete.

If a PDF is damaged, you can try to redistill it or save it in Adobe Acrobat, using

File

Save as

. If this doesn't solve the problem, you will have to recreate the PDF from the source file, or download it again (if the problem was caused by a corrupt download).

4.2.2.13 Check if document has enough high-ASCII bytes in the PDF header

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

185

PitStop Pro

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the PDF header contains at least 4 high-ASCII bytes.

4.2.2.14 Check if document is optimized for Fast Web View

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Verifies if the document is optimized for the Web.

A document that has been optimized for the Web often has a significantly smaller file size. This is achieved by replacing images that occur more than once in the document with pointers to the first instance of these images. Also, the PDF document is restructured to allow page-at-a-time downloading over the Internet: only the page viewed by the user is downloaded, thus avoiding long loading times for larger PDF documents.

4.2.2.15 Check if document requires PostScript LanguageLevel 3

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks a PDF to see if it contains PostScript Level 3-specific features such as transparency or smooth shadings.

About Adobe PostScript

Adobe PostScript is a page descripting language developed by Adobe in 1985. The language has changed over the years, resulting in different versions:

• Adobe PostScript Level 1: first, original version.

• Adobe PostScript Level 2: enhanced version; added support for different page sizes and better color printing.

• Adobe PostScript LanguageLevel 3: improved handling of graphics, supports more fonts, and speeds up printing.

186

PitStop Pro

For more information, refer to

http://www.adobe.com/products/postscript/pdfs/PLRM.pdf

4.2.2.16 Check number of pages

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page;Doc

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks the number of pages in a PDF.

You can for example check if there are less/more than x page(s), or if the PDF contains an odd/ even number of pages ...

4.2.2.17 Check PDF/X viewer preferences

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the PDF document complies with the viewer preferences as required by the PDF/X specifications.

PDF/X-1a:2003 and PDF/X-3:2003 require the view area, view clip, print area and print clip to be set to the media (or bleed) box.

on page 83

4.2.2.18 Check object compression

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks the compression of the PDF structure (possible as of PDF 1.5).

You can also check if the compression is compliant with PDF/X.

About object compression

187

PitStop Pro to check if the PDF contains such compressed streams, which you can afterwards remove if required.

Related Actions

•

•

on page 191

4.2.3 General

4.2.3.1 Check encoding of name objects

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Allows you to check if the encoding of font names, separation names or structure type names is

UTF8.

This may not be the case if you receive PDFs from Japanese or Chinese designers.

Note:

This Action verifies if the name

data

is valid UTF8 data. Note that this does not necessarily mean that the name actually is UTF8 encoded. It just checks if it would be a valid string when interpreted as UTF8.

4.2.3.2 Check file specification keys

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Searches the PDF for file specification keys.

Related Actions

•

•

188

PitStop Pro

4.2.3.3 Check for embedded PostScript fragments

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Searches for fragments of embedded PostScript in a PDF document.

Embedded PostScript fragments do not show up in the screen preview, but could change the appearance of the printed document. They are generally undesirable in a print production environment.

Related Actions

•

on page 259

•

on page 85

4.2.3.4 Check for external streams

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the PDF contains links to external data.

4.2.3.5 Check for file specifications

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the PDF contains URLs or links to embedded or external files in PDF streams.

You can check for either URL or file specifications, and search for embedded, non-embedded, or both types of links.

189

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

•

on page 188

•

4.2.3.6 Check for invisible objects without fill and stroke

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Searches the PDF document for any objects that have no fill or stroke color associated with them.

Designers sometimes leave such objects in a document rather than deleting them.

Related Actions

•

on page 261

•

on page 157

4.2.3.7 Check for reference Xobjects

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks the PDF for the presence of XObjects.

XObjects are PostScript objects, such as background images, that are defined only once in a PDF file, but used several times (e.g. on several pages). Using XObjects can speed up printing but requires extra printer memory.

XObjects are supported as of PDF 1.4.

Related Actions

on page 263

4.2.3.8 Check for unknown objects

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Checks

190

PitStop Pro

What it does

Checks if the PDF contains unknown objects.

Unknown objects in this context are objects that are not defined in the PDF 1.3 standard. The

PDF/X standards require all objects in the document to be “known”, or defined in the PDF 1.3

specification.

This avoids differences in output between older and newer RIPs, for example. Older RIPs may not be able to process certain objects, and produce blank pages, whereas a more recent RIP can deal with those objects correctly and will produce the intended output.

4.2.3.9 Check optimal compression

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the latest and most efficient compression mechanisms have been applied in the PDF document.

Previous versions of Adobe Acrobat (2.1, 3.0, 4.0) featured less advanced compression mechanisms.

About object compression

Related Actions

•

on page 187

•

4.2.3.10 Log selection

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Allows you to log the selection you made with another Action in the same Action list.

This Action is useful if you want to check something for which no "Check" Action is available. For example, if you want to check if the PDF contains red text, you can first select all red text, and then log the selection. You will find all occurences of red text in the Report.

191

PitStop Pro

How to proceed

Select a language and enter a text string that will appear in the Report as a reason for any selected objects failing.

Note:

You can configure different descriptions for different languages (for example:

JPEG images

in English versus

JPEG afbeeldingen

in Dutch). The language shown in the log file depends on the PitStop Pro language (See

Edit

Preferences

PitStop

Pro Preferences

Indicate whether or not the following information should be logged as well (if applicable):

• The type of page and document objects

• The annotation objects

Note:

By default, annotations aren't logged. Even if Log selection applies to a selection made by

, nothing will be logged, unless the

Report the annotation objects

checkbox is selected.

Select the desired log level.

Note:

In this case, it doesn't make sense to choose "Don't log", since the result of this Action is shown in the Enfocus Navigator.

Example

To check if a PDF contains red text, you could create the following Action List:

Select fill and stroke color

<!-- Add

Select color

on page 252. Select fill and stroke and determine the

color you want to check for, for example using the Grab fill and Grab stroke icon -->

Select text segments

on page 306 -->

AND

on page 279 : necessary to combine the two previous Actions -->

AND

Log selection

<!-- Choose "English" as language and enter "Red text" as explanation.

Select "Log as warning" -->

If you run this Action List, all red text will be selected and logged as a warning. In the Enfocus

Navigator, if you select an object in the Description field, you will see the description ("Red text") under Details. You will also find a warning in the Preflight Report (e.g. "Red text (x times on pages y-z)").

4.2.4 Image

4.2.4.1 Check for alternate images

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Searches a PDF for alternate images.

192

PitStop Pro

Alternate images are low resolution versions of images that are used for on-screen proofing because they render more quickly. PitStop can check for the presence of all alternate images or only those that are set to print as default.

Related Actions

•

•

on page 263

•

on page 89

4.2.4.2 Check for images with 16 bits per channel

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Searches a PDF for images with 16 bits per channel.

These images have a much larger color range than standard 8 bit images. Note that not all of these colors can be accurately reproduced on press.

4.2.4.3 Check if JPEG2000 compressed images are PDF/X compliant

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Check if JPEG2000 compressed images are PDF/X compliant.

You might want to remove or replace non-compliant images.

4.2.4.4 Check image compression

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks image filters to ensure that the images in the PDF are not compressed using a particular compression method.

You can check for the following compression methods:

• CCITT

193

PitStop Pro

• JPEG

• ZIP

• LZW

• RunLength

• JBIG2

• JPEG2000

By default, soft-mask images are not included, unless you select the

Also check soft-mask images

checkbox.

4.2.4.5 Check image compression ratio

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks the compression ratio of the images in a PDF against a particular threshold.

You can check the compression ratio of images compressed with one of the following compression methods:

• CCITT

• JPEG

• ZIP

• LZW

• RunLength

• JBIG2

• JPEG2000

Example

If the JPEG images in your PDF should not be compressed at all, use the following values:

Compression ratio of JPEG images must be  equal to 1.0000

A compression ratio of "1" means "no compression"; a compression ratio of "0.5" means

"50%" , ...

4.2.4.6 Check image interpolation

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if images in the PDF have been resampled.

194

PitStop Pro

4.2.4.7 Check OPI path

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

If your document contains objects with OPI information, you can use this Action to retrieve the path to the high resolution images.

About OPI

Related Actions

•

•

on page 195

•

•

•

4.2.4.8 Check OPI type

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks which OPI types are allowed in a PDF.

You can check for the following OPI types:

• None

• 1.3

• 2.0

• both 1.3 and 2.0

About OPI

195

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

•

•

•

•

•

Select by image resolution

4.2.4.9 Check resolution

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks the resolution of particular image types (color or grayscale images, 1-bit images or any images).

Note:

This Action checks for the

effective

resolution; if the image has been resized, this is the resolution after scaling.

Related Actions

on page 264

4.2.5 Layers

4.2.5.1 Check for empty layers

Belongs to

•

Category:

Layers

•

Type:

Checks

•

Since version:

12 update 3

What it does

Allows you to check if the selected layers are empty. The Action must be preceded by another

Action that selects the layer(s) concerned.

Example

To check if the PDF contains any empty layers:

on page 267 selects ALL layers -->

Check for empty layers

196

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

on page 97

4.2.5.2 Check if layer is PDF/X-4 compliant

Belongs to

•

Category:

Layers

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the layers in a PDF document comply with the PDF/X-4 specification.

About layers in PDF/X-4

The PDF/X-4 standard allows the use of layers (OCGs = Optional Content Groups) in PDF.

These layers can have different states (ON or OFF). The state of all OCGs must be defined in an

Optional Content Configuration Dictionary (OCCD). This dictionary must be used by compliant readers to switch on or off the layers.

4.2.5.3 Check layer properties

Belongs to

•

Category:

Layers

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks certain properties, i.e. default visibility and presence in the Layers panel ("layer configuration") of the layers selected by another Action in the same Action List.

Example

To check the properties of

all

layers in the PDF, create the following Action List:

Check layer properties

Related Actions

•

•

on page 268

4.2.5.4 Check layers

Belongs to

•

Category:

Layers

197

PitStop Pro

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks the layers in a PDF.

You can set a number of different checks, such as:

• Document must not have layers, i.e. optional content is not allowed.

• The document catalog dictionary must not contain OCProperties key.

• Document must not have alternate layer configurations, i.e. only one Layers panel ("layers palette") is allowed.

• Layer configuration (i.e. the Layers panel) must have a name.

• Multiple layer configurations (i.e. Layers panels) must not have the

same

name.

• Layer group must not be missing from order, i.e. the Layer group must be present in the order of the Layer panel.

• Layer configuration (i.e. the Layers panel) must not contain application specific usage entry.

About PDF layers

Layered content usually comes from applications such as InDesign, AutoCAD or Visio. When converted to PDF, the layers are retained and can be viewed and navigated in Adobe Acrobat.

However, if you print a PDF file that contains layers, only the content that is visible on-screen is printed. This may or may not be desired.

"Conventional" layers versus PDF layers

Layers in digital image editing

Layers in PDF

have a different meaning. They are used to hide or show page content:

• Turning

a layer, all objects on this layer are shown on-screen.

• Turning

off

a layer, all objects on this layer are hidden, i.e. they become invisible.

To work with layers in a PDF document in Adobe Acrobat, select

View

Show/Hide

Navigation Panes

Layers

For more information, refer to the Adobe Acrobat help.

Related Actions

•

•

on page 268

•

Fix layers

on page 93

4.2.6 Line Art

198

PitStop Pro

4.2.6.1 Check line weight

Belongs to

•

Category:

LineArt; Prepress

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the line weight of the selected objects is higher or lower than a particular value.

Related Actions

•

•

•

Select page by number of paths

on page 84

4.2.6.2 Check maximum path length

Belongs to

•

Category:

Line Art

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks for a maximum amount of nodes in a path.

4.2.6.3 Check number of paths on page

Belongs to

•

Category:

Line Art

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks the number of paths on one page.

You can for example log a warning if the PDF contains more than 4 paths on a page.

Related Actions

on page 271

4.2.7 Metadata

199

PitStop Pro

4.2.7.1 Check annotations print setting

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Check annotations' print settings allows you to log annotations with a particular print setting

(print or non-printing).

4.2.7.2 Check annotations type

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Check annotations' type allows you to log the occurrence of particular types of annotations in a

PDF, for example: text, hyperlinks, movies,...

4.2.7.3 Check appearances of annotations and interactive form fields

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the document contains annotations and interactive form fields.

This is useful if you want to print the document (as annotations and interactive form fields cannot be printed) or if your output device or PDF renderer does not support form fields.

Related Actions

•

on page 205

•

on page 112

•

Check for annotations inside art box or trim box

•

on page 215

200

PitStop Pro

4.2.7.4 Check article threads

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks for the existence of article threads in a PDF file.

Article threads are electronic threads defined by the author of the PDF. They indicate which elements in a PDF belong together as part of a single story, even if they do not follow each other sequentially in the layout of the document.

4.2.7.5 Check binding

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if binding is left or right.

Most European language documents are bound on the left.

Note:

To check a document's binding, in Adobe Acrobat, go to

File

Properties

and switch to the

Advanced

tab. The document's binding property (Left Edge or Right Edge) is displayed under Reading Options.

Related Actions

•

•

4.2.7.6 Check bookmarks

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the PDF contains bookmarks.

201

PitStop Pro

Bookmarks are links in the left hand side bar of a PDF that take you to different sections.

4.2.7.7 Check creation and modification date

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Check

What it does

Checks the creation and modification date.

You can indicate which metadata location should be checked, for example only the most recently changed one, or "any" metadata location (if it doesn't matter), ...

About metadata locations in a PDF file

There are two metadata locations in a PDF file:

• The

info dictionary

contains information about the file, such as the title, the author, the creation date ... and is visible through the file's Document properties. It's not in XML format.

• The

XMP metadata stream

also contains information about the file, but this information is represented as XMP metadata - XMP referring to Adobe's labeling technology

xtensible

etadata

latform. All information in the info dictionary is also represented in the XMP metadata stream dictionary, in the form of XMP properties.

Inconsistencies may occur when only one of the metadata locations has been updated.

on page 106

4.2.7.8 Check document info

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Searches for the requested document info in the document properties of the PDF.

You can check:

• Title

• Subject

• Author

• Keywords

• Producer

• Creator

Use the

Compare with

field to enter (part of) the name of the document info you are looking for.

202

PitStop Pro

Use the operator methods

equals

and

doesn't equal

if you are looking for an exact match; use

contain

doesn't contain

if the entered value is just part of the document info you are looking for.

Select the

Match case

checkbox if you want the search to take into account the lower and upper cases of the entered value.

Note:

From version 12 update 2 onwards, you can use regular expressions to define the value in the

Compare with

field (if you select

Equals/Does not equal

as operator method).

Related Actions

•

•

on page 275

4.2.7.9 Check document permissions

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Allows you to check the permission settings of a PDF, such as (low/high resolution) printing, copying, editing, ...

About document permissions

The table below gives an overview of the permissions that can be set in a PDF.

Document permission

Assembly

If enabled...

Users can insert, delete and rotate pages, and create bookmarks and thumbnails.

Accessibility software (such as a screen reader) is allowed to use the content of the document.

Users can fill in and change forms.

Content accessibility

Fill-in or changing

Annotating

Copying

Editing

Low resolution printing

High resolution printing

Printing

Users can make annotations.

Users can select and copy contents to the clipboard.

Users can make modifications to the document.

Users can print a low-resolution bitmapped image of the pages (for personal use).

Users can print the document with a high resolution output.

Users can print the document.

To view a summary of the document permissions, proceed as follows:

Open Adobe Acrobat.

203

PitStop Pro

Select

File

Properties

Switch to the

Security

tab. The document restrictions are displayed in the lower part of the dialog.

4.2.7.10 Check document security

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if a particular encryption was used to secure the PDF file.

Options:

• An Acrobat version (5-7)

• A combination of "none" and an Acrobat version (5-7)

• None

• None or Standard (= no custom security)

• Custom (enter a custom name in the text field)

4.2.7.11 Check document trapped flag

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Allows you to check the value of the trapped flag in a PDF.

About trapping

The trapped flag indicates whether or not a file has been "trapped", i.e. has been corrected for slight color misregistrations. The trapped flag must be defined in PDF/X documents.

The flag can be set to:

•

True

: the document has been trapped, or the creator of the document has decided that it should not be trapped.

•

False

: the document has not been trapped

•

Unknown

: it's not known whether or not the document has been trapped. Note that this status should be avoided.

The trapped flag is stored in the info dictionary and/or in the XMP metadata stream, but the data can be inconsistent; that's why you must indicate where the trapped flag must be taken from, e.g. from the most recent metadata location.

Related Actions

•

204

PitStop Pro

•

on page 276

•

on page 214

4.2.7.12 Check external hyperlink annotations

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the annotations in the PDF contain hyperlinks to files, applications, and/or web pages.

4.2.7.13 Check form fields

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Looks for the presence of form fields in a PDF.

Related Actions

•

on page 112

•

4.2.7.14 Check for action dictionaries

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if a PDF contains particular action dictionaries, i.e. action types.

About action dictionaries

205

PitStop Pro

You may want to remove these actions, as they are not allowed in a PDF/X file. The Remove action dictionaries Action will remove the action only; the object (the bookmark, annotation) the actions are linked to will not be removed. For example, if you remove the action from a bookmark, the bookmark is still visible, but not clickable anymore.

Related Actions

•

Check for additional actions

on page 113

•

on page 206

4.2.7.15 Check for additional actions

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if a PDF contains action dictionaries, i.e. action types, other than the standard ones.

About action dictionaries

Related Actions

•

on page 113

•

on page 205

4.2.7.16 Check for annotations inside printable area

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Searches a PDF for any annotations that appear in the printable area of the PDF.

4.2.7.17 Check for deprecated attributes in XMP metadata

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

206

PitStop Pro

What it does

Checks if the XMP metadata streams in the PDF contain attributes that are outdated.

About XMP metadata

Document Properties in Acrobat (Click the

Additional Metadata

button, then select

Advanced

Related Actions

on page 211

4.2.7.18 Check for Javascript

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if a PDF contains instances of the JavaScript programming language.

This language is often used to add interactive functionality to PDF files. However, in a print production environment, these scripts serve no purpose and may result in increased file sizes.

Related Actions

Remove Javascript

on page 114

4.2.7.19 Check for XFA forms

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks whether the PDF contains XFA forms.

An XFA form is a web form and is not suited for printing documents. XFA stands for XML Forms

Architecture. It's an XML specification, which is rather vague and does not specify any rendering.

207

PitStop Pro

Optionally, you can also check if a NeedsRendering key is present in the PDF document (

log if

NeedsRendering key is present

4.2.7.20 Check for XMP schema definitions as required by PDF/A

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks whether the PDF contains XMP schema definitions for identifying the document, as required by the PDF/A specification.

4.2.7.21 Check if date is present in document XMP metadata

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks for the date in the XMP metadata of a PDF.

About XMP metadata

Document Properties in Acrobat (Click the

Additional Metadata

button, then select

Advanced

Related Actions

•

on page 183

•

on page 213

4.2.7.22 Check if document is produced by PDFWriter

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if a PDF was produced by PDFWriter.

208

PitStop Pro

PDFs created with PDFWriter are not suitable for high-end printing.

4.2.7.23 Check if document metadata is consistent

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if metadata that is present in different metadata locations is identical.

How it works

There are two metadata locations in a PDF file:

• The

info dictionary

contains information about the file, such as the title, the author, the creation date ... and is visible through the file's Document properties. It's not in XML format.

• The

XMP metadata stream

also contains information about the file, but this information is represented as XMP metadata - XMP referring to Adobe's labeling technology

xtensible

etadata

latform. All information in the info dictionary is also represented in the XMP metadata stream dictionary, in the form of XMP properties.

Inconsistencies may occur when only one of the metadata locations has been updated.

Extra checks

Optionally you can check if metadata in one location (selected from the list) is also present in the other location; if all metadata should be present in both locations, select

any metadata location

If multiple creators are not considered an inconsistency, select the

Allow multiple creators

checkbox.

Related Actions

•

on page 112

•

on page 278

4.2.7.24 Check if document XMP metadata types are valid

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if metadata streams defined in a PDF conform to the XMP schema.

About XMP metadata streams

There are two metadata locations in a PDF file:

209

PitStop Pro

• The

info dictionary

contains information about the file, such as the title, the author, the creation date ... and is visible through the file's Document properties. It's not in XML format.

• The

XMP metadata stream

also contains information about the file, but this information is represented as XMP metadata - XMP referring to Adobe's labeling technology

xtensible

etadata

latform. All information in the info dictionary is also represented in the XMP metadata stream dictionary, in the form of XMP properties.

Inconsistencies may occur when only one of the metadata locations has been updated.

Related Actions

•

on page 211

•

on page 112

•

Set correct document XMP name spaces

on page 278

4.2.7.25 Check if document XMP name space uses correct prefix

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

The XMP metadata standard (used for labeling metadata in PDFs) defines namespaces for defined sets of core properties. This Action checks if the correct prefixes are used.

Related Actions

on page 116

4.2.7.26 Check if metadata streams do not have a compression filter

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if metadata streams do not have a compression filter.

A compression filter is used to reduce the file size of a PDF. If no compression filter has been used, you may want to add one; if a compression filter has been used, you may want to check which one (e.g. to see if it complies with certain specifications).

on page 213

210

PitStop Pro

4.2.7.27 Check if URLs in Link Annotations are valid

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks the validity of the hyperlinks in annotations with hyperlinks to web pages, i.e. checks if the target web page exists.

If you're using a proxy server, you should enter the proxy server address and port, and your user name and password. Otherwise, the check cannot be performed.

Related Actions

PitStop provides an Action to solve these problems:

on page 205

4.2.7.28 Check if XMP metadata is well-formed

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the XMP metadata streams in the PDF conform to the XMP specifications.

If the XMP metadata is not well-formed, the document cannot be made PDF/X-4 compliant.

Tip:

Fix non well-formed XMP metadata

on page 166.

About XMP metadata

Document Properties in Acrobat (Click the Additional Metadata button, then select Advanced).

4.2.7.29 Check marked content

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

211

PitStop Pro

What it does

Logs content that has been identified with a marked content tag in a PDF.

Marked content is content tagged with special messages so that the application that opens it can read it in a particular way.

Related Actions

Remove marked content

on page 114

4.2.7.30 Check PDF/Acrobat compatibility

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Allows you to checks if a particular Acrobat or PDF version is used in a PDF document.

You can for example check if the Acrobat version is equal to or higher/lower than a particular version.

4.2.7.31 Check PDF/A version key

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks the PDF/A version key.

Related Actions

•

•

4.2.7.32 Check PDF/X version key

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks the PDF/X version key.

212

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

•

on page 109

•

Check if date is present in document XMP metadata

on page 115

4.2.7.33 Check pdfxid prefix in XMP name space

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the pdfxid prefix in the XMP namespace is correct.

The namespace prefix is required for PDF/A.

4.2.7.34 Check presence of document metadata stream

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the PDF contains metadata, i.e. descriptive information about the file, such as the title, the author, the creation date ...

About XMP metadata

Document Properties in Acrobat (Click the

Additional Metadata

button, then select

Advanced

Related Actions

•

on page 208

•

on page 183

4.2.7.35 Check thumbnails

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

213

PitStop Pro

What it does

Checks if the PDF contains thumbnails.

4.2.7.36 Check Trapnets for PDF/X

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks whether trapnet information in a PDF is compliant with either PDF/X-1 or PDF/X-3 standards.

About trapping

In printing, even the slightest misregistration of the plates can cause gaps or color shifts between colored objects to appear.

Trapping

is a technique that compensates for misregistration by expanding adjacent colored objects so that they overlap. Trapping can be performed by the source application, in the PDF, by dedicated trapping tools, or during the RIPprocess.

If the traps in a document were added before the PDF document was created, they are included in the PDF file as

trap networks

. A page may have more than one trap network, e.g. one for each intended output device, but all the different trap networks are stored in the same trap network, also called

trapnet annotation

. When printed, the trapnet annotation provides all the required trapping information for the page.

About the PDF/X Requirements for trapping

When trapnet annotations are found in the document,

PDF/X-1a:2001

requires that:

• The

trapped flag

in the document is set to either True or False (Unknown is not allowed).

• If the trapped flag is

False

, the document does not contain trapnet annotations.

• If the trapped flag is

True

, the document is completely trapped, and the document contains trapnet annotations.

•

Font substitution

is not used.

• The

CMYK

color space is used.

When trapnet annotations are found in the document,

PDF/X-3:2002

requires that:

• Trapping occurs only when all the

fonts in the document are embedded

• The

CMYK

color space is used.

Related Actions

•

•

on page 276

•

Remove unused destinations

214

PitStop Pro

4.2.7.37 Check unused destinations

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Destinations identify locations or views in a PDF you can point to using bookmarks or links. As destinations increase the file size, you may want to check for and remove destinations that are not used.

This Action allows you to

verify

if there are any unused destinations in a PDF document.

The Action

allows you to

remove

them from the PDF.

4.2.8 Page

4.2.8.1 Check for annotations inside art box or trim box

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Searches a PDF for any annotations that appear inside the art box or trim box - an undesirable location for printing.

4.2.8.2 Check for differences in page boxes

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Allows you to compare a certain page box's size with that of another page box.

215

PitStop Pro

Example

Check if the media box is x inch wider and y inch higher than the trim box.

4.2.8.3 Check for empty pages

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the PDF has pages without content.

Additionally, you can specify that elements outside of a specific page box should be ignored.

Related Actions

•

•

4.2.8.4 Check for pre-separated pages

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color; Page

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the PDF document contains any pages that already have been separated.

A pre-separated PDF contains pages that have been separated into their CMYK components.

This separation process is usually carried out by the RIP, and not in the source PDF document.

4.2.8.5 Check for sub-page navigation support

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the PDF supports sub-page navigation, i.e. the possibility to navigate from one layer to another layer on the same page.

216

PitStop Pro

Sub-page navigation support is not desired in documents for print.

About page and sub-page navigation

Page navigation allows you to navigate from one

page

to another, whereas sub-page navigation allows you to navigate from

one layer to another layer

on the same page.

Example

Suppose you have a single page PDF showing the slides of a presentation. Each slide is on a different layer. When the user presses the forward arrow, the next slide (on the same page, but on another layer) is shown and the previous one (on another layer) is hidden.

4.2.8.6 Check if blending color space is defined

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color; Page

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the page blending color space has been defined in the PDF document.

You must set the required blending color space and the required luminosity softmask blending color.

About blending color spaces

blending color space

The

page blending color space

is the blending color space assigned to a page; it is used when individual artwork does not have a blending color space.

The blending color space for soft masks (masks with soft transitions) is called the

luminosity softmask blending color space

. It is usually gray.

Related Actions

•

on page 68

•

on page 247

4.2.8.7 Check if object is close to the page edge

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Checks

217

PitStop Pro

What it does

Checks whether the selected object is situated close to the page edge and might need to be enlarged.

You must specify the required distance to the trim box and the distance into the bleed.

Optionally, you can choose to treat subpaths of compound paths individually. In that case, each of the subpaths will be checked separately.

See also:

•

on page 287

•

4.2.8.8 Check if object is completely outside page box

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page; Position and size

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Searches for (and optionally selects) objects that lie completely outside the selected page box.

Depending on your workflow, you may want to remove these objects before printing.

4.2.8.9 Check if page box is defined

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the selected page box (trim, crop, art or bleed box) has been defined in the PDF.

4.2.8.10 Check if page box is too large

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Checks

218

PitStop Pro

What it does

Checks if the selected page box (art, bleed, crop, or trim box) lies inside the media box.

4.2.8.11 Check if page scaling factor is used

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page; Position and size

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks whether the PDF uses a page scaling factor. If so, you can optionally check if a certain page scaling factor applies.

A page with scaling factor 2 will be displayed and printed twice the original size (= scaling factor

1). Page scaling has been introduced in PDF 1.6 and allows you to extend the maximum page size beyond 200 by 200 inch.

Related Actions

•

on page 117

•

4.2.8.12 Check if trim marks match page box

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if trim marks found in the PDF match the trim box and/or the bleed marks match the bleed box.

How to proceed

Indicate which marks you want to check: trim marks, bleed marks or both.

To help PitStop detect the trim marks, specify the potential color of the marks, by choosing one or more of the following:

• 400% CMYK

• Separation All (registration)

• 100% black

• A specific color

In case of a specific color, do one of the following:

• Select a color space from the list and use the sliders to select the appropriate color.

•

Click and select the appropriate color.

219

PitStop Pro

•

Select an object with the Enfocus Selection tool and click color from the selection.

to grab the fill or stroke

If desired, specify how much the marks are allowed to deviate from the expected position:

• The unit is the unit set in the PitStop Preferences (Units & Guides category), for example: cm or pt

• The maximum value is 2.7 pt; if you enter a higher value, it is automatically reset to 2.7 pt or an equivalent value, if you're using a different unit.

Example

In the image below, the red marks are detected as trim marks, although the position of the vertical marks in the top and bottom left corner is not as expected (they are not exactly on one vertical line). In this case, the deviation (= difference between the position of both marks) is less than the specified threshold.

Remark

A filled path with 3 lines is accepted as a trim mark if:

• The color is as specified in the attributes of this Action.

• It has no dash pattern.

• The 4 points of the 3 lines are a rectangle.

• The path is closed.

• The width is between 0.1 and 2 pt.

• The length is between 8 and 40 pt.

Related Actions

•

220

PitStop Pro

•

4.2.8.13 Check media box origin

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page; Position and size

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks whether the media box is set to coordinates 0,0.

Related Actions

•

•

on page 123

4.2.8.14 Check number of pages

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page;Doc

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks the number of pages in a PDF.

You can for example check if there are less/more than x page(s), or if the PDF contains an odd/ even number of pages ...

4.2.8.15 Check page bleed box

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Checks

221

PitStop Pro

What it does

Checks and compares the size of the bleed box with the size of the trim or crop box.

4.2.8.16 Check page boxes consistency

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if different page boxes (if defined) have the same size and position.

4.2.8.17 Check page box layout

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks whether the page boxes comply with the selected layout (Press, Screen viewing or PDF/

X layout).

The attributes depend on the chosen layout:

•

Press layout

(typically for print)

If you select this layout, the Action derives the correct media size from the first page box that is present in the document. The order in which is searched, is fixed: first the art box, then the trim, crop, bleed and finally the media box.

You can define the minimum distance required between the media and bleed box and between the bleed and trim box, and you should choose one of the following options:

•

Crop box must equal trim box

, or

•

No crop box must be defined or the crop box equals the media box

. This means that it is OK if the crop box is not defined, but if it is defined, it should have the same size and position as the media box.

•

Screen viewing

If you select this layout, the Action checks if the page is defined solely by the crop box, which should have the same size as the media box. No other page boxes are allowed.

•

PDF/X layout

If you select this layout, the Action checks if the page box layout is compliant with the selected PDF/X version.

If you have chosen PDF/X-1a:2003 or PDF/X-3:2003, the art box or trim box shall not extend beyond the boundaries of the bleed box and the crop box.

222

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

Change page box layout

on page 121

4.2.8.18 Check page format

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Ensures that the media box is defined as being the width or height of a multiple of a particular measurement. This allows you to check whether the page size of your document fits your column and/or row layout.

Example

To set all your page boxes to a multiple of 22cm wide

Select

A multiple of columns

To have pages that are always multiples of 22 cm:

Enter 22 cm as column width.

Enter 0 as column spacing.

Related Actions

Change page format

on page 122

4.2.8.19 Check page orientation

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if all the pages in a PDF have a given orientation (portrait, landscape, all the same orientation or the most used orientation).

The orientation is based on the selected page box.

Related Actions

•

on page 122

223

PitStop Pro

•

on page 285

4.2.8.20 Check page rotation angle

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page; Position and size

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks whether the page rotation angle is equal to a specific value.

You can check for a rotation angle of -90°, 0°, 90°, or180° (clockwise).

Related Actions

•

on page 285

•

4.2.8.21 Check page safe type zone

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks for text or objects that overlap or come close to an edge limit in a PDF.

The safe type zone is the area where you must not place any text or objects, unless these objects are intended as bleed.

How to proceed

Define the safe type zone as one of the page boxes.

Optionally define values for the left, right, top and/or bottom margin.

To make sure that even and odd pages are mirrored, select

Mirror horizontal margins

. This is recommended if the left and right margin have a different size.

Figure 3: Mirror horizontal margins illustrated

Mirror horizontal margins

is not selected. Margins of odd and even pages are the same; the left margin is larger than the right margin.

Mirror horizontal margins

is selected. Odd and even pages are mirrored; the outer margin is smaller than the inner margin.

224

PitStop Pro

To only check for text in the page safe type zone, select the

Restrict this check to text

checkbox.

4.2.8.22 Check page size

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Allows you to check if the size or position of a specific page box matches the desired size or position.

How to proceed

Do one of the following:

• To check the coordinates of the selected page box, select

Rectangle

• To check the height and width of the selected page box, select

Size

Select the page box of which you want to check the size or position.

Enter the required values (coordinates or width and height).

In the

Precision

field, indicate how much the actual size or position is allowed to deviate from the entered values.

A precision of 0 means that no deviation is allowed: the size or position needs to match exactly the entered values. For example, if you are checking for a height of 10 inch, even a very small difference (e.g. a page box height of 10.001 inch) will result in an error or warning.

Related Actions

Select by page size

on page 285

225

PitStop Pro

4.2.8.23 Check pages have same size

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks whether all pages in a PDF have the same size. The page size is based on the selected page box.

4.2.9 Position and size

4.2.9.1 Check if page scaling factor is used

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page; Position and size

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks whether the PDF uses a page scaling factor. If so, you can optionally check if a certain page scaling factor applies.

A page with scaling factor 2 will be displayed and printed twice the original size (= scaling factor

1). Page scaling has been introduced in PDF 1.6 and allows you to extend the maximum page size beyond 200 by 200 inch.

Related Actions

•

on page 117

•

4.2.9.2 Check for flipped objects

Belongs to

•

Category:

Position/Size

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Searches a PDF for objects that have been flipped, normally using QuarkXpress. These can slow down the RIP.

226

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

Flip content

on page 123

4.2.9.3 Check for rotated objects

Belongs to

•

Category:

Position/Size

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if a PDF contains objects that have been rotated in page layout applications such as

QuarkXPress. Older RIPs may have problems with such objects.

Optionally, you can allow deviations of e.g. 7°, meaning that objects that have been rotated at angles between 0° and 7° are logged.

Related Actions

•

on page 141

•

•

4.2.9.4 Check for sheared objects

Belongs to

•

Category:

Position/Size

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the PDF contains objects that have been disproportionally skewed or twisted in a page layout application such as QuarkXpress.

4.2.9.5 Check XY scaling difference

Belongs to

•

Category:

Position/Size

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks the proportional scaling of a selected object.

If the XY scaling difference is 0%, the object is scaled proportionally, i.e. the height-to-width ratio is maintained. The object is enlarged or reduced both horizontally (X) and vertically (Y) with the same percentage.

227

PitStop Pro

In some cases, a small XY scaling difference is allowed, for example in line art (e.g. a rectangle in one color); in images this may cause distortions.

4.2.10 Prepress

4.2.10.1 Check flatness

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Allows you to check the minimum or maximum flatness of a line art curve.

The default setting to produce a smooth curve is 1. A value higher than 1 can produce a jaggy edge; lower than 1 can slow down the RIP.

Related Actions

•

•

4.2.10.2 Check for transparent objects

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Searches the PDF document for any objects with transparency. You can restrict your search to transparent objects with fill overprint, strike overprint or spot color.

About transparency in PDF

Transparency can cause some problems if you view documents in Adobe Acrobat 4.0 or earlier: transparent objects can be rendered incorrectly.

A transparent layer can also cause problems when you transpose the PostScript code of your

PDF document to the halftone information of your printer (the 'ripping').

A typical example is saving graphics with transparent elements as PDF compatible with Acrobat

228

PitStop Pro

It can be useful to make the distinction between spot colors and CMYK colors when checking the transparency settings in your documents, because different rules govern the overprinting of spot colors.

Related Actions

•

on page 298

•

•

•

4.2.10.3 Check halftone phase

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks the PDF documents for the presence of halftone phases.

Related Actions

Remove halftone phase

on page 153

4.2.10.4 Check if object is set to knockout

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if a selected object is set to knockout or not. You can distinguish between the fill and stroke being 'knocked out'.

If an object is set to knockout, the colors of this object cut out the area underneath. The background color is erased.

4.2.10.5 Check if object is set to overprint

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

229

PitStop Pro

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the fill and/or stroke of a selected object is set to overprint.

Black objects and particularly smaller text objects should be set to overprint, to compensate for misregistration and to preserve the legibility of the text.

Related Actions

Remove black generation

4.2.10.6 Check for custom black generation

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if custom black generation curves (BG) have been included in the PDF document.

Black generation (BG) is the process of adding black ink to CMY-generated black and gray, in order to achieve a clear black color and to save valuable color ink.

Related Actions

4.2.10.7 Check for custom halftone

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Searches a PDF for objects to which custom halftones are applied.

Related Actions

Remove halftone

230

PitStop Pro

4.2.10.8 Check for custom transfer function

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if a PDF contains objects to which transfer functions are applied.

Note:

Transfer functions are not allowed in PDF/X compliant documents.

Related Actions

•

on page 66

•

Remove undercolor removal

on page 152

4.2.10.9 Check for custom undercolor removal

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if custom undercolor removal definitions (UCR) have been included in the PDF document.

Related Actions

on page 155

4.2.10.10 Check for non-PDF/X compliant halftone

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Checks

231

PitStop Pro

What it does

Searches a PDF for objects with halftones that are not compliant with the PDF/X specification.

Halftoning is a method of printing shades using a single color ink. By varying the size or density of dots, the eye can see a shade somewhere between the solid color and the color of the background paper. Some of these halftones are not allowed according to the PDF/X specification.

Related Actions

Remove non-PDF/X compliant halftone

on page 153

4.2.10.11 Check for non-standard blend modes

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks whether the PDF contains objects with a blend mode other than one of the standard blend modes.

Blend modes determine how colors on different layers blend with each other. For more information about blend modes, visit the Adobe website (

http://www.adobe.com

) or refer to the

Help or documentation of your design application (Adobe InDesign, QuarkXPress, ...)

Related Actions

Select by blend modes

on page 294

4.2.10.12 Check ink coverage (total page check)

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color;Prepress

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks the total CMYK ink coverage of all colors on a page (inside a particular page box).

You can for example check if the total ink coverage in the media box is at least 300%.

It's also possible to ignore small areas, for example areas smaller than 1 inch.

4.2.10.13 Check ink coverage (basic object check)

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color;Prepress

232

PitStop Pro

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks the total CMYK ink coverage of the color of the

objects

in the PDF.

You can for example check if the ink coverage is at least 300%.

4.2.10.14 Check overprint mode

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if fill and/or stroke overprint is set to Standard overprint mode (OPM 0), or Illustrator overprint mode (OPM 1).

About overprint modes

• In

Standard overprint mode

(OPM 0), the tint value 0 of one of the CMYK inks in the foreground object has a knockout effect on the color rendering of the underlying object.

In other words, a foreground ink with a C, M, Y or K value of 0 % erases the corresponding background ink. Here, the “foreground inks win” principle applies.

• In

Illustrator overprint mode

(OPM 1), the tint value 0 is neutral: it is ignored (as if it were

“not specified”) and has therefore no effect on the color rendering of the underlying object.

For more information and examples, refer to

the PitStop Pro Reference Guide on the Enfocus website

Related Actions

•

•

4.2.10.15 Check rendering intent

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color; Prepress

•

Type:

Checks

233

PitStop Pro

What it does

Allows you to check the rendering intent of particular objects (Paths, Text, Paths or Text,

Images, or all Rendering objects) in a PDF.

You can check whether or not they use rendering, and if they do, which type:

• Absolute Colorimetric

• Relative Colorimetric

• Perceptual

• Saturation

About rendering intents

For more information, refer to the chapter "Rendering intents to remap colors" in

the PitStop

Pro Reference Guide on the Enfocus website

Related Actions

•

•

on page 69

•

4.2.11 Text

4.2.11.1 Check CMap

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if a PDF contains an embedded CMap, and if so, whether its name is consistent with any matching external file. This is necessary for PDF/A compliance.

About CMaps

CMap (Character Map) is a mapping of character codes to an ID. This ID is used to map the characters to the correct glyphs.

CMaps can be external or embedded:

• When the CMap is external, it is referenced in the PDF by a name.

Note:

Some CMaps are shipped (as external files) along with PitStop.

234

PitStop Pro

• When the CMap is embedded, it's often also referenced inside the PDF.

4.2.11.2 Check corrupt font widths

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Searches a PDF for fonts that have corrupt widths. You might want to remove or replace these fonts.

Corrupt font widths may occur in a PDF, when "artificial" bold or italic was used instead of the

"bold" or "italic" version of the font concerned. For example, if "Futura" is used in your PDF, the

"Futura-Bold" and "Futura-Oblique" fonts should be used instead of applying bold and italics on the regular Futura font. Artificial font may cause problems when printing the PDF.

Related Actions

•

•

4.2.11.3 Check embedded font is OpenType

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Allows you to check if the embedded font is OpenType.

About OpenType embedded fonts

OpenType is an extension of the TrueType format that can contain TrueType and/or Type 1 font data. In PDF files it can only appear as an embedded font. It has been introduced in PDF 1.6.

Related Actions

•

Select OpenType embedded fonts

on page 299

•

on page 303

4.2.11.4 Check font by name

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Checks

235

PitStop Pro

What it does

Checks for the presence of a particular font.

Enter the name of the font you want to check for in the text field, or use the

FontPicker

button to select it.

Note:

From version 12 update 2 onwards, you can use a regular expression to define the font name.

4.2.11.5 Check font embedding

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks whether or not fonts are embedded.

About embedding fonts

Embedding fonts

Embedding a font as a

subset

means that only those characters of the font that are actually used in the text are embedded. This reduces the file size by not including superfluous font information.

Related Actions

•

on page 299

•

Select fonts by license

on page 168

4.2.11.6 Check font license

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks which operations the font's license allows without obtaining permission from the font's owner.

These operations are:

• Embed

• Subset

• Outline

236

PitStop Pro

• Preview and print

Related Actions

on page 300

4.2.11.7 Check font metadata

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Allows you to check if the fonts in the PDF have been added correctly to the metadata.

About font metadata

Font metadata is descriptive information about the fonts used in a PDF, for example the name of the font, its type and encoding. You can find the font metadata of a file in Adobe Acrobat by selecting

File

Document Properties

and switching to the

Fonts

tab.

Related Actions

Add font metadata

on page 159

4.2.11.8 Check font subsetting

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if fonts are subsetted or complete.

If a font is subsetted, only the characters of the font that are actually used in the text are embedded in the document. This is done to to keep a file as small as possible.

Related Actions

•

Check if a subset font contains a complete CharSet or CIDSet

on page 305

•

on page 239

4.2.11.9 Check font type

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Checks

237

PitStop Pro

What it does

Checks for particular font types in a PDF.

You can check for:

• TrueType

• Type 1

• Type 3

• Multiple Master

• Composite TT

• Composite T1

• Composite (all types)

About types of fonts

Refer to the

PitStop Pro Reference Guide

on the Enfocus website (Chapter: Types of fonts and their usage).

Related Actions

Select fonts by type

on page 301

4.2.11.10 Check font vendor

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks to see if fonts from a particular vendor have been used in a PDF.

4.2.11.11 Check for artificial font style

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Searches a PDF for instances of artificial font style (artificial bold, italic or outline style).

About artificial font style

Some fonts consist of specific

font families

for each style. The font Futura, for example, has the font families Futura (for “regular” Roman style), Futura-Bold, Futura-Oblique etc. This implies that, if you want to put text in Futura and in bold, for example, you will have to select the font family “Futura-Bold”.

Certain design programs or word processors allow you to adapt the style of these fonts artificially. You can select text and to put it in italics or in bold by selecting the respective style

238

PitStop Pro within this font family. Sometimes, you can even do this by means of shortcuts, e.g. Control+b for bold or Control+i for italics. Text that has been modified in this manner uses a so-called

artificial bold or italic style

This method may seem very handy but it is recommended to avoid it, because these artificial styles can cause problems when printing: e.g. artificial bold is created when printing two characters on top of each other, one being one point size bigger than the other.

4.2.11.12 Check for city fonts

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Searches a PDF for instances of city fonts.

City fonts are bitmap fonts that tend not to produce good results when printed.

4.2.11.13 Check if a subset font contains a complete CharSet or

CIDSet

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the subset fonts embedded in the document (if any) contain a complete character or

CID set.

If a font is subsetted, only the characters of the font that are actually used in the text are embedded in the document. This is done to to keep a file as small as possible. This Action allows you to check if all characters of the font are embedded. In case of simple fonts, the complete set is referred to as "CharSet"; in case of composite fonts, it's referred to as "CIDSet".

CID (Character Identifier) fonts are a format of Type 1 fonts that are typically used for Chinese,

Japanese and Korean fonts.

Related Actions

•

on page 305

239

PitStop Pro

•

4.2.11.14 Check if font contains all glyphs and metrics for all characters used

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Searches the PDF document for fonts that don't have the character set required to display and print the used characters correctly.

Optionally, you can include in your check the glyphs that were removed by subsetting fonts.

You can then replace these fonts by embedded or subset fonts that do have all required glyphs and metrics.

4.2.11.15 Check if invalid character (.notdef glyph) is used

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the PDF contains invalid characters.

.notdef glyphs are replacement characters for undefined characters in a PDF; they often look like a small box containing an X or a question mark and are not PDF/X compliant. You might want to remove or fix them.

on page 166

4.2.11.16 Check if TrueType fonts are PDF/X-4 or PDF/X-4p compliant

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if TrueType fonts are PDF/X-4 or PDF/X-4p compliant.

240

PitStop Pro

About OpenType embedded fonts

OpenType is an extension of the TrueType format that can contain TrueType and/or Type 1 font data. In PDF files it can only appear as an embedded font. It has been introduced in PDF 1.6.

on page 302

4.2.11.17 Check presence of ToUnicode map in font

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the unicode mappings of the fonts are compliant with a particular PDF/A version.

PDF/A requires that all text in the PDF file can be mapped to Unicode. Therefore, fonts used in the PDF should contain a character-to-glyph mapping that is consistent with character semantics as defined in the Unicode Standard.

This mapping is used to override the default text extraction behavior, for example when using the Acrobat text tool to copy and paste text to another application like Notepad.

4.2.11.18 Check text point size

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks the text point size against a particular value.

Examples

Text point size must be equal to 5 pt.

To check the minimum text point size, select "Text point size must be more than or equal to ...

pt" and enter the appropriate value.

4.2.11.19 Check text x-height

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Checks

241

PitStop Pro

What it does

Check text x-height checks the font size by measuring the height of the lowercase x (= the x-height). The x-height refers to the distance between the baseline and the mean line in a typeface; this is typically the height of the letters x, u, v, w, and z. You can set a threshold for the text x-height expressed in points.

Note that the check only can work if at least one of the characters to be measured (x, u, v, w or z) is available in the PDF.

4.2.11.20 Check that composite TrueType CIDToGIDMap is present

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the PDF contains a mapping table for composite TrueType fonts to map CID (Character

IDs) to GID (Clyph IDs), and if it's correctly defined. This is required by the PDF/A specification.

CID (Character Identifier) fonts are a format of Type 1 fonts that are typically used for Chinese,

Japanese and Korean fonts.

GID (Glyph Identifier) are identifiers to identify all glyphs in a font.

4.2.11.21 Check TrueType font encoding according to PDF/A

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks whether the Truetype font used in the PDF complies with a given version of the PDF/A specification. Fonts must for example be embedded in the PDF.

4.3 Informs

The following Actions allow you to collect information from PDF documents, for example information about fonts, OPI, colors, ... The requested information will be available in the

Preflight report.

4.3.1 Color

242

PitStop Pro

4.3.1.1 Gather color information

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Informs

What it does

Collects information about the color spaces used in a PDF and presents it in the log.

4.3.1.2 Gather ink information

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Informs

What it does

Calculates the amount of each color separation needed to print a page, and a complete document, i.e. how much of each page is actually covered by each ink.

This Action reports the result in % of the page size and also as inch2, cm2 or mm2 depending on your unit preferences. The ink usage report is also included as part of the Preflight Profile editor, so it can be generated within a Preflight Report by checking the

Inks

checkbox (at the bottom of the General section in the Preflight Profile editor). This check is off by default

(because the calculation is time consuming).

4.3.2 Document

4.3.2.1 Gather filters information

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Informs

What it does

Collects information about:

• The data format of the file (ASCII/binary)

• Whether or not compression is used

• The compression filters (if any), for example: ZIP, JPEG, LZW, ...

This information is presented in the Preflight Report under

General File Information

Compression

243

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

Check contents compression

on page 182

on page 182

4.3.2.2 Gather Output Intent information

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Informs

What it does

Collects information about the output intents used in a PDF document and presents it in the log.

In the report, you can find the following information (if output intents are used):

• ICC profile or ICC characterization name

• Registry name

• Additional information

4.3.3 Image

4.3.3.1 Gather image information

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Informs

What it does

Collects information about the images used in a PDF and presents it in the log.

The following information is logged:

• Type

• Color Space

• Physical Resolution

• Effective Resolution

• Page found

• Angle

• Skew

• Flipped

• Custom Transfer

• Custom Halftone

• Custom BG (black generation)

• Custom UCR (undercolor removal definitions)

244

PitStop Pro

4.3.3.2 Gather OPI information

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Informs

What it does

Collects information about the OPI (Open Prepress Interface) used in a PDF and presents it in the log.

About OPI

Related Actions

•

•

on page 195

•

•

•

4.3.4 Metadata

4.3.4.1 Gather pages information

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata; Page

•

Type:

Informs

245

PitStop Pro

What it does

Collects information about the pages (number of pages and range) in a PDF and presents it in the log.

4.3.5 Page

4.3.5.1 Gather page box information

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Informs

What it does

Collects information about the page boxes used in a PDF document and presents it in the log.

In the report file (under Page boxes), each page box layout is represented by 2 drawings:

• One to show the page boxes that were defined in the document ("defined" page boxes)

• One to show the actual position of the page ("effective" page boxes).

Below these drawings, an overview of all page boxes and their sizes is listed:

• The pages this page box layout applies to

• The start position of the media box

• The page rotation

• The page scaling factor

4.3.6 Text

4.3.6.1 Gather font information

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Informs

What it does

Collects information about fonts used in a PDF and presents it in the log.

The following information is logged:

• Font Name

• Type

• Encoding

• Embedded

246

PitStop Pro

• Subset

4.4 Selections

The following Actions allow you to select elements in a PDF.

4.4.1 Color

4.4.1.1 Select by blending color space

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color; Page

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Makes a selection based on the blending color space.

You must set the required blending color space and the required luminosity softmask blending color (or select the option

Undefined

About blending color spaces

blending color space

The blending color space for soft masks (masks with soft transitions) is called the

luminosity softmask blending color space

. It is usually gray.

Related Actions

•

on page 68

•

on page 175

4.4.1.2 Select by color space

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects line art (fill and/or stroke) and/or other objects according to their color space.

247

PitStop Pro

Example

To select all ICC line art, proceed as follows:

Select by color space

<!-- Options:

1. Select both Fill and stroke color space.

2. For both, select "ICC tagged". Optionally, indicate the preferred number of color

components.

3. Make sure the checkbox under Other objects is cleared

-->

Log selection

4.4.1.3 Select by color space in PDF/X Output Intent

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to make a selection based on the color space in the PDF/X Output Intent.

You can choose one of the following color spaces:

• CMYK

• RGB

• Gray

• Unknown

4.4.1.4 Select by ICC tag subtype

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows to make a distinction between ICC-based RGB, ICC-based gray and ICC-based Lab.

and

allow to make the distinction between DeviceRGB, DeviceCMYK and ICC-based color spaces, but they treat all ICC-Based spaces as a single group. This Action allows to make the distinction between ICC-based CMYK and ICC-based RGB objects.

Related Actions

•

on page 248

248

PitStop Pro

•

Change Gray to CMYK Black

on page 169

4.4.1.5 Select by ink coverage (basic object check)

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color; Prepress

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Makes a selection of all objects that meet your ink coverage criteria.

You can for example select objects only if the ink coverage is at least 300%.

When including images in this selection, the threshold will determine the minimum area in which the ink coverage criteria have to be met in order to be selected. E.g. when entering '0', even an image of which only 1 dot meets the ink coverage requirement will be selected.

on page 176

4.4.1.6 Select by number of color plates

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects objects that occur on a certain number of color plates (separations). You can make the selection based on the object's fill and/or stroke.

Example

You could for example search for objects with 4 color plates (dark gray), and afterwards change gray to CMYK Black. This will reduce the number of plates from 4 plates to 1 plate.

Select by number of color plates

Change Gray to CMYK Black <!--

on page 68 -->

4.4.1.7 Select by rendering intent

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color;Prepress

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects color managed objects based on a particular rendering intent.

249

PitStop Pro

You can select paths, text, images, or all rendering objects, with one of the the following rendering intents:

• Absolute Colorimetric

• Relative Colorimetric

• Perceptual

• Saturation

About rendering intents

For more information and examples, refer to

the PitStop Pro Reference Guide on the Enfocus website

(See Chapter "Rendering intents to remap colors").

Related Actions

•

on page 69

•

on page 178

•

•

4.4.1.8 Select by spot color suffix

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects spot colors with a given suffix.

You can choose one of the following suffixes: CV; CVC; CVU; CVS; CVP; C; U; or M (or None of the above).

About spot color suffixes

Suffixes represent the

apparent

color of the color when printed on different types of paper. For example, PANTONE 3258

and PANTONE 3258

refer to the same color, but when printed on

oated, respectively

ncoated paper, they will look different, although the same ink formula was used.

Suffix overview

Suffix

Meaning

Computer video (electronic simulation)

250

PitStop Pro

Suffix

CVC

CVU

Meaning

Computer video - coated

Computer video - uncoated

Coated paper

Uncoated paper

Matte paper

Related Actions

•

on page 180

•

4.4.1.9 Select by tagged ICC Profile

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select objects which have (not) been tagged with an ICC profile, or objects with a specific color space and a specific ICC profile.

You can distinguish between stroke and fill color, for example select objects of which the stroke color is ICC tagged.

About ICC tagging

Related Actions

•

•

on page 251

•

Check if ICC profile differs from ICC profile in PDF/X output intent

on page 80

•

Select objects of which ICC profile is equal to ICC profile in PDF/X output

•

•

PitStop also provides an Action to

251

PitStop Pro

4.4.1.10 Select color

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects objects by their fill or stroke color, or both.

How to proceed

Define the colors you want to select as follows:

Select the appropriate checkbox, depending on what you want to define (Fill color or Stroke color).

Select the appropriate color in one of the following ways:

Select an object with the PitStop Select Objects tool and use the icon to grab the fill or stroke color (depending on what you're defining).

Click the color picker icon

Select the required color space:

and select the appropriate color.

• Device colors can be Gray, RGB or CMYK

• Calibrated colors can be Gray or RGB

• User Swatch (= user-defined colors)

Fine tune the color by moving the sliders.

4.4.1.11 Select color range

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select objects with a specific color, by specifying the color range of the fill and/or stroke color.

The available options depend on the chosen color space:

• Gray, CMYK or RGB:

search in converted values of other color spaces

(If selected, the result of the conversion is calculated in advance.)

• Separations: You can decide to select either all spot colors or only the spot colors with a particular name. You can type the name or click the

Load Spot Color

button to select it.

• DeviceN process colors:

allow spot colors in DeviceN color space

252

PitStop Pro

Example

To catch all gray objects (either fill or stroke) with a brightness between 0% and 40 %, and turn them into CMYK objects with 100% Cyan color, you can do the following:

Select gray fill or stroke color

<!-- This is the "Select color range" Action with the options Fill and Stroke selected.

Select "Color space is gray", and in the Gray from field, enter values between 0% and

40% -->

Change fill and stroke color

<!-- This is the "Change color" Action with Fill and Stroke selected.

Select "Device CMYK" and set Cyan to 100% -->

4.4.1.12 Select default color spaces

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select default color spaces or default color spaces that are not defined by PDF/

X-3.

Default color spaces are defined on page level. They are used to systematically remap devicespecific colors to device-independent colors.

Note:

change

default color spaces

4.4.1.13 Select DeviceN with attributes

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select the fill and/or stroke of DeviceN and/or NChannel objects.

You must specify which attributes must be present to select the object:

• Spot color definitions

• Process color mapping

• Mixing hints

• Solidities

• Printing order

• Dot gain

253

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

Check DeviceN attributes

on page 169

4.4.1.14 Select gray

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to make a selection based on the gray color of the fill and/or stroke color of the objects in the PDF.

You can specify how much the actual gray in the document is allowed to deviate from "true" gray

(i.e. gray which doesn't have tones of any other color; for RGB this means that the percentage of

Red, Gray and Blue is the same; for CMYK, this holds for Cyan, Magenta and Yellow).

4.4.1.15 Select incorrectly defined process color spaces in DeviceN

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select objects that use a DeviceN color space containing a process color space which does not match the PDF/X Output intent.

on page 171

4.4.1.16 Select non-compliant Output Intent

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects the whole document if the output intent is:

•

Not compliant

with a particular PDF/X or PDF/A version, OR

•

Compliant

with a particular PDF/X or PDF/A version,

but the ICC profile or ICC characterization is not as specified

You can check the compliance with the following PDF/X versions:

254

PitStop Pro

• PDF/X-1a:2001

• PDF/X-3:2002

• PDF/X-1a:2003

• PDF/X-3:2003

• PDF/X-4

• PDF/X-4p

• PDF/A-1

• PDF/A-2

4.4.1.17 Select objects of which ICC profile is equal to ICC profile in

PDF/X output

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects objects of which the ICC profile is equal to the ICC profile in PDF/X output. Choose either fill, stroke or both.

About ICC tagging

Related Actions

•

on page 77

•

on page 251

•

Check if ICC profile differs from ICC profile in PDF/X output intent

•

•

on page 80

•

Convert alternate color space to CMYK <!-- (See

4.4.1.18 Select shading objects

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Selections

255

PitStop Pro

What it does

Selects all shading objects.

Shadings represent complex mathematical functions. That's why certain output devices may not be able to correctly interpret them. Shadings can also cause problems during color conversions.

Note:

As of PitStop 7, shadings can be color converted.

on page 72

4.4.1.19 Select spot color

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select either all spot colors in a PDF file, or a particular color, based on its name.

Note:

From version 12 update 2 onwards, you can use regular expressions to define the spot color name.

4.4.1.20 Select spot color by alternate color space

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects spot colors based on their alternate color space.

For example, select a spot color if its alternate color space is ICC tagged RGB or Device RGB.

Example

To convert a spot color's alternate color space to another color space, for example CMYK, proceed as follows:

Select spot color by alternate color space <!-- select the appropriate alternate color

space(s) -->

256

PitStop Pro

Convert alternate color space to CMYK

on page 70) -->

4.4.1.21 Select tiling pattern contents according to parent object selection

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select the tiling pattern content depending on whether or not the parent object

(e.g. text or line art) is selected.

There are two options:

• Select the tiling pattern content if the parent object is selected.

• Select everything except the tiling pattern content of parent objects that are not selected.

4.4.1.22 Select undefined DeviceN colorants

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects objects which use a DeviceN color space (including NChannel) that contains spot colors that are not defined in the colorants dictionary.

About the DeviceN color space

Checking the colorants dictionary

You can use the Enfocus PitStop Inspector to check whether a particular spot color has been defined in the colorants dictionary. Proceed as follows:

Select an object with the color you want to check (using the Enfocus Select Object Tool ).

Click to display the Enfocus Inspector and select > . Next to the Fill icons, you will see "DeviceN (Spot + process colors). Below you will see the number of components and their names.

Click the

Actions

link (in the top right corner) and select

Color Picker

257

PitStop Pro

In the left part of the Color Picker dialog, navigate to the

Document Spot Colors

folder. This folder contains all spot colors used in the document (not only the ones used for the selected object).

Select the spot color you want to check. If the color is just a color name, without a color definition, the Alternate Color Space is Gray.

Related Actions

Check DeviceN colorants

on page 170

4.4.2 Document

4.4.2.1 Select by document encoding

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects a document based on its encoding (binary or ASCII).

About document encoding

ASCII versus Binary encoding

ASCII encoding may increase the file size, but allows you to edit the file manually.

Binary encoding makes the file smaller, but does not allow you to edit the file manually.

Related Actions

•

•

on page 81

4.4.2.2 Select document

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select the whole document.

258

PitStop Pro

4.4.3 General

4.4.3.1 Select clipping objects

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects clipping objects, i.e. objects of which the shape masks other artwork. Only areas inside the clipping objects are visible.

You could use this Action to select clip text of which you want to change the font.

on page 293

4.4.3.2 Select embedded PostScript fragments

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects all fragments of embedded PostScript in the PDF document.

Embedded PostScript fragments do not show up in the screen preview, but could change the appearance of the printed document. They are generally undesirable in a print production environment.

Related Actions

•

on page 189

•

on page 85

4.4.3.3 Select form contents according to form selection

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Selections

259

PitStop Pro

What it does

Allows you to select or deselect the content of selected forms.

Forms are rectangular frames in a PDF wich contain objects, for example an image or a placed

PDF.

For more information, refer to

the PitStop Pro Reference Guide on the Enfocus website

(See

Chapter "Editing forms").

Related Actions

Select objects inside or outside region

4.4.3.4 Select form if content is selected

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select forms based on selected objects. Note that by selecting the forms, the objects themselves are no longer selected.

You can choose whether or not to select nested forms, i.e. forms included inside other forms.

For example, in the example below, the object is part of Form1 and Form2.

• If

Also selected nested forms

is cleared, only Form1 (= highest level) will be selected.

• If

Also selected nested forms

is selected, both forms will be selected.

About forms

Forms are rectangular frames in a PDF, wich contain objects, for example an image or a placed

PDF.

For more information about forms, refer to

the PitStop Pro Reference Guide on the Enfocus website

(See Chapter "Editing forms").

Example

The following example Action List consists of 2 Actions:

260

PitStop Pro

• The first Action selects all objects inside the art box.

• The second Action selects all forms of which the objects are selected by the first Action, and deselects the objects. Forms inside another form are not selected.

on page 292

Select form if content is selected

Related Actions

•

•

on page 259

4.4.3.5 Select forms

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select all forms in a PDF document.

Forms are rectangular frames in a PDF wich contain objects, for example an image or a placed

PDF.

For more information, refer to

the PitStop Pro Reference Guide on the Enfocus website

(See

Chapter "Editing forms").

Example

To select all forms and log them as an error:

Select forms

Log selection <!-- enter "Forms were found in this document" and select "Log as error"

at the bottom -->

Related Actions

•

Log selection

on page 191

•

Select objects that use neither stroke nor fill

on page 259

4.4.3.6 Select invisible objects without fill and stroke

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects objects that have no fill or stroke color associated with them. Even though these objects are not visible in the document, you might want to remove them.

261

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

•

on page 270 (same functionality)

•

Check for invisible objects without fill and stroke

on page 190

•

on page 157

4.4.3.7 Select objects that have a clipping path

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects objects of which the shape (partly) masks other artwork. Only areas inside the clipping objects are visible.

Related Actions

•

on page 259

•

Check for reference Xobjects

on page 293

4.4.3.8 Select parent content object

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select parent content objects, for example the page the object belongs to.

4.4.3.9 Select tiling pattern contents according to parent object selection

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select the tiling pattern content depending on whether or not the parent object

(e.g. text or line art) is selected.

There are two options:

• Select the tiling pattern content if the parent object is selected.

262

PitStop Pro

• Select everything except the tiling pattern content of parent objects that are not selected.

4.4.3.10 Select XObjects

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects any XObject in the PDF file.

XObjects are supported as of PDF 1.4.

Example

To log the presence of XObjects, use:

Select XObjects

Log Selection

Related Actions

on page 190

4.4.4 Image

4.4.4.1 Select by alternate images

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects either

all images with alternates

all images with alternates that are default for printing

An alternate can be a high resolution version of an image that is used in the PDF to preview the image on screen. If you want to make sure that the correct image is set to print, choose

all images with alternates that are default for printing

Related Actions

•

263

PitStop Pro

•

on page 192

•

on page 89

4.4.4.2 Select by image resolution

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Makes a selection of images based on their resolution, for example all images with a resolution between 320 and 400 ppi.

You can select all images, or limit your selection to color or gray scale images, or to monocolor images only.

Note:

This Action checks for the

effective

resolution; if the image has been resized, this is the resolution after scaling.

Related Actions

Check resolution

on page 196

4.4.4.3 Select by image size

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select images by their width or height (expressed in pixels).

You can for example select images with a width or height equal to (or more or less than) 64 pixels.

4.4.4.4 Select image by filter type

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select images according to the compression type they use.

You can choose one or more of the following filters:

264

PitStop Pro

• ASCII hex

• CCITT

• ZIP

• RunLength

• JPEG2000

• ASCII 85

• JPEG

• LZW

• JBIG2

Optionally, you can also include soft-mask images (of the chosen filter types) in your selection

(i.e. the images that mask an image). These are not included by default.

4.4.4.5 Select images

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects all the images in a PDF document.

Example

The following selects everything in a PDF except for the images:

Select all

Select images

NOT

AND

4.4.4.6 Select images with OPI info

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects all the images in a PDF document that contain OPI (Open Prepress Interface) information.

OPI images are treated special as they are assumed to be preview images. They will for example not be preflighted as other images would be.

About OPI

265

PitStop Pro

Example

The following finds any such images and logs them as a caution:

Select images with OPI info

Log selection <!-- In the field, type your message (ex. 'Images with OPI comments were

found in this PDF'), then select Log as warning at the bottom -->

Related Actions

•

•

on page 195

•

•

•

4.4.4.7 Select image type

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select a particular type of images.

You can select one of the following image types:

• 1-Bit images

• Grayscale images

• Color images

• Stencil mask

• Indexed images

Example

The following will convert color images to Grayscale but will not alter Black & White images:

Select image type

Convert color

4.4.4.8 Select rendering objects

Belongs to

•

Category:

LineArt;Text;Image

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects all objects with a rendering intent.

This includes paths, text and images with any of the following rendering intents:

266

PitStop Pro

• Absolute Colorimetric

• Relative Colorimetric

• Perceptual

• Saturation

Note:

This Action does not allow you to make a selection based on

one particular

rendering intent. To select objects by

one

on page 249.

About rendering intents

For more information and examples, refer to

the PitStop Pro Reference Guide on the Enfocus website

(See Chapter "Rendering intents to remap colors").

Related Actions

•

on page 69

•

on page 178

•

•

4.4.4.9 Select single image page images

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects single image page images, i.e. images that cover the entire page.

4.4.5 Layers

4.4.5.1 Select layers

Belongs to

•

Category:

Layers

•

Type:

Selections

•

Since version:

12 update 3

What it does

Selects ALL layers in a PDF document.

267

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

on page 268

4.4.5.2 Select layers by name

Belongs to

•

Category:

Layers

•

Type:

Selections

•

Since version:

12 update 3

What it does

Allows you to select layers with a particular layer name.

Note:

You can use regular expressions to define the layer name (if you select

Equals/

Does not equal

as operator method).

Example

To select "Layer1" and "Layer3" but not e.g. "Layer2", "Layer12" or any other layer, choose the following attributes:

Select layers where name equals [13]

Select Match case

Select Use regular expressions <!-- to make sure [13] is considered a regular expression

instead of a string -->

4.4.5.3 Select objects in layers by layer properties

Belongs to

•

Category:

Layers

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select content based on the layer properties of the layer it's placed on.

You can select content that is:

•

Optional

: placed on a layer

•

Not optional

: not placed on a layer

•

By default visible

: visible when the document is first opened (applies to both layered and

"normal" content)

•

By default invisible

: invisible when the document is first opened

•

Visible

: set to "visible" e.g. by the user or by an application such as PitStop (regardless of the initial visibility state)

•

Invisible

: set to "invisible" e.g. by the user or by an application such as PitStop (regardless of the initial visibility state)

268

PitStop Pro

Example

The following Action List allows you to select layered content that is by default visible. Normal content (that is visible by default) is not selected.

Select objects in layers by layer properties <!-- Choose "Select content that is

optional" -->

Select objects in layers by layer properties <!-- Choose "Select content that is

visible" -->

AND <!-- This operator makes sure that only content is selected that is optional and

visible at the same time -->

Related Actions

•

•

4.4.5.4 Select objects in layers by name

Belongs to

•

Category:

Layers

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select objects inside layers with a certain name.

How to proceed

Select whether the layer name should (not) be equal to or (not) contain the value you specify.

Optionally, enable

Match case

Use regular expressions

Note:

The option

Use regular expression

is available as of PitStop 12 update 2, if you select

equals

does not equal

. This option allows you to define the layer name using a regular expression (e.g Layer[1-3] will match the following layer names:

Layer1, Layer2 and Layer3).

Related Actions

•

on page 269

•

on page 268

4.4.5.5 Select objects in selected layers

Belongs to

•

Category:

Layers

•

Type:

Selections

•

Since version:

12 update 3

What it does

Selects objects in the layer(s) selected by another Action in the same Action List.

269

PitStop Pro

Example

To select the objects on

all

layers of the PDF, create the following Action List:

Select objects in selected layers

Related Actions

•

•

on page 268

4.4.6 Line Art

4.4.6.1 Select by line weight

Belongs to

•

Category:

Line Art

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects objects with a particular line weight.

For example, select objects with line weight

less than 0.0123

inch.

Related Actions

•

on page 84

•

•

Check number of paths on page

on page 199

4.4.6.2 Select line art

Belongs to

•

Category:

Line Art

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select objects that are drawn as line art (i.e. vector and not raster).

4.4.6.3 Select objects that use neither stroke nor fill

Belongs to

•

Category:

LineArt;Text

270

PitStop Pro

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects vector or path objects that contain no stroke or fill color value in a PDF.

on page 261 (same functionality)

4.4.6.4 Select page by number of paths

Belongs to

•

Category:

Line Art

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to make a selection based on the number of paths on a page.

You could for example select all pages with less than 4 pages.

Related Actions

on page 199

4.4.6.5 Select rendering objects

Belongs to

•

Category:

LineArt;Text;Image

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects all objects with a rendering intent.

This includes paths, text and images with any of the following rendering intents:

• Absolute Colorimetric

• Relative Colorimetric

• Perceptual

• Saturation

Note:

This Action does not allow you to make a selection based on

one particular

rendering intent. To select objects by

one

on page 249.

About rendering intents

271

PitStop Pro

For more information and examples, refer to

the PitStop Pro Reference Guide on the Enfocus website

(See Chapter "Rendering intents to remap colors").

Related Actions

•

on page 69

•

on page 178

•

•

4.4.6.6 Select subpaths

Belongs to

•

Category:

Line Art

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects the subpaths if the entire path is selected.

About subpaths

Related Actions

•

on page 104

•

4.4.6.7 Select thin objects

Belongs to

•

Category:

Line Art

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select objects based on the maximum thickness of the fill or stroke.

If desired, you can indicate that for objects of which stroke and fill have the same color, the width of the fill and stroke should be added together.

This Action is typically used to select and afterwards remove thin white lines that may be visible on small screens (e.g. on an iPad screen).

272

PitStop Pro

Example

If you choose the following options:

Select objects with width of

Filled rectangle

smaller than

0.0353 cm

Calculate whole thickness when stroke and fill have the same color

Following objects will be included in the selection:

• Objects with different stroke and fill color, must have a

fill

smaller than 0.0353 cm.

• Objects with the same stroke and fill color, must have a

fill

and

stroke

(added together) smaller than 0.0353 cm.

4.4.7 Metadata

4.4.7.1 Select annotations

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects annotations of a particular type in a PDF document.

Example

To delete all annotations of the type "Movie" and "Sound" in a PDF, configure the following

Action List:

Select annotations

Remove selection

4.4.7.2 Select annotations appearance streams contents according to annotation selection

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select content based on the selected annotations.

About annotation appearance streams

An appearance stream determines the visual appearance of an annotation (e.g. borders, colors,...). Different from

on page 273 (which only selects the annotation

content

), this Action allows you to also include the appearance stream in your selection, so

273

PitStop Pro that other actions can be applied to it. You could for example check for RGB objects only inside appearance streams.

This Action has two options:

•

Select the annotation content if the annotation is selected

: If the annotation is selected, all the PDF objects in the appearance stream will be selected too.

•

Select everything except the annotation content of annotations that are not selected

: This is the inverse of the first option; everything in the PDF is selected, except for the objects inside appearance streams of unselected annotations.

Example

To select all annotations of the type "Text" and change their color, configure the following Action

List:

Select annotations <!-- select Text only - See

Change color <!-- Pick the desired fill/stroke color - See

Select annotations' appearance streams contents according to annotation selection <!--

choose first option -->

To select and change the color of the whole document, including text annotations but excluding video, sound, ... configure the following Action List:

Select annotations <!-- select Text only - See

Change color <!-- Pick the desired fill/stroke color - See

on page 273-->

Select annotations' appearance streams contents according to annotation selection <!--

choose the second option -->

Change annotations print setting

4.4.7.3 Select annotations by print setting

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects annotations based on their print setting.

Example

To select all printing annotations and remove them

Select annotations by print setting

Remove selection

To select all printing annotations and set them to non-printing

Select annotations by print setting

Change annotations' print setting

See also:

on page 106

4.4.7.4 Select by binding

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

274

PitStop Pro

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows the selection of a PDF based on its binding (left-edge or right-edge binding).

Most European language documents are bound on the left.

Note:

To check a document's binding, in Adobe Acrobat, go to

File

Properties

and switch to the

Advanced

tab. The document's binding property (Left Edge or Right Edge) is displayed under Reading Options.

Related Actions

•

on page 201

•

Change binding

4.4.7.5 Select by document info

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to make selections based on document info, such as the title, subject, author, keywords, producer or creator of the PDF. You can specify where the information must be taken from, and what the expected value is.

Note:

From version 12 update 2 onwards, you can use regular expressions to define the value in the

Compare with

field (if you select

Equals/Does not equal

as operator method).

Example

Suppose you want to select a document of which the author is Anne Banks. It doesn't matter where this information is taken from.

Attributes:

• Document info: author

• Read value from: any metadata location

Note:

If you select

Both metadata locations

, the name of the author will be searched for in both the XMP metadata stream and the info dictionary; if you select

Most recent metadata location

, only the most recently changed metadata location will be checked.

• Operator method: equals

• Compare with: Anne Banks

If you are not sure about the spelling of the name

Anne

(spelled Ann or Anne?), you could select the

Use regular expressions

checkbox and enter "Ann(e)? Banks" in the

Compare with

field.

275

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

•

•

on page 202

4.4.7.6 Select by PDF version

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to make a selection based on the PDF's Acrobat or PDF version.

The Acrobat version is the sum of the two numbers that make up the PDF version, for example:

PDF 1.4 = Acrobat 5.

Example

To select PDFs with Acrobat version higher than 7.0, proceed as follows:

Select by PDF version

Related Actions

Change PDF version

on page 108

4.4.7.7 Select by trapped flag

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows the selection of a PDF based on the value of the trapped flag.

About trapping

The trapped flag indicates whether or not a file has been "trapped", i.e. has been corrected for slight color misregistrations. The trapped flag must be defined in PDF/X documents.

The flag can be set to:

•

True

: the document has been trapped, or the creator of the document has decided that it should not be trapped.

•

False

: the document has not been trapped

•

Unknown

: it's not known whether or not the document has been trapped. Note that this status should be avoided.

276

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

•

•

on page 276

•

on page 214

4.4.7.8 Select document if XMP file identifiers are not present

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects document if XMP file identifiers are not present.

Related Actions

•

on page 116

•

You can check the validity of the links with

on page 183

4.4.7.9 Select document if document XMP metadata contains invalid types

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects the document if metadata streams defined in the PDF do not conform to the XMP schema.

About XMP metadata streams

There are two metadata locations in a PDF file:

• The

info dictionary

contains information about the file, such as the title, the author, the creation date ... and is visible through the file's Document properties. It's not in XML format.

• The

XMP metadata stream

also contains information about the file, but this information is represented as XMP metadata - XMP referring to Adobe's labeling technology

xtensible

etadata

latform. All information in the info dictionary is also represented in the XMP metadata stream dictionary, in the form of XMP properties.

Inconsistencies may occur when only one of the metadata locations has been updated.

277

PitStop Pro

on page 209

4.4.7.10 Select external hyperlink annotations

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects annotations with external links to other files, applications and/or web Pages embedded in a PDF document.

Tip:

on page 205.

4.4.7.11 Select if document XMP contains an invalid name space prefix

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects if document XMP contains an invalid namespace prefix.

About XMP metadata

Document Properties in Acrobat (Click the Additional Metadata button, then select Advanced).

on page 208

4.4.7.12 Select if document metadata is inconsistent

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Selections

278

PitStop Pro

What it does

Selects if document metadata is inconsistent, i.e. if the metadata values are not identical in the different metadata locations.

How it works

There are two metadata locations in a PDF file:

• The

info dictionary

contains information about the file, such as the title, the author, the creation date ... and is visible through the file's Document properties. It's not in XML format.

• The

XMP metadata stream

also contains information about the file, but this information is represented as XMP metadata - XMP referring to Adobe's labeling technology

xtensible

etadata

latform. All information in the info dictionary is also represented in the XMP metadata stream dictionary, in the form of XMP properties.

Inconsistencies may occur when only one of the metadata locations has been updated.

Extra checks

Optionally you can make the selection only if metadata in one location (selected from the list) is also present in the other location; if all metadata should be present in both locations, select

any metadata location

If multiple creators should not be considered an inconsistency, select the

Allow multiple creators

checkbox.

Related Actions

•

on page 209

•

current Action list stack. It's typically combined with the

on page 112

4.4.8 Operators

4.4.8.1 AND

Belongs to

•

Category:

Operators

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

AND is a logical operator. This means it is used to select a single object with more than one attribute.

Example

To select text that was Helvetica AND size 12 pt, use:

Select Font Helvetica

Select Text if Point Size = 12.00 pt

AND

279

PitStop Pro

Note:

AND is NOT used to select two different objects!

For example,

the following is incorrect

because a font cannot be both Helvetica and Arial:

Select Font Helvetica

Select Font Arial

AND

4.4.8.2 Duplicate top of selection stack

Belongs to

•

Category:

Operator

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Duplicate top of selection stack is a logical operator. It is used to

duplicate

the top of the

Both "Duplicate top of selection stack" and

("delete")

operator.

For internal use only

group contains the Actions to set the trim marks (using

are only used internally by PitStop.

When running a Preflight Profile, PitStop turns this Profile into an Action List; the more checks and fixes there are in the Preflight Profile, the longer and more elaborate its Action List representation. In order to avoid having to perform complex selections multiple times, PitStop optimizes the internal Action List by duplicating these selections when they are needed multiple times.

4.4.8.3 Group Actions

Belongs to

•

Category:

Operator

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to group several Actions within an Action List.

This Action is useful to organize and document your Action List.

Note:

Instead of using the Group Actions Action, you can as well right-click an Action in the Action List and select

Make Group

from the context menu.

How to proceed

Double-click

Group Actions

to add it to the Action List.

Specify a meaningful name for your Action group and enter a description.

280

PitStop Pro

Move

Group Actions

to the desired position. You can drag and drop it, or use the options in the context menu (

Move Up

Move Down

Add the required Actions to your Action List and drag them to your group.

Example

The screenshot below shows the

Add my Printer Marks and Enlarge

Action List (by default provided with PitStop). This Action List contains 3 Action groups (preceded by an icon: if the group is expanded; if the group is collapsed):

• The

Registration marks

group contains the different Actions required to add registration marks to the top, bottom, left and right of the page.

• The

Color bars

group contains the Actions to create two color bars.

• The

Trim marks

56).

4.4.8.4 NOT

Belongs to

•

Category:

Operators

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

NOT is a logical operator. It is used to exclude objects according to their attributes.

Example

To select all the text in a document that was not Arial, you need to exclude Arial from your selection.

Select Text

281

PitStop Pro

Select Font Arial

NOT <!-- NOT only applies to the immediately preceding item in the list of selections --

AND

4.4.8.5 OR

Belongs to

•

Category:

Operator

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

OR is a logical operator. It is used to select objects that share attributes.

Example

To select all text that is either Helvetica or Arial, use the following:

Select Font Helvetica

Select Font Arial

Note:

Do not use OR to exclude objects!

For example, the following will select all 12pt AND 14pt fonts:

Select Text if point size = 12.00 pt

Select Text if point size = 14.00 pt

4.4.8.6 Remove top of selection stack

Belongs to

•

Category:

Operator

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Deletes

the top of the current Action list stack. It's typically combined with the

operator.

For internal use only

Both "Remove top of selection stack" and

are only used internally by PitStop.

282

PitStop Pro optimizes the internal Action List by duplicating these selections when they are needed multiple times.

4.4.8.7 Select all

Belongs to

•

Category:

Operator

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select every object in a PDF document.

Example

To delete every object in a PDF:

Select all

Remove selection

Remark

Note that objects that are clipped away (hence are invisible) are selected as well. If you don't want this, we recommend removing them first. You can use

on page 293 and

on page 158 to do so.

4.4.8.8 Select last added objects

Belongs to

•

Category:

Operator

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects the objects that were added recently (in the same Action List).

This Action must be preceded by an Action of the type "Add".

Example

The following Action List will first add graphics to the PDF. The added graphics will then be selected and used by the third Action.

Add copied graphics <!--

Check XY scaling difference <!--

on page 56 -->

Select last added objects

283

PitStop Pro

Check XY scaling difference

on page 227 -->

4.4.9 Page

4.4.9.1 Select by blending color space

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color; Page

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Makes a selection based on the blending color space.

You must set the required blending color space and the required luminosity softmask blending color (or select the option

Undefined

About blending color spaces

blending color space

The blending color space for soft masks (masks with soft transitions) is called the

luminosity softmask blending color space

. It is usually gray.

Related Actions

•

on page 68

•

on page 175

4.4.9.2 Select by media box origin

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select pages of which the lower left corner is not located at coordinates 0,0.

Related Actions

•

284

PitStop Pro

•

on page 123

4.4.9.3 Select by page orientation

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select pages by orientation.

Choose either Portrait, Landscape, Same orientation or Most used orientation to select all pages with this orientation, and select the page box the orientation must be based on.

Related Actions

•

on page 122

•

4.4.9.4 Select by page rotation angle

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page; Position and Size

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects pages with a certain rotation angle.

You can choose a rotation angle of -90°, 0°, 90°, or 180° (clockwise).

Related Actions

•

•

4.4.9.5 Select by page size

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select pages based on the size of one of the page boxes.

You can for example select pages with a trim box of 21x29 cm.

285

PitStop Pro

The precision indicates how much the actual size is allowed to differ from the specified size. A precision of 0 means that no deviation is allowed: the size needs to match exactly the entered values.

Related Actions

Check page size

on page 225

4.4.9.6 Select color bars

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select color bars with a certain color patch border and patch size.

Color bars (also called color control bars or color control strips) are small squares of color representing CMYK inks and tints of gray, that are used by press operators to control ink density, dot gain, print contrast, ...

Note:

PitStop provides an Action List to add color bars.

Example

You could combine this Action with another Action to, for example, delete all color bars at once:

Select color bars

Remove selection <!--

on page 158 -->

4.4.9.7 Select empty pages

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects pages in a PDF document that contain no objects.

You can specify that elements outside of a specific page box should be ignored.

Related Actions

•

286

PitStop Pro

•

4.4.9.8 Select objects close to the page edge

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects objects close to the page edge.

You must specify the distance to the trim box and the distance into the bleed.

Optionally, you can choose to treat subpaths of compound paths individually. In that case, each of the subpaths will be selected separately.

See also:

•

on page 217

•

Add copied graphics <!-- See

4.4.9.9 Select objects if page is selected

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select all objects on the selected page(s).

4.4.9.10 Select page by its page box properties

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select a number of pages based on one of the following criteria:

• Whether or not a certain page box is defined.

• The fact that the crop or art box differs from the trim box.

• The fact that a certain page box lies (partially) outside of the media box.

• The fact that the size of the bleed box is not sufficient compared to the trim or crop box.

This allows you to detect pages of which the page boxes are not well defined.

287

PitStop Pro

4.4.9.11 Select page if content is selected

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select a page if the content is selected.

You can select or both the page object and the entire page content.

How to proceed

Specify

what

you want to select:

• The page object only, or

• Both the page object and the entire page content.

Specify on what

condition

you want to select it, for example if more than one objects are selected.

4.4.9.12 Select pages

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select a particular page, a set of pages, or a page range, for example the first or last page of a PDF, all odd pages, pages from 1 to 5, ...

You can also make a selection based on the number of pages, for example: Select if number of pages is not a multiple of 10.

Example

To select every page but the first page of a PDF, and then add a copied graphic to that page, proceed as follows:

Select all pages

Select first page

NOT

AND

on page 56 -->

4.4.9.13 Select pages with PieceInfo

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

288

PitStop Pro

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Searches for pages containing PieceInfo.

This can for example apply to pages coming from Illustrator, containing Illustrator PieceInfo.

If a PDF contains PieceInfo, it was saved with editing capabilities from applications such as

Illustrator, which may be lost if you edit the PDF with another application.

Removing PieceInfo will make the file smaller, but it won't be possible anymore to import the document in Illustrator.

4.4.9.14 Select pages with transparent objects

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects pages containing transparency.

About transparency in PDF

Transparency can cause some problems if you view documents in Adobe Acrobat 4.0 or earlier: transparent objects can be rendered incorrectly.

A transparent layer can also cause problems when you transpose the PostScript code of your

PDF document to the halftone information of your printer (the 'ripping').

A typical example is saving graphics with transparent elements as PDF compatible with Acrobat

It can be useful to make the distinction between spot colors and CMYK colors when checking the transparency settings in your documents, because different rules govern the overprinting of spot colors.

Related Actions

•

on page 228

•

•

on page 298

•

4.4.9.15 Select registration marks

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

289

PitStop Pro

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select potential registration marks with a certain color.

How to proceed

Specify the potential color of the registration marks, by choosing one or more of the following:

• 400% CMYK

• Separation All (registration)

• 100% black

• A specific color

In case of a specific color, do one of the following:

• Select a color space from the list and use the sliders to select the appropriate color.

•

Click and select the appropriate color.

•

Select an object with the Enfocus Selection tool and click color from the selection.

to grab the fill or stroke

Related Actions

Add registration marks

on page 59

4.4.9.16 Select trim marks

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select potential trim or bleed marks with a certain color.

How to proceed

Indicate which marks you want to select: trim marks, bleed marks or both.

To help PitStop detect the trim marks, specify the potential color of the marks, by choosing one or more of the following:

• 400% CMYK

• Separation All (registration)

• 100% black

• A specific color

In case of a specific color, do one of the following:

• Select a color space from the list and use the sliders to select the appropriate color.

•

Click and select the appropriate color.

290

PitStop Pro

•

Select an object with the Enfocus Selection tool and click color from the selection.

to grab the fill or stroke

If desired, specify how much the marks are allowed to deviate from the expected position:

• The unit is the unit set in the PitStop Preferences (Units & Guides category), for example: cm or pt

• The maximum value is 2.7 pt; if you enter a higher value, it is automatically reset to 2.7 pt or an equivalent value, if you're using a different unit.

Example

Remark

A filled path with 3 lines is accepted as a trim mark if:

• The color is as specified in the attributes of this Action.

• It has no dash pattern.

• The 4 points of the 3 lines are a rectangle.

• The path is closed.

• The width is between 0.1 and 2 pt.

• The length is between 8 and 40 pt.

Related Actions

•

•

4.4.10 Position and size

291

PitStop Pro

4.4.10.1 Select by page rotation angle

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page; Position and Size

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects pages with a certain rotation angle.

You can choose a rotation angle of -90°, 0°, 90°, or 180° (clockwise).

Related Actions

•

•

4.4.10.2 Select objects inside or outside region

Belongs to

•

Category:

Position and Size

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Makes a selection across pages defined by a user-defined area or by PDF page boxes.

This is useful to select (and afterwards remove or move) objects that lay outside the trim box, hence will not be printed.

How to proceed

Define the area inside or outside which the objects should be selected. Choose on of the following options:

•

Define the region relative to the lower left of the media box

: You can manually enter the values of the X and Y axis (the anchor point) and the height and with (the size) of the area, or grab them by clicking the icon .

•

Use

(one of the page boxes): You can choose one of the page boxes, the printing area or either the art or trim box, depending on what's defined (option

the art box (if defined) or trim box

•

Use region relative to page box

: You can specify the exact location of the area to check, for example "place the center left of the region relative to the center right of the bleed box with a particular offset, height and width".

Indicate which objects relative to the defined area should be selected, for example the objects inside or overlapping the region.

292

PitStop Pro

Indicate whether or not annotations and clipping paths should be included in the selection.

If applicable, choose whether or not to take into account page rotation and scaling factor.

Example

To select any objects that lay outside of the trim box and delete them, you could use the following:

Select objects inside or outside region <!-- Select "Use trim box" and "Select objects

outside region" -->

Remove selection

4.4.10.3 Select objects that are completely clipped away

Belongs to

•

Category:

Position and Size

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select objects that are hidden ("clipped away") by other objects of which the shape masks the artwork.

Optionally, you can include invisible objects that belong to this form.

Related Actions

Check for non-standard blend modes

on page 259

4.4.10.4 Select overlapping objects

Belongs to

•

Category:

Position and Size

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects the objects defined by a first selection, that overlap the objects defined by a second selection (within the same Action List).

In order to define the first and second selection, the Select overlapping objects Action needs to be preceded by 2 other selection Actions.

Example

Suppose you have two magenta filled line art objects and two yellow filled line art objects. One of the two magenta objects physically overlaps 1 of the 2 yellow objects; that's the object you want to select and to log.

To do so, proceed as follows:

Select color

Select color

293

PitStop Pro

Select overlapping objects

Log selection <!-- Choose user-defined text, for example: Magenta objects overlapping

yellow objects have been found -->

4.4.10.5 Select size

Belongs to

•

Category:

Position/Size

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select any object in a PDF of which the height or width is less than, equal to, or greater than a certain size.

You can choose whether or not to take into account page rotation and scaling factor.

4.4.11 Prepress

4.4.11.1 Select by blend modes

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select objects with or without one or more specific blending modes.

Blend modes determine how colors on different layers blend with each other. For more information about blend modes, visit the Adobe website (

http://www.adobe.com

) or refer to the

Help or documentation of your design application (Adobe InDesign, QuarkXPress, ...)

Related Actions

on page 232

4.4.11.2 Select by graphic state attributes

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select objects based on their graphic state attributes.

294

PitStop Pro

You can select one of the following object types:

• Objects with non-PDF/X-1 compliant halftone info

• Objects with transfer function info

• Objects with halftone info

• None

Viewing the graphic state attributes of an object

Proceed as follows:

Select the object, using the PitStop Select Objects tool .

Click to display the Enfocus Inspector.

Select (

Prepress

) > (General) or (

Halftone

Related Actions

•

Check for non-PDF/X compliant halftone

•

on page 231

4.4.11.3 Select by ink coverage (basic object check)

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color; Prepress

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Makes a selection of all objects that meet your ink coverage criteria.

You can for example select objects only if the ink coverage is at least 300%.

on page 176

4.4.11.4 Select by overprint

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects objects based on the overprint mode of their fill and/or stroke.

295

PitStop Pro

How to proceed

Proceed as follows:

To select objects based on their fill/stroke overprint, select the corresponding checkbox.

For example, to select object based on the overprint mode of their stroke, select

Stroke overprint

Indicate whether overprint must be enabled or disabled for the options selected in step 1, by clicking the buttons.

•

Overprint is off.

•

Overprint is on.

Tip:

Check the Actions field, to see if the Action is configured appropriately. For example, if you selected the Stroke overprint checkbox and clicked the button next to it, the name of the Action should change into "Select if stroke overprint is off."

Related Actions

•

•

4.4.11.5 Select by overprint mode

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select objects based on the overprint mode of their fill and/or stroke color.

About overprint modes

• In

Standard overprint mode

(OPM 0), the tint value 0 of one of the CMYK inks in the foreground object has a knockout effect on the color rendering of the underlying object.

In other words, a foreground ink with a C, M, Y or K value of 0 % erases the corresponding background ink. Here, the “foreground inks win” principle applies.

• In

Illustrator overprint mode

(OPM 1), the tint value 0 is neutral: it is ignored (as if it were

“not specified”) and has therefore no effect on the color rendering of the underlying object.

For more information and examples, refer to

the PitStop Pro Reference Guide on the Enfocus website

Related Actions

•

•

on page 233

296

PitStop Pro

4.4.11.6 Select by rendering intent

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color;Prepress

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects color managed objects based on a particular rendering intent.

You can select paths, text, images, or all rendering objects, with one of the the following rendering intents:

• Absolute Colorimetric

• Relative Colorimetric

• Perceptual

• Saturation

About rendering intents

For more information and examples, refer to

the PitStop Pro Reference Guide on the Enfocus website

(See Chapter "Rendering intents to remap colors").

Related Actions

•

on page 69

•

on page 178

•

•

4.4.11.7 Select flatness

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select objects with a flatness setting equal to or higher/lower than a certain value.

The default setting to produce a smooth curve is 1. A value higher than 1 can produce a jaggy edge; lower than 1 can slow down the RIP.

Example

If the curves in a PDF are showing visible line segments, try the following to solve the problem:

Select flatness

297

PitStop Pro

Change flatness

Related Actions

•

•

4.4.11.8 Select transparent objects

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select transparent objects.

You can check the transparency of different elements, such as the fill or stroke, the blend modes, ... For the whole list of options, check the attributes of the Action in PitStop.

You can select all transparent objects or restrict your selection to objects that have

all

at least one

of the following properties:

• Fill is set to overprint

• Stroke is set to overprint

• Graphic element uses a spot color

About transparency in PDF

Transparency can cause some problems if you view documents in Adobe Acrobat 4.0 or earlier: transparent objects can be rendered incorrectly.

A transparent layer can also cause problems when you transpose the PostScript code of your

PDF document to the halftone information of your printer (the 'ripping').

A typical example is saving graphics with transparent elements as PDF compatible with Acrobat

It can be useful to make the distinction between spot colors and CMYK colors when checking the transparency settings in your documents, because different rules govern the overprinting of spot colors.

Related Actions

•

on page 228

•

•

•

4.4.12 Text

298

PitStop Pro

4.4.12.1 Select clipping and non-clipping text

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects all text segments, even if they have been clipped and are not visible anymore.

Tip:

If you want to select non-clipping text only, you can use

4.4.12.2 Select corrupt font widths

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select all text with a corrupt font width.

Corrupt font widths may occur in a PDF, when "artificial" bold or italic was used instead of the

"bold" or "italic" version of the font concerned. For example, if "Futura" is used in your PDF, the

"Futura-Bold" and "Futura-Oblique" fonts should be used instead of applying bold and italics on the regular Futura font. Artificial font may cause problems when printing the PDF.

Related Actions

•

on page 235

•

4.4.12.3 Select embedded fonts

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select all embedded or unembedded fonts in a PDF document.

The selection of embedded fonts includes OpenType embedded fonts.

299

PitStop Pro

About embedding fonts

Embedding fonts

Embedding a font as a

subset

means that only those characters of the font that are actually used in the text are embedded. This reduces the file size by not including superfluous font information.

About OpenType embedded fonts

OpenType is an extension of the TrueType format that can contain TrueType and/or Type 1 font data. In PDF files it can only appear as an embedded font. It has been introduced in PDF 1.6.

Related Actions

•

•

on page 168

•

on page 235

4.4.12.4 Select fonts by license

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select fonts that allow certain operations without obtaining permission from the font's owner.

These operations are:

• Embed

• Subset

• Outline

• Preview and print

Related Actions

Check font license

on page 236

4.4.12.5 Select fonts by name

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Selections

300

PitStop Pro

What it does

Allows you to select all the fonts with a particular name.

Note:

From version 12 update 2 onwards, you can use regular expressions to define the font name.

Example

To select all the Times, Arial, Helvetica and Courier fonts in a PDF, you could use the following sequence of Actions:

Select font Times

Select font Arial

Select font Helvetica

Select font Courier

4.4.12.6 Select fonts by type

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects text using a particular font type.

You can select one of the following font types:

• TrueType

• Type1

• Type3

• Multiple Master

• Composite TT

• Composite T1

• Composite (all types)

About types of fonts

Refer to the

PitStop Pro Reference Guide

(Chapter: Types of fonts and their usage), available on the Enfocus website.

Example

For example, to unembed TrueType fonts without unembedding any other font types, do the following:

Select TrueType fonts

Unembed font <!-- See

on page 168 -->

Related Actions

Check font type

on page 237

301

PitStop Pro

4.4.12.7 Select fonts that can be emulated

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects fonts that can be emulated.

Fonts that can be emulated are fonts that can be represented on screen, even if the font is unavailable on your system and even though it has not been embedded. If you are certain the document only needs to be viewed on screen, and will not be printed, fonts that can be emulated do not need to be embedded. This makes your PDF lighter, for example for distribution on the internet.

Example

To select fonts and then unembed them:

Select fonts that can be emulated

Unembed font <!-- See

on page 168 -->

4.4.12.8 Select non-PDF/X-4 compliant TrueType fonts

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select a TrueType font that is not PDF/X-4 compliant, for example a symbol font.

After this selection, you might want to remove or replace this font.

About OpenType embedded fonts

OpenType is an extension of the TrueType format that can contain TrueType and/or Type 1 font data. In PDF files it can only appear as an embedded font. It has been introduced in PDF 1.6.

on page 240

4.4.12.9 Select objects that use neither stroke nor fill

Belongs to

•

Category:

LineArt;Text

•

Type:

Selections

302

PitStop Pro

What it does

Selects vector or path objects that contain no stroke or fill color value in a PDF.

on page 261 (same functionality)

4.4.12.10 Select OpenType embedded fonts

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects all embedded fonts that are OpenType, or alternatively, all embedded fonts that are not

OpenType.

About embedding fonts

Embedding fonts

Embedding a font as a

subset

means that only those characters of the font that are actually used in the text are embedded. This reduces the file size by not including superfluous font information.

About OpenType embedded fonts

OpenType is an extension of the TrueType format that can contain TrueType and/or Type 1 font data. In PDF files it can only appear as an embedded font. It has been introduced in PDF 1.6.

Example

To search for all OpenType fonts and then unembed them, proceed as follows:

Select embedded fonts that are OpenType

Unembed font

Related Actions

•

on page 235

•

on page 168

4.4.12.11 Select rendering objects

Belongs to

•

Category:

LineArt;Text;Image

303

PitStop Pro

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects all objects with a rendering intent.

This includes paths, text and images with any of the following rendering intents:

• Absolute Colorimetric

• Relative Colorimetric

• Perceptual

• Saturation

Note:

This Action does not allow you to make a selection based on

one particular

rendering intent. To select objects by

one

on page 249.

About rendering intents

For more information and examples, refer to

the PitStop Pro Reference Guide on the Enfocus website

(See Chapter "Rendering intents to remap colors").

Related Actions

•

on page 69

•

on page 178

•

•

4.4.12.12 Select standard 14 fonts

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects the standard 14 PostScript fonts.

The 14 fonts are automatically installed with Adobe Acrobat and embedded by default (since

PDF 1.5).

Example

To save on file size, you could select these fonts and unembed them. Proceed as follows:

Select standard 14 fonts

304

PitStop Pro

Unembed font <!--

on page 168-->

4.4.12.13 Select subset fonts

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects fonts that are subsetted.

If a font is subsetted, only the characters of the font that are actually used in the text are embedded in the document. This is done to to keep a file as small as possible.

Example

If you have the original font on your system, you could choose the subsetted fonts and embed them completely for later editing. To do so, proceed as follows:

Select subset fonts

Embed font

Related Actions

•

Check if a subset font contains a complete CharSet or CIDSet

•

on page 239

4.4.12.14 Select text by key phrase

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select text objects containing a particular key word or phrase.

To take into account the case of the key phrase (uppercase/lowercase as entered in the text field), select the

Case sensitive

checkbox.

Tip:

To only select a particular key word (and not the entire text object it belongs to), you

could first split the text objects, using

to select clipping text as well, you can use

on page 167.

4.4.12.15 Select text by point size

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

305

PitStop Pro

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects text in a font that is below, above or equal to a certain size (expressed in points).

This Action is useful to select text that is too small to print correctly.

4.4.12.16 Select text by x-height

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Select text by x-height allows you to select text by a font size expressed in x-height. The x-height refers to the distance between the baseline and the mean line in a typeface; this is typically the height of the letters x, u, v, w, and z. You can set a threshold for the text x-height expressed in points.

Note that this Action only can work if at least one of the characters to be measured (x, u, v, w or z) is available in the PDF.

4.4.12.17 Select text segments

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects all text objects in a PDF.

Tip:

This Action does not select clipping text, which is not visible in the PDF. If you want

Select clipping and non-clipping text

299.

4.5 Settings

The following Actions allow you to change certain default settings, such as the image recompression, page boxes, color management, the number of decimal places, ...

4.5.1 Color

306

PitStop Pro

4.5.1.1 Override color management settings

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color; General

•

Type:

Settings

What it does

Replaces any color management settings from the PDF Profile or general PitStop preferences with the settings defined here. These settings will be used when converting colors.

4.5.1.2 Restore previous color management settings

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color; General

•

Type:

Settings

What it does

Allows you to revert to the previous color management settings (if you have changed them before, in the same Action List).

Related Actions

on page 307

4.5.1.3 Save color management settings

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color; General

•

Type:

Settings

What it does

Allows you to save the current color management settings (changed in the Action List).

307

PitStop Pro

Check if text point size is equal to 10.0 pt <--

4.5.2 General

4.5.2.1 Override color management settings

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color; General

•

Type:

Settings

What it does

Replaces any color management settings from the PDF Profile or general PitStop preferences with the settings defined here. These settings will be used when converting colors.

4.5.2.2 Override default image recompression

Belongs to

•

Category:

General; Image

•

Type:

Settings

What it does

Overrides the default recompression quality setting (used by PitStop when changing images) with the one defined in this Action.

How it works

If PitStop is used to change images (e.g. to convert the color, to resample the image...), the images are decompressed first, then changed, and afterwards recompressed according to the default settings (maximum for JPEG, lossless for JPEG2000). With these default settings, files may grow to an unacceptable size compared to the original input PDF file. In that case, you can use Override default image recompression to make the files smaller.

4.5.2.3 Override page box defaults

Belongs to

•

Category:

General; Page

•

Type:

Settings

What it does

Replaces the default order (Media > Crop > Art - Bleed - Trim) of the page boxes in a PDF document with the order defined in this Action.

308

PitStop Pro

4.5.2.4 Override rounding rules

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Settings

What it does

Replaces the default rules used for comparing text size, line weight and/or coordinates to the ones set in this Action.

You have the choice to:

• Leave text size, line weight and/or coordinates unchanged

• Use the default rules, or

• Use decimals.

Example

PitStop applies a number of rounding rules when comparing the actual values in a PDF to the ones set in a check (Profile check or "check" Action). For example, if you want to check if the text point size is equal to 10 points, PitStop will give a warning if there is a difference of 0.1

point.

If you don't want to log such small differences, use this Action to overrule the default behavior.

Example of such an Action List:

Select all

Override rounding rules

Check text point size

on page 241 -->

4.5.2.5 Restore previous color management settings

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color; General

•

Type:

Settings

What it does

Allows you to revert to the previous color management settings (if you have changed them before, in the same Action List).

309

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

on page 307

4.5.2.6 Save color management settings

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color; General

•

Type:

Settings

What it does

Allows you to save the current color management settings (changed in the Action List).

Select registration marks

4.5.3 Image

4.5.3.1 Override default image recompression

Belongs to

•

Category:

General; Image

•

Type:

Settings

What it does

Overrides the default recompression quality setting (used by PitStop when changing images) with the one defined in this Action.

How it works

310

PitStop Pro may grow to an unacceptable size compared to the original input PDF file. In that case, you can use Override default image recompression to make the files smaller.

4.5.4 Page

4.5.4.1 Override page box defaults

Belongs to

•

Category:

General; Page

•

Type:

Settings

What it does

Replaces the default order (Media > Crop > Art - Bleed - Trim) of the page boxes in a PDF document with the order defined in this Action.

311

PitStop Pro

5. Actions sorted per Category

5.1 Add

5.1.1 Changes

5.1.1.1 Add background

Belongs to

•

Category:

Add

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Adds a background to the selection that preceeds this Action in your Action List.

You can choose a color for the background and define a size (size of one of the page boxes or the same size as the bounding box of all objects).

5.1.1.2 Add color bar

Belongs to

•

Category:

Add

•

Type:

Changes

•

Since version:

12 update 3

What it does

Adds color patches to your PDF document. The color patches are individually created for each page and show all separations including any spot colors.

How to proceed

On the

Color Patches

tab, indicate how many tint values per separation you want to add.

By default, a 100% tint of the color is added.

• To change a value, double-click it in the

Tint values (%)

box and type an alternative value.

•

To add another value, click and enter the required value.

312

PitStop Pro

•

To remove a value, select it and click .

Enter the required size of the color patches, i.e. the preferred height or width. This depends on the device you're using.

Select the preferred options:

•

Repeat color patches

: The color patches are repeated till the end of the line (= right border of the page box). If this checkbox is cleared, each tint value of each color is added only once.

•

Don't add process colors (C, M, Y, K)

: For process colors no color patches are added.

•

Don't add if tint is 0%

: If a color is defined but not used in the PDF, no color patch will be added.

Switch to the

Position

tab.

Determine the position of the color bar relative to one of the page boxes.

Examples

Example 1:

This document contains two spot colors, which are each added once, in 2 tint values

(100% + 50%). Chosen position: relative to the top of the trim box (blue line). Process colors are

not added.

Example 2:

Same options as in the first example, but with

Repeat color patches

enabled.

313

PitStop Pro

5.1.1.3 Add copied graphics

Belongs to

•

Category:

Add

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Copies graphic elements and positions them on the page.

How to proceed

Select the graphic(s) by using the PitStop Select Objects tool .

Click

Grab Selection

To see the graphic that will be copied, switch to the

Preview

tab.

To specify how the graphics must be displayed, switch back to the

Attributes

tab and select the appropriate options.

Graphics can be rotated, put in the foreground or background. You can place them at any position on the page and use the offset feature to more precisely position the graphic.

5.1.1.4 Add object

Belongs to

•

Category:

Add

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Inserts a chosen object (a line, a rectangle, an ellipse or a text) and positions it relative to one of the page boxes. This can be useful to add information to be trimmed off later.

Note:

If you're inserting text, you can make use of predefined variables, such as the name of the document, the author, the page number, page count, the page box dimensions, ...See the example below.

The

Fill

and

Stroke

tabs allow you to define the color of the objects you are inserting.

Example

To add the width and height of the media box to your document, proceed as follows:

In the attributes for the Add object Action, on the

Object and position

tab, choose

Add text in foreground

Click the

Variable

button.

Select

%Page Box Dimensions%

Select the page box of which you want to insert the dimensions, in this example

Media Box

The current value is shown.

314

PitStop Pro

Click

Insert

Select a font and a font size and determine where the text must be inserted in the document, for example in the center of the media box with a particular offset.

Specify whether or not to take into account page rotation and page scaling factor if applicable.

Below is an example of the dialog that allows you to insert predefined text variables.

5.1.1.5 Add page box marks

Belongs to

•

Category:

Add

•

Type:

Changes

315

PitStop Pro

What it does

Allows you to add trim marks and/or bleed marks to your document in the style of your preference (InDesign or QuarkXPress).

5.1.1.6 Add page number

Belongs to

•

Category:

Add

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Adds page numbers (including section and chapter numbers) to a PDF.

Note:

The Global Change

Add Page Number

provides the same functionality.

How it works

You must first create a sample piece of text, which will be used to determine the format and style used for page numbering (font, color, size etc):

• If you want to add a page number only, the sample should only be a number, e.g. "3".

• If you want to add a page number with more information (for example: include the word

"Page" and the total number of pages) add this to the sample, e.g. "Page 1 of 10".

How to proceed

Create an example piece of text.

Select the sample by using the PitStop Select Objects tool .

In the attributes of the Action, click the

Grab Sample from Selection

button.

The sample text appears in the Sample field.

Specify the position of the page numbers relative to the text and one of the page boxes. You can use a default offset, manually enter offset values or grab the document's offset values.

If your sample text contains numbers, the

Variable number sequence

list is activated.

This list allows you to indicate which number should be considered a variable (indicated by

"%pagenr%").

For example, if your sample text is "Page 2, Section 1", you will have three options:

• "Page 2, Section 1" will insert "Page 2, Section 1" on every page.

• "Page %pagenr%, Section 1" will insert "Page 1, Section 1" on page 1, "Page 2, Section

1" ...(Section 1 will not change)

316

PitStop Pro

• "Page 2, Section %pagenr%" will insert "Page 2, Section 1" on page 1, "Page 2, Section

2" ...(Page 2 will not change)

Switch to the

Options

tab and select the appropriate checkbox:

•

Remove any overlapping text

will remove existing page numbers.

•

Only number pages that already have a number

will not add page numbers to pages that currently don't have any.

•

Add white background

ensures that the page numbers are visible, even if the PDF has a dark background.

5.1.1.7 Add pages

Belongs to

•

Category:

Add; Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to insert either empty pages or pages from a particular PDF file.

You can choose the number of pages to add, the location of the new pages in the PDF ...

5.1.1.8 Add registration marks

Belongs to

•

Category:

Add

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to add registration marks to your document in the style of your preference (InDesign or QuarkXPress).

Registration marks ensure that the different separations in a color document are properly aligned.

Related Actions

5.1.1.9 Add separation names

Belongs to

•

Category:

Add

•

Type:

Changes

•

Since version:

12 update 2

317

PitStop Pro

What it does

Allows the names of color separations to be generated and positioned within a PDF file. The separation names are individually created for each page and show all separations including any spot colors.

You have several options. You can specify:

•

How

the separation names should be displayed (stacked (i.e. one per line), inline (

reflow

) or all on top of each other (

on same location

- useful for color plates); in color or with color patches, rotated, …). You can also determine the font and the font size.

•

Where

exactly they should be placed on the page (position of the color names relative to a page box).

• Whether or not

process colors

and

separations with 0% tint

should be displayed.

• If you have chosen to add color patches, whether or not they should have a border (

Add stroke on color patches

Examples

• Example 1: Layout:

Stack

and Color:

Separation names in black + color patches

are selected.

• Example 2: Layout:

Overflow

and Color:

Separation names in black + color patches

are selected. The color patches have a border, because

Add stroke on color patches

is enabled.

• Example 3: Layout:

Overflow

and Color:

Separation names in color

are selected.

5.1.1.10 Put selection in form

Belongs to

•

Category:

Add

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to gather all selected objects in a form (a so-called XObject form).

318

PitStop Pro

Forms are rectangular frames in a PDF document that contain objects. The way in which you edit these forms and the objects inside them is different from regular objects in a PDF document. For example, you can select a regular object and move it to a random position on the page in your PDF document. Objects in forms can only be moved inside the form and thus, you can use the form to crop the object.

Note that you can use PitStop's Edit Form tool in order to edit the form and the objects it contains.

5.2 Color

5.2.1 Changes

5.2.1.1 Add default color spaces for color spaces that are not compliant to the Output Intent

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

If you are using an Output Intent that does not support a certain color space, you can use this

Action to replace it with another color space that does comply.

You can select an alternative color space for Gray, RGB, and/or CMYK.

The following PDF/X and PDF/A standards are supported:

• PDF/X-1a:2001

• PDF/X-3:2002

• PDF/X-1a:2003

• PDF/X-3:2003

• PDF/X-4

• PDF/X-4p

• PDF/A-1

• PDF/A-2

5.2.1.2 Apply CMYK curve

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

319

PitStop Pro

•

Since version:

12 update 2

What it does

This Action allows color curves to be applied to selected CMYK objects, either on all four channels, or on individual C, M, Y, or K channels.

Curves can be created by adding points, and dragging them to the preferred position, or by entering values in the

Input

and

Output

field below the curve.

Example

5.2.1.3 Apply color curve

Belongs to

•

Application:

PitStop Pro

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

•

Since version:

12 update 2

What it does

This Action allows color curves to be applied on separations of selected objects.

The default separations are C, M, Y, K, and Other (= all other separations in the file except for

CMYK), but you can also add a curve for another spot color or varnish separation, which will be used if that color appears in the processed file.

320

PitStop Pro

Curves can be created by adding points, and dragging them to the preferred position, or by entering values in the

Input

and

Output

field below the curve.

Note:

Apply color curve is also available as a Global Change!

Example

The

button allows you to add a curve for an additional color.

5.2.1.4 Apply DeviceLink

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to convert the color of the selected objects to Gray, CMYK or RGB using a DeviceLink profile (instead of a ICC profile).

DeviceLink Profiles are device specific profiles, converting colors from one color space to another, without converting to LAB or any other device independent color space in between.

You can convert only the stroke or fill of the objects, or both.

321

PitStop Pro

5.2.1.5 Apply Gray curve

Belongs to

•

Application:

PitStop Pro

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

•

Since version:

12 update 2

What it does

This Action allows a curve to be applied to selected Gray objects.

Curves can be created by adding points, and dragging them to the preferred position, or by entering values in the

Input

and

Output

field below the curve.

Example

5.2.1.6 Apply Lab curve

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

322

PitStop Pro

•

Since version:

12 update 2

What it does

This Action allows color curves to be applied to selected Lab objects on individual lightness, a, or b channels.

Curves can be created by adding points, and dragging them to the preferred position, or by entering values in the

Input

and

Output

field below the curve.

Example

5.2.1.7 Apply RGB curve

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

•

Since version:

12 update 2

What it does

This Action allows color curves to be applied to selected RGB objects, either on all three channels, or on individual R, G, or B channels.

Curves can be created by adding points, and dragging them to the preferred position, or by entering values in the

Input

and

Output

field below the curve.

323

PitStop Pro

Example

5.2.1.8 Apply transfer function

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress;Text;LineArt;Color;Image

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Adds a transfer function to paths, text, images or all these types of objects. You can exclude spot colors or apply the transfer function on tint values or alternate values only.

Note:

Transfer functions are not allowed in PDF/X compliant documents.

Related Actions

•

on page 231

•

on page 152

324

PitStop Pro

5.2.1.9 Change color

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to change the fill and/or stroke colors in a PDF.

How to proceed

Define the target colors as follows:

Select the appropriate checkbox, depending on what you want to change (Fill color or Stroke color).

Select the appropriate target color in one of the following ways:

Select an object with the PitStop Select Objects tool and use the icon to grab the fill or stroke color (depending on what you're defining).

Click the color picker icon

Select the required color space:

and select the appropriate color.

• Device colors can be Gray, RGB or CMYK

• Calibrated colors can be Gray or RGB

• User Swatch (= user-defined colors)

Fine tune the color by moving the sliders.

Related Actions

on page 74

5.2.1.10 Change default color spaces

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

325

PitStop Pro

What it does

5.2.1.11 Change Gray to CMYK Black

Belongs to

•

Application:

PitStop Pro

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Remaps the device grayscale color space to the device CMYK color space, keeping overprint.

5.2.1.12 Change blending color space

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color; Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows to change the blending color space and/or the luminosity softmask blending color space

(if defined in the PDF document).

You can:

• Change the color to CMYK, gray or RGB, or

• Remove the blending color space, by selecting "none" from the first list, or

• Leave one of the color spaces unchanged, by selecting

Do not change

About blending color spaces

blending color space

The blending color space for soft masks (masks with soft transitions) is called the

luminosity softmask blending color space

. It is usually gray.

Related Actions

•

on page 175

326

PitStop Pro

•

on page 247

5.2.1.13 Change rendering intent

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress;Color

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Modifies the rendering intent of an object to one of the following:

• Absolute Colorimetric

• Relative Colorimetric

• Perceptual

• Saturation

About rendering intents

For more information and examples, refer to

the PitStop Pro Reference Guide on the Enfocus website

(See Chapter "Rendering intents to remap colors").

Related Actions

•

•

on page 178

•

5.2.1.14 Change Output Intent

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color; Metadata

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes a PDF's output intent to comply with a particular PDF/X or PDF/A version, using a particular ICC profile and/or ICC characterization.

327

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

5.2.1.15 Change spot color suffix

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Modifies a selected spot color's suffix to one of the following standard suffixes: CV; CVC; CVU;

CVS; CVP; C; U; or M (or None of the above).

About spot color suffixes

Suffixes represent the

apparent

color of the color when printed on different types of paper. For example, PANTONE 3258

and PANTONE 3258

refer to the same color, but when printed on

oated, respectively

ncoated paper, they will look different, although the same ink formula was used.

Suffix overview

Suffix

CVC

CVU

Meaning

Computer video (electronic simulation)

Computer video - coated

Computer video - uncoated

Coated paper

Uncoated paper

Matte paper

Related Actions

•

•

on page 180

5.2.1.16 Convert alternate color space to CMYK

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the alternate color space for a spot to CMYK.

328

PitStop Pro

If you want to change all alternate color spaces except for gray, select the

Do not convert if alternate color space is gray

checkbox.

About alternate color spaces

5.2.1.17 Convert color

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the color space of an object to gray, RGB, CMYK or a given spot color.

You can convert the fill and/or stroke color as required.

5.2.1.18 Convert color to shading color space

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Converts the colors in a PDF to their shading counterparts.

5.2.1.19 Convert images to indexed color space

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color;Image

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the color of images to the indexed color space.

About the indexed color space

The indexed color space uses no more than 256 colors, and is as such particularly suited for use in Web applications. Images are typically converted to indexed color mode in order to

decrease their file sizes

. When an image is converted to indexed color, a color lookup table is created,

329

5.2.1.20 Convert indexed color space to base color space

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the indexed color space back to the original colors.

About the indexed color space

The indexed color space uses no more than 256 colors, and is as such particularly suited for use in Web applications. Images are typically converted to indexed color mode in order to

decrease their file sizes

5.2.1.21 Convert process to DeviceN

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Converts all instances of device CMYK to DeviceN.

You must indicate what is most important to you:

• Reducing the number of color plates to a minimum, or

• Keeping the overprint settings

5.2.1.22 Convert shading color space to solid color

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Converts shading colors ("gradients") in the corresponding solid colors. You can convert the fill, the stroke or both as required.

Shadings represent complex mathematical functions. That's why certain output devices may not be able to correctly interpret them. Shadings can also cause problems during color conversions.

330

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

Select shading objects

Check for NChannel colors with non-trivial process dictionary

5.2.1.23 Convert spot color to equivalent CMYK color

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the color of a spot color object to its CMYK equivalents (for example to save on ink).

You can do this for all spot colors, or only for spot colors of which the alternate color is CMYK or

Gray (less risk of getting small color variations).

5.2.1.24 Create varnish

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Creates a varnish on top of the selected object.

This varnish is a user-defined spot color with the same shape of the selected object.

How to proceed?

Enter a name to recognize this spot color by, and indicate whether or not you wish to set it to overprint.

5.2.1.25 Make DeviceN without NChannel information

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Converts the color space to DeviceN without NChannel information.

About NChannel

331

PitStop Pro

NChannel is supported from PDF 1.6 (Acrobat 7.x) onwards. If you are opening a PDF in an earlier version of Adobe Acrobat, colors can print or display incorrectly.

About converting NChannel to DeviceN

This Action will convert NChannel to DeviceN, so the object looks as it will be printed when using devices not supporting PDF 1.6 features.

Note that there are three options. You can convert the color space to:

•

DeviceN

•

NChannel with regular DeviceN color information only

•

NChannel with color information additional to regular DeviceN

Note:

This Action will have no visual effect if all colors are available on the target device.

PitStop provides an Action List with the same functionality: Convert NChannel Color Space to

DeviceN

Related Actions

•

on page 171

•

on page 253

5.2.1.26 Match fill and stroke colors

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

•

Since version:

12 update 3

What it does

Changes the stroke color to match the fill color or vice versa.

Use case

Change the stroke color to match the fill color

Related Actions

on page 67

5.2.1.27 Remap alternate color space to CMYK

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

332

PitStop Pro

What it does

Remaps the alternate color spaces of the chosen spot colors to the preferred CMYK values.

How to proceed

To add the spot colors of which you want to remap the alternate color space, do one of the following:

• To select the desired spot color from the list of spot colors (Spot color picker)

Click .

Select the preferred spot color and click

. The selected color is shown in the table, with the corresponding CMYK values.

• To define a new spot color

Click the

Add New Color

button.

In the table, in the first column (Name), replace "Color name" with the name of the new spot color.

• To select the desired spot color from the Spot library picker

Click the

Add Colors

button.

Select the preferred spot color and click

. The selected color is shown in the table, with the corresponding CMYK values.

Add or change the CMYK values as required.

To remove colors from the table

• Use the

Remove All

button, or

•

Select a color and click to remove only the selected color.

5.2.1.28 Remap color

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Remap color is a complex but powerful Action that allows the remapping of colors from one color space to another.

For each color in the document you can specify whether or not you want to map it to another color (by means of "remapping rules"), and whether or not the overprint settings should change.

Note:

• Use the

Analyze page

Analyze document

buttons to get an overview of the colors in the document being processed.

• To change a remapping rule, click

Change

and make the required changes; to add a new one, click

Add

333

PitStop Pro

• Keep in mind that the order of the rules is important. You can change the order by selecting a rule and clicking

Down

• You can remap colors, color spaces, color ranges and channels.

Example

Suppose you have a CMYK PDF that you want to print in a single spot color, MySpot.cv.

To remap all the colors to this spot:

Under Attributes for Remap color, select the row that mentions

All other

and click

Change

In the

Color Remap Rule

popup, under

To:

, select

Color

Select the repository color MySpot.cv. You should have specified this color earlier in PitStop.

Select the desired overprint setting:

•

Keep

the overprint settings as they are, do not change.

• Enable overprint:

• Disable overprint:

Off

Click

To remap everything except, for example, 100% black text and objects to the selected target color MySpot.cv, you need a slightly more elaborated action:

Click

Add

Under

Remap

, select

Color

and

Device CMYK

Set the values to: C 0% M 0% Y 0% K 100%.

Under

To:

, select

Keep

Select the desired overprint setting.

Click

Select

Add

In the

Color Remap Rule

popup, under

Remap

, select

Device CMYK

Under

To:

, select

Color

10.

Select the repository color MySpot.cv. You should have specified this color earlier in PitStop.

11.

Click

The above Actions must be performed in the correct order. Under

Attributes for Remap color

, you should have three lines:

• The rule for "keep 100% Black" at the top

• Then the rule for "remap to MySpot.cv"

• "All other" at the bottom

5.2.1.29 Remap spot color

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

334

PitStop Pro

What it does

Allows you to remap all spot colors in a document, or one particular spot color to:

• Gray

• The color's CMYK equivalent

• A custom CMYK equivalent

• Another spot color

You can apply the Action to either the fill or stroke color, or to both.

Note:

From version 12 update 2 onwards, you can use regular expressions to define the color that should be remapped.

5.2.1.30 Remove ICC tag

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes the ICC tags either from the selected objects or from the whole document (if no selection is defined). You can remove the ICC tags from fill and/or stroke colors as required.

About ICC tagging

In some workflows, e.g. without color management, ICC profiles are unwanted and may cause inconsistent color reproduction. In that case, you can use this Action to remove the ICC tags.

Related Actions

•

•

on page 251

•

Check if ICC profile differs from ICC profile in PDF/X output intent

on page 80

•

Select objects of which ICC profile is equal to ICC profile in PDF/X output

•

•

335

PitStop Pro

5.2.1.31 Remove rendering intent

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color; Prepress

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Strips rendering intents from color managed objects in a PDF.

About rendering intents

For more information and examples, refer to

the PitStop Pro Reference Guide on the Enfocus website

(See Chapter "Rendering intents to remap colors").

Related Actions

•

•

on page 178

•

on page 69

5.2.1.32 Rename spot color

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to change the name of spot colors in a document.

Note:

"Varnish([0-9])+" to "Varnish".

How to proceed

To rename one or more spot colors in a document

Select

Rename spot color

Optionally, select the

Use regular expressions

checkbox.

Click

Add

336

PitStop Pro

In the Rename

Spot Color Rule

dialog:

• In the left part (under

From

), enter the name of the spot color that should be renamed.

• In the right part (under

), enter a new name for the selected spot color.

Click

To create another rule (i.e. to rename another spot color), repeat steps 3-5.

Example

The above rule will rename

Pantone

Separation

in spot color names like Pantone 0123 U

(which will then become Separation 0123 U).

5.2.1.33 Snap color to color set

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to remap any colors that vary a little from your desired colors back to the desired color. This Action can also remap images to Black or CMYK.

337

PitStop Pro

Snap color to color set can be useful to keep tight control over the range of colors in a document.

How to proceed

Define the color set to which the colors in the PDF must be changed as follows:

To remap variants of black to 100% black, select

Black

Note:

If you want to remap

all colors

in your document to black,

only

select the

Black

checkbox. Do not add any other color.

To add another color the colors in the document should be remapped to if they are close to it:

Click

New

. A new entry appears in the text box.

If you want to use a spot color (optionally), select the

Spot color

checkbox and type the name of the spot color in the text field. You should define a CMYK equivalent too (see next step). The name of the spot color is shown in the text box.

Enter the required values for CMYK (expressed in %) in the fields below the New/Remove button. Your changes are shown in the text box.

From the

Map images to

list, select the preferred color space for images. You can choose between black, CMYK, and (if applicable) the spot color(s) defined in the previous step.

5.2.1.34 Tag object with an ICC profile

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Tags objects with a Gray, RGB, CMYK or Lab color space with a chosen ICC profile.

You can only tag the stroke or fill color or both. If an object is tagged already, the ICC tag will not be modified, unless you select the

Change ICC profile if object is already tagged

checkbox.

About ICC tagging

Related Actions

•

on page 77

•

on page 251

•

Check if ICC profile differs from ICC profile in PDF/X output intent

•

Select objects of which ICC profile is equal to ICC profile in PDF/X output

338

PitStop Pro

•

•

5.2.2 Checks

5.2.2.1 Check color type

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if a particular color space is used for particular objects.

For example, check if the

device-specific color space

is used for

text and line-art

You can ignore process colors in DeviceN color spaces, as required. (It may not be required to check for the presence of process colors, as they are by default available on the printer.)

5.2.2.2 Check default color spaces

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks whether default color spaces are used and whether or not they are PDF/X-3 compliant.

5.2.2.3 Check DeviceN attributes

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the PDF's color space is DeviceN or NChannel with a particular attribute.

You can check the following attributes:

• Spot color definitions

• Process color mapping

• Mixing hints

• Solidities

• Printing order

339

PitStop Pro

• Dot gain

Related Actions

Select undefined DeviceN colorants

on page 253

5.2.2.4 Check DeviceN colorants

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the non-process colors used in the DeviceN color space are defined in the colorants dictionary, so that they can be used on other devices.

About the DeviceN color space

Checking the colorants dictionary

You can use the Enfocus PitStop Inspector to check whether a particular spot color has been defined in the colorants dictionary. The colorants dictionary describes the colorants used in the

DeviceN color space. Proceed as follows:

Select an object with the color you want to check (using the Enfocus Select Object Tool ).

Click to display the Enfocus Inspector and select > . Next to the Fill icons, you will see "DeviceN (Spot + process colors)". Below you will see the number of components and their names.

Click the

Actions

link (in the top right corner) and select

Color Picker

In the left part of the Color Picker dialog, navigate to the

Document Spot Colors

folder. This folder contains all spot colors used in the document (not only the ones used for the selected object).

Select the spot color you want to check. If the color is just a color name, without a color definition, the Alternate Color Space is Gray.

Related Actions

on page 257

5.2.2.5 Check DeviceN for process color spaces

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

340

PitStop Pro

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks whether the DeviceN process color space matches the PDF/X output intent color space, i.e. whether the DeviceN color space contains only process colors.

About the DeviceN color space

5.2.2.6 Check for NChannel colors with non-trivial process dictionary

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks whether the PDF contains NChannel colors with non-trivial process dictionary.

About NChannel

NChannel is supported from PDF 1.6 (Acrobat 7.x) onwards. If you are opening a PDF in an earlier version of Adobe Acrobat, colors can print or display incorrectly.

About process dictionaries

NChannel requires a process dictionary which maps the names used in the colorants list to device colors. This allows giving aliases for process colors.

A "trivial" process dictionary uses aliases that are easy to understand, e.g. maps "Cyan" to the process color "Cyan".

A "non-trivial" process dictionary would use custom aliases, such as "My Process color".

Related Actions

•

Make DeviceN without NChannel information

on page 73

341

PitStop Pro

•

on page 253

5.2.2.7 Check for pre-separated pages

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color; Page

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the PDF document contains any pages that already have been separated.

A pre-separated PDF contains pages that have been separated into their CMYK components.

This separation process is usually carried out by the RIP, and not in the source PDF document.

5.2.2.8 Check for spot color ambiguity

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Searches for ambiguous spot colors. Spot colors are considered ambiguous if the name of the spot color refers to more than one set of color values.

You can set a number of options, to make the check less strict. You can also include a check on

DeviceN color spaces.

5.2.2.9 Check ICC tagging

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks objects to see whether or not they are ICC tagged or tagged with a particular ICC profile in a particular color space. You can check if the fill and/or stroke of the objects are ICC tagged.

342

PitStop Pro

About ICC tagging

Related Actions

•

on page 77

•

on page 251

•

Check if ICC profile differs from ICC profile in PDF/X output intent

on page 80

•

Select objects of which ICC profile is equal to ICC profile in PDF/X output

•

•

5.2.2.10 Check ICC profile version

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the ICC profile version is equal to or lower than a particular version number.

About ICC tagging

Related Actions

•

on page 77

•

on page 251

343

PitStop Pro

•

Check if ICC profile differs from ICC profile in PDF/X output intent

•

Select objects of which ICC profile is equal to ICC profile in PDF/X output

•

•

on page 80

5.2.2.11 Check if DeviceN printing order is consistent

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Check whether the DeviceN printing order is consistent and whether all colorants are defined in the DeviceN printing order.

5.2.2.12 Check if ICC profile differs from ICC profile in PDF/X output intent

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks whether the fill and/or stroke ICC profile differs from the ICC profile in the PDF/X output intent.

About ICC tagging

Related Actions

•

on page 77

•

on page 251

344

PitStop Pro

•

•

Select objects of which ICC profile is equal to ICC profile in PDF/X output

on page 80

•

•

5.2.2.13 Check if blending color space is defined

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color; Page

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the page blending color space has been defined in the PDF document.

You must set the required blending color space and the required luminosity softmask blending color.

About blending color spaces

blending color space

The

page blending color space

is the blending color space assigned to a page; it is used when individual artwork does not have a blending color space.

The blending color space for soft masks (masks with soft transitions) is called the

luminosity softmask blending color space

. It is usually gray.

Related Actions

•

on page 68

•

on page 247

5.2.2.14 Check if solidities of DeviceN colorants are consistent

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Check if solidities of DeviceN colorants are consistent.

345

PitStop Pro

5.2.2.15 Check if the color spaces used match the blend colorspaces

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the color spaces used in the PDF match the blend colorspaces.

5.2.2.16 Check ink coverage (basic object check)

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color;Prepress

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks the total CMYK ink coverage of the color of the

objects

in the PDF.

You can for example check if the ink coverage is at least 300%.

5.2.2.17 Check ink coverage (total page check)

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color;Prepress

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks the total CMYK ink coverage of all colors on a page (inside a particular page box).

You can for example check if the total ink coverage in the media box is at least 300%.

346

PitStop Pro

It's also possible to ignore small areas, for example areas smaller than 1 inch.

5.2.2.18 Check number of separations

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks the number of separations that occur in a PDF file. You can set a precise number (e.g.

5 separations) or a range (e.g. less than 5) and choose whether or not to exclude certain colors

(e.g. CMYK plates, spot color All ...).

Note:

From version 12 update 2 onwards, you can use regular expressions to indicate which separations should not be counted.

Checking ICC tagged objects

5.2.2.19 Check number of spot colors

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks the number of spot colors in a document.

You must enter the number of spot colors the document must have.

If you select the option

Spot colors whose names differ only by their suffix are counted as one

, spot colors with the same name but with a different suffix (e.g. PANTONE 3258 C, PANTONE

347

PitStop Pro

3258 U, PANTONE 3258 M) are counted as one color instead of different (3 in this example) colors. For more information about suffixes, refer to

on page 70.

5.2.2.20 Check Output Intent

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the desired color management output intent is used in a PDF document.

You can check for compliance with a particular PDF/X version and/or check if a particular ICC profile or ICC characterization is used.

Related Actions

Change Output Intent

on page 69

5.2.2.21 Check rendering intent

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color; Prepress

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Allows you to check the rendering intent of particular objects (Paths, Text, Paths or Text,

Images, or all Rendering objects) in a PDF.

You can check whether or not they use rendering, and if they do, which type:

• Absolute Colorimetric

• Relative Colorimetric

• Perceptual

• Saturation

About rendering intents

For more information, refer to the chapter "Rendering intents to remap colors" in

the PitStop

Pro Reference Guide on the Enfocus website

Related Actions

•

•

on page 69

348

PitStop Pro

•

Snap color to color set

5.2.2.22 Check required color set

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks for a restrictive range of tints in a PDF.

How to proceed

Define the color set to be checked:

To allow the use of 100% black, select

Black

Note:

If only black is allowed in the PDF,

only

select the

Black

checkbox. Do not add any other color.

To add another color that is allowed in the PDF:

Click

New

A new entry appears in the text box.

To allow a spot color (optionally), select the

Spot color

checkbox and type the name of the spot color in the text field. You should define a CMYK equivalent too (see next step).

The name of the spot color is shown in the text box.

Enter the required values for CMYK (expressed in %) in the fields below the New/Remove button.

Your changes are shown in the text box.

If only one color should be used for images, select that color from the

Images must use only

list.

Related Actions

on page 79

5.2.2.23 Check spot color by alternate color space

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Searches for spot colors with an alternate color space definition.

You can search for the following alternate color spaces:

• Device CMYK

349

PitStop Pro

• Device gray

• Device RGB

• ICC tagged gray

• ICC tagged RGB

• ICC tagged CMYK

• ICC tagged Lab

• Calibrated gray

• Calibrated RGB

• Lab

5.2.2.24 Check spot color by name

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if a particular spot color is present in the document.

In the text field, enter the name of the spot color to check for.

Note:

From version 12 update 2 onwards, you can use regular expressions to define the spot color name.

5.2.2.25 Check spot color suffix

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks whether the spot colors in the PDF have a given suffix.

You can choose one of the following suffixes: CV; CVC; CVU; CVS; CVP; C; U; or M (or None of the above).

About spot color suffixes

Suffixes represent the

apparent

color of the color when printed on different types of paper. For example, PANTONE 3258

and PANTONE 3258

refer to the same color, but when printed on

oated, respectively

ncoated paper, they will look different, although the same ink formula was used.

Suffix overview

350

PitStop Pro

Suffix

CVC

CVU

Meaning

Computer video (electronic simulation)

Computer video - coated

Computer video - uncoated

Coated paper

Uncoated paper

Matte paper

Related Actions

•

•

5.2.3 Informs

5.2.3.1 Gather color information

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Informs

What it does

Collects information about the color spaces used in a PDF and presents it in the log.

5.2.3.2 Gather ink information

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Informs

What it does

Calculates the amount of each color separation needed to print a page, and a complete document, i.e. how much of each page is actually covered by each ink.

Inks

checkbox (at the bottom of the General section in the Preflight Profile editor). This check is off by default

(because the calculation is time consuming).

5.2.4 Selections

351

PitStop Pro

5.2.4.1 Select by blending color space

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color; Page

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Makes a selection based on the blending color space.

You must set the required blending color space and the required luminosity softmask blending color (or select the option

Undefined

About blending color spaces

blending color space

The blending color space for soft masks (masks with soft transitions) is called the

luminosity softmask blending color space

. It is usually gray.

Related Actions

•

on page 68

•

on page 175

5.2.4.2 Select by color space

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects line art (fill and/or stroke) and/or other objects according to their color space.

Example

To select all ICC line art, proceed as follows:

Select by color space

<!-- Options:

1. Select both Fill and stroke color space.

2. For both, select "ICC tagged". Optionally, indicate the preferred number of color

components.

3. Make sure the checkbox under Other objects is cleared

-->

352

PitStop Pro

Log selection

5.2.4.3 Select by color space in PDF/X Output Intent

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to make a selection based on the color space in the PDF/X Output Intent.

You can choose one of the following color spaces:

• CMYK

• RGB

• Gray

• Unknown

5.2.4.4 Select by ICC tag subtype

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows to make a distinction between ICC-based RGB, ICC-based gray and ICC-based Lab.

and

Related Actions

•

on page 248

•

Change Gray to CMYK Black

on page 169

5.2.4.5 Select by ink coverage (basic object check)

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color; Prepress

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Makes a selection of all objects that meet your ink coverage criteria.

353

PitStop Pro

You can for example select objects only if the ink coverage is at least 300%.

on page 176

5.2.4.6 Select by number of color plates

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects objects that occur on a certain number of color plates (separations). You can make the selection based on the object's fill and/or stroke.

Example

You could for example search for objects with 4 color plates (dark gray), and afterwards change gray to CMYK Black. This will reduce the number of plates from 4 plates to 1 plate.

Select by number of color plates

Change Gray to CMYK Black <!--

on page 68 -->

5.2.4.7 Select by rendering intent

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color;Prepress

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects color managed objects based on a particular rendering intent.

You can select paths, text, images, or all rendering objects, with one of the the following rendering intents:

• Absolute Colorimetric

• Relative Colorimetric

• Perceptual

• Saturation

About rendering intents

354

PitStop Pro

For more information and examples, refer to

the PitStop Pro Reference Guide on the Enfocus website

(See Chapter "Rendering intents to remap colors").

Related Actions

•

on page 69

•

on page 178

•

•

5.2.4.8 Select by spot color suffix

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects spot colors with a given suffix.

You can choose one of the following suffixes: CV; CVC; CVU; CVS; CVP; C; U; or M (or None of the above).

About spot color suffixes

Suffixes represent the

apparent

color of the color when printed on different types of paper. For example, PANTONE 3258

and PANTONE 3258

refer to the same color, but when printed on

oated, respectively

ncoated paper, they will look different, although the same ink formula was used.

Suffix overview

Suffix

CVC

CVU

Meaning

Computer video (electronic simulation)

Computer video - coated

Computer video - uncoated

Coated paper

Uncoated paper

Matte paper

Related Actions

•

on page 180

•

355

PitStop Pro

5.2.4.9 Select by tagged ICC Profile

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select objects which have (not) been tagged with an ICC profile, or objects with a specific color space and a specific ICC profile.

You can distinguish between stroke and fill color, for example select objects of which the stroke color is ICC tagged.

About ICC tagging

Related Actions

•

•

on page 251

•

Check if ICC profile differs from ICC profile in PDF/X output intent

on page 80

•

Select objects of which ICC profile is equal to ICC profile in PDF/X output

•

•

PitStop also provides an Action to

5.2.4.10 Select color

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects objects by their fill or stroke color, or both.

How to proceed

Define the colors you want to select as follows:

356

PitStop Pro

Select the appropriate checkbox, depending on what you want to define (Fill color or Stroke color).

Select the appropriate color in one of the following ways:

Select an object with the PitStop Select Objects tool and use the icon to grab the fill or stroke color (depending on what you're defining).

Click the color picker icon

Select the required color space:

and select the appropriate color.

• Device colors can be Gray, RGB or CMYK

• Calibrated colors can be Gray or RGB

• User Swatch (= user-defined colors)

Fine tune the color by moving the sliders.

5.2.4.11 Select color range

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select objects with a specific color, by specifying the color range of the fill and/or stroke color.

The available options depend on the chosen color space:

• Gray, CMYK or RGB:

search in converted values of other color spaces

(If selected, the result of the conversion is calculated in advance.)

• Separations: You can decide to select either all spot colors or only the spot colors with a particular name. You can type the name or click the

Load Spot Color

button to select it.

• DeviceN process colors:

allow spot colors in DeviceN color space

Example

To catch all gray objects (either fill or stroke) with a brightness between 0% and 40 %, and turn them into CMYK objects with 100% Cyan color, you can do the following:

Select gray fill or stroke color

<!-- This is the "Select color range" Action with the options Fill and Stroke selected.

Select "Color space is gray", and in the Gray from field, enter values between 0% and

40% -->

Change fill and stroke color

<!-- This is the "Change color" Action with Fill and Stroke selected.

Select "Device CMYK" and set Cyan to 100% -->

5.2.4.12 Select default color spaces

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Selections

357

PitStop Pro

What it does

Allows you to select default color spaces or default color spaces that are not defined by PDF/

X-3.

Default color spaces are defined on page level. They are used to systematically remap devicespecific colors to device-independent colors.

Note:

change

default color spaces

5.2.4.13 Select DeviceN with attributes

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select the fill and/or stroke of DeviceN and/or NChannel objects.

You must specify which attributes must be present to select the object:

• Spot color definitions

• Process color mapping

• Mixing hints

• Solidities

• Printing order

• Dot gain

Related Actions

Check DeviceN attributes

on page 169

5.2.4.14 Select gray

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to make a selection based on the gray color of the fill and/or stroke color of the objects in the PDF.

358

PitStop Pro

You can specify how much the actual gray in the document is allowed to deviate from "true" gray

(i.e. gray which doesn't have tones of any other color; for RGB this means that the percentage of

Red, Gray and Blue is the same; for CMYK, this holds for Cyan, Magenta and Yellow).

5.2.4.15 Select incorrectly defined process color spaces in DeviceN

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select objects that use a DeviceN color space containing a process color space which does not match the PDF/X Output intent.

on page 171

5.2.4.16 Select non-compliant Output Intent

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects the whole document if the output intent is:

•

Not compliant

with a particular PDF/X or PDF/A version, OR

•

Compliant

with a particular PDF/X or PDF/A version,

but the ICC profile or ICC characterization is not as specified

You can check the compliance with the following PDF/X versions:

• PDF/X-1a:2001

• PDF/X-3:2002

• PDF/X-1a:2003

• PDF/X-3:2003

• PDF/X-4

• PDF/X-4p

• PDF/A-1

359

PitStop Pro

• PDF/A-2

5.2.4.17 Select objects of which ICC profile is equal to ICC profile in

PDF/X output

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects objects of which the ICC profile is equal to the ICC profile in PDF/X output. Choose either fill, stroke or both.

About ICC tagging

Related Actions

•

on page 77

•

on page 251

•

Check if ICC profile differs from ICC profile in PDF/X output intent

•

•

on page 80

•

Convert alternate color space to CMYK <!-- (See

5.2.4.18 Select shading objects

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects all shading objects.

Shadings represent complex mathematical functions. That's why certain output devices may not be able to correctly interpret them. Shadings can also cause problems during color conversions.

360

PitStop Pro

Note:

As of PitStop 7, shadings can be color converted.

on page 72

5.2.4.19 Select spot color

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select either all spot colors in a PDF file, or a particular color, based on its name.

Note:

From version 12 update 2 onwards, you can use regular expressions to define the spot color name.

5.2.4.20 Select spot color by alternate color space

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects spot colors based on their alternate color space.

For example, select a spot color if its alternate color space is ICC tagged RGB or Device RGB.

Example

To convert a spot color's alternate color space to another color space, for example CMYK, proceed as follows:

Select spot color by alternate color space <!-- select the appropriate alternate color

space(s) -->

Convert alternate color space to CMYK

on page 70) -->

5.2.4.21 Select tiling pattern contents according to parent object selection

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

361

PitStop Pro

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select the tiling pattern content depending on whether or not the parent object

(e.g. text or line art) is selected.

There are two options:

• Select the tiling pattern content if the parent object is selected.

• Select everything except the tiling pattern content of parent objects that are not selected.

5.2.4.22 Select undefined DeviceN colorants

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects objects which use a DeviceN color space (including NChannel) that contains spot colors that are not defined in the colorants dictionary.

About the DeviceN color space

Checking the colorants dictionary

You can use the Enfocus PitStop Inspector to check whether a particular spot color has been defined in the colorants dictionary. Proceed as follows:

Select an object with the color you want to check (using the Enfocus Select Object Tool ).

Click to display the Enfocus Inspector and select > . Next to the Fill icons, you will see "DeviceN (Spot + process colors). Below you will see the number of components and their names.

Click the

Actions

link (in the top right corner) and select

Color Picker

In the left part of the Color Picker dialog, navigate to the

Document Spot Colors

folder. This folder contains all spot colors used in the document (not only the ones used for the selected object).

Select the spot color you want to check. If the color is just a color name, without a color definition, the Alternate Color Space is Gray.

Related Actions

Check DeviceN colorants

on page 170

5.2.5 Settings

362

PitStop Pro

5.2.5.1 Override color management settings

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color; General

•

Type:

Settings

What it does

Replaces any color management settings from the PDF Profile or general PitStop preferences with the settings defined here. These settings will be used when converting colors.

5.2.5.2 Restore previous color management settings

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color; General

•

Type:

Settings

What it does

Allows you to revert to the previous color management settings (if you have changed them before, in the same Action List).

Related Actions

on page 307

5.2.5.3 Save color management settings

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color; General

•

Type:

Settings

What it does

Allows you to save the current color management settings (changed in the Action List).

Check document unique IDs

5.3 Document

363

PitStop Pro

5.3.1 Changes

5.3.1.1 Add unique document IDs

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Adds a unique document ID (generated at random) to your document.

Related Actions

5.3.1.2 Change document encoding

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the PDF encoding to binary or ASCII.

About document encoding

ASCII versus Binary encoding

ASCII encoding may increase the file size, but allows you to edit the file manually.

Binary encoding makes the file smaller, but does not allow you to edit the file manually.

Related Actions

•

364

PitStop Pro

•

Check PDF/X viewer preferences

on page 258

5.3.1.3 Change initial view

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Changes

•

Since version:

12 update 2

What it does

You can make a lot of changes, for example choose a particular page layout or magnification level, turn on or off certain window options, hide application toolbars or window controls ...

Note:

The attributes for this Action, correspond to the Initial View options in Adobe

Acrobat (See

File

Properties

, select the

Initial View

tab). If you do not change the attributes, these settings will be used. For a detailed overview of the meaning of each option, refer to the

Adobe help files

365

PitStop Pro

5.3.1.4 Make viewer preferences PDF/X compliant

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to change the viewer preferences of the PDF document, to make them PDF/X compliant.

PDF/X-1a:2003 and PDF/X-3:2003 require the view area, view clip, print area and print clip to be set to the media (or bleed) box.

Related Actions

on page 187

5.3.1.5 Optimize document structure

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Guarantees that the underlying document structure of your PDF is efficient, for example by improving the compression of the document as required.

5.3.2 Checks

5.3.2.1 Check access control

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Checks

366

PitStop Pro

What it does

Checks whether the document is protected in any way, for example with passwords, certificate

IDs or file permission settings.

5.3.2.2 Check Certified PDF state

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks the Enfocus Certified PDF status of a PDF.

You can log whether

The Certified Preflight Profile matches a particular Profile. You can select a Profile from the database on your computer or from your disk/network (which hasn't been imported yet in

PitStop).

The PDF being checked is Preflighted or Preflighted without errors.

All saved sessions or only the last saved session must be valid.

Note:

A session is invalid if it refers to changes made by an external program.

For more information, refer to the chapter "Working with Certified PDF documents" in

the

PitStop Pro Reference Guide on the Enfocus website

Related Actions

on page 155

5.3.2.3 Check contents compression

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the PDF contains streams that are not compressed with some content compression method (CCITT, Flate, DCT or JBIG2). Compression allows you to make the file smaller.

5.3.2.4 Check data format

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

367

PitStop Pro

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the data format of a PDF is either Binary (=non-ASCII) or ASCII.

ASCII-encoding increases the file size, but allows files to be sent through older network protocols that cannot handle non-alphanumeric characters.

ASCII versus Binary encoding

ASCII encoding may increase the file size, but allows you to edit the file manually.

Binary encoding makes the file smaller, but does not allow you to edit the file manually.

Related Actions

•

on page 258

•

Add unique document IDs

on page 81

5.3.2.5 Check document unique IDs

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to check if the PDF has a unique document ID.

Related Actions

on page 81

5.3.2.6 Check file identifiers in document XMP metadata

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks the PDF for missing file identifiers in the document metadata, for example: VersionID,

DocumentID or RenditionClass.

About XMP metadata

Document Properties in Acrobat (Click the

Additional Metadata

button, then select

Advanced

368

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

•

Check if date is present in document XMP metadata

on page 213

•

on page 208

•

on page 116

5.3.2.7 Check for alternate presentations

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks whether the PDF contains alternate presentations.

This mechanism is used for slideshow displays and is therefore not desired in a print document.

5.3.2.8 Check for garbage after the PDF End-Of-File marker %

%EOF

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks whether the PDF contains undesired characters after the end-of-file marker EOF.

If this is the case, the PDF is malformed. The last line of a PDF should only contain the EOF marker.

To solve this problem, you can do one of the following:

• Open the PDF in Adobe Acrobat and save it (using

File

Save As

• Process the PDF with PitStop Server (with the option

Full Save

enabled).

5.3.2.9 Check for PDF/A file structure problems

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Checks

369

PitStop Pro

What it does

Checks whether the structure of the PDF conforms to the file structure as defined by the PDF/A specification.

5.3.2.10 Check for unreadable data in front of the PDF header signature

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks for unreadable data in front of the PDF header signature.

5.3.2.11 Check if compression filters are PDF/X compliant

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks whether compression filters used in the PDF are compliant with a specific PDF/X version.

Select the desired PDF/X version:

• PDF/X-1a:2001

• PDF/X-3:2002

• PDF/X-1a:2003

• PDF/X-3:2003

• PDF/X-4

• PDF/X-4p

• PDF/A-1

• PDF/A-2

5.3.2.12 Check if document does not need repair

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Checks

370

PitStop Pro

What it does

Checks whether a PDF is damaged and needs to be repaired when it is opened.

A PDF file can be damaged, for example, if you downloaded it from the Internet and the file transfer was incomplete.

If a PDF is damaged, you can try to redistill it or save it in Adobe Acrobat, using

File

Save as

. If this doesn't solve the problem, you will have to recreate the PDF from the source file, or download it again (if the problem was caused by a corrupt download).

5.3.2.13 Check if document has enough high-ASCII bytes in the PDF header

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the PDF header contains at least 4 high-ASCII bytes.

5.3.2.14 Check if document is optimized for Fast Web View

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Verifies if the document is optimized for the Web.

5.3.2.15 Check if document requires PostScript LanguageLevel 3

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks a PDF to see if it contains PostScript Level 3-specific features such as transparency or smooth shadings.

371

PitStop Pro

About Adobe PostScript

Adobe PostScript is a page descripting language developed by Adobe in 1985. The language has changed over the years, resulting in different versions:

• Adobe PostScript Level 1: first, original version.

• Adobe PostScript Level 2: enhanced version; added support for different page sizes and better color printing.

• Adobe PostScript LanguageLevel 3: improved handling of graphics, supports more fonts, and speeds up printing.

For more information, refer to

http://www.adobe.com/products/postscript/pdfs/PLRM.pdf

5.3.2.16 Check number of pages

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page;Doc

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks the number of pages in a PDF.

You can for example check if there are less/more than x page(s), or if the PDF contains an odd/ even number of pages ...

5.3.2.17 Check object compression

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks the compression of the PDF structure (possible as of PDF 1.5).

You can also check if the compression is compliant with PDF/X.

About object compression

Related Actions

•

•

on page 191

372

PitStop Pro

5.3.2.18 Check PDF/X viewer preferences

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the PDF document complies with the viewer preferences as required by the PDF/X specifications.

PDF/X-1a:2003 and PDF/X-3:2003 require the view area, view clip, print area and print clip to be set to the media (or bleed) box.

on page 83

5.3.3 Informs

5.3.3.1 Gather filters information

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Informs

What it does

Collects information about:

• The data format of the file (ASCII/binary)

• Whether or not compression is used

• The compression filters (if any), for example: ZIP, JPEG, LZW, ...

This information is presented in the Preflight Report under

General File Information

Compression

Related Actions

Check contents compression

on page 182

373

PitStop Pro

on page 182

5.3.3.2 Gather Output Intent information

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Informs

What it does

Collects information about the output intents used in a PDF document and presents it in the log.

In the report, you can find the following information (if output intents are used):

• ICC profile or ICC characterization name

• Registry name

• Additional information

5.3.4 Selections

5.3.4.1 Select by document encoding

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects a document based on its encoding (binary or ASCII).

About document encoding

ASCII versus Binary encoding

ASCII encoding may increase the file size, but allows you to edit the file manually.

Binary encoding makes the file smaller, but does not allow you to edit the file manually.

Related Actions

•

374

PitStop Pro

•

on page 81

5.3.4.2 Select document

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select the whole document.

5.4 General

5.4.1 Changes

5.4.1.1 Change object order

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the layer position of an object in a PDF.

You can choose to move the object forwards, backwards, to the front, or to the back depending on where you want your object to appear in the layer stack.

5.4.1.2 Normalize line weight

Belongs to

•

Category:

General; LineArt; Position and size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

375

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

•

•

•

on page 199

5.4.1.3 Rasterize page content, keeping text

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to rasterize complex graphics in PDF, for example to reduce the rendering complexity for a file for viewing on the iPad.

You can set the resolution of the generated bitmap (ppi), the preferred compression (JPEG,

JPEG2000, ZIP, None), the required quality (maximum, high...), and decide whether or not to keep line art unchanged.

5.4.1.4 Remove file specification from streams

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes links to embedded or external files from PDF streams.

Related Actions

•

on page 188

•

5.4.1.5 Remove PostScript

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes all fragments of embedded PostScript in a PDF document.

376

PitStop Pro

Embedded PostScript fragments do not show up in the screen preview, but could change the appearance of the printed document. They are generally undesirable in a print production environment.

Related Actions

See also

•

on page 189

•

on page 259

5.4.1.6 Replace page content by bitmap

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Converts the page content to a bitmap. You can choose the resolution of the generated bitmap

(ppi), the compression method (JPEG, JPEG2000, ZIP, none) and the quality level.

5.4.2 Checks

5.4.2.1 Check encoding of name objects

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Allows you to check if the encoding of font names, separation names or structure type names is

UTF8.

This may not be the case if you receive PDFs from Japanese or Chinese designers.

Note:

This Action verifies if the name

data

is valid UTF8 data. Note that this does not necessarily mean that the name actually is UTF8 encoded. It just checks if it would be a valid string when interpreted as UTF8.

5.4.2.2 Check file specification keys

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Checks

377

PitStop Pro

What it does

Searches the PDF for file specification keys.

Related Actions

•

•

5.4.2.3 Check for embedded PostScript fragments

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Searches for fragments of embedded PostScript in a PDF document.

Embedded PostScript fragments do not show up in the screen preview, but could change the appearance of the printed document. They are generally undesirable in a print production environment.

Related Actions

•

on page 259

•

on page 85

5.4.2.4 Check for external streams

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the PDF contains links to external data.

5.4.2.5 Check for file specifications

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

378

PitStop Pro

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the PDF contains URLs or links to embedded or external files in PDF streams.

You can check for either URL or file specifications, and search for embedded, non-embedded, or both types of links.

Related Actions

•

on page 188

•

5.4.2.6 Check for invisible objects without fill and stroke

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Searches the PDF document for any objects that have no fill or stroke color associated with them.

Designers sometimes leave such objects in a document rather than deleting them.

Related Actions

•

on page 261

•

on page 157

5.4.2.7 Check for reference Xobjects

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks the PDF for the presence of XObjects.

379

PitStop Pro

XObjects are supported as of PDF 1.4.

Related Actions

on page 263

5.4.2.8 Check for unknown objects

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the PDF contains unknown objects.

Unknown objects in this context are objects that are not defined in the PDF 1.3 standard. The

PDF/X standards require all objects in the document to be “known”, or defined in the PDF 1.3

specification.

5.4.2.9 Check optimal compression

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the latest and most efficient compression mechanisms have been applied in the PDF document.

Previous versions of Adobe Acrobat (2.1, 3.0, 4.0) featured less advanced compression mechanisms.

About object compression

Related Actions

•

on page 187

•

380

PitStop Pro

5.4.2.10 Log selection

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Allows you to log the selection you made with another Action in the same Action list.

How to proceed

Select a language and enter a text string that will appear in the Report as a reason for any selected objects failing.

Note:

You can configure different descriptions for different languages (for example:

JPEG images

in English versus

JPEG afbeeldingen

in Dutch). The language shown in the log file depends on the PitStop Pro language (See

Edit

Preferences

PitStop

Pro Preferences

Indicate whether or not the following information should be logged as well (if applicable):

• The type of page and document objects

• The annotation objects

Note:

By default, annotations aren't logged. Even if Log selection applies to a selection made by

, nothing will be logged, unless the

Report the annotation objects

checkbox is selected.

Select the desired log level.

Note:

In this case, it doesn't make sense to choose "Don't log", since the result of this Action is shown in the Enfocus Navigator.

Example

To check if a PDF contains red text, you could create the following Action List:

Select fill and stroke color

<!-- Add

Select color

on page 252. Select fill and stroke and determine the

color you want to check for, for example using the Grab fill and Grab stroke icon -->

Select text segments

on page 306 -->

AND

on page 279 : necessary to combine the two previous Actions -->

AND

Log selection

<!-- Choose "English" as language and enter "Red text" as explanation.

Select "Log as warning" -->

If you run this Action List, all red text will be selected and logged as a warning. In the Enfocus

381

PitStop Pro

5.4.3 Selections

5.4.3.1 Select clipping objects

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects clipping objects, i.e. objects of which the shape masks other artwork. Only areas inside the clipping objects are visible.

You could use this Action to select clip text of which you want to change the font.

on page 293

5.4.3.2 Select embedded PostScript fragments

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects all fragments of embedded PostScript in the PDF document.

Embedded PostScript fragments do not show up in the screen preview, but could change the appearance of the printed document. They are generally undesirable in a print production environment.

Related Actions

•

on page 189

•

on page 85

5.4.3.3 Select forms

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Selections

382

PitStop Pro

What it does

Allows you to select all forms in a PDF document.

Forms are rectangular frames in a PDF wich contain objects, for example an image or a placed

PDF.

For more information, refer to

the PitStop Pro Reference Guide on the Enfocus website

(See

Chapter "Editing forms").

Example

To select all forms and log them as an error:

Select forms

Log selection <!-- enter "Forms were found in this document" and select "Log as error"

at the bottom -->

Related Actions

•

Log selection

on page 191

•

on page 259

5.4.3.4 Select form contents according to form selection

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select or deselect the content of selected forms.

Forms are rectangular frames in a PDF wich contain objects, for example an image or a placed

PDF.

For more information, refer to

the PitStop Pro Reference Guide on the Enfocus website

(See

Chapter "Editing forms").

Related Actions

Select objects inside or outside region

5.4.3.5 Select form if content is selected

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select forms based on selected objects. Note that by selecting the forms, the objects themselves are no longer selected.

383

PitStop Pro

You can choose whether or not to select nested forms, i.e. forms included inside other forms.

For example, in the example below, the object is part of Form1 and Form2.

• If

Also selected nested forms

is cleared, only Form1 (= highest level) will be selected.

• If

Also selected nested forms

is selected, both forms will be selected.

About forms

Forms are rectangular frames in a PDF, wich contain objects, for example an image or a placed

PDF.

For more information about forms, refer to

the PitStop Pro Reference Guide on the Enfocus website

(See Chapter "Editing forms").

Example

The following example Action List consists of 2 Actions:

• The first Action selects all objects inside the art box.

• The second Action selects all forms of which the objects are selected by the first Action, and deselects the objects. Forms inside another form are not selected.

on page 292

Select form if content is selected

Related Actions

•

•

Select objects that use neither stroke nor fill

on page 259

5.4.3.6 Select invisible objects without fill and stroke

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects objects that have no fill or stroke color associated with them. Even though these objects are not visible in the document, you might want to remove them.

384

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

•

on page 270 (same functionality)

•

Check for invisible objects without fill and stroke

on page 190

•

on page 157

5.4.3.7 Select objects that have a clipping path

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects objects of which the shape (partly) masks other artwork. Only areas inside the clipping objects are visible.

Related Actions

•

on page 259

•

Check for reference Xobjects

on page 293

5.4.3.8 Select parent content object

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select parent content objects, for example the page the object belongs to.

5.4.3.9 Select tiling pattern contents according to parent object selection

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select the tiling pattern content depending on whether or not the parent object

(e.g. text or line art) is selected.

There are two options:

• Select the tiling pattern content if the parent object is selected.

385

PitStop Pro

• Select everything except the tiling pattern content of parent objects that are not selected.

5.4.3.10 Select XObjects

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects any XObject in the PDF file.

XObjects are supported as of PDF 1.4.

Example

To log the presence of XObjects, use:

Select XObjects

Log Selection

Related Actions

on page 190

5.4.4 Settings

5.4.4.1 Override color management settings

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color; General

•

Type:

Settings

What it does

Replaces any color management settings from the PDF Profile or general PitStop preferences with the settings defined here. These settings will be used when converting colors.

5.4.4.2 Override default image recompression

Belongs to

•

Category:

General; Image

•

Type:

Settings

386

PitStop Pro

What it does

Overrides the default recompression quality setting (used by PitStop when changing images) with the one defined in this Action.

How it works

5.4.4.3 Override page box defaults

Belongs to

•

Category:

General; Page

•

Type:

Settings

What it does

Replaces the default order (Media > Crop > Art - Bleed - Trim) of the page boxes in a PDF document with the order defined in this Action.

5.4.4.4 Override rounding rules

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Settings

What it does

Replaces the default rules used for comparing text size, line weight and/or coordinates to the ones set in this Action.

You have the choice to:

• Leave text size, line weight and/or coordinates unchanged

• Use the default rules, or

• Use decimals.

Example

point.

If you don't want to log such small differences, use this Action to overrule the default behavior.

Example of such an Action List:

Select all

387

PitStop Pro

Override rounding rules

Check if text point size is equal to 10.0 pt <--

Check text point size

on page 241 -->

5.4.4.5 Restore previous color management settings

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color; General

•

Type:

Settings

What it does

Allows you to revert to the previous color management settings (if you have changed them before, in the same Action List).

Related Actions

on page 307

5.4.4.6 Save color management settings

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color; General

•

Type:

Settings

What it does

Allows you to save the current color management settings (changed in the Action List).

5.5 Image

5.5.1 Changes

5.5.1.1 Add alternate images

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Changes

388

PitStop Pro

What it does

If you are working with PDFs that contain very high resolution images and render slowly on screen, you can speed up rendering by adding alternate images and then clicking the PitStop

Speed Up Image Display

button (available in the Enfocus View Modes toolbar (Acrobat 8 and 9) or the PitStop View Panel (Acrobat X and XI)).

You can use this Action to add low resolution alternate images.

How to proceed

Select the preferred downsampling.

Bicubic looks best but is slowest; subsampling looks worst but is fastest.

Specify the preferred resolution.

72dpi is good for screen viewing.

Set

Resample above

to a higher value than the dpi chosen above.

PitStop suggests a value, but you can change it as required.

Select

Convert to RGB

for even faster on screen rendering, but in RGB color values.

Related Actions

•

on page 263

•

on page 192

•

on page 89

5.5.1.2 Apply a gaussian blur to an image

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to apply a Gaussian blur to the selected images.

You can define the radius of the blur, by moving the slider. A higher radius will result in a higher amount of blur.

Applying a Gaussian blur is useful to reduce image noise and detail.

5.5.1.3 Apply transfer function

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress;Text;LineArt;Color;Image

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Adds a transfer function to paths, text, images or all these types of objects. You can exclude spot colors or apply the transfer function on tint values or alternate values only.

389

PitStop Pro

Note:

Transfer functions are not allowed in PDF/X compliant documents.

Related Actions

•

on page 231

•

on page 152

5.5.1.4 Change image brightness and contrast

Belongs to

•

Application:

PitStop Pro

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to make brightness and contrast adjustments to pixel images of all color spaces (e.g.

RGB) and image types (e.g. JPEG).

Note:

This option is also available in the PitStop Inspector (by selecting

5.5.1.5 Change image compression

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Change image compression changes the compression of selected images.

Color and Gray images can be compressed with JPEG, JPEG2000 or ZIP compression (ZIP is lossless, JPEG lossy).

Monochrome images can be compressed with CCIT Group 3 & 4, ZIP or RunLength compression.

390

PitStop Pro

In addition, an ASCII Hex or 85 filter can be applied.

5.5.1.6 Change OPI info

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Updates the OPI information of the document, for example if you have changed an OPI path with the PitStop Inspector in PitStop.

Note:

This Action is mainly meant for OEMs, who can change OPI dictionaries through the PitStop Library. If an image with OPI information is encountered during processing,

PitStop Library will call the OEM's code to replace it with the OEM's values.

About OPI

Related Actions

•

•

on page 195

•

•

•

5.5.1.7 Convert images to indexed color space

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color;Image

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the color of images to the indexed color space.

About the indexed color space

The indexed color space uses no more than 256 colors, and is as such particularly suited for use in Web applications. Images are typically converted to indexed color mode in order to

decrease their file sizes

391

PitStop Pro

5.5.1.8 Crop images

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to crop images to match a clip mask and/or a particular page box.

5.5.1.9 Remove alternate images

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes alternate images from a PDF.

If you are working with PDFs that contain very high resolution images and render slowly on screen, you can speed up rendering by adding alternate images and then clicking the PitStop

Speed Up Image Display

button (available in the Enfocus View Modes toolbar (Acrobat 8 and 9) or the PitStop View Panel (Acrobat X and XI)).

As these alternate images are not necessary for print, you may use this Action to remove them and only keep one version. You can choose between:

• Default for printing

• Lowest resolution

• Highest resolution

Related Actions

•

on page 192

•

on page 263

•

5.5.1.10 Remove OPI

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes OPI (Open Prepress Interface) information from a PDF.

392

PitStop Pro

About OPI

Related Actions

•

•

on page 195

•

•

•

5.5.1.11 Resample image

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Resamples, i.e. changes the resolution of the selected image(s).

How to proceed

Select the preferred resampling or interpolation method:

•

Average Resampling

: computes the average pixel color of the pixels in the sample area, and replaces the entire area with this average.

•

Bicubic resampling

: calculates the values of the new dots on the basis of a weighted average of the pixels in the same area.

•

Bicubic B-Spline resampling

: is a modified bicubic interpolation with more sharpening effects and is recommended for upsampling.

•

Bilinear resampling

: uses weighted interpolation between 4 pixels in the original image.

Note:

Bicubic gives the best result for photographs (but takes the longest to compute).

Enter the preferred resolution, for example 72 ppi for screen viewing.

To only resample images with a resolution below a particular threshold, select the

Resample above ... ppi

checkbox and enter a value.

For example, if you enter 150 ppi, only images with a resolution above 150 ppi will be resampled.

393

PitStop Pro

5.5.1.12 Sharpen an image with unsharp mask

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to sharpen edges in pixel images by applying the unsharp mask filter.

This filter:

• Compares adjacent pixels (specified by

Radius

and

Threshold

) to determine which pixels to correct.

• Increases the contrast of these pixels (specified by

Amount

You can modify the amount of contrast to be applied when correcting pixels (Amount), the distance (Radius) and the brightness difference (Threshold) between adjacent pixels.

The effects of the unsharp mask filter are far more pronounced on-screen than in highresolution output. For print, experiment to determine which options work best for your image.

5.5.2 Checks

Note:

This option is also available in the PitStop Inspector (by selecting

5.5.2.1 Check if JPEG2000 compressed images are PDF/X compliant

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Check if JPEG2000 compressed images are PDF/X compliant.

You might want to remove or replace non-compliant images.

5.5.2.2 Check for alternate images

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

394

PitStop Pro

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Searches a PDF for alternate images.

Related Actions

•

•

on page 263

•

on page 89

5.5.2.3 Check for images with 16 bits per channel

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Searches a PDF for images with 16 bits per channel.

These images have a much larger color range than standard 8 bit images. Note that not all of these colors can be accurately reproduced on press.

5.5.2.4 Check image compression

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks image filters to ensure that the images in the PDF are not compressed using a particular compression method.

You can check for the following compression methods:

• CCITT

• JPEG

• ZIP

• LZW

• RunLength

• JBIG2

• JPEG2000

395

PitStop Pro

By default, soft-mask images are not included, unless you select the

Also check soft-mask images

checkbox.

5.5.2.5 Check image compression ratio

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks the compression ratio of the images in a PDF against a particular threshold.

You can check the compression ratio of images compressed with one of the following compression methods:

• CCITT

• JPEG

• ZIP

• LZW

• RunLength

• JBIG2

• JPEG2000

Example

If the JPEG images in your PDF should not be compressed at all, use the following values:

Compression ratio of JPEG images must be  equal to 1.0000

A compression ratio of "1" means "no compression"; a compression ratio of "0.5" means

"50%" , ...

5.5.2.6 Check image interpolation

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if images in the PDF have been resampled.

5.5.2.7 Check OPI path

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

396

PitStop Pro

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

If your document contains objects with OPI information, you can use this Action to retrieve the path to the high resolution images.

About OPI

Related Actions

•

•

on page 195

•

•

•

5.5.2.8 Check OPI type

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks which OPI types are allowed in a PDF.

You can check for the following OPI types:

• None

• 1.3

• 2.0

• both 1.3 and 2.0

About OPI

Related Actions

•

•

•

397

PitStop Pro

•

•

Select by image resolution

5.5.2.9 Check resolution

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks the resolution of particular image types (color or grayscale images, 1-bit images or any images).

Note:

This Action checks for the

effective

resolution; if the image has been resized, this is the resolution after scaling.

Related Actions

on page 264

5.5.3 Informs

5.5.3.1 Gather image information

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Informs

What it does

Collects information about the images used in a PDF and presents it in the log.

The following information is logged:

• Type

• Color Space

• Physical Resolution

• Effective Resolution

• Page found

• Angle

• Skew

• Flipped

• Custom Transfer

• Custom Halftone

• Custom BG (black generation)

398

PitStop Pro

• Custom UCR (undercolor removal definitions)

5.5.3.2 Gather OPI information

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Informs

What it does

Collects information about the OPI (Open Prepress Interface) used in a PDF and presents it in the log.

About OPI

Related Actions

•

•

on page 195

•

•

•

5.5.4 Selections

5.5.4.1 Select by alternate images

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects either

all images with alternates

all images with alternates that are default for printing

An alternate can be a high resolution version of an image that is used in the PDF to preview the image on screen. If you want to make sure that the correct image is set to print, choose

all images with alternates that are default for printing

Related Actions

•

399

PitStop Pro

•

on page 192

•

on page 89

5.5.4.2 Select by image resolution

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Makes a selection of images based on their resolution, for example all images with a resolution between 320 and 400 ppi.

You can select all images, or limit your selection to color or gray scale images, or to monocolor images only.

Note:

This Action checks for the

effective

resolution; if the image has been resized, this is the resolution after scaling.

Related Actions

Check resolution

on page 196

5.5.4.3 Select by image size

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select images by their width or height (expressed in pixels).

You can for example select images with a width or height equal to (or more or less than) 64 pixels.

5.5.4.4 Select image by filter type

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select images according to the compression type they use.

You can choose one or more of the following filters:

400

PitStop Pro

• ASCII hex

• CCITT

• ZIP

• RunLength

• JPEG2000

• ASCII 85

• JPEG

• LZW

• JBIG2

Optionally, you can also include soft-mask images (of the chosen filter types) in your selection

(i.e. the images that mask an image). These are not included by default.

5.5.4.5 Select images

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects all the images in a PDF document.

Example

The following selects everything in a PDF except for the images:

Select all

Select images

NOT

AND

5.5.4.6 Select images with OPI info

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects all the images in a PDF document that contain OPI (Open Prepress Interface) information.

OPI images are treated special as they are assumed to be preview images. They will for example not be preflighted as other images would be.

About OPI

401

PitStop Pro

Example

The following finds any such images and logs them as a caution:

Select images with OPI info

Log selection <!-- In the field, type your message (ex. 'Images with OPI comments were

found in this PDF'), then select Log as warning at the bottom -->

Related Actions

•

•

on page 195

•

•

•

5.5.4.7 Select image type

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select a particular type of images.

You can select one of the following image types:

• 1-Bit images

• Grayscale images

• Color images

• Stencil mask

• Indexed images

Example

The following will convert color images to Grayscale but will not alter Black & White images:

Select image type

Convert color

5.5.4.8 Select rendering objects

Belongs to

•

Category:

LineArt;Text;Image

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects all objects with a rendering intent.

This includes paths, text and images with any of the following rendering intents:

402

PitStop Pro

• Absolute Colorimetric

• Relative Colorimetric

• Perceptual

• Saturation

Note:

This Action does not allow you to make a selection based on

one particular

rendering intent. To select objects by

one

on page 249.

About rendering intents

For more information and examples, refer to

the PitStop Pro Reference Guide on the Enfocus website

(See Chapter "Rendering intents to remap colors").

Related Actions

•

on page 69

•

on page 178

•

•

5.5.4.9 Select single image page images

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects single image page images, i.e. images that cover the entire page.

5.5.5 Settings

5.5.5.1 Override default image recompression

Belongs to

•

Category:

General; Image

•

Type:

Settings

What it does

Overrides the default recompression quality setting (used by PitStop when changing images) with the one defined in this Action.

403

PitStop Pro

How it works

5.6 Layers

5.6.1 Changes

5.6.1.1 Add objects to layer with name

Belongs to

•

Category:

Layers

•

Type:

Changes

•

Since version:

12 update 3

What it does

How to proceed

Add a "select" Action to the Action List, to select the objects you want to add, for example

on page 283.

Add

Add objects to layers

to the Action List.

Enter the name of the layer.

Optionally, select

Remove from other layers

Example

To add all annotations to a particular layer and remove them from another layer, use the following Actions:

Add objects to layers <!-- Enter a name, e.g. AnnotationLayer and select Remove from

other layers-->

Related Actions

•

•

on page 97

404

PitStop Pro

5.6.1.2 Add objects to layer

Belongs to

•

Category:

Layers

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to add any selected objects to a specific layer. You can identify the layer concerned by selecting it using another Action in the same Action List.

Optionally, you can at the same time remove the added objects from the other layers.

How to proceed

Add a first "select" Action to the Action List, to select the

layer

to which you want to assign the objects.

Add a second "select" Action to the Action List, to select the

objects

to be added.

Note:

You don't have to specify operators in between the two "select" Actions.

However, you can also use

combined

"Select" Actions to specify the layer or the objects concerned (see example 2).

Add

Add objects to layers

and select the

Add to selected layers

radio button.

Examples

Example 1:

The following Action List will add all annotations to Layer1 and remove them from the other layers:

Select layers by name <!--

on page 268 and set the layer name to

Layer1 -->

Add objects to layers

Example 2:

The following Action List will add XObjects and annotations to LayerA and LayerB:

Select layers by name <!--

on page 268 and set the layer name to

"equals [AB]"; enable Use regular expressions -->

Select XObjects <!--

Add objects to layers

Related Actions

•

•

5.6.1.3 Change layer properties

Belongs to

•

Category:

Layers

•

Type:

Changes

405

PitStop Pro

What it does

Allows you to change certain properties, i.e. default visibility and presence in the Layers panel

("layer configuration") of the layers selected by another Action in the same Action List.

Example

To change the properties of

all

layers in the PDF, create the following Action List:

Change layer properties

Related Actions

•

on page 197

•

on page 268

5.6.1.4 Fix layers

Belongs to

•

Category:

Layers

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to perform a number of fixes to the layers in a PDF.

Options:

• Remove alternate layer configurations, only keep default configuration

• Add missing layer configuration names (e.g. "config_1", "config_2", ...)

• Make layer configuration names unique

• Remove order from layer configuration if layers are missing

• Remove AS (AutoState) entry from layer configurations. (AutoState entries are application specific usage entries).

Note:

Layer configuration refers to the Layers panel.

About PDF layers

Layered content usually comes from applications such as InDesign, AutoCAD or Visio. When converted to PDF, the layers are retained and can be viewed and navigated in Adobe Acrobat.

However, if you print a PDF file that contains layers, only the content that is visible on-screen is printed. This may or may not be desired.

"Conventional" layers versus PDF layers

Layers in digital image editing

Layers in PDF

have a different meaning. They are used to hide or show page content:

• Turning

a layer, all objects on this layer are shown on-screen.

• Turning

off

a layer, all objects on this layer are hidden, i.e. they become invisible.

406

PitStop Pro

To work with layers in a PDF document in Adobe Acrobat, select

View

Show/Hide

Navigation Panes

Layers

For more information, refer to the Adobe Acrobat help.

Related Actions

Check layers

on page 197

5.6.1.5 Flatten layers

Belongs to

•

Category:

Layers

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes the selected layers. You can choose whether or not to remove the objects on these layers as well:

• To keep all objects, regardless of their visibility, select

Make all elements visible

. All objects

(including hidden objects) will become visible after the layers have been removed.

• To keep all objects

based on their default visibility

, select

Preserve the initial view of the

PDF

. Objects on layers with

default

visibility turned on are preserved (and remain visible). All other objects (i.e. by default hidden objects) are removed.

• To keep all objects

based on their current visibility

, select

Preserve the current view of the

PDF

. Objects on visible layers are preserved, regardless of their default visibility state. All other objects (i.e. currently hidden objects) are removed.

About PDF layers

Layered content usually comes from applications such as InDesign, AutoCAD or Visio. When converted to PDF, the layers are retained and can be viewed and navigated in Adobe Acrobat.

However, if you print a PDF file that contains layers, only the content that is visible on-screen is printed. This may or may not be desired.

"Conventional" layers versus PDF layers

Layers in digital image editing

Layers in PDF

have a different meaning. They are used to hide or show page content:

• Turning

a layer, all objects on this layer are shown on-screen.

• Turning

off

a layer, all objects on this layer are hidden, i.e. they become invisible.

407

PitStop Pro

To work with layers in a PDF document in Adobe Acrobat, select

View

Show/Hide

Navigation Panes

Layers

For more information, refer to the Adobe Acrobat help.

Related Actions

5.6.1.6 Flatten objects in layer

Belongs to

•

Category:

Layers

•

Type:

Changes

•

Since version:

12 update 3

What it does

Removes the selected objects from ALL layers and at the same time removes all empty layers.

You can choose whether or not to remove hidden objects:

• To keep all objects, regardless of their visibility, select

Make all elements visible

. All objects

(including hidden objects) will become visible after the layers have been removed.

• To keep all objects

based on their default visibility

, select

Preserve the initial view of the

PDF

. Objects on layers with

default

visibility turned on are preserved (and remain visible). All other objects (i.e. by default hidden objects) are removed.

• To keep all objects

based on their current visibility

, select

Preserve the current view of the

PDF

. Objects on visible layers are preserved, regardless of their default visibility state. All other objects (i.e. currently hidden objects) are removed.

About PDF layers

Layered content usually comes from applications such as InDesign, AutoCAD or Visio. When converted to PDF, the layers are retained and can be viewed and navigated in Adobe Acrobat.

However, if you print a PDF file that contains layers, only the content that is visible on-screen is printed. This may or may not be desired.

"Conventional" layers versus PDF layers

Layers in digital image editing

Layers in PDF

have a different meaning. They are used to hide or show page content:

• Turning

a layer, all objects on this layer are shown on-screen.

• Turning

off

a layer, all objects on this layer are hidden, i.e. they become invisible.

408

PitStop Pro

To work with layers in a PDF document in Adobe Acrobat, select

View

Show/Hide

Navigation Panes

Layers

For more information, refer to the Adobe Acrobat help.

Related Actions

on page 94

5.6.1.7 Remove empty layers

Belongs to

•

Category:

Remove; Layers

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes empty layers selected by another Action in the same Action List.

Example

The following Action List will remove

all

empty layers in the PDF:

Remove empty layers

To remove Layer1 and 2, if they are empty:

Select layers by name <!--

on page 268 - Choose "equals Layer

[12]" and "Use regular expressions" -->

Remove empty layers

About PDF layers

Layered content usually comes from applications such as InDesign, AutoCAD or Visio. When converted to PDF, the layers are retained and can be viewed and navigated in Adobe Acrobat.

However, if you print a PDF file that contains layers, only the content that is visible on-screen is printed. This may or may not be desired.

"Conventional" layers versus PDF layers

Layers in digital image editing

Layers in PDF

have a different meaning. They are used to hide or show page content:

• Turning

a layer, all objects on this layer are shown on-screen.

• Turning

off

a layer, all objects on this layer are hidden, i.e. they become invisible.

To work with layers in a PDF document in Adobe Acrobat, select

View

Show/Hide

Navigation Panes

Layers

For more information, refer to the Adobe Acrobat help.

409

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

on page 97

5.6.1.8 Remove objects from layers

Belongs to

•

Category:

Layers

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to remove objects from the selected layers in a PDF document.

About PDF layers

Layered content usually comes from applications such as InDesign, AutoCAD or Visio. When converted to PDF, the layers are retained and can be viewed and navigated in Adobe Acrobat.

However, if you print a PDF file that contains layers, only the content that is visible on-screen is printed. This may or may not be desired.

"Conventional" layers versus PDF layers

Layers in digital image editing

Layers in PDF

have a different meaning. They are used to hide or show page content:

• Turning

a layer, all objects on this layer are shown on-screen.

• Turning

off

a layer, all objects on this layer are hidden, i.e. they become invisible.

To work with layers in a PDF document in Adobe Acrobat, select

View

Show/Hide

Navigation Panes

Layers

For more information, refer to the Adobe Acrobat help.

How to proceed

Add a first "select" Action to the Action List, to select the

layer

from which you want to remove objects.

Add a second "select" Action to the Action List, to select the

objects

to be removed.

Note:

You don't have to specify operators in between the two "select" Actions.

However, you can also use

combined

"select" Actions to specify the layer or the objects concerned (see example 2).

Add

Remove objects from layers

410

PitStop Pro

Examples

Example 1:

The following Action List will remove all objects from Layer1:

Select layers by name <!--

on page 268 and set the layer name to

Layer1 -->

Select all <!--

on page 283 -->

Remove objects from layers

Example 2:

The following Action List will remove XObjects and annotations from LayerA and

LayerB:

Select layers by name <!--

on page 268 and set the layer name to

equals [AB]; enable "Use regular expressions" -->

Select XObjects <!--

Remove objects from layers

Related Actions

•

•

5.6.1.9 Rename layer

Belongs to

•

Category:

Layers

•

Type:

Changes

•

Since version:

12 update 3

What it does

Allows you to change the name of the layers in a document.

Note:

You can also use regular expressions to define the source and target layer name.

Example

Suppose you want to rename the layers that are visible in your document, in this example

Layer1 and Layer3 (but not Layer2, Layer12 or any other layer).

411

Proceed as follows:

Select the

Rename Layer

Action.

Under Attributes for Rename layer, configure the source and target layer as follows:

•

From

: Layer([13])

•

: VisibleLayer$1

Select the

Use regular expessions

checkbox.

Click

Run the Action List.

Result:

PitStop Pro

5.6.2 Selections

5.6.2.1 Select layers

Belongs to

•

Category:

Layers

•

Type:

Selections

•

Since version:

12 update 3

What it does

Selects ALL layers in a PDF document.

412

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

on page 268

5.6.2.2 Select layers by name

Belongs to

•

Category:

Layers

•

Type:

Selections

•

Since version:

12 update 3

What it does

Allows you to select layers with a particular layer name.

Note:

You can use regular expressions to define the layer name (if you select

Equals/

Does not equal

as operator method).

Example

To select "Layer1" and "Layer3" but not e.g. "Layer2", "Layer12" or any other layer, choose the following attributes:

Select layers where name equals [13]

Select Match case

Select Use regular expressions <!-- to make sure [13] is considered a regular expression

instead of a string -->

5.6.2.3 Select objects in layers by layer properties

Belongs to

•

Category:

Layers

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select content based on the layer properties of the layer it's placed on.

You can select content that is:

•

Optional

: placed on a layer

•

Not optional

: not placed on a layer

•

By default visible

: visible when the document is first opened (applies to both layered and

"normal" content)

•

By default invisible

: invisible when the document is first opened

•

Visible

: set to "visible" e.g. by the user or by an application such as PitStop (regardless of the initial visibility state)

•

Invisible

: set to "invisible" e.g. by the user or by an application such as PitStop (regardless of the initial visibility state)

413

PitStop Pro

Example

The following Action List allows you to select layered content that is by default visible. Normal content (that is visible by default) is not selected.

Select objects in layers by layer properties <!-- Choose "Select content that is

optional" -->

Select objects in layers by layer properties <!-- Choose "Select content that is

visible" -->

AND <!-- This operator makes sure that only content is selected that is optional and

visible at the same time -->

Related Actions

•

•

5.6.2.4 Select objects in layers by name

Belongs to

•

Category:

Layers

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select objects inside layers with a certain name.

How to proceed

Select whether the layer name should (not) be equal to or (not) contain the value you specify.

Optionally, enable

Match case

Use regular expressions

Note:

The option

Use regular expression

is available as of PitStop 12 update 2, if you select

equals

does not equal

. This option allows you to define the layer name using a regular expression (e.g Layer[1-3] will match the following layer names:

Layer1, Layer2 and Layer3).

Related Actions

•

on page 269

•

on page 268

5.6.2.5 Select objects in selected layers

Belongs to

•

Category:

Layers

•

Type:

Selections

•

Since version:

12 update 3

What it does

Selects objects in the layer(s) selected by another Action in the same Action List.

414

PitStop Pro

Example

To select the objects on

all

layers of the PDF, create the following Action List:

Select objects in selected layers

Related Actions

•

•

on page 268

5.6.3 Checks

5.6.3.1 Check for empty layers

Belongs to

•

Category:

Layers

•

Type:

Checks

•

Since version:

12 update 3

What it does

Allows you to check if the selected layers are empty. The Action must be preceded by another

Action that selects the layer(s) concerned.

Example

To check if the PDF contains any empty layers:

on page 267 selects ALL layers -->

Check for empty layers

Related Actions

on page 97

5.6.3.2 Check if layer is PDF/X-4 compliant

Belongs to

•

Category:

Layers

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the layers in a PDF document comply with the PDF/X-4 specification.

About layers in PDF/X-4

The PDF/X-4 standard allows the use of layers (OCGs = Optional Content Groups) in PDF.

These layers can have different states (ON or OFF). The state of all OCGs must be defined in an

415

PitStop Pro

Optional Content Configuration Dictionary (OCCD). This dictionary must be used by compliant readers to switch on or off the layers.

5.6.3.3 Check layer properties

Belongs to

•

Category:

Layers

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks certain properties, i.e. default visibility and presence in the Layers panel ("layer configuration") of the layers selected by another Action in the same Action List.

Example

To check the properties of

all

layers in the PDF, create the following Action List:

Check layer properties

Related Actions

•

•

on page 268

5.6.3.4 Check layers

Belongs to

•

Category:

Layers

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks the layers in a PDF.

You can set a number of different checks, such as:

• Document must not have layers, i.e. optional content is not allowed.

• The document catalog dictionary must not contain OCProperties key.

• Document must not have alternate layer configurations, i.e. only one Layers panel ("layers palette") is allowed.

• Layer configuration (i.e. the Layers panel) must have a name.

• Multiple layer configurations (i.e. Layers panels) must not have the

same

name.

• Layer group must not be missing from order, i.e. the Layer group must be present in the order of the Layer panel.

• Layer configuration (i.e. the Layers panel) must not contain application specific usage entry.

About PDF layers

Layered content usually comes from applications such as InDesign, AutoCAD or Visio. When converted to PDF, the layers are retained and can be viewed and navigated in Adobe Acrobat.

416

PitStop Pro

However, if you print a PDF file that contains layers, only the content that is visible on-screen is printed. This may or may not be desired.

"Conventional" layers versus PDF layers

Layers in digital image editing

Layers in PDF

have a different meaning. They are used to hide or show page content:

• Turning

a layer, all objects on this layer are shown on-screen.

• Turning

off

a layer, all objects on this layer are hidden, i.e. they become invisible.

To work with layers in a PDF document in Adobe Acrobat, select

View

Show/Hide

Navigation Panes

Layers

For more information, refer to the Adobe Acrobat help.

Related Actions

•

•

on page 268

•

Fix layers

on page 93

5.7 Line Art

5.7.1 Changes

5.7.1.1 Apply transfer function

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress;Text;LineArt;Color;Image

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Adds a transfer function to paths, text, images or all these types of objects. You can exclude spot colors or apply the transfer function on tint values or alternate values only.

417

PitStop Pro

Note:

Transfer functions are not allowed in PDF/X compliant documents.

Related Actions

•

on page 231

•

on page 152

5.7.1.2 Change dash pattern

Belongs to

•

Category:

Line Art

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the pattern of dashed lines or converts them to continuous lines.

How to proceed

To use continuous lines, click .

To create a dashed pattern, click and configure the following fields:

• In the

fields, enter the desired length of the dashes.

• In the

Off

fields, enter the desired size of the spaces between the dashes.

• In the

Phase

5.7.1.3 Change fill and/or stroke

Belongs to

•

Category:

LineArt;Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to turn on or off the fill and/or stroke for the selected objects.

5.7.1.4 Change fill type

Belongs to

•

Category:

LineArt;Text

418

PitStop Pro

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to change the fill type of the selected objects to either Non-Zero Winding (Fill) or

Even-odd (Eofill).

About the fill type

The fill type is an attribute of polygons and loops: compound paths with intersecting lines. To determine whether a point is part of the shape, two different rules can be applied:

• The

Non-Zero Winding

• For every edge that crosses the line from the point inside the shape in one direction, add 1 to the winding number.

• For every edge that crosses the line in the opposite direction, subtract 1.

If the winding number is not equal to zero, the shape area to which the point belongs, is filled. For more information, refer to

http://www.wikipedia.org/wiki/nonzero-rule

• The

Even-odd rule

: This rule also supposes that you draw a line between a point inside the shape outline and a point outside its outline.

• If that line crosses the line of the shape an odd number of times, the shape area to which the point belongs, is filled.

• If the number of crossings is even, the area is not filled.

Checking the fill type of line art

To see which rule is applied, check the object's fill attributes:

Select the object, using the Enfocus Select tool .

Click to display the Enfocus Inspector and select

At the bottom, check which button is selected:

•

Fill

is selected, the

Non-zero Winding rule

applies.

•

Eofill

is selected, the

Even-odd

rule applies.

5.7.1.5 Change flatness

Belongs to

•

Category:

LineArt;Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to set the flatness of a PostScript curve.

419

PitStop Pro

The flatness determines how the objects in a document are printed on a PostScript printer.

Related Actions

•

•

5.7.1.6 Change line cap

Belongs to

•

Category:

LineArt;Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes how the end of a vector line looks like.

How to proceed

•

To have the line end exactly, click

•

To put a round end on the line, click

butt

round

•

To have corners projected beyond the length of the line, click

projecting square

5.7.1.7 Change line join

Belongs to

•

Category:

LineArt; Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes how a corner on a vector line looks like.

How to proceed

•

To have a sharp corner, click

miter

•

To put a round corner on the line, click

round

420

PitStop Pro

•

To flatten the corners, click

bevel

5.7.1.8 Change line weight

Belongs to

•

Category:

LineArt;Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the thickness of a selected line to the desired line weight.

Related Actions

•

on page 84

•

•

on page 199

5.7.1.9 Change miter limit

Belongs to

•

Category:

LineArt; Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the length of the extension of a corner on a vector line.

The miter limit is the limit when a join switches from mitered (pointed) to beveled (squared-off).

To allow “pointier” angles, you can increase the miter limit.

For more information on how to calculate the miter limit, refer to the topic "Stroke attributes:

Miter limit" in

the PitStop Pro Reference Guide on the Enfocus website

5.7.1.10 Change stroke adjustment

Belongs to

•

Category:

LineArt; Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to enable or disable stroke adjustment.

Stroke adjustment takes care of the rendering of paths on a raster device (printing device, computer monitor, etc.).

421

PitStop Pro

Example

If stroke adjustment is

turned off

, the device will draw the pixel only if it covers the path for more than 50%.

This means that a 1 pixel wide line can be drawn in different ways:

• If the line is drawn nicely on top of a pixel of the screen, the line will look fine.

• If the line is spread over 2 pixels of the screen, the width will be 2 pixels on some places and

1 pixel on other places, turning the line into an ugly, jaggy line.

If stroke adjustment is

turned on

, a correction will be made in such a way that the line looks nice and has the same width (1 pixel) everywhere.

5.7.1.11 Close path

Belongs to

•

Category:

Line Art

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Joins the connection between the first and the last anchor point of a path (as required).

5.7.1.12 Combine subpaths

Belongs to

•

Category:

Line Art

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Combines two selected paths.

About subpaths

Related Actions

•

on page 272

422

PitStop Pro

•

5.7.1.13 Normalize line weight

Belongs to

•

Category:

General; LineArt; Position and size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Related Actions

•

•

•

on page 199

5.7.1.14 Open path

Belongs to

•

Category:

Line Art

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes the connection between the first and the last anchor point of a path.

5.7.1.15 Split in subpaths

Belongs to

•

Category:

Line Art

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to split any compound path into separate paths, for example to give them a different color.

Splitting compound paths in PitStop Pro

In PitStop Pro, you can as well split compound paths. Proceed as follows:

Select the compound path (by using the PitStop Select Objects tool ).

423

PitStop Pro

Right-click it.

Click

Path

Compound Path

Release Compound Path

Related Actions

•

on page 104

•

on page 272

5.7.2 Checks

5.7.2.1 Check line weight

Belongs to

•

Category:

LineArt; Prepress

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the line weight of the selected objects is higher or lower than a particular value.

Related Actions

•

•

•

Select page by number of paths

on page 84

5.7.2.2 Check maximum path length

Belongs to

•

Category:

Line Art

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks for a maximum amount of nodes in a path.

5.7.2.3 Check number of paths on page

Belongs to

•

Category:

Line Art

•

Type:

Checks

424

PitStop Pro

What it does

Checks the number of paths on one page.

You can for example log a warning if the PDF contains more than 4 paths on a page.

Related Actions

on page 271

5.7.3 Selections

5.7.3.1 Select by line weight

Belongs to

•

Category:

Line Art

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects objects with a particular line weight.

For example, select objects with line weight

less than 0.0123

inch.

Related Actions

•

on page 84

•

•

Check number of paths on page

on page 199

5.7.3.2 Select line art

Belongs to

•

Category:

Line Art

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select objects that are drawn as line art (i.e. vector and not raster).

5.7.3.3 Select objects that use neither stroke nor fill

Belongs to

•

Category:

LineArt;Text

•

Type:

Selections

425

PitStop Pro

What it does

Selects vector or path objects that contain no stroke or fill color value in a PDF.

on page 261 (same functionality)

5.7.3.4 Select page by number of paths

Belongs to

•

Category:

Line Art

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to make a selection based on the number of paths on a page.

You could for example select all pages with less than 4 pages.

Related Actions

on page 199

5.7.3.5 Select rendering objects

Belongs to

•

Category:

LineArt;Text;Image

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects all objects with a rendering intent.

This includes paths, text and images with any of the following rendering intents:

• Absolute Colorimetric

• Relative Colorimetric

• Perceptual

• Saturation

Note:

This Action does not allow you to make a selection based on

one particular

rendering intent. To select objects by

one

on page 249.

About rendering intents

For more information and examples, refer to

the PitStop Pro Reference Guide on the Enfocus website

(See Chapter "Rendering intents to remap colors").

426

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

•

on page 69

•

on page 178

•

•

5.7.3.6 Select subpaths

Belongs to

•

Category:

Line Art

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects the subpaths if the entire path is selected.

About subpaths

Related Actions

•

on page 104

•

Check creation and modification date

5.7.3.7 Select thin objects

Belongs to

•

Category:

Line Art

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select objects based on the maximum thickness of the fill or stroke.

If desired, you can indicate that for objects of which stroke and fill have the same color, the width of the fill and stroke should be added together.

This Action is typically used to select and afterwards remove thin white lines that may be visible on small screens (e.g. on an iPad screen).

Example

If you choose the following options:

Select objects with width of

Filled rectangle

smaller than

0.0353 cm

Calculate whole thickness when stroke and fill have the same color

427

PitStop Pro

Following objects will be included in the selection:

• Objects with different stroke and fill color, must have a

fill

smaller than 0.0353 cm.

• Objects with the same stroke and fill color, must have a

fill

and

stroke

(added together) smaller than 0.0353 cm.

5.8 Metadata

5.8.1 Changes

5.8.1.1 Add missing creation and modification date

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Inserts the creation and modification date.

In some legacy PDF applications it was possible to create a PDF file without a creation or modification date. This Action fixes this issue.

Related Actions

on page 202

5.8.1.2 Change annotations print setting

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Change annotations' print setting allows you to set the selected annotations to

Printing

Non-

Printing

5.8.1.3 Change binding

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

428

PitStop Pro

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to redefine a document's binding; you can set binding to the right or to the left.

Most European language documents are bound on the left.

Note:

To check a document's binding, in Adobe Acrobat, go to

File

Properties

and switch to the

Advanced

tab. The document's binding property (Left Edge or Right Edge) is displayed under Reading Options.

Related Actions

•

on page 201

•

Select by binding

on page 274

5.8.1.4 Change document info

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the document information as found in the document properties in Acrobat.

You can change, remove or replace the following details:

• Producer

• Title

• Subject

• Author

• Creator

• Keywords

If you want to replace document info, you can make use of fixed strings and/or variables, such as the user name, company, date ...

Example

To replace the current keywords in your document with the document title and the word "PDF", proceed as follows:

Run the Change document info Action to remove the current keywords:

Change document keywords

Run the Change document info Action to insert the new keywords:

Change document keywords

Related Actions

•

on page 202

429

PitStop Pro

•

on page 275

5.8.1.5 Change Output Intent

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color; Metadata

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes a PDF's output intent to comply with a particular PDF/X or PDF/A version, using a particular ICC profile and/or ICC characterization.

Related Actions

5.8.1.6 Change PDF version

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the Acrobat and PDF version of a PDF.

The Acrobat version is the sum of the two numbers that make up the PDF version, for example:

PDF 1.4 = Acrobat 5.

Note:

Changing the PDF version will not change the attributes of a higher version PDF to those of a lower one - it only changes the version

number

. As higher versions of

Acrobat always save the PDF version number up to their version, even if nothing has changed, this Action can be useful to reset the PDF version to the one used to create the

PDF.

Example

If you configure this Action to change the PDF version to PDF 1.5, both the PDF version and the

Acrobat version will be changed. The new PDF version will be PDF 1.5; the new Acrobat version will be 6.0.

430

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

Select by PDF version

on page 276

5.8.1.7 Change PDF/A version key

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the version key tag in a PDF/A document to another version key.

The following version keys are supported:

• PDF/A-1a

• PDF/A-1b

• PDF/A-2a

• PDF/A-2b

• PDF/A-2u

About PDF/A version keys

PDF/A is a specialized subset of the PDF specification, also known as "PDF for

rchive".

The PDF/A version key identifies the version of the PDF/A standard the document complies with.

If the version key is not set correctly, the document is not PDF/A compliant. Note that changing the

key

does not change the compliance of the document! It will only allow you to continue with your workflow.

Related Actions

•

Check PDF/A version key

•

on page 212

5.8.1.8 Change PDF/X version key

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the version key tag in a PDF/X document to another version key.

The following version keys are supported:

• PDF/X-1a:2001

• PDF/X-32002

• PDF/X-1a:2003

• PDF/X-3:2003

431

PitStop Pro

• PDF/X-4

• PDFX/-4p

About PDF/X version keys

PDF/X is a specialized subset of the PDF specification, also known as "PDF for Exchange".

The PDF/X version key identifies the version of the PDF/X standard the document complies with.

If the version key is not set correctly, the document is not PDF/X compliant. Note that changing the

key

does not change the compliance of the document! It will only allow you to continue with your workflow.

Related Actions

•

on page 212

•

on page 115

5.8.1.9 Change trapped flag

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Modifies the trapped flag.

About trapping

The trapped flag indicates whether or not a file has been "trapped", i.e. has been corrected for slight color misregistrations. The trapped flag must be defined in PDF/X documents.

The flag can be set to:

•

True

: the document has been trapped, or the creator of the document has decided that it should not be trapped.

•

False

: the document has not been trapped

•

Unknown

: it's not known whether or not the document has been trapped. Note that this status should be avoided.

Related Actions

•

•

on page 276

•

on page 214

5.8.1.10 Fix PDF/A extension schema definitions in document XMP metadata

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

432

PitStop Pro

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Fixes issues with the PDF/A extension schema definitions in document XMP metadata.

About XMP metadata

Document Properties in Acrobat (Click the

Additional Metadata

button, then select

Advanced

About XMP schema definitions

5.8.1.11 Flatten form fields

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to convert form fields to normal objects in a document.

This Action is useful if you have output issues with form fields as content, for example because the output device or the PDF renderer does not support form fields.

Related Actions

•

on page 205

•

5.8.1.12 Make document metadata consistent

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Makes sure that the metadata in the different metadata locations has the same values. In case of inconsistencies, the most recent value is used.

If multiple creators are not considered an inconsistency, select the

Allow multiple creators

checkbox. In that case, the "Creator" property will not be changed, even if it is not the same in the different metadata locations.

433

PitStop Pro

How it works

There are two metadata locations in a PDF file:

• The

info dictionary

contains information about the file, such as the title, the author, the creation date ... and is visible through the file's Document properties. It's not in XML format.

• The

XMP metadata stream

also contains information about the file, but this information is represented as XMP metadata - XMP referring to Adobe's labeling technology

xtensible

etadata

latform. All information in the info dictionary is also represented in the XMP metadata stream dictionary, in the form of XMP properties.

Inconsistencies may occur when only one of the metadata locations has been updated.

Related Actions

•

on page 209

•

on page 278

5.8.1.13 Remove action dictionaries

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes action dictionaries ("actions") from a PDF.

About action dictionaries

You may want to remove these actions, as they are not allowed in a PDF/X file. The Remove action dictionaries Action will only remove the

action

; the object (the bookmark, annotation) the actions are linked to will not be removed. For example, if you remove the action from a bookmark, the bookmark is still visible, but not clickable anymore.

Related Actions

on page 205

5.8.1.14 Remove form fields

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes any PDF form fields from a document.

434

PitStop Pro

You may lose data if you do this.

Related Actions

•

on page 205

•

on page 112

5.8.1.15 Remove Javascript

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes JavaScript code (which might perform unwanted actions) from a PDF.

This language is often used to add interactive functionality to PDF files. However, in a print production environment, these scripts serve no purpose and may result in increased file sizes.

Related Actions

Check for Javascript

on page 207

5.8.1.16 Remove marked content

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Strips PDF generator defined content from a PDF.

Marked content is content tagged with special messages so that the application that opens it can read it in a particular way.

Related Actions

Check marked content

5.8.1.17 Remove metadata

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Changes

435

What it does

Removes the selected metadata from a PDF.

You can remove the following types of metadata:

• Annotations

• Thumbnails

• Article threads

• Page labels

• Acrobat capture info

• Bookmarks

• Structural information

• Job ticket

• Named destinations (includes annotations and bookmarks)

5.8.1.18 Remove PDF/A version key

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

This Action removes the PDF/A version key from the PDF file.

Related Actions

•

•

5.8.1.19 Remove PDF/X version key

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

This Action removes the PDF/X version key from the PDF file.

Related Actions

•

on page 109

PitStop Pro

436

PitStop Pro

•

Check unused destinations

on page 212

5.8.1.20 Remove unused destinations

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

See also:

on page 215

5.8.1.21 Set correct document XMP name spaces

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

on page 210

5.8.1.22 Set XMP file identifiers

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Adds missing file identifiers to the PDF's XMP metadata stream, for example: the Version ID, the

DocumentID, the RenditionClass.

437

PitStop Pro

5.8.2 Checks

5.8.2.1 Check annotations print setting

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Check annotations' print settings allows you to log annotations with a particular print setting

(print or non-printing).

5.8.2.2 Check annotations type

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Check annotations' type allows you to log the occurrence of particular types of annotations in a

PDF, for example: text, hyperlinks, movies,...

5.8.2.3 Check appearances of annotations and interactive form fields

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the document contains annotations and interactive form fields.

This is useful if you want to print the document (as annotations and interactive form fields cannot be printed) or if your output device or PDF renderer does not support form fields.

Related Actions

•

on page 205

438

PitStop Pro

•

on page 112

•

Check for annotations inside art box or trim box

•

on page 215

5.8.2.4 Check article threads

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks for the existence of article threads in a PDF file.

5.8.2.5 Check binding

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if binding is left or right.

Most European language documents are bound on the left.

Note:

To check a document's binding, in Adobe Acrobat, go to

File

Properties

and switch to the

Advanced

tab. The document's binding property (Left Edge or Right Edge) is displayed under Reading Options.

Related Actions

•

•

5.8.2.6 Check bookmarks

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

439

PitStop Pro

What it does

Checks if the PDF contains bookmarks.

Bookmarks are links in the left hand side bar of a PDF that take you to different sections.

5.8.2.7 Check creation and modification date

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Check

What it does

Checks the creation and modification date.

You can indicate which metadata location should be checked, for example only the most recently changed one, or "any" metadata location (if it doesn't matter), ...

About metadata locations in a PDF file

There are two metadata locations in a PDF file:

• The

info dictionary

contains information about the file, such as the title, the author, the creation date ... and is visible through the file's Document properties. It's not in XML format.

• The

XMP metadata stream

also contains information about the file, but this information is represented as XMP metadata - XMP referring to Adobe's labeling technology

xtensible

etadata

latform. All information in the info dictionary is also represented in the XMP metadata stream dictionary, in the form of XMP properties.

Inconsistencies may occur when only one of the metadata locations has been updated.

on page 106

5.8.2.8 Check document info

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Searches for the requested document info in the document properties of the PDF.

You can check:

• Title

• Subject

• Author

• Keywords

440

PitStop Pro

• Producer

• Creator

Use the

Compare with

field to enter (part of) the name of the document info you are looking for.

Use the operator methods

equals

and

doesn't equal

if you are looking for an exact match; use

contain

doesn't contain

if the entered value is just part of the document info you are looking for.

Select the

Match case

checkbox if you want the search to take into account the lower and upper cases of the entered value.

Note:

From version 12 update 2 onwards, you can use regular expressions to define the value in the

Compare with

field (if you select

Equals/Does not equal

as operator method).

Related Actions

•

•

on page 275

5.8.2.9 Check document permissions

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Allows you to check the permission settings of a PDF, such as (low/high resolution) printing, copying, editing, ...

About document permissions

The table below gives an overview of the permissions that can be set in a PDF.

Document permission

Assembly

If enabled...

Users can insert, delete and rotate pages, and create bookmarks and thumbnails.

Accessibility software (such as a screen reader) is allowed to use the content of the document.

Users can fill in and change forms.

Content accessibility

Fill-in or changing

Annotating

Copying

Editing

Low resolution printing

High resolution printing

Users can make annotations.

Users can select and copy contents to the clipboard.

Users can make modifications to the document.

Users can print a low-resolution bitmapped image of the pages (for personal use).

Users can print the document with a high resolution output.

441

PitStop Pro

Document permission

Printing

If enabled...

Users can print the document.

To view a summary of the document permissions, proceed as follows:

Open Adobe Acrobat.

Select

File

Properties

Switch to the

Security

tab. The document restrictions are displayed in the lower part of the dialog.

5.8.2.10 Check document security

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if a particular encryption was used to secure the PDF file.

Options:

• An Acrobat version (5-7)

• A combination of "none" and an Acrobat version (5-7)

• None

• None or Standard (= no custom security)

• Custom (enter a custom name in the text field)

5.8.2.11 Check document trapped flag

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Allows you to check the value of the trapped flag in a PDF.

About trapping

The trapped flag indicates whether or not a file has been "trapped", i.e. has been corrected for slight color misregistrations. The trapped flag must be defined in PDF/X documents.

The flag can be set to:

•

True

: the document has been trapped, or the creator of the document has decided that it should not be trapped.

•

False

: the document has not been trapped

•

Unknown

: it's not known whether or not the document has been trapped. Note that this status should be avoided.

442

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

•

•

on page 276

•

on page 214

5.8.2.12 Check external hyperlink annotations

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the annotations in the PDF contain hyperlinks to files, applications, and/or web pages.

5.8.2.13 Check for action dictionaries

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if a PDF contains particular action dictionaries, i.e. action types.

About action dictionaries

Related Actions

•

Check for additional actions

on page 113

•

on page 206

443

PitStop Pro

5.8.2.14 Check for additional actions

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if a PDF contains action dictionaries, i.e. action types, other than the standard ones.

About action dictionaries

Related Actions

•

on page 113

•

on page 205

5.8.2.15 Check for annotations inside printable area

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Searches a PDF for any annotations that appear in the printable area of the PDF.

5.8.2.16 Check for deprecated attributes in XMP metadata

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the XMP metadata streams in the PDF contain attributes that are outdated.

About XMP metadata

Document Properties in Acrobat (Click the

Additional Metadata

button, then select

Advanced

444

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

on page 211

5.8.2.17 Check for Javascript

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if a PDF contains instances of the JavaScript programming language.

This language is often used to add interactive functionality to PDF files. However, in a print production environment, these scripts serve no purpose and may result in increased file sizes.

Related Actions

Remove Javascript

on page 114

5.8.2.18 Check form fields

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Looks for the presence of form fields in a PDF.

Related Actions

•

on page 112

•

5.8.2.19 Check for XFA forms

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks whether the PDF contains XFA forms.

An XFA form is a web form and is not suited for printing documents. XFA stands for XML Forms

Architecture. It's an XML specification, which is rather vague and does not specify any rendering.

445

PitStop Pro

Optionally, you can also check if a NeedsRendering key is present in the PDF document (

log if

NeedsRendering key is present

5.8.2.20 Check for XMP schema definitions as required by PDF/A

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks whether the PDF contains XMP schema definitions for identifying the document, as required by the PDF/A specification.

5.8.2.21 Check if date is present in document XMP metadata

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks for the date in the XMP metadata of a PDF.

About XMP metadata

Document Properties in Acrobat (Click the

Additional Metadata

button, then select

Advanced

Related Actions

•

on page 183

•

on page 213

5.8.2.22 Check if document is produced by PDFWriter

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if a PDF was produced by PDFWriter.

PDFs created with PDFWriter are not suitable for high-end printing.

446

PitStop Pro

5.8.2.23 Check if document XMP metadata types are valid

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if metadata streams defined in a PDF conform to the XMP schema.

About XMP metadata streams

There are two metadata locations in a PDF file:

• The

info dictionary

contains information about the file, such as the title, the author, the creation date ... and is visible through the file's Document properties. It's not in XML format.

• The

XMP metadata stream

also contains information about the file, but this information is represented as XMP metadata - XMP referring to Adobe's labeling technology

xtensible

etadata

latform. All information in the info dictionary is also represented in the XMP metadata stream dictionary, in the form of XMP properties.

Inconsistencies may occur when only one of the metadata locations has been updated.

Related Actions

•

on page 211

•

on page 112

•

Set correct document XMP name spaces

on page 278

5.8.2.24 Check if document XMP name space uses correct prefix

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

The XMP metadata standard (used for labeling metadata in PDFs) defines namespaces for defined sets of core properties. This Action checks if the correct prefixes are used.

Related Actions

on page 116

5.8.2.25 Check if document metadata is consistent

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

447

PitStop Pro

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if metadata that is present in different metadata locations is identical.

How it works

There are two metadata locations in a PDF file:

• The

info dictionary

contains information about the file, such as the title, the author, the creation date ... and is visible through the file's Document properties. It's not in XML format.

• The

XMP metadata stream

also contains information about the file, but this information is represented as XMP metadata - XMP referring to Adobe's labeling technology

xtensible

etadata

latform. All information in the info dictionary is also represented in the XMP metadata stream dictionary, in the form of XMP properties.

Inconsistencies may occur when only one of the metadata locations has been updated.

Extra checks

Optionally you can check if metadata in one location (selected from the list) is also present in the other location; if all metadata should be present in both locations, select

any metadata location

If multiple creators are not considered an inconsistency, select the

Allow multiple creators

checkbox.

Related Actions

•

on page 112

•

on page 278

5.8.2.26 Check if metadata streams do not have a compression filter

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if metadata streams do not have a compression filter.

448

PitStop Pro

on page 213

5.8.2.27 Check if URLs in Link Annotations are valid

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks the validity of the hyperlinks in annotations with hyperlinks to web pages, i.e. checks if the target web page exists.

If you're using a proxy server, you should enter the proxy server address and port, and your user name and password. Otherwise, the check cannot be performed.

Related Actions

PitStop provides an Action to solve these problems:

on page 205

5.8.2.28 Check if XMP metadata is well-formed

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the XMP metadata streams in the PDF conform to the XMP specifications.

If the XMP metadata is not well-formed, the document cannot be made PDF/X-4 compliant.

Tip:

Fix non well-formed XMP metadata

on page 166.

About XMP metadata

Document Properties in Acrobat (Click the Additional Metadata button, then select Advanced).

5.8.2.29 Check marked content

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

449

PitStop Pro

What it does

Logs content that has been identified with a marked content tag in a PDF.

Marked content is content tagged with special messages so that the application that opens it can read it in a particular way.

Related Actions

Remove marked content

on page 114

5.8.2.30 Check PDF/Acrobat compatibility

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Allows you to checks if a particular Acrobat or PDF version is used in a PDF document.

You can for example check if the Acrobat version is equal to or higher/lower than a particular version.

5.8.2.31 Check pdfxid prefix in XMP name space

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the pdfxid prefix in the XMP namespace is correct.

The namespace prefix is required for PDF/A.

5.8.2.32 Check PDF/A version key

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks the PDF/A version key.

Related Actions

•

450

PitStop Pro

•

5.8.2.33 Check PDF/X version key

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks the PDF/X version key.

Related Actions

•

on page 109

•

Check if date is present in document XMP metadata

on page 115

5.8.2.34 Check presence of document metadata stream

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the PDF contains metadata, i.e. descriptive information about the file, such as the title, the author, the creation date ...

About XMP metadata

Document Properties in Acrobat (Click the

Additional Metadata

button, then select

Advanced

Related Actions

•

on page 208

•

on page 183

5.8.2.35 Check thumbnails

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

451

PitStop Pro

What it does

Checks if the PDF contains thumbnails.

5.8.2.36 Check Trapnets for PDF/X

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks whether trapnet information in a PDF is compliant with either PDF/X-1 or PDF/X-3 standards.

About trapping

In printing, even the slightest misregistration of the plates can cause gaps or color shifts between colored objects to appear.

Trapping

If the traps in a document were added before the PDF document was created, they are included in the PDF file as

trap networks

. A page may have more than one trap network, e.g. one for each intended output device, but all the different trap networks are stored in the same trap network, also called

trapnet annotation

. When printed, the trapnet annotation provides all the required trapping information for the page.

About the PDF/X Requirements for trapping

When trapnet annotations are found in the document,

PDF/X-1a:2001

requires that:

• The

trapped flag

in the document is set to either True or False (Unknown is not allowed).

• If the trapped flag is

False

, the document does not contain trapnet annotations.

• If the trapped flag is

True

, the document is completely trapped, and the document contains trapnet annotations.

•

Font substitution

is not used.

• The

CMYK

color space is used.

When trapnet annotations are found in the document,

PDF/X-3:2002

requires that:

• Trapping occurs only when all the

fonts in the document are embedded

• The

CMYK

color space is used.

Related Actions

•

•

on page 276

452

PitStop Pro

•

Remove unused destinations

5.8.2.37 Check unused destinations

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

This Action allows you to

verify

if there are any unused destinations in a PDF document.

The Action

allows you to

remove

them from the PDF.

5.8.3 Informs

5.8.3.1 Gather pages information

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata; Page

•

Type:

Informs

What it does

Collects information about the pages (number of pages and range) in a PDF and presents it in the log.

5.8.4 Selections

5.8.4.1 Select annotations

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects annotations of a particular type in a PDF document.

453

PitStop Pro

Example

To delete all annotations of the type "Movie" and "Sound" in a PDF, configure the following

Action List:

Select annotations

Remove selection

5.8.4.2 Select annotations appearance streams contents according to annotation selection

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select content based on the selected annotations.

About annotation appearance streams

An appearance stream determines the visual appearance of an annotation (e.g. borders, colors,...). Different from

on page 273 (which only selects the annotation

content

), this Action allows you to also include the appearance stream in your selection, so that other actions can be applied to it. You could for example check for RGB objects only inside appearance streams.

This Action has two options:

•

Select the annotation content if the annotation is selected

: If the annotation is selected, all the PDF objects in the appearance stream will be selected too.

•

Select everything except the annotation content of annotations that are not selected

: This is the inverse of the first option; everything in the PDF is selected, except for the objects inside appearance streams of unselected annotations.

Example

To select all annotations of the type "Text" and change their color, configure the following Action

List:

Select annotations <!-- select Text only - See

Change color <!-- Pick the desired fill/stroke color - See

Select annotations' appearance streams contents according to annotation selection <!--

choose first option -->

To select and change the color of the whole document, including text annotations but excluding video, sound, ... configure the following Action List:

Select annotations <!-- select Text only - See

Change color <!-- Pick the desired fill/stroke color - See

on page 273-->

Select annotations' appearance streams contents according to annotation selection <!--

choose the second option -->

454

PitStop Pro

Change annotations print setting

5.8.4.3 Select annotations by print setting

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects annotations based on their print setting.

Example

To select all printing annotations and remove them

Select annotations by print setting

Remove selection

To select all printing annotations and set them to non-printing

Select annotations by print setting

Change annotations' print setting

See also:

on page 106

5.8.4.4 Select by binding

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows the selection of a PDF based on its binding (left-edge or right-edge binding).

Most European language documents are bound on the left.

Note:

To check a document's binding, in Adobe Acrobat, go to

File

Properties

and switch to the

Advanced

tab. The document's binding property (Left Edge or Right Edge) is displayed under Reading Options.

Related Actions

•

on page 201

•

Change binding

5.8.4.5 Select by document info

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

455

PitStop Pro

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Note:

From version 12 update 2 onwards, you can use regular expressions to define the value in the

Compare with

field (if you select

Equals/Does not equal

as operator method).

Example

Suppose you want to select a document of which the author is Anne Banks. It doesn't matter where this information is taken from.

Attributes:

• Document info: author

• Read value from: any metadata location

Note:

If you select

Both metadata locations

, the name of the author will be searched for in both the XMP metadata stream and the info dictionary; if you select

Most recent metadata location

, only the most recently changed metadata location will be checked.

• Operator method: equals

• Compare with: Anne Banks

If you are not sure about the spelling of the name

Anne

(spelled Ann or Anne?), you could select the

Use regular expressions

checkbox and enter "Ann(e)? Banks" in the

Compare with

field.

Related Actions

•

•

on page 202

5.8.4.6 Select by PDF version

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to make a selection based on the PDF's Acrobat or PDF version.

The Acrobat version is the sum of the two numbers that make up the PDF version, for example:

PDF 1.4 = Acrobat 5.

Example

To select PDFs with Acrobat version higher than 7.0, proceed as follows:

Select by PDF version

456

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

Change PDF version

on page 108

5.8.4.7 Select by trapped flag

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows the selection of a PDF based on the value of the trapped flag.

About trapping

The trapped flag indicates whether or not a file has been "trapped", i.e. has been corrected for slight color misregistrations. The trapped flag must be defined in PDF/X documents.

The flag can be set to:

•

True

: the document has been trapped, or the creator of the document has decided that it should not be trapped.

•

False

: the document has not been trapped

•

Unknown

: it's not known whether or not the document has been trapped. Note that this status should be avoided.

Related Actions

•

•

on page 276

•

on page 214

5.8.4.8 Select document if XMP file identifiers are not present

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects document if XMP file identifiers are not present.

Related Actions

•

on page 116

•

You can check the validity of the links with

on page 183

457

PitStop Pro

5.8.4.9 Select external hyperlink annotations

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects annotations with external links to other files, applications and/or web Pages embedded in a PDF document.

Tip:

on page 205.

5.8.4.10 Select if document metadata is inconsistent

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects if document metadata is inconsistent, i.e. if the metadata values are not identical in the different metadata locations.

How it works

There are two metadata locations in a PDF file:

• The

info dictionary

contains information about the file, such as the title, the author, the creation date ... and is visible through the file's Document properties. It's not in XML format.

• The

XMP metadata stream

also contains information about the file, but this information is represented as XMP metadata - XMP referring to Adobe's labeling technology

xtensible

etadata

latform. All information in the info dictionary is also represented in the XMP metadata stream dictionary, in the form of XMP properties.

Inconsistencies may occur when only one of the metadata locations has been updated.

Extra checks

Optionally you can make the selection only if metadata in one location (selected from the list) is also present in the other location; if all metadata should be present in both locations, select

any metadata location

If multiple creators should not be considered an inconsistency, select the

Allow multiple creators

checkbox.

Related Actions

•

on page 209

•

on page 112

458

PitStop Pro

5.8.4.11 Select document if document XMP metadata contains invalid types

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects the document if metadata streams defined in the PDF do not conform to the XMP schema.

About XMP metadata streams

There are two metadata locations in a PDF file:

• The

info dictionary

contains information about the file, such as the title, the author, the creation date ... and is visible through the file's Document properties. It's not in XML format.

• The

XMP metadata stream

also contains information about the file, but this information is represented as XMP metadata - XMP referring to Adobe's labeling technology

xtensible

etadata

latform. All information in the info dictionary is also represented in the XMP metadata stream dictionary, in the form of XMP properties.

Inconsistencies may occur when only one of the metadata locations has been updated.

on page 209

5.8.4.12 Select if document XMP contains an invalid name space prefix

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects if document XMP contains an invalid namespace prefix.

About XMP metadata

Document Properties in Acrobat (Click the Additional Metadata button, then select Advanced).

on page 208

459

PitStop Pro

current Action list stack. It's typically combined with the

5.9 Operators

5.9.1 Selections

5.9.1.1 AND

Belongs to

•

Category:

Operators

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

AND is a logical operator. This means it is used to select a single object with more than one attribute.

Example

To select text that was Helvetica AND size 12 pt, use:

Select Font Helvetica

Select Text if Point Size = 12.00 pt

AND

Note:

AND is NOT used to select two different objects!

For example,

the following is incorrect

because a font cannot be both Helvetica and Arial:

Select Font Helvetica

Select Font Arial

AND

5.9.1.2 Duplicate top of selection stack

Belongs to

•

Category:

Operator

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Duplicate top of selection stack is a logical operator. It is used to

duplicate

the top of the

Both "Duplicate top of selection stack" and

("delete")

operator.

460

PitStop Pro

For internal use only

group contains the Actions to set the trim marks (using

are only used internally by PitStop.

5.9.1.3 Group Actions

Belongs to

•

Category:

Operator

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to group several Actions within an Action List.

This Action is useful to organize and document your Action List.

Note:

Instead of using the Group Actions Action, you can as well right-click an Action in the Action List and select

Make Group

from the context menu.

How to proceed

Double-click

Group Actions

to add it to the Action List.

Specify a meaningful name for your Action group and enter a description.

Move

Group Actions

to the desired position. You can drag and drop it, or use the options in the context menu (

Move Up

Move Down

Add the required Actions to your Action List and drag them to your group.

Example

The screenshot below shows the

Add my Printer Marks and Enlarge

Action List (by default provided with PitStop). This Action List contains 3 Action groups (preceded by an icon: if the group is expanded; if the group is collapsed):

• The

Registration marks

group contains the different Actions required to add registration marks to the top, bottom, left and right of the page.

• The

Color bars

group contains the Actions to create two color bars.

• The

Trim marks

56).

461

PitStop Pro

5.9.1.4 NOT

Belongs to

•

Category:

Operators

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

NOT is a logical operator. It is used to exclude objects according to their attributes.

Example

To select all the text in a document that was not Arial, you need to exclude Arial from your selection.

Select Text

Select Font Arial

NOT <!-- NOT only applies to the immediately preceding item in the list of selections --

AND

5.9.1.5 OR

Belongs to

•

Category:

Operator

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

OR is a logical operator. It is used to select objects that share attributes.

462

PitStop Pro

Example

To select all text that is either Helvetica or Arial, use the following:

Select Font Helvetica

Select Font Arial

Note:

Do not use OR to exclude objects!

For example, the following will select all 12pt AND 14pt fonts:

Select Text if point size = 12.00 pt

Select Text if point size = 14.00 pt

5.9.1.6 Remove top of selection stack

Belongs to

•

Category:

Operator

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Deletes

the top of the current Action list stack. It's typically combined with the

operator.

For internal use only

Both "Remove top of selection stack" and

are only used internally by PitStop.

5.9.1.7 Select all

Belongs to

•

Category:

Operator

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select every object in a PDF document.

Example

To delete every object in a PDF:

Select all

Remove selection

463

PitStop Pro

Remark

Note that objects that are clipped away (hence are invisible) are selected as well. If you don't want this, we recommend removing them first. You can use

on page 293 and

on page 158 to do so.

5.9.1.8 Select last added objects

Belongs to

•

Category:

Operator

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects the objects that were added recently (in the same Action List).

This Action must be preceded by an Action of the type "Add".

Example

The following Action List will first add graphics to the PDF. The added graphics will then be selected and used by the third Action.

Add copied graphics <!--

Check XY scaling difference <!--

on page 56 -->

Select last added objects

Check XY scaling difference

on page 227 -->

5.10 Page

5.10.1 Changes

5.10.1.1 Add pages

Belongs to

•

Category:

Add; Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to insert either empty pages or pages from a particular PDF file.

464

PitStop Pro

You can choose the number of pages to add, the location of the new pages in the PDF ...

5.10.1.2 Apply page rotation

Belongs to

•

Category:

Position/Size;Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Sets the page rotate key defined in the PDF to 0 °. This may have a visual effect.

Related Actions

•

•

on page 285

•

5.10.1.3 Apply page scaling factor

Belongs to

•

Category:

Position/Size;Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Apply page scaling factor removes the page scaling factor and scales the page to compensate.

A page of 10 by 10 inches and a page scaling factor 2 will be displayed and printed as a page of

20 by 20 inches. By applying the page scaling factor, the actual page size will become 20 by 20 inches.

Page scaling has been introduced in PDF 1.6. If the page scaling factor is not removed or applied, the page size can only be displayed correctly in Acrobat 7 or higher.

Related Actions

•

on page 219

•

5.10.1.4 Center page content

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page;Position/Size

•

Type:

Changes

465

PitStop Pro

What it does

Places all objects in the center of the page.

You can:

• Center the objects horizontally, vertically or both.

• Center the content relative to a page box and set margins (left, right, top and bottom).

• Use page rotation and scaling factor as required.

• Only center the visible part of the content.

5.10.1.5 Change art box

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to create or resize an art box.

You must choose one of the following options:

• To create a new art box, select

Define new rectangle

and enter the required values. Note that boxes are defined from lower left to upper right.

• To resize the art box relative to the axes of the existing art box, select

Resize

and enter the required values.

• To re-use the dimensions from another box, select

Use box size

and select the appropriate page box.

• To determine the size of the art box based on a selection, select

Resize page box to fit the selection

and enter the offset values.

5.10.1.6 Change bleed box

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to create or resize a bleed box.

You must choose one of the following options:

• To create a new bleed box, select

Define new rectangle

and enter the required values. Note that boxes are defined from lower left to upper right.

• To resize a bleed box relative to the axes of the existing bleed box, select

Resize

and enter the required values.

• To re-use the dimensions from another box, select

Use box size

and select the appropriate page box.

466

PitStop Pro

• To determine the size of a bleed box based on a selection, select

Resize page box to fit the selection

and enter the offset values.

5.10.1.7 Change blending color space

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color; Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows to change the blending color space and/or the luminosity softmask blending color space

(if defined in the PDF document).

You can:

• Change the color to CMYK, gray or RGB, or

• Remove the blending color space, by selecting "none" from the first list, or

• Leave one of the color spaces unchanged, by selecting

Do not change

About blending color spaces

blending color space

The blending color space for soft masks (masks with soft transitions) is called the

luminosity softmask blending color space

. It is usually gray.

Related Actions

•

on page 175

•

on page 247

5.10.1.8 Change crop box

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to create or resize a crop box.

You must choose one of the following options:

• To create a new crop box, select

Define new rectangle

and enter the required values. Note that boxes are defined from lower left to upper right.

• To resize a crop box relative to the axes of the existing crop box, select

Resize

and enter the required values.

• To re-use the dimensions from another box, select

Use box size

and select the appropriate page box.

467

PitStop Pro

• To determine the size of a crop box based on a selection, select

Resize page box to fit the selection

and enter the offset values.

5.10.1.9 Change media box

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to create or resize a media box.

You must choose one of the following options:

• To create a new media box, select

Define new rectangle

and enter the required values. Note that boxes are defined from lower left to upper right.

• To resize a media box relative to the axes of the existing media box, select

Resize

and enter the required values.

• To re-use the dimensions from another box, select

Use box size

and select the appropriate page box.

• To determine the size of a media box based on a selection, select

Resize page box to fit the selection

and enter the offset values.

5.10.1.10 Change objects that are close to the page edge

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes objects that are close to the page edge, but do not bleed enough.

You must specify the required distance to the trim box and the distance into the bleed.

Optionally, you can choose to treat subpaths of compound paths individually. In that case, each of the subpaths will be changed separately.

See also:

•

on page 217

•

on page 287

5.10.1.11 Change page box layout

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

468

PitStop Pro

What it does

Changes the page box layout in a PDF to Press, Screen viewing or PDF/X Layout.

The attributes depend on the chosen layout:

•

Press layout

(typically used for print)

If you select this layout, the trim box will be derived from the first page box (out of the list below) that is present on the page. Use the

and

Down

button to move the preferred page box to the top of the list. For example, if

bleed box

is the first item in the list, and

art box

You must also define the minimum distance between the media and bleed boxes and between the bleed and trim boxes.

To get the PDF to display at the size of the media it will be printed on, select the appropriate option:

•

Crop box must equal trim box

, or

•

No crop box must be defined or the crop box equals the media box

. This means that, if the crop box is not defined yet, it will not be added by this Action; if the crop box is defined, it will get the same size and position as the media box.

•

Screen viewing

and

Down

button to move the preferred page box to the top of the list. For example, if

bleed box

is the first item in the list, the crop box/media box will be derived from the bleed box if found in the PDF; if the bleed box is not found, the second page box in the list will be searched for, ...

•

PDF/X layout

If you select this layout, a page may only contain a trim box or an art box, not both.

You must also select the preferred PDF/X version. If you have chosen PDF/X-1a:2003 or PDF/

X-3:2003, the art box or trim box shall not extend beyond the boundaries of the bleed box and the crop box.

To define the trim box relative to the media box, define the desired margins.

Related Actions

on page 222

5.10.1.12 Change page format

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Snaps the page box of your choice to a multiple of either columns or rows.

469

PitStop Pro

This Action is useful for newspapers or magazines with content displayed in columns and rows.

How to proceed

To configure the Change page format Action

Select the page box you wish to define.

Select

A multiple of columns

and/or

A multiple of rows

as required.

Set the preferred column or row width.

Add column/row spacing as required.

Check page format

on page 223

5.10.1.13 Change page orientation

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the page layout to either portrait, landscape or the orientation that is used most in the

PDF.

The page orientation is based on the selected page box. If you don't want to change the page orientation in case all pages have already the same orientation, enable the

Only apply if not all pages have the same orientation

checkbox.

Related Actions

•

on page 285

•

5.10.1.14 Change trim box

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to create or resize a trim box.

You must choose one of the following options:

• To create a new trim box, select

Define new rectangle

and enter the required values. Note that boxes are defined from lower left to upper right.

• To resize a trim box relative to the axes of the existing trim box, select

Resize

and enter the required values.

• To re-use the dimensions from another box, select

Use box size

and select the appropriate page box.

470

PitStop Pro

• To determine the size of a trim box based on a selection, select

Resize page box to fit the selection

and enter the offset values.

5.10.1.15 Flip content

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page;Position/Size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Flips the contents of a selected object horizontally or vertically.

You can flip the content relative to the center of one of the page boxes. Note that you can take page rotation into account as required.

Related Actions

5.10.1.16 Move media box to 0.0

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the coordinates of the media box, so that the lower left corner of the media box is located at coordinates 0,0. This won't change the way the file looks.

Related Actions

•

•

5.10.1.17 Move objects into the page box

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page;Position/Size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Moves the selected objects into a particular page box.

471

PitStop Pro

You can include annotations as required.

Related Actions

•

on page 138

•

on page 124

5.10.1.18 Move objects out of the page box

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page; Position/Size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Moves the selected objects out of a particular page box.

You can can include annotations as required.

Related Actions

•

on page 138

•

on page 124

5.10.1.19 Move page box

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to move one of the page boxes to the desired position.

You can choose which page you want to move, and define the target position in one of the following ways:

• By specifying the position relative to one of the other page boxes, based on the anchor point.

• By specifying the target X and Y coordinates.

• By specifying the values by which the X and Y axis should be moved.

You can take into account page rotation and scaling factor as required.

5.10.1.20 Move page content

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page; Position/Size

•

Type:

Changes

472

PitStop Pro

What it does

Moves the contents of a page in the preferred direction (horizontally or vertically) by the specified distance:

• A positive value, e.g. "1 cm" will move the content to the right (horizontally) or to the top of the page (vertically).

• A negative value, e.g. "-1 cm" will move the content to the left (horizontally) or to the bottom of the page (vertically).

Note:

Remember that the unit used in Actions (in this example "cm") is defined in the

PitStop Pro Preferences (Units & Guides Category).

You can choose whether or not to take into account page rotation and scaling factor (if applicable).

5.10.1.21 Move page content to corner

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page; Position/Size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Moves the contents of a page to a chosen corner.

This Action does not center the object on the corner but moves the closest objects to that corner and moves the other objects by the same distance towards the corner (horizontally or vertically).

Example

To move the page content to the lower left

Select Move page content horizontally to

Left Side

Select Move page content vertically to

Bottom Side

Select the page box to be used as a reference, for example the

media box

Optionally, set

margins

to be added to the media box.

Select the

Use page rotation and scaling factor

checkbox, if page rotation and scaling factor should be taken into account.

5.10.1.22 Normalize page boxes

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

473

PitStop Pro

5.10.1.23 Normalize Page Rotate Key

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to manipulate page rotate keys in a PDF.

You can do one of the following:

• Flatten a rotate key into the page content (no visual effect)

• Introduce a rotate key for landscape pages and flatten it for portrait pages.

You can indicate which page box determines the page orientation. For example, if you select

"trim box" and the trim box is 4 units wide and 3 units tall, the page is considered to have a landscape orientation.

• Remove a rotate key without flattening it into the page content. This may have a visual effect.

Related Actions

•

•

on page 285

•

5.10.1.24 Remove art box

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes the art box from a PDF.

The art box delimits the size a PDF will display in a page layout application like QuarkXPress. An art box is not essential to a PDF's structure and may be removed.

5.10.1.25 Remove bleed box

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes the bleed box from a PDF.

474

PitStop Pro

5.10.1.26 Remove crop box

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes the crop box from a PDF.

The crop box is the PDF page box that defines the frame of a PDF as it is displayed on screen. If you remove this box, the PDF will display at Media Box size.

5.10.1.27 Remove empty page

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Deletes any pages in a PDF document that contain no objects.

Tip:

When you’ve removed the empty pages, check whether the page numbering is still consistent. If necessary, you can correct the page numbering using

Add page number

Related Actions

•

•

5.10.1.28 Remove page scaling factor

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page; Position and size

475

PitStop Pro

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes the page scaling factor an reverts the page to its original size.

A page of 10 by 10 inches and a page scaling factor 2 will be displayed and printed as a page of

20 by 20 inches. By removing the page scaling factor, the page size will be at 10 by 10 inches again.

Page scaling has been introduced in PDF 1.6. If the page scaling factor is not removed or applied, the page size can only be displayed correctly in Acrobat 7 or higher.

Related Actions

•

on page 219

•

on page 117

5.10.1.29 Remove trim box

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes the trim box from a PDF document. The trim box defines the final cut size of a printed

PDF document.

5.10.1.30 Rotate content

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page; Position/Size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Rotates the page content at a particular angle around a particular point.

You could for example rotate the page content at an angle of 90° relative to the center of the media box.

You can choose whether or not to take into account page rotation.

Related Actions

•

on page 227

•

on page 141

•

476

PitStop Pro

5.10.1.31 Rotate page

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to set page rotation to -90, 0, 90 or 180 degrees (clockwise).

Related Actions

on page 128

5.10.1.32 Scale page boxes

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page; Position and size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to scale all page boxes simultaneously.

Specify X and Y scaling percentages. You can anchor the page boxes at a certain corner in the

PDF, for instance at the lower left corner of the media box. You can also choose whether or not to use the page rotation.

Note:

If you want to scale the page boxes proportionally, you need to specify the same values for X and Y.

Related Actions

•

•

•

on page 130

•

on page 133

5.10.1.33 Scale page content

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page;Position/Size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Scales page content along the X and/or Y axis by a certain percentage.

477

PitStop Pro

Note:

If you want to scale the page content proportionally, you need to specify the same values for X and Y.

Example

Suppose you have an A4-size PDF document (210 x 297 mm). You want to keep the page size “as is”, but need to make the page content narrower. You also wish to move the page content to the

upper right corner of the crop box.

How to proceed

Enter the preferred scaling percentage for the X and Y axis.

Do one of the following:

• To define an anchor point, select

Anchored at

• To define the target position of the page contents, select

Moving page content to

Define the anchor point or target position, for example (anchored at/moving to) the upper right of the crop box.

Related Actions

•

•

•

•

on page 133

5.10.1.34 Scale page content to fit

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page; Position/Size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Scales the page content to fit the size of a particular page box. You can add extra margins, if necessary.

478

PitStop Pro

You should also define the target position of the page content inside the page box, e.g. "page content should move to the upper right".

You can choose whether or not to take into account the page rotation and scaling factor.

Example

In the example below, the page content is scaled to fit the size of the trim box (A).

Related Actions

•

on page 130

•

•

•

on page 133

5.10.1.35 Scale to fit page size

Belongs to

•

Category:

Position/Size; Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Scales all page boxes (and optionally all page content as well) until the specified page box fits the target size.

The target size can be specified by defining the target width and height or a percentage for the X and Y axis.

Note:

If you want to scale the page boxes proportionally, you need to specify the same values for X and Y.

You can choose what proportions to keep into account when performing this scaling:

• The proportions of both the page content and the page boxes

• The proportions of the page content only

• No proportions should be taken into account: both the page content and the page boxes can be scaled non-proportionally to match the target page size.

479

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

•

•

on page 130

•

•

on page 133

5.10.1.36 Set page size to the largest in document

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Increases the size of smaller pages in a PDF document, so they are all equal to the size of the largest page.

If a PDF contains pages of different sizes, this may cause problems during the printing process.

You can use this Action to fix this problem.

on page 132

5.10.1.37 Set page size to the smallest in document

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Decreases the size of larger pages in a PDF document, so that they are all equal to the size of the smallest page.

If a PDF contains pages of different sizes, this may cause problems during the printing process.

You can use this Action to fix this problem.

on page 132

5.10.1.38 Shrink page content to fit

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page; Position/Size

•

Type:

Changes

480

PitStop Pro

What it does

You can choose whether or not to take into account page rotation and scaling factor.

Related Actions

•

•

•

on page 130

•

5.10.1.39 Split pages in half

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Splits pages in half in a certain direction (horizontally, vertically, or orientation dependent), based on the desired page box.

Orientation depending means that the landscape pages are split vertically and portrait pages are split horizontally.

Note:

PitStop provides three Actions Lists, allowing you split A4, A5 and US Letter documents in half.

5.10.1.40 Use trim marks to set page box

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page; Position and size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to set the trim box and/or the bleed box based on the trim or bleed marks found in the PDF.

Note:

• Crop marks with a

dash pattern

cannot be used to set the page box.

481

PitStop Pro

• Crop marks generated with Illustrator, InDesign and QuarkXpress are supported.

How to proceed

Indicate which page box you want to set: the trim box, the bleed box or both.

Specify the color of the trim marks by choosing one or more of the following:

• 400% CMYK

• Separation All (registration)

• 100% black

• A specific color.

If desired, specify how much the marks are allowed to deviate from the expected position:

• The unit is the unit set in the PitStop Pro Preferences (Units & Guides category), for example: cm or pt

• The maximum value is 2.7 pt; if you enter a higher value, it is automatically reset to 2.7 pt or an equivalent value (if you're using a different unit).

Example

Related Actions

•

482

PitStop Pro

•

5.10.2 Checks

5.10.2.1 Check for annotations inside art box or trim box

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Searches a PDF for any annotations that appear inside the art box or trim box - an undesirable location for printing.

5.10.2.2 Check for differences in page boxes

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Allows you to compare a certain page box's size with that of another page box.

Example

Check if the media box is x inch wider and y inch higher than the trim box.

5.10.2.3 Check for empty pages

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the PDF has pages without content.

Additionally, you can specify that elements outside of a specific page box should be ignored.

Related Actions

•

483

PitStop Pro

•

5.10.2.4 Check for pre-separated pages

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color; Page

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the PDF document contains any pages that already have been separated.

A pre-separated PDF contains pages that have been separated into their CMYK components.

This separation process is usually carried out by the RIP, and not in the source PDF document.

5.10.2.5 Check for sub-page navigation support

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the PDF supports sub-page navigation, i.e. the possibility to navigate from one layer to another layer on the same page.

Sub-page navigation support is not desired in documents for print.

About page and sub-page navigation

Page navigation allows you to navigate from one

page

to another, whereas sub-page navigation allows you to navigate from

one layer to another layer

on the same page.

Example

5.10.2.6 Check if blending color space is defined

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color; Page

•

Type:

Checks

484

PitStop Pro

What it does

Checks if the page blending color space has been defined in the PDF document.

You must set the required blending color space and the required luminosity softmask blending color.

About blending color spaces

blending color space

The

page blending color space

is the blending color space assigned to a page; it is used when individual artwork does not have a blending color space.

The blending color space for soft masks (masks with soft transitions) is called the

luminosity softmask blending color space

. It is usually gray.

Related Actions

•

on page 68

•

on page 247

5.10.2.7 Check if object is close to the page edge

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks whether the selected object is situated close to the page edge and might need to be enlarged.

You must specify the required distance to the trim box and the distance into the bleed.

Optionally, you can choose to treat subpaths of compound paths individually. In that case, each of the subpaths will be checked separately.

See also:

•

on page 287

•

5.10.2.8 Check if object is completely outside page box

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page; Position and size

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Searches for (and optionally selects) objects that lie completely outside the selected page box.

485

PitStop Pro

Depending on your workflow, you may want to remove these objects before printing.

5.10.2.9 Check if page box is defined

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the selected page box (trim, crop, art or bleed box) has been defined in the PDF.

5.10.2.10 Check if page box is too large

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the selected page box (art, bleed, crop, or trim box) lies inside the media box.

5.10.2.11 Check if page scaling factor is used

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page; Position and size

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks whether the PDF uses a page scaling factor. If so, you can optionally check if a certain page scaling factor applies.

A page with scaling factor 2 will be displayed and printed twice the original size (= scaling factor

1). Page scaling has been introduced in PDF 1.6 and allows you to extend the maximum page size beyond 200 by 200 inch.

Related Actions

•

on page 117

•

5.10.2.12 Check if trim marks match page box

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

486

PitStop Pro

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if trim marks found in the PDF match the trim box and/or the bleed marks match the bleed box.

How to proceed

Indicate which marks you want to check: trim marks, bleed marks or both.

To help PitStop detect the trim marks, specify the potential color of the marks, by choosing one or more of the following:

• 400% CMYK

• Separation All (registration)

• 100% black

• A specific color

In case of a specific color, do one of the following:

• Select a color space from the list and use the sliders to select the appropriate color.

•

Click and select the appropriate color.

•

Select an object with the Enfocus Selection tool and click color from the selection.

to grab the fill or stroke

If desired, specify how much the marks are allowed to deviate from the expected position:

• The unit is the unit set in the PitStop Preferences (Units & Guides category), for example: cm or pt

• The maximum value is 2.7 pt; if you enter a higher value, it is automatically reset to 2.7 pt or an equivalent value, if you're using a different unit.

Example

487

PitStop Pro

Remark

A filled path with 3 lines is accepted as a trim mark if:

• The color is as specified in the attributes of this Action.

• It has no dash pattern.

• The 4 points of the 3 lines are a rectangle.

• The path is closed.

• The width is between 0.1 and 2 pt.

• The length is between 8 and 40 pt.

Related Actions

•

•

5.10.2.13 Check media box origin

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page; Position and size

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks whether the media box is set to coordinates 0,0.

Related Actions

•

•

on page 123

5.10.2.14 Check number of pages

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page;Doc

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks the number of pages in a PDF.

You can for example check if there are less/more than x page(s), or if the PDF contains an odd/ even number of pages ...

488

PitStop Pro

5.10.2.15 Check page bleed box

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks and compares the size of the bleed box with the size of the trim or crop box.

5.10.2.16 Change page box layout

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the page box layout in a PDF to Press, Screen viewing or PDF/X Layout.

The attributes depend on the chosen layout:

•

Press layout

(typically used for print)

If you select this layout, the trim box will be derived from the first page box (out of the list below) that is present on the page. Use the

and

Down

button to move the preferred page box to the top of the list. For example, if

bleed box

is the first item in the list, and

art box

You must also define the minimum distance between the media and bleed boxes and between the bleed and trim boxes.

To get the PDF to display at the size of the media it will be printed on, select the appropriate option:

•

Crop box must equal trim box

, or

•

No crop box must be defined or the crop box equals the media box

. This means that, if the crop box is not defined yet, it will not be added by this Action; if the crop box is defined, it will get the same size and position as the media box.

•

Screen viewing

and

Down

button to move the preferred page box to the top of the list. For example, if

bleed box

is the first item in the list, the crop box/media box will be derived from the bleed box if found in the PDF; if the bleed box is not found, the second page box in the list will be searched for, ...

•

PDF/X layout

489

PitStop Pro

If you select this layout, a page may only contain a trim box or an art box, not both.

You must also select the preferred PDF/X version. If you have chosen PDF/X-1a:2003 or PDF/

X-3:2003, the art box or trim box shall not extend beyond the boundaries of the bleed box and the crop box.

To define the trim box relative to the media box, define the desired margins.

Related Actions

on page 222

5.10.2.17 Check page boxes consistency

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if different page boxes (if defined) have the same size and position.

5.10.2.18 Check page format

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Example

To set all your page boxes to a multiple of 22cm wide

Select

A multiple of columns

To have pages that are always multiples of 22 cm:

Enter 22 cm as column width.

Enter 0 as column spacing.

490

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

Change page format

on page 122

5.10.2.19 Check page orientation

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if all the pages in a PDF have a given orientation (portrait, landscape, all the same orientation or the most used orientation).

The orientation is based on the selected page box.

Related Actions

•

on page 122

•

on page 285

5.10.2.20 Check page rotation angle

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page; Position and size

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks whether the page rotation angle is equal to a specific value.

You can check for a rotation angle of -90°, 0°, 90°, or180° (clockwise).

Related Actions

•

on page 285

•

5.10.2.21 Check page safe type zone

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks for text or objects that overlap or come close to an edge limit in a PDF.

491

PitStop Pro

The safe type zone is the area where you must not place any text or objects, unless these objects are intended as bleed.

How to proceed

Define the safe type zone as one of the page boxes.

Optionally define values for the left, right, top and/or bottom margin.

To make sure that even and odd pages are mirrored, select

Mirror horizontal margins

. This is recommended if the left and right margin have a different size.

Figure 4: Mirror horizontal margins illustrated

Mirror horizontal margins

is not selected. Margins of odd and even pages are the same; the left margin is larger than the right margin.

Mirror horizontal margins

is selected. Odd and even pages are mirrored; the outer margin is smaller than the inner margin.

To only check for text in the page safe type zone, select the

Restrict this check to text

checkbox.

5.10.2.22 Check pages have same size

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Checks

492

PitStop Pro

What it does

Checks whether all pages in a PDF have the same size. The page size is based on the selected page box.

5.10.2.23 Check page size

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Allows you to check if the size or position of a specific page box matches the desired size or position.

How to proceed

Do one of the following:

• To check the coordinates of the selected page box, select

Rectangle

• To check the height and width of the selected page box, select

Size

Select the page box of which you want to check the size or position.

Enter the required values (coordinates or width and height).

In the

Precision

field, indicate how much the actual size or position is allowed to deviate from the entered values.

Related Actions

Select by page size

on page 285

5.10.3 Informs

5.10.3.1 Gather page box information

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Informs

What it does

Collects information about the page boxes used in a PDF document and presents it in the log.

In the report file (under Page boxes), each page box layout is represented by 2 drawings:

493

PitStop Pro

• One to show the page boxes that were defined in the document ("defined" page boxes)

• One to show the actual position of the page ("effective" page boxes).

Below these drawings, an overview of all page boxes and their sizes is listed:

• The pages this page box layout applies to

• The start position of the media box

• The page rotation

• The page scaling factor

5.10.3.2 Gather pages information

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata; Page

•

Type:

Informs

What it does

Collects information about the pages (number of pages and range) in a PDF and presents it in the log.

5.10.4 Selections

5.10.4.1 Select by blending color space

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color; Page

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Makes a selection based on the blending color space.

You must set the required blending color space and the required luminosity softmask blending color (or select the option

Undefined

About blending color spaces

blending color space

The blending color space for soft masks (masks with soft transitions) is called the

luminosity softmask blending color space

. It is usually gray.

Related Actions

•

on page 68

•

on page 175

494

PitStop Pro

5.10.4.2 Select by media box origin

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select pages of which the lower left corner is not located at coordinates 0,0.

Related Actions

•

•

on page 123

5.10.4.3 Select by page orientation

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select pages by orientation.

Choose either Portrait, Landscape, Same orientation or Most used orientation to select all pages with this orientation, and select the page box the orientation must be based on.

Related Actions

•

on page 122

•

5.10.4.4 Select by page rotation angle

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page; Position and Size

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects pages with a certain rotation angle.

You can choose a rotation angle of -90°, 0°, 90°, or 180° (clockwise).

495

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

•

•

5.10.4.5 Select by page size

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select pages based on the size of one of the page boxes.

You can for example select pages with a trim box of 21x29 cm.

The precision indicates how much the actual size is allowed to differ from the specified size. A precision of 0 means that no deviation is allowed: the size needs to match exactly the entered values.

Related Actions

Check page size

on page 225

5.10.4.6 Select color bars

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select color bars with a certain color patch border and patch size.

Note:

PitStop provides an Action List to add color bars.

Example

You could combine this Action with another Action to, for example, delete all color bars at once:

Select color bars

496

PitStop Pro

Remove selection <!--

on page 158 -->

5.10.4.7 Select empty pages

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects pages in a PDF document that contain no objects.

You can specify that elements outside of a specific page box should be ignored.

Related Actions

•

•

5.10.4.8 Select objects close to the page edge

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects objects close to the page edge.

You must specify the distance to the trim box and the distance into the bleed.

Optionally, you can choose to treat subpaths of compound paths individually. In that case, each of the subpaths will be selected separately.

See also:

•

on page 217

•

Add copied graphics <!-- See

5.10.4.9 Select objects if page is selected

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select all objects on the selected page(s).

497

PitStop Pro

5.10.4.10 Select page by its page box properties

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select a number of pages based on one of the following criteria:

• Whether or not a certain page box is defined.

• The fact that the crop or art box differs from the trim box.

• The fact that a certain page box lies (partially) outside of the media box.

• The fact that the size of the bleed box is not sufficient compared to the trim or crop box.

This allows you to detect pages of which the page boxes are not well defined.

5.10.4.11 Select page if content is selected

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select a page if the content is selected.

You can select or both the page object and the entire page content.

How to proceed

Specify

what

you want to select:

• The page object only, or

• Both the page object and the entire page content.

Specify on what

condition

you want to select it, for example if more than one objects are selected.

5.10.4.12 Select pages

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select a particular page, a set of pages, or a page range, for example the first or last page of a PDF, all odd pages, pages from 1 to 5, ...

498

PitStop Pro

You can also make a selection based on the number of pages, for example: Select if number of pages is not a multiple of 10.

Example

To select every page but the first page of a PDF, and then add a copied graphic to that page, proceed as follows:

Select all pages

Select first page

NOT

AND

on page 56 -->

5.10.4.13 Select pages with PieceInfo

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Searches for pages containing PieceInfo.

This can for example apply to pages coming from Illustrator, containing Illustrator PieceInfo.

If a PDF contains PieceInfo, it was saved with editing capabilities from applications such as

Illustrator, which may be lost if you edit the PDF with another application.

Removing PieceInfo will make the file smaller, but it won't be possible anymore to import the document in Illustrator.

5.10.4.14 Select pages with transparent objects

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects pages containing transparency.

About transparency in PDF

Transparency can cause some problems if you view documents in Adobe Acrobat 4.0 or earlier: transparent objects can be rendered incorrectly.

A transparent layer can also cause problems when you transpose the PostScript code of your

PDF document to the halftone information of your printer (the 'ripping').

A typical example is saving graphics with transparent elements as PDF compatible with Acrobat

499

PitStop Pro

It can be useful to make the distinction between spot colors and CMYK colors when checking the transparency settings in your documents, because different rules govern the overprinting of spot colors.

Related Actions

•

on page 228

•

•

on page 298

•

5.10.4.15 Select registration marks

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select potential registration marks with a certain color.

How to proceed

Specify the potential color of the registration marks, by choosing one or more of the following:

• 400% CMYK

• Separation All (registration)

• 100% black

• A specific color

In case of a specific color, do one of the following:

• Select a color space from the list and use the sliders to select the appropriate color.

•

Click and select the appropriate color.

•

Select an object with the Enfocus Selection tool and click color from the selection.

to grab the fill or stroke

Related Actions

Add registration marks

on page 59

5.10.4.16 Select trim marks

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Selections

500

PitStop Pro

What it does

Allows you to select potential trim or bleed marks with a certain color.

How to proceed

Indicate which marks you want to select: trim marks, bleed marks or both.

To help PitStop detect the trim marks, specify the potential color of the marks, by choosing one or more of the following:

• 400% CMYK

• Separation All (registration)

• 100% black

• A specific color

In case of a specific color, do one of the following:

• Select a color space from the list and use the sliders to select the appropriate color.

•

Click and select the appropriate color.

•

Select an object with the Enfocus Selection tool and click color from the selection.

to grab the fill or stroke

If desired, specify how much the marks are allowed to deviate from the expected position:

• The unit is the unit set in the PitStop Preferences (Units & Guides category), for example: cm or pt

• The maximum value is 2.7 pt; if you enter a higher value, it is automatically reset to 2.7 pt or an equivalent value, if you're using a different unit.

Example

501

PitStop Pro

Remark

A filled path with 3 lines is accepted as a trim mark if:

• The color is as specified in the attributes of this Action.

• It has no dash pattern.

• The 4 points of the 3 lines are a rectangle.

• The path is closed.

• The width is between 0.1 and 2 pt.

• The length is between 8 and 40 pt.

Related Actions

•

•

5.10.4.17 Select pages with transparent objects

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects pages containing transparency.

About transparency in PDF

Transparency can cause some problems if you view documents in Adobe Acrobat 4.0 or earlier: transparent objects can be rendered incorrectly.

A transparent layer can also cause problems when you transpose the PostScript code of your

PDF document to the halftone information of your printer (the 'ripping').

A typical example is saving graphics with transparent elements as PDF compatible with Acrobat

It can be useful to make the distinction between spot colors and CMYK colors when checking the transparency settings in your documents, because different rules govern the overprinting of spot colors.

Related Actions

•

on page 228

•

•

on page 298

•

502

PitStop Pro

5.10.5 Settings

5.10.5.1 Override page box defaults

Belongs to

•

Category:

General; Page

•

Type:

Settings

What it does

Replaces the default order (Media > Crop > Art - Bleed - Trim) of the page boxes in a PDF document with the order defined in this Action.

5.11 Position and Size

5.11.1 Changes

5.11.1.1 Apply page rotation

Belongs to

•

Category:

Position/Size;Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Sets the page rotate key defined in the PDF to 0 °. This may have a visual effect.

Related Actions

•

•

on page 285

•

5.11.1.2 Apply page scaling factor

Belongs to

•

Category:

Position/Size;Page

503

PitStop Pro

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Apply page scaling factor removes the page scaling factor and scales the page to compensate.

A page of 10 by 10 inches and a page scaling factor 2 will be displayed and printed as a page of

20 by 20 inches. By applying the page scaling factor, the actual page size will become 20 by 20 inches.

Page scaling has been introduced in PDF 1.6. If the page scaling factor is not removed or applied, the page size can only be displayed correctly in Acrobat 7 or higher.

Related Actions

•

on page 219

•

5.11.1.3 Center page content

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page;Position/Size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Places all objects in the center of the page.

You can:

• Center the objects horizontally, vertically or both.

• Center the content relative to a page box and set margins (left, right, top and bottom).

• Use page rotation and scaling factor as required.

• Only center the visible part of the content.

5.11.1.4 Change position

Belongs to

•

Category:

Position/Size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Moves selected objects to a new position.

You can define an absolute or a relative target position:

•

Move absolute to

moves either all selected objects in one go or each of the selected objects individually to a new position relative to the page they are on.

•

Move relative by

moves an object in relation to itself.

504

PitStop Pro

Indicate whether page rotation and/or the page scaling factor (if applicable) should be taken into account when moving the selection.

5.11.1.5 Crop images

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to crop images to match a clip mask and/or a particular page box.

5.11.1.6 Flip content

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page;Position/Size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Flips the contents of a selected object horizontally or vertically.

You can flip the content relative to the center of one of the page boxes. Note that you can take page rotation into account as required.

Related Actions

5.11.1.7 Move objects into the page box

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page;Position/Size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Moves the selected objects into a particular page box.

You can include annotations as required.

Related Actions

•

on page 138

•

on page 124

505

PitStop Pro

5.11.1.8 Move objects out of the page box

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page; Position/Size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Moves the selected objects out of a particular page box.

You can can include annotations as required.

Related Actions

•

on page 138

•

on page 124

5.11.1.9 Move objects to corner

Belongs to

•

Category:

Position/Size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Moves the selected graphic elements to the defined corner of the selected page box.

How to proceed

Proceed as follows:

Select the anchor point of the object you want to use for positioning the object, for example

"upper left".

Select the anchor point of the specified page box you want to use for positioning, for example

"center".

Select the page box itself, for example "crop box".

Select the

Use page rotation

checkbox as required.

Example

To move the images in your document to the lower right corner of the page, without cutting off the images, use:

Select images

Move objects to corner

<!-- settings (example): Place the lower right corner of the graphic elements

relative to the lower right corner of the trim box -->

If you have chosen to place the center of the graphic elements relative to the lower right corner of the trim box, the center point of the image will be positioned on the lower right corner point of

506

PitStop Pro the trim box, meaning that the right hand side and lower half of the image will lie outside of the trim box.

Related Actions

•

on page 124

•

on page 124

5.11.1.10 Move page content

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page; Position/Size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Moves the contents of a page in the preferred direction (horizontally or vertically) by the specified distance:

• A positive value, e.g. "1 cm" will move the content to the right (horizontally) or to the top of the page (vertically).

• A negative value, e.g. "-1 cm" will move the content to the left (horizontally) or to the bottom of the page (vertically).

Note:

Remember that the unit used in Actions (in this example "cm") is defined in the

PitStop Pro Preferences (Units & Guides Category).

You can choose whether or not to take into account page rotation and scaling factor (if applicable).

5.11.1.11 Move page content to corner

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page; Position/Size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Moves the contents of a page to a chosen corner.

This Action does not center the object on the corner but moves the closest objects to that corner and moves the other objects by the same distance towards the corner (horizontally or vertically).

Example

To move the page content to the lower left

Select Move page content horizontally to

Left Side

Select Move page content vertically to

Bottom Side

Select the page box to be used as a reference, for example the

media box

507

PitStop Pro

Optionally, set

margins

to be added to the media box.

Select the

Use page rotation and scaling factor

checkbox, if page rotation and scaling factor should be taken into account.

5.11.1.12 Normalize line weight

Belongs to

•

Category:

General; LineArt; Position and size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Related Actions

•

•

•

on page 199

5.11.1.13 Remove page scaling factor

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page; Position and size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes the page scaling factor an reverts the page to its original size.

A page of 10 by 10 inches and a page scaling factor 2 will be displayed and printed as a page of

20 by 20 inches. By removing the page scaling factor, the page size will be at 10 by 10 inches again.

Page scaling has been introduced in PDF 1.6. If the page scaling factor is not removed or applied, the page size can only be displayed correctly in Acrobat 7 or higher.

Related Actions

•

on page 219

•

on page 117

5.11.1.14 Rotate content

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page; Position/Size

508

PitStop Pro

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Rotates the page content at a particular angle around a particular point.

You could for example rotate the page content at an angle of 90° relative to the center of the media box.

You can choose whether or not to take into account page rotation.

Related Actions

•

on page 227

•

on page 141

•

5.11.1.15 Rotate object

Belongs to

•

Category:

Position/Size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Rotates an object at a certain amount of degrees around a particular point.

Related Actions

•

on page 227

•

•

5.11.1.16 Rotate objects as group

Belongs to

•

Category:

Position/Size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Rotates a selection of objects at a particular angle around a particular point.

You could for example rotate the selection around the center of the media box at an angle of 90 degrees.

Note:

Rotating objects as a group means that all of the selected objects act as one large object during the rotation.

509

PitStop Pro

How to proceed

Select what specific place in the page box you want to use as the rotation point (center, lower left ...).

Specify the page box of your choice.

Define the rotation angle.

Select the

Use page rotation

checkbox as required.

Related Actions

•

on page 227

•

•

on page 141

5.11.1.17 Rotate page

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to set page rotation to -90, 0, 90 or 180 degrees (clockwise).

Related Actions

on page 128

5.11.1.18 Scale page boxes

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page; Position and size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to scale all page boxes simultaneously.

Specify X and Y scaling percentages. You can anchor the page boxes at a certain corner in the

PDF, for instance at the lower left corner of the media box. You can also choose whether or not to use the page rotation.

Note:

If you want to scale the page boxes proportionally, you need to specify the same values for X and Y.

Related Actions

•

•

510

PitStop Pro

•

on page 130

•

on page 133

5.11.1.19 Scale page content

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page;Position/Size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Scales page content along the X and/or Y axis by a certain percentage.

Note:

If you want to scale the page content proportionally, you need to specify the same values for X and Y.

Example

Suppose you have an A4-size PDF document (210 x 297 mm). You want to keep the page size “as is”, but need to make the page content narrower. You also wish to move the page content to the

upper right corner of the crop box.

How to proceed

Enter the preferred scaling percentage for the X and Y axis.

Do one of the following:

• To define an anchor point, select

Anchored at

• To define the target position of the page contents, select

Moving page content to

Define the anchor point or target position, for example (anchored at/moving to) the upper right of the crop box.

Related Actions

•

•

511

PitStop Pro

•

•

on page 133

5.11.1.20 Scale page content to fit

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page; Position/Size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Scales the page content to fit the size of a particular page box. You can add extra margins, if necessary.

You should also define the target position of the page content inside the page box, e.g. "page content should move to the upper right".

You can choose whether or not to take into account the page rotation and scaling factor.

Example

In the example below, the page content is scaled to fit the size of the trim box (A).

Related Actions

•

on page 130

•

•

•

on page 133

5.11.1.21 Scale to fit page size

Belongs to

•

Category:

Position/Size; Page

•

Type:

Changes

512

PitStop Pro

What it does

Scales all page boxes (and optionally all page content as well) until the specified page box fits the target size.

The target size can be specified by defining the target width and height or a percentage for the X and Y axis.

Note:

If you want to scale the page boxes proportionally, you need to specify the same values for X and Y.

You can choose what proportions to keep into account when performing this scaling:

• The proportions of both the page content and the page boxes

• The proportions of the page content only

• No proportions should be taken into account: both the page content and the page boxes can be scaled non-proportionally to match the target page size.

Related Actions

•

•

on page 130

•

•

on page 133

5.11.1.22 Shrink page content to fit

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page; Position/Size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

You can choose whether or not to take into account page rotation and scaling factor.

Related Actions

•

•

•

on page 130

•

5.11.1.23 Use trim marks to set page box

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page; Position and size

•

Type:

Changes

513

PitStop Pro

What it does

Allows you to set the trim box and/or the bleed box based on the trim or bleed marks found in the PDF.

Note:

• Crop marks with a

dash pattern

cannot be used to set the page box.

• Crop marks generated with Illustrator, InDesign and QuarkXpress are supported.

How to proceed

Indicate which page box you want to set: the trim box, the bleed box or both.

Specify the color of the trim marks by choosing one or more of the following:

• 400% CMYK

• Separation All (registration)

• 100% black

• A specific color.

If desired, specify how much the marks are allowed to deviate from the expected position:

• The unit is the unit set in the PitStop Pro Preferences (Units & Guides category), for example: cm or pt

• The maximum value is 2.7 pt; if you enter a higher value, it is automatically reset to 2.7 pt or an equivalent value (if you're using a different unit).

Example

Related Actions

•

514

PitStop Pro

•

5.11.2 Checks

5.11.2.1 Check for flipped objects

Belongs to

•

Category:

Position/Size

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Searches a PDF for objects that have been flipped, normally using QuarkXpress. These can slow down the RIP.

Related Actions

Flip content

on page 123

5.11.2.2 Check for rotated objects

Belongs to

•

Category:

Position/Size

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if a PDF contains objects that have been rotated in page layout applications such as

QuarkXPress. Older RIPs may have problems with such objects.

Optionally, you can allow deviations of e.g. 7°, meaning that objects that have been rotated at angles between 0° and 7° are logged.

Related Actions

•

on page 141

•

•

5.11.2.3 Check for sheared objects

Belongs to

•

Category:

Position/Size

•

Type:

Checks

515

PitStop Pro

What it does

Checks if the PDF contains objects that have been disproportionally skewed or twisted in a page layout application such as QuarkXpress.

5.11.2.4 Check if object is completely outside page box

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page; Position and size

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Searches for (and optionally selects) objects that lie completely outside the selected page box.

Depending on your workflow, you may want to remove these objects before printing.

5.11.2.5 Check if page scaling factor is used

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page; Position and size

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks whether the PDF uses a page scaling factor. If so, you can optionally check if a certain page scaling factor applies.

A page with scaling factor 2 will be displayed and printed twice the original size (= scaling factor

1). Page scaling has been introduced in PDF 1.6 and allows you to extend the maximum page size beyond 200 by 200 inch.

Related Actions

•

on page 117

•

5.11.2.6 Check media box origin

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page; Position and size

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks whether the media box is set to coordinates 0,0.

516

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

•

•

on page 123

5.11.2.7 Check page rotation angle

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page; Position and size

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks whether the page rotation angle is equal to a specific value.

You can check for a rotation angle of -90°, 0°, 90°, or180° (clockwise).

Related Actions

•

on page 285

•

5.11.2.8 Check XY scaling difference

Belongs to

•

Category:

Position/Size

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks the proportional scaling of a selected object.

In some cases, a small XY scaling difference is allowed, for example in line art (e.g. a rectangle in one color); in images this may cause distortions.

5.11.3 Selections

5.11.3.1 Select by page rotation angle

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page; Position and Size

517

PitStop Pro

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects pages with a certain rotation angle.

You can choose a rotation angle of -90°, 0°, 90°, or 180° (clockwise).

Related Actions

•

•

5.11.3.2 Select objects inside or outside region

Belongs to

•

Category:

Position and Size

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Makes a selection across pages defined by a user-defined area or by PDF page boxes.

This is useful to select (and afterwards remove or move) objects that lay outside the trim box, hence will not be printed.

How to proceed

Define the area inside or outside which the objects should be selected. Choose on of the following options:

•

Define the region relative to the lower left of the media box

: You can manually enter the values of the X and Y axis (the anchor point) and the height and with (the size) of the area, or grab them by clicking the icon .

•

Use

(one of the page boxes): You can choose one of the page boxes, the printing area or either the art or trim box, depending on what's defined (option

the art box (if defined) or trim box

•

Use region relative to page box

: You can specify the exact location of the area to check, for example "place the center left of the region relative to the center right of the bleed box with a particular offset, height and width".

Indicate which objects relative to the defined area should be selected, for example the objects inside or overlapping the region.

Indicate whether or not annotations and clipping paths should be included in the selection.

If applicable, choose whether or not to take into account page rotation and scaling factor.

Example

To select any objects that lay outside of the trim box and delete them, you could use the following:

Select objects inside or outside region <!-- Select "Use trim box" and "Select objects

outside region" -->

518

PitStop Pro

Remove selection

5.11.3.3 Select objects that are completely clipped away

Belongs to

•

Category:

Position and Size

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select objects that are hidden ("clipped away") by other objects of which the shape masks the artwork.

Optionally, you can include invisible objects that belong to this form.

Related Actions

on page 259

5.11.3.4 Select overlapping objects

Belongs to

•

Category:

Position and Size

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects the objects defined by a first selection, that overlap the objects defined by a second selection (within the same Action List).

In order to define the first and second selection, the Select overlapping objects Action needs to be preceded by 2 other selection Actions.

Example

To do so, proceed as follows:

Select color

Select color

Select overlapping objects

Log selection <!-- Choose user-defined text, for example: Magenta objects overlapping

yellow objects have been found -->

5.11.3.5 Select size

Belongs to

•

Category:

Position/Size

519

PitStop Pro

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select any object in a PDF of which the height or width is less than, equal to, or greater than a certain size.

You can choose whether or not to take into account page rotation and scaling factor.

5.12 Prepress

5.12.1 Changes

5.12.1.1 Apply transfer function

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress;Text;LineArt;Color;Image

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Adds a transfer function to paths, text, images or all these types of objects. You can exclude spot colors or apply the transfer function on tint values or alternate values only.

Note:

Transfer functions are not allowed in PDF/X compliant documents.

Related Actions

•

on page 231

•

on page 152

5.12.1.2 Change overprint

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Changes

520

PitStop Pro

What it does

Changes the overprint for a selected object's fill and/or stroke.

How to proceed

Proceed as follows:

To change the Fill/Stroke overprint, select the Fill/Stroke overprint checkbox.

Note:

The checkbox only indicates

what

you want to change,

not how

you want it to change. If none of the checkboxes has been selected, the name of the Action will change into "Do not change overprint".

To enable or disable Fill/Stroke overprint, click the buttons:

•

Overprint is off.

•

Overprint is on.

Tip:

Related Actions

•

•

Select by overprint

on page 295

5.12.1.3 Change overprint mode

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to change the overprint mode of a selection to Standard overprint (OPM 0) or

Illustrator overprint mode (OPM 1).

About overprint modes

• In

Standard overprint mode

(OPM 0), the tint value 0 of one of the CMYK inks in the foreground object has a knockout effect on the color rendering of the underlying object.

In other words, a foreground ink with a C, M, Y or K value of 0 % erases the corresponding background ink. Here, the “foreground inks win” principle applies.

• In

Illustrator overprint mode

(OPM 1), the tint value 0 is neutral: it is ignored (as if it were

“not specified”) and has therefore no effect on the color rendering of the underlying object.

For more information and examples, refer to

the PitStop Pro Reference Guide on the Enfocus website

521

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

•

on page 233

•

5.12.1.4 Change rendering intent

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress;Color

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Modifies the rendering intent of an object to one of the following:

• Absolute Colorimetric

• Relative Colorimetric

• Perceptual

• Saturation

About rendering intents

For more information and examples, refer to

the PitStop Pro Reference Guide on the Enfocus website

(See Chapter "Rendering intents to remap colors").

Related Actions

•

•

on page 178

•

5.12.1.5 Change rendering parameter

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the rendering parameter of your choice to the corresponding rendering parameter of the grabbed object.

Example

To apply a transfer curve from an object to the objects of your selection in the Action List

Select an object in your PDF document, by using the PitStop Select Objects tool .

522

PitStop Pro

In the attributes of the Change rendering parameter Action, select Change

transfer

Click

Grab Transfer From Selection

5.12.1.6 Change smoothness

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the value of smoothness of a selected PostScript curve.

A value of 1 is a good default.

5.12.1.7 Change transparency

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to modify the transparency of the objects in a PDF file.

You can:

• Modify the alpha channel of a fill and/or stroke, by moving the sliders to the desired percentage. Note that, to gain full opacity, you should move the slider to 100%.

• Change the blending modes.

This will change the way in which the colors of a transparent object on top blend with the colors of underlying objects.

To select the blending modes you want to apply, proceed as follows:

Select a blending mode under

Available

Click

Add

to move it to the

Selected

list.

Repeat steps 1-2 as required.

The blending modes will be applied in the order as they appear in the Selected list.

• Turn on or off

Alpha is Shape

as required. This may affect anti-aliasing. (Do not turn it on, unless you really need it.)

• Turn on or off

Text Knockout

If Text Knockout is enabled, the inks of underlying objects, if any, will be cut out on the other separations. This option may be useful in case of overlapping characters.

Related Actions

•

on page 228

•

•

on page 298

523

PitStop Pro

•

Check for custom black generation

5.12.1.8 Clean up unused resources

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes resources that are not used, for example embedded images or fonts, to reduce the file size.

5.12.1.9 Convert PDF/X-4p output intent to PDF/X-4

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Converts PDF/X-4p output intent to PDF/X-4.

PDF/X-4p is used when the ICC profile in the output intent is supplied externally.

In PDF/X-4, the ICC profile in the output intent must be supplied internally, so this Action embedds the external ICC profile.

5.12.1.10 Make mask

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Creates a mask from at least two selected objects (line art or text).

Related Actions

Release mask

on page 151

5.12.1.11 Overprint on all separations

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Changes

524

PitStop Pro

What it does

Ensures that if an object is set to overprint, it overprints on all separations. You can apply the overprint to the fill color and/or the stroke color.

5.12.1.12 Release mask

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes a selected mask.

Related Actions

Make mask

on page 151

5.12.1.13 Remove black generation

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to remove black generation settings.

Related Actions

on page 230

5.12.1.14 Remove custom transfer function

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

525

PitStop Pro

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Remove a custom transfer function applied to an object in a PDF.

Note:

Transfer functions are not allowed in PDF/X compliant documents.

Related Actions

•

on page 66

•

Check for custom halftone

on page 152

5.12.1.15 Remove halftone

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes any custom halftone information from a document.

Related Actions

on page 230

5.12.1.16 Remove halftone phase

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes all halftone phases from a PDF document.

526

PitStop Pro

Note:

It may be interesting to remove halftone phases, because halftone curves, when defined, overrule general transfer curves.

Related Actions

Check halftone phase

5.12.1.17 Remove non-PDF/X compliant halftone

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes any instances of halftones that are not compliant with the PDF/X specification.

Halftoning is a method of printing shades using a single color ink. By varying the size or density of dots, the eye can see a shade somewhere between the solid color and the color of the background paper. Some of these halftones are not allowed according to the PDF/X specification, which is why you might want to remove them.

5.12.1.18 Remove rendering intent

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color; Prepress

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Strips rendering intents from color managed objects in a PDF.

About rendering intents

For more information and examples, refer to

the PitStop Pro Reference Guide on the Enfocus website

(See Chapter "Rendering intents to remap colors").

527

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

•

•

on page 178

•

on page 69

5.12.1.19 Remove transparency

Belongs to

•

Category:

Remove; Prepress

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes transparency from the objects in a PDF file.

You can remove transparency from

all

objects in the PDF, or from objects for which:

• Fill is set to overprint, and/or

• Stroke is set to overprint, and/or

• Spot colors are used.

About transparency in PDF

Transparency can cause some problems if you view documents in Adobe Acrobat 4.0 or earlier: transparent objects can be rendered incorrectly.

A transparent layer can also cause problems when you transpose the PostScript code of your

PDF document to the halftone information of your printer (the 'ripping').

A typical example is saving graphics with transparent elements as PDF compatible with Acrobat

It can be useful to make the distinction between spot colors and CMYK colors when checking the transparency settings in your documents, because different rules govern the overprinting of spot colors.

Related Actions

•

on page 228

•

•

on page 298

•

Check for custom undercolor removal

5.12.1.20 Remove undercolor removal

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Changes

528

PitStop Pro

What it does

Removes any custom undercolor removal information from a PDF.

Related Actions

on page 231

5.12.2 Checks

5.12.2.1 Check flatness

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Allows you to check the minimum or maximum flatness of a line art curve.

The default setting to produce a smooth curve is 1. A value higher than 1 can produce a jaggy edge; lower than 1 can slow down the RIP.

Related Actions

•

•

5.12.2.2 Check for custom black generation

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if custom black generation curves (BG) have been included in the PDF document.

Black generation (BG) is the process of adding black ink to CMY-generated black and gray, in order to achieve a clear black color and to save valuable color ink.

Related Actions

Remove black generation

529

PitStop Pro

5.12.2.3 Check for custom halftone

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Searches a PDF for objects to which custom halftones are applied.

Related Actions

Remove halftone

5.12.2.4 Check for custom transfer function

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if a PDF contains objects to which transfer functions are applied.

Note:

Transfer functions are not allowed in PDF/X compliant documents.

Related Actions

•

on page 66

530

PitStop Pro

•

Remove undercolor removal

on page 152

5.12.2.5 Check for custom undercolor removal

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if custom undercolor removal definitions (UCR) have been included in the PDF document.

Related Actions

on page 155

5.12.2.6 Check for non-PDF/X compliant halftone

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Searches a PDF for objects with halftones that are not compliant with the PDF/X specification.

Halftoning is a method of printing shades using a single color ink. By varying the size or density of dots, the eye can see a shade somewhere between the solid color and the color of the background paper. Some of these halftones are not allowed according to the PDF/X specification.

Related Actions

Remove non-PDF/X compliant halftone

on page 153

5.12.2.7 Check for non-standard blend modes

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Checks

531

PitStop Pro

What it does

Checks whether the PDF contains objects with a blend mode other than one of the standard blend modes.

Blend modes determine how colors on different layers blend with each other. For more information about blend modes, visit the Adobe website (

http://www.adobe.com

) or refer to the

Help or documentation of your design application (Adobe InDesign, QuarkXPress, ...)

Related Actions

Select by blend modes

on page 294

5.12.2.8 Check for transparent objects

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Searches the PDF document for any objects with transparency. You can restrict your search to transparent objects with fill overprint, strike overprint or spot color.

About transparency in PDF

Transparency can cause some problems if you view documents in Adobe Acrobat 4.0 or earlier: transparent objects can be rendered incorrectly.

A transparent layer can also cause problems when you transpose the PostScript code of your

PDF document to the halftone information of your printer (the 'ripping').

A typical example is saving graphics with transparent elements as PDF compatible with Acrobat

It can be useful to make the distinction between spot colors and CMYK colors when checking the transparency settings in your documents, because different rules govern the overprinting of spot colors.

Related Actions

•

on page 298

•

•

•

5.12.2.9 Check halftone phase

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

532

PitStop Pro

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks the PDF documents for the presence of halftone phases.

Related Actions

Remove halftone phase

on page 153

5.12.2.10 Check if object is set to knockout

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if a selected object is set to knockout or not. You can distinguish between the fill and stroke being 'knocked out'.

If an object is set to knockout, the colors of this object cut out the area underneath. The background color is erased.

5.12.2.11 Check if object is set to overprint

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the fill and/or stroke of a selected object is set to overprint.

Black objects and particularly smaller text objects should be set to overprint, to compensate for misregistration and to preserve the legibility of the text.

Related Actions

5.12.2.12 Check ink coverage (basic object check)

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color;Prepress

533

PitStop Pro

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks the total CMYK ink coverage of the color of the

objects

in the PDF.

You can for example check if the ink coverage is at least 300%.

5.12.2.13 Check ink coverage (total page check)

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color;Prepress

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks the total CMYK ink coverage of all colors on a page (inside a particular page box).

You can for example check if the total ink coverage in the media box is at least 300%.

It's also possible to ignore small areas, for example areas smaller than 1 inch.

5.12.2.14 Check line weight

Belongs to

•

Category:

LineArt; Prepress

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the line weight of the selected objects is higher or lower than a particular value.

Related Actions

•

•

•

on page 84

5.12.2.15 Check overprint mode

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

534

PitStop Pro

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if fill and/or stroke overprint is set to Standard overprint mode (OPM 0), or Illustrator overprint mode (OPM 1).

About overprint modes

• In

Standard overprint mode

(OPM 0), the tint value 0 of one of the CMYK inks in the foreground object has a knockout effect on the color rendering of the underlying object.

In other words, a foreground ink with a C, M, Y or K value of 0 % erases the corresponding background ink. Here, the “foreground inks win” principle applies.

• In

Illustrator overprint mode

(OPM 1), the tint value 0 is neutral: it is ignored (as if it were

“not specified”) and has therefore no effect on the color rendering of the underlying object.

For more information and examples, refer to

the PitStop Pro Reference Guide on the Enfocus website

Related Actions

•

•

5.12.2.16 Check rendering intent

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color; Prepress

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Allows you to check the rendering intent of particular objects (Paths, Text, Paths or Text,

Images, or all Rendering objects) in a PDF.

You can check whether or not they use rendering, and if they do, which type:

• Absolute Colorimetric

• Relative Colorimetric

• Perceptual

• Saturation

About rendering intents

For more information, refer to the chapter "Rendering intents to remap colors" in

the PitStop

Pro Reference Guide on the Enfocus website

Related Actions

•

535

PitStop Pro

•

on page 69

•

Check for non-standard blend modes

5.12.3 Selections

5.12.3.1 Select by blend modes

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select objects with or without one or more specific blending modes.

Blend modes determine how colors on different layers blend with each other. For more information about blend modes, visit the Adobe website (

http://www.adobe.com

) or refer to the

Help or documentation of your design application (Adobe InDesign, QuarkXPress, ...)

Related Actions

on page 232

5.12.3.2 Select by graphic state attributes

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select objects based on their graphic state attributes.

You can select one of the following object types:

• Objects with non-PDF/X-1 compliant halftone info

• Objects with transfer function info

• Objects with halftone info

• None

Viewing the graphic state attributes of an object

Proceed as follows:

Select the object, using the PitStop Select Objects tool .

Click to display the Enfocus Inspector.

Select (

Prepress

) > (General) or (

Halftone

536

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

•

Check for non-PDF/X compliant halftone

•

on page 231

5.12.3.3 Select by ink coverage (basic object check)

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color; Prepress

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Makes a selection of all objects that meet your ink coverage criteria.

You can for example select objects only if the ink coverage is at least 300%.

on page 176

5.12.3.4 Select by overprint

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects objects based on the overprint mode of their fill and/or stroke.

How to proceed

Proceed as follows:

To select objects based on their fill/stroke overprint, select the corresponding checkbox.

For example, to select object based on the overprint mode of their stroke, select

Stroke overprint

Indicate whether overprint must be enabled or disabled for the options selected in step 1, by clicking the buttons.

•

Overprint is off.

•

Overprint is on.

537

PitStop Pro

Tip:

Related Actions

•

•

5.12.3.5 Select by overprint mode

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select objects based on the overprint mode of their fill and/or stroke color.

About overprint modes

• In

Standard overprint mode

(OPM 0), the tint value 0 of one of the CMYK inks in the foreground object has a knockout effect on the color rendering of the underlying object.

In other words, a foreground ink with a C, M, Y or K value of 0 % erases the corresponding background ink. Here, the “foreground inks win” principle applies.

• In

Illustrator overprint mode

(OPM 1), the tint value 0 is neutral: it is ignored (as if it were

“not specified”) and has therefore no effect on the color rendering of the underlying object.

For more information and examples, refer to

the PitStop Pro Reference Guide on the Enfocus website

Related Actions

•

•

on page 233

5.12.3.6 Select by rendering intent

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color;Prepress

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects color managed objects based on a particular rendering intent.

You can select paths, text, images, or all rendering objects, with one of the the following rendering intents:

538

PitStop Pro

• Absolute Colorimetric

• Relative Colorimetric

• Perceptual

• Saturation

About rendering intents

For more information and examples, refer to

the PitStop Pro Reference Guide on the Enfocus website

(See Chapter "Rendering intents to remap colors").

Related Actions

•

on page 69

•

on page 178

•

•

5.12.3.7 Select flatness

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select objects with a flatness setting equal to or higher/lower than a certain value.

The default setting to produce a smooth curve is 1. A value higher than 1 can produce a jaggy edge; lower than 1 can slow down the RIP.

Example

If the curves in a PDF are showing visible line segments, try the following to solve the problem:

Select flatness

Change flatness

Related Actions

•

•

5.12.3.8 Select transparent objects

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Selections

539

PitStop Pro

What it does

Allows you to select transparent objects.

You can check the transparency of different elements, such as the fill or stroke, the blend modes, ... For the whole list of options, check the attributes of the Action in PitStop.

You can select all transparent objects or restrict your selection to objects that have

all

at least one

of the following properties:

• Fill is set to overprint

• Stroke is set to overprint

• Graphic element uses a spot color

About transparency in PDF

Transparency can cause some problems if you view documents in Adobe Acrobat 4.0 or earlier: transparent objects can be rendered incorrectly.

A transparent layer can also cause problems when you transpose the PostScript code of your

PDF document to the halftone information of your printer (the 'ripping').

A typical example is saving graphics with transparent elements as PDF compatible with Acrobat

It can be useful to make the distinction between spot colors and CMYK colors when checking the transparency settings in your documents, because different rules govern the overprinting of spot colors.

Related Actions

•

on page 228

•

•

•

5.13 Remove

5.13.1 Changes

5.13.1.1 Remove Certified PDF workflow information

Belongs to

•

Category:

Remove

540

PitStop Pro

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes Certified PDF workflow information from a PDF.

For more information and examples, refer to

the PitStop Pro Reference Guide

(Chapter: Working with Certified PDF documents).

Related Actions

Check Certified PDF state

on page 181

5.13.1.2 Remove empty layers

Belongs to

•

Category:

Remove; Layers

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes empty layers selected by another Action in the same Action List.

Example

The following Action List will remove

all

empty layers in the PDF:

Remove empty layers

To remove Layer1 and 2, if they are empty:

Select layers by name <!--

on page 268 - Choose "equals Layer

[12]" and "Use regular expressions" -->

Remove empty layers

About PDF layers

Layered content usually comes from applications such as InDesign, AutoCAD or Visio. When converted to PDF, the layers are retained and can be viewed and navigated in Adobe Acrobat.

However, if you print a PDF file that contains layers, only the content that is visible on-screen is printed. This may or may not be desired.

"Conventional" layers versus PDF layers

Layers in digital image editing

Layers in PDF

have a different meaning. They are used to hide or show page content:

• Turning

a layer, all objects on this layer are shown on-screen.

• Turning

off

a layer, all objects on this layer are hidden, i.e. they become invisible.

541

PitStop Pro

To work with layers in a PDF document in Adobe Acrobat, select

View

Show/Hide

Navigation Panes

Layers

For more information, refer to the Adobe Acrobat help.

Related Actions

Check for invisible objects without fill and stroke

on page 97

5.13.1.3 Remove invisible objects without fill and stroke

Belongs to

•

Category:

Remove

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes objects that have no fill or stroke color associated with them.

Designers sometimes leave such objects in a document rather than deleting them.

Related Actions

•

on page 190

•

on page 261

5.13.1.4 Remove object compression

Belongs to

•

Category:

Remove

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes the object compression from a PDF.

About object compression

Related Actions

•

on page 187

542

PitStop Pro

•

on page 191

5.13.1.5 Remove selection

Belongs to

•

Category:

Remove

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes any currently selected object in a PDF.

5.13.1.6 Remove transparency

Belongs to

•

Category:

Remove; Prepress

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes transparency from the objects in a PDF file.

You can remove transparency from

all

objects in the PDF, or from objects for which:

• Fill is set to overprint, and/or

• Stroke is set to overprint, and/or

• Spot colors are used.

About transparency in PDF

Transparency can cause some problems if you view documents in Adobe Acrobat 4.0 or earlier: transparent objects can be rendered incorrectly.

A transparent layer can also cause problems when you transpose the PostScript code of your

PDF document to the halftone information of your printer (the 'ripping').

A typical example is saving graphics with transparent elements as PDF compatible with Acrobat

It can be useful to make the distinction between spot colors and CMYK colors when checking the transparency settings in your documents, because different rules govern the overprinting of spot colors.

Related Actions

•

on page 228

•

543

PitStop Pro

•

on page 298

•

5.14 Text

5.14.1 Changes

5.14.1.1 Add font metadata

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Adds font information to the PDF's metadata (based on the font resource).

About font metadata

Font metadata is descriptive information about the fonts used in a PDF, for example the name of the font, its type and encoding. You can find the font metadata of a file in Adobe Acrobat by selecting

File

Document Properties

and switching to the

Fonts

tab.

Related Actions

Check font metadata

5.14.1.2 Apply transfer function

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress;Text;LineArt;Color;Image

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Adds a transfer function to paths, text, images or all these types of objects. You can exclude spot colors or apply the transfer function on tint values or alternate values only.

544

PitStop Pro

Note:

Transfer functions are not allowed in PDF/X compliant documents.

Related Actions

•

on page 231

•

on page 152

5.14.1.3 Change character spacing

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the amount of space between two characters in a selected text string.

The amount of space is expressed in 'em' units. An 'em' refers to the width of the capital M in the current font.

5.14.1.4 Change corrupt font widths

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes corrupt font widths.

Corrupt font widths may occur in a PDF, when "artificial" bold or italic was used instead of the

"bold" or "italic" version of the font concerned. For example, if "Futura" is used in your PDF, the

"Futura-Bold" and "Futura-Oblique" fonts should be used instead of applying bold and italics on the regular Futura font. Artificial font may cause problems when printing the PDF.

Related Actions

•

on page 235

•

5.14.1.5 Change fill and/or stroke

Belongs to

•

Category:

LineArt;Text

545

PitStop Pro

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to turn on or off the fill and/or stroke for the selected objects.

5.14.1.6 Change fill type

Belongs to

•

Category:

LineArt;Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to change the fill type of the selected objects to either Non-Zero Winding (Fill) or

Even-odd (Eofill).

About the fill type

The fill type is an attribute of polygons and loops: compound paths with intersecting lines. To determine whether a point is part of the shape, two different rules can be applied:

• The

Non-Zero Winding

• For every edge that crosses the line from the point inside the shape in one direction, add 1 to the winding number.

• For every edge that crosses the line in the opposite direction, subtract 1.

If the winding number is not equal to zero, the shape area to which the point belongs, is filled. For more information, refer to

http://www.wikipedia.org/wiki/nonzero-rule

• The

Even-odd rule

: This rule also supposes that you draw a line between a point inside the shape outline and a point outside its outline.

• If that line crosses the line of the shape an odd number of times, the shape area to which the point belongs, is filled.

• If the number of crossings is even, the area is not filled.

Checking the fill type of line art

To see which rule is applied, check the object's fill attributes:

Select the object, using the Enfocus Select tool .

Click to display the Enfocus Inspector and select

At the bottom, check which button is selected:

•

Fill

is selected, the

Non-zero Winding rule

applies.

•

Eofill

is selected, the

Even-odd

rule applies.

546

PitStop Pro

5.14.1.7 Change flatness

Belongs to

•

Category:

LineArt;Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to set the flatness of a PostScript curve.

The flatness determines how the objects in a document are printed on a PostScript printer.

Related Actions

•

•

5.14.1.8 Change font

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to replace the current font with another one.

Choose the font that should replace the current font:

• To combine a font name with the preferred type and subtype, select

Search for a font by name

Click

Select Font Name

and select the appropriate font. Click

Select the preferred type and subtype.

Select the

Embed

checkbox as required.

• To use an existing font, select

Select an existing font

Click

Create Font Resource

Select the appropriate font.

Select

Embed

Don't embed

Embed Subset

Click

547

PitStop Pro

You should also indicate how the embedded composite font should be handled.

5.14.1.9 Change line cap

Belongs to

•

Category:

LineArt;Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes how the end of a vector line looks like.

How to proceed

•

To have the line end exactly, click

•

To put a round end on the line, click

•

butt

round

To have corners projected beyond the length of the line, click

projecting square

5.14.1.10 Change line join

Belongs to

•

Category:

LineArt; Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes how a corner on a vector line looks like.

How to proceed

•

To have a sharp corner, click

•

miter

To put a round corner on the line, click

•

To flatten the corners, click

bevel

round

5.14.1.11 Change line weight

Belongs to

•

Category:

LineArt;Text

•

Type:

Changes

548

PitStop Pro

What it does

Changes the thickness of a selected line to the desired line weight.

Related Actions

•

on page 84

•

•

on page 199

5.14.1.12 Change miter limit

Belongs to

•

Category:

LineArt; Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the length of the extension of a corner on a vector line.

The miter limit is the limit when a join switches from mitered (pointed) to beveled (squared-off).

To allow “pointier” angles, you can increase the miter limit.

For more information on how to calculate the miter limit, refer to the topic "Stroke attributes:

Miter limit" in

the PitStop Pro Reference Guide on the Enfocus website

5.14.1.13 Change point size

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the point size of a selection by or to a given amount.

5.14.1.14 Change stroke adjustment

Belongs to

•

Category:

LineArt; Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to enable or disable stroke adjustment.

Stroke adjustment takes care of the rendering of paths on a raster device (printing device, computer monitor, etc.).

549

PitStop Pro

Example

If stroke adjustment is

turned off

, the device will draw the pixel only if it covers the path for more than 50%.

This means that a 1 pixel wide line can be drawn in different ways:

• If the line is drawn nicely on top of a pixel of the screen, the line will look fine.

• If the line is spread over 2 pixels of the screen, the width will be 2 pixels on some places and

1 pixel on other places, turning the line into an ugly, jaggy line.

If stroke adjustment is

turned on

, a correction will be made in such a way that the line looks nice and has the same width (1 pixel) everywhere.

5.14.1.15 Change word spacing

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the word spacing of a selected text string to a given value (in em).

5.14.1.16 Convert text to outlines

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to outline the text segments in your selection.

This can be useful to make sure that your text is printed exactly "as is" or, if you cannot embed the font, for example due to font licensing restrictions.

Note:

By default, invalid characters (often represented as a small box containing an X or a question mark) are not converted, unless you select the

Outline invalid characters

(.notdef glyph)

checkbox.

5.14.1.17 Embed font

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

550

PitStop Pro

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Embeds a selected font if it is available on the system of the machine PitStop is running on.

You can include the entire font or only embed a subset.

About embedding fonts

Embedding fonts

Embedding a font as a

subset

means that only those characters of the font that are actually used in the text are embedded. This reduces the file size by not including superfluous font information.

Related Actions

•

on page 168

•

on page 299

•

5.14.1.18 Fix invalid characters (.notdef usage)

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Fixes invalid .notdef glyphs in a PDF.

.notdef glyphs are replacement characters for undefined characters in a PDF; they often look like a small box containing an X or a question mark and are not PDF/X compliant.

on page 240

5.14.1.19 Fix non well-formed XMP metadata

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Corrects badly formed XMP metadata and optionally removes it, if it cannot be fixed, ensuring that PDF files can be made PDF/X-4 compliant.

551

PitStop Pro

About XMP metadata

Document Properties in Acrobat (Click the

Additional Metadata

button, then select

Advanced

Related Actions

on page 211

5.14.1.20 Merge into text lines

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to merge text into text lines.

This Action merges all text that occurs on one line and has the same font into one text object.

This is useful if you want to change text (e.g. the font) on a line by line basis.

Related Actions

•

on page 167

•

on page 167

5.14.1.21 Split in characters

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to split text objects in a PDF in separate characters.

This allows you to change for example the font or format of single characters (e.g. increase the size of capital letters).

Related Actions

•

on page 167

552

PitStop Pro

•

5.14.1.22 Split in words

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to split the text objects in a PDF in separate words, for example to modify the spacing.

Related Actions

•

on page 167

•

5.14.1.23 Strip OpenType embedded fonts

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to remove the font's OpenType

info

from the PDF.

An OpenType embedded font is a PDF font resource that has its font embedded in the 'FontFile3' key with as 'SubType' the value 'OpenType'. This is not supported by older software. Running this

Action will convert the PDF font resource to a format that is supported by older software as well.

5.14.1.24 Unembed font

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes embedded fonts from a document.

This can make the PDF lighter for internet distribution but risks messing up formatting if the font is not present on the end user's machine.

Optionally, you can choose not to execute this Action if the resulting font is unsafe.

553

PitStop Pro

About embedding fonts

Embedding fonts

Embedding a font as a

subset

means that only those characters of the font that are actually used in the text are embedded. This reduces the file size by not including superfluous font information.

Related Actions

Embed font

on page 165

5.14.2 Checks

5.14.2.1 Check CMap

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if a PDF contains an embedded CMap, and if so, whether its name is consistent with any matching external file. This is necessary for PDF/A compliance.

About CMaps

CMap (Character Map) is a mapping of character codes to an ID. This ID is used to map the characters to the correct glyphs.

CMaps can be external or embedded:

• When the CMap is external, it is referenced in the PDF by a name.

Note:

Some CMaps are shipped (as external files) along with PitStop.

• When the CMap is embedded, it's often also referenced inside the PDF.

5.14.2.2 Check corrupt font widths

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Checks

554

PitStop Pro

What it does

Searches a PDF for fonts that have corrupt widths. You might want to remove or replace these fonts.

Corrupt font widths may occur in a PDF, when "artificial" bold or italic was used instead of the

"bold" or "italic" version of the font concerned. For example, if "Futura" is used in your PDF, the

"Futura-Bold" and "Futura-Oblique" fonts should be used instead of applying bold and italics on the regular Futura font. Artificial font may cause problems when printing the PDF.

Related Actions

•

•

5.14.2.3 Check embedded font is OpenType

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Allows you to check if the embedded font is OpenType.

About OpenType embedded fonts

OpenType is an extension of the TrueType format that can contain TrueType and/or Type 1 font data. In PDF files it can only appear as an embedded font. It has been introduced in PDF 1.6.

Related Actions

•

Select OpenType embedded fonts

on page 299

•

on page 303

5.14.2.4 Check font by name

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks for the presence of a particular font.

Enter the name of the font you want to check for in the text field, or use the

FontPicker

button to select it.

Note:

From version 12 update 2 onwards, you can use a regular expression to define the font name.

555

PitStop Pro

5.14.2.5 Check font embedding

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks whether or not fonts are embedded.

About embedding fonts

Embedding fonts

Embedding a font as a

subset

means that only those characters of the font that are actually used in the text are embedded. This reduces the file size by not including superfluous font information.

Related Actions

•

on page 299

•

Select fonts by license

on page 168

5.14.2.6 Check font license

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks which operations the font's license allows without obtaining permission from the font's owner.

These operations are:

• Embed

• Subset

• Outline

• Preview and print

556

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

on page 300

5.14.2.7 Check font metadata

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Allows you to check if the fonts in the PDF have been added correctly to the metadata.

About font metadata

Font metadata is descriptive information about the fonts used in a PDF, for example the name of the font, its type and encoding. You can find the font metadata of a file in Adobe Acrobat by selecting

File

Document Properties

and switching to the

Fonts

tab.

Related Actions

Add font metadata

on page 159

5.14.2.8 Check font subsetting

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if fonts are subsetted or complete.

If a font is subsetted, only the characters of the font that are actually used in the text are embedded in the document. This is done to to keep a file as small as possible.

Related Actions

•

Check if a subset font contains a complete CharSet or CIDSet

on page 305

•

on page 239

5.14.2.9 Check font type

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Checks

557

PitStop Pro

What it does

Checks for particular font types in a PDF.

You can check for:

• TrueType

• Type 1

• Type 3

• Multiple Master

• Composite TT

• Composite T1

• Composite (all types)

About types of fonts

Refer to the

PitStop Pro Reference Guide

on the Enfocus website (Chapter: Types of fonts and their usage).

Related Actions

Select fonts by type

on page 301

5.14.2.10 Check font vendor

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks to see if fonts from a particular vendor have been used in a PDF.

5.14.2.11 Check for artificial font style

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Searches a PDF for instances of artificial font style (artificial bold, italic or outline style).

About artificial font style

Some fonts consist of specific

font families

Certain design programs or word processors allow you to adapt the style of these fonts artificially. You can select text and to put it in italics or in bold by selecting the respective style

558

artificial bold or italic style

5.14.2.12 Check for city fonts

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Searches a PDF for instances of city fonts.

City fonts are bitmap fonts that tend not to produce good results when printed.

5.14.2.13 Check if a subset font contains a complete CharSet or

CIDSet

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the subset fonts embedded in the document (if any) contain a complete character or

CID set.

CID (Character Identifier) fonts are a format of Type 1 fonts that are typically used for Chinese,

Japanese and Korean fonts.

Related Actions

•

on page 305

559

PitStop Pro

•

5.14.2.14 Check if font contains all glyphs and metrics for all characters used

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Searches the PDF document for fonts that don't have the character set required to display and print the used characters correctly.

Optionally, you can include in your check the glyphs that were removed by subsetting fonts.

You can then replace these fonts by embedded or subset fonts that do have all required glyphs and metrics.

5.14.2.15 Check if invalid character (.notdef glyph) is used

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the PDF contains invalid characters.

on page 166

5.14.2.16 Check if TrueType fonts are PDF/X-4 or PDF/X-4p compliant

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if TrueType fonts are PDF/X-4 or PDF/X-4p compliant.

560

PitStop Pro

About OpenType embedded fonts

OpenType is an extension of the TrueType format that can contain TrueType and/or Type 1 font data. In PDF files it can only appear as an embedded font. It has been introduced in PDF 1.6.

on page 302

5.14.2.17 Check presence of ToUnicode map in font

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the unicode mappings of the fonts are compliant with a particular PDF/A version.

This mapping is used to override the default text extraction behavior, for example when using the Acrobat text tool to copy and paste text to another application like Notepad.

5.14.2.18 Check text point size

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks the text point size against a particular value.

Examples

Text point size must be equal to 5 pt.

To check the minimum text point size, select "Text point size must be more than or equal to ...

pt" and enter the appropriate value.

5.14.2.19 Check text x-height

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Checks

561

PitStop Pro

What it does

Note that the check only can work if at least one of the characters to be measured (x, u, v, w or z) is available in the PDF.

5.14.2.20 Check that composite TrueType CIDToGIDMap is present

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the PDF contains a mapping table for composite TrueType fonts to map CID (Character

IDs) to GID (Clyph IDs), and if it's correctly defined. This is required by the PDF/A specification.

CID (Character Identifier) fonts are a format of Type 1 fonts that are typically used for Chinese,

Japanese and Korean fonts.

GID (Glyph Identifier) are identifiers to identify all glyphs in a font.

5.14.2.21 Check TrueType font encoding according to PDF/A

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks whether the Truetype font used in the PDF complies with a given version of the PDF/A specification. Fonts must for example be embedded in the PDF.

5.14.3 Informs

5.14.3.1 Gather font information

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Informs

562

PitStop Pro

What it does

Collects information about fonts used in a PDF and presents it in the log.

The following information is logged:

• Font Name

• Type

• Encoding

• Embedded

• Subset

5.14.4 Selections

5.14.4.1 Select clipping and non-clipping text

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects all text segments, even if they have been clipped and are not visible anymore.

Tip:

If you want to select non-clipping text only, you can use

5.14.4.2 Select corrupt font widths

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select all text with a corrupt font width.

Corrupt font widths may occur in a PDF, when "artificial" bold or italic was used instead of the

"bold" or "italic" version of the font concerned. For example, if "Futura" is used in your PDF, the

"Futura-Bold" and "Futura-Oblique" fonts should be used instead of applying bold and italics on the regular Futura font. Artificial font may cause problems when printing the PDF.

Related Actions

•

on page 235

563

PitStop Pro

•

5.14.4.3 Select embedded fonts

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select all embedded or unembedded fonts in a PDF document.

The selection of embedded fonts includes OpenType embedded fonts.

About embedding fonts

Embedding fonts

Embedding a font as a

subset

means that only those characters of the font that are actually used in the text are embedded. This reduces the file size by not including superfluous font information.

About OpenType embedded fonts

OpenType is an extension of the TrueType format that can contain TrueType and/or Type 1 font data. In PDF files it can only appear as an embedded font. It has been introduced in PDF 1.6.

Related Actions

•

•

on page 168

•

on page 235

5.14.4.4 Select fonts by license

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select fonts that allow certain operations without obtaining permission from the font's owner.

These operations are:

• Embed

564

PitStop Pro

• Subset

• Outline

• Preview and print

Related Actions

Check font license

on page 236

5.14.4.5 Select fonts by name

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select all the fonts with a particular name.

Note:

From version 12 update 2 onwards, you can use regular expressions to define the font name.

Example

To select all the Times, Arial, Helvetica and Courier fonts in a PDF, you could use the following sequence of Actions:

Select font Times

Select font Arial

Select font Helvetica

Select font Courier

5.14.4.6 Select fonts by type

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects text using a particular font type.

You can select one of the following font types:

• TrueType

• Type1

• Type3

• Multiple Master

• Composite TT

565

PitStop Pro

• Composite T1

• Composite (all types)

About types of fonts

Refer to the

PitStop Pro Reference Guide

(Chapter: Types of fonts and their usage), available on the Enfocus website.

Example

For example, to unembed TrueType fonts without unembedding any other font types, do the following:

Select TrueType fonts

Unembed font <!-- See

on page 168 -->

Related Actions

Check font type

on page 237

5.14.4.7 Select fonts that can be emulated

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects fonts that can be emulated.

Example

To select fonts and then unembed them:

Select fonts that can be emulated

Unembed font <!-- See

on page 168 -->

5.14.4.8 Select non-PDF/X-4 compliant TrueType fonts

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select a TrueType font that is not PDF/X-4 compliant, for example a symbol font.

566

PitStop Pro

After this selection, you might want to remove or replace this font.

About OpenType embedded fonts

OpenType is an extension of the TrueType format that can contain TrueType and/or Type 1 font data. In PDF files it can only appear as an embedded font. It has been introduced in PDF 1.6.

on page 240

5.14.4.9 Select objects that use neither stroke nor fill

Belongs to

•

Category:

LineArt;Text

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects vector or path objects that contain no stroke or fill color value in a PDF.

on page 261 (same functionality)

5.14.4.10 Select OpenType embedded fonts

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects all embedded fonts that are OpenType, or alternatively, all embedded fonts that are not

OpenType.

About embedding fonts

Embedding fonts

Embedding a font as a

subset

means that only those characters of the font that are actually used in the text are embedded. This reduces the file size by not including superfluous font information.

About OpenType embedded fonts

OpenType is an extension of the TrueType format that can contain TrueType and/or Type 1 font data. In PDF files it can only appear as an embedded font. It has been introduced in PDF 1.6.

567

PitStop Pro

Example

To search for all OpenType fonts and then unembed them, proceed as follows:

Select embedded fonts that are OpenType

Unembed font

Related Actions

•

on page 235

•

on page 168

5.14.4.11 Select rendering objects

Belongs to

•

Category:

LineArt;Text;Image

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects all objects with a rendering intent.

This includes paths, text and images with any of the following rendering intents:

• Absolute Colorimetric

• Relative Colorimetric

• Perceptual

• Saturation

Note:

This Action does not allow you to make a selection based on

one particular

rendering intent. To select objects by

one

on page 249.

About rendering intents

For more information and examples, refer to

the PitStop Pro Reference Guide on the Enfocus website

(See Chapter "Rendering intents to remap colors").

Related Actions

•

on page 69

•

on page 178

•

568

PitStop Pro

•

5.14.4.12 Select standard 14 fonts

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects the standard 14 PostScript fonts.

The 14 fonts are automatically installed with Adobe Acrobat and embedded by default (since

PDF 1.5).

Example

To save on file size, you could select these fonts and unembed them. Proceed as follows:

Select standard 14 fonts

Unembed font <!--

on page 168-->

5.14.4.13 Select subset fonts

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects fonts that are subsetted.

If a font is subsetted, only the characters of the font that are actually used in the text are embedded in the document. This is done to to keep a file as small as possible.

Example

If you have the original font on your system, you could choose the subsetted fonts and embed them completely for later editing. To do so, proceed as follows:

Select subset fonts

Embed font

Related Actions

•

Check if a subset font contains a complete CharSet or CIDSet

569

PitStop Pro

•

on page 239

5.14.4.14 Select text by key phrase

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select text objects containing a particular key word or phrase.

To take into account the case of the key phrase (uppercase/lowercase as entered in the text field), select the

Case sensitive

checkbox.

Tip:

To only select a particular key word (and not the entire text object it belongs to), you

could first split the text objects, using

to select clipping text as well, you can use

on page 167.

5.14.4.15 Select text by point size

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects text in a font that is below, above or equal to a certain size (expressed in points).

This Action is useful to select text that is too small to print correctly.

5.14.4.16 Select text by x-height

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

570

PitStop Pro

Note that this Action only can work if at least one of the characters to be measured (x, u, v, w or z) is available in the PDF.

5.14.4.17 Select text segments

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects all text objects in a PDF.

Tip:

This Action does not select clipping text, which is not visible in the PDF. If you want

Select clipping and non-clipping text

299.

571

PitStop Pro

6. Actions sorted alphabetically

6.1 A

6.1.1 Add alternate images

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

If you are working with PDFs that contain very high resolution images and render slowly on screen, you can speed up rendering by adding alternate images and then clicking the PitStop

Speed Up Image Display

button (available in the Enfocus View Modes toolbar (Acrobat 8 and 9) or the PitStop View Panel (Acrobat X and XI)).

You can use this Action to add low resolution alternate images.

How to proceed

Select the preferred downsampling.

Bicubic looks best but is slowest; subsampling looks worst but is fastest.

Specify the preferred resolution.

72dpi is good for screen viewing.

Set

Resample above

to a higher value than the dpi chosen above.

PitStop suggests a value, but you can change it as required.

Select

Convert to RGB

for even faster on screen rendering, but in RGB color values.

Related Actions

•

on page 263

•

on page 192

•

on page 89

6.1.2 Add background

Belongs to

•

Category:

Add

572

PitStop Pro

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Adds a background to the selection that preceeds this Action in your Action List.

You can choose a color for the background and define a size (size of one of the page boxes or the same size as the bounding box of all objects).

6.1.3 Add color bar

Belongs to

•

Category:

Add

•

Type:

Changes

•

Since version:

12 update 3

What it does

Adds color patches to your PDF document. The color patches are individually created for each page and show all separations including any spot colors.

How to proceed

On the

Color Patches

tab, indicate how many tint values per separation you want to add.

By default, a 100% tint of the color is added.

• To change a value, double-click it in the

Tint values (%)

box and type an alternative value.

•

To add another value, click and enter the required value.

•

To remove a value, select it and click .

Enter the required size of the color patches, i.e. the preferred height or width. This depends on the device you're using.

Select the preferred options:

•

Repeat color patches

: The color patches are repeated till the end of the line (= right border of the page box). If this checkbox is cleared, each tint value of each color is added only once.

•

Don't add process colors (C, M, Y, K)

: For process colors no color patches are added.

•

Don't add if tint is 0%

: If a color is defined but not used in the PDF, no color patch will be added.

Switch to the

Position

tab.

Determine the position of the color bar relative to one of the page boxes.

Examples

Example 1:

This document contains two spot colors, which are each added once, in 2 tint values

(100% + 50%). Chosen position: relative to the top of the trim box (blue line). Process colors are

not added.

573

PitStop Pro

Example 2:

Same options as in the first example, but with

Repeat color patches

enabled.

6.1.4 Add copied graphics

Belongs to

•

Category:

Add

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Copies graphic elements and positions them on the page.

How to proceed

Select the graphic(s) by using the PitStop Select Objects tool .

Click

Grab Selection

To see the graphic that will be copied, switch to the

Preview

tab.

To specify how the graphics must be displayed, switch back to the

Attributes

tab and select the appropriate options.

574

PitStop Pro

Graphics can be rotated, put in the foreground or background. You can place them at any position on the page and use the offset feature to more precisely position the graphic.

6.1.5 Add default color spaces for color spaces that are not compliant to the Output Intent

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

If you are using an Output Intent that does not support a certain color space, you can use this

Action to replace it with another color space that does comply.

You can select an alternative color space for Gray, RGB, and/or CMYK.

The following PDF/X and PDF/A standards are supported:

• PDF/X-1a:2001

• PDF/X-3:2002

• PDF/X-1a:2003

• PDF/X-3:2003

• PDF/X-4

• PDF/X-4p

• PDF/A-1

• PDF/A-2

6.1.6 Add font metadata

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Adds font information to the PDF's metadata (based on the font resource).

About font metadata

Font metadata is descriptive information about the fonts used in a PDF, for example the name of the font, its type and encoding. You can find the font metadata of a file in Adobe Acrobat by selecting

File

Document Properties

and switching to the

Fonts

tab.

575

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

Check font metadata

Check creation and modification date

6.1.7 Add missing creation and modification date

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Inserts the creation and modification date.

In some legacy PDF applications it was possible to create a PDF file without a creation or modification date. This Action fixes this issue.

Related Actions

on page 202

6.1.8 Add object

Belongs to

•

Category:

Add

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Inserts a chosen object (a line, a rectangle, an ellipse or a text) and positions it relative to one of the page boxes. This can be useful to add information to be trimmed off later.

Note:

If you're inserting text, you can make use of predefined variables, such as the name of the document, the author, the page number, page count, the page box dimensions, ...See the example below.

The

Fill

and

Stroke

tabs allow you to define the color of the objects you are inserting.

Example

To add the width and height of the media box to your document, proceed as follows:

In the attributes for the Add object Action, on the

Object and position

tab, choose

Add text in foreground

Click the

Variable

button.

Select

%Page Box Dimensions%

Select the page box of which you want to insert the dimensions, in this example

Media Box

The current value is shown.

Click

Insert

Select a font and a font size and determine where the text must be inserted in the document, for example in the center of the media box with a particular offset.

576

Specify whether or not to take into account page rotation and page scaling factor if applicable.

Below is an example of the dialog that allows you to insert predefined text variables.

PitStop Pro

6.1.9 Add objects to layer

Belongs to

•

Category:

Layers

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to add any selected objects to a specific layer. You can identify the layer concerned by selecting it using another Action in the same Action List.

Optionally, you can at the same time remove the added objects from the other layers.

How to proceed

Add a first "select" Action to the Action List, to select the

layer

to which you want to assign the objects.

577

PitStop Pro

Add a second "select" Action to the Action List, to select the

objects

to be added.

Note:

You don't have to specify operators in between the two "select" Actions.

However, you can also use

combined

"Select" Actions to specify the layer or the objects concerned (see example 2).

Add

Add objects to layers

and select the

Add to selected layers

radio button.

Examples

Example 1:

The following Action List will add all annotations to Layer1 and remove them from the other layers:

Select layers by name <!--

on page 268 and set the layer name to

Layer1 -->

Add objects to layers

Example 2:

The following Action List will add XObjects and annotations to LayerA and LayerB:

Select layers by name <!--

on page 268 and set the layer name to

"equals [AB]"; enable Use regular expressions -->

Select XObjects <!--

Add objects to layers

Related Actions

•

•

6.1.10 Add objects to layer with name

Belongs to

•

Category:

Layers

•

Type:

Changes

•

Since version:

12 update 3

What it does

How to proceed

Add a "select" Action to the Action List, to select the objects you want to add, for example

on page 283.

Add

Add objects to layers

to the Action List.

Enter the name of the layer.

Optionally, select

Remove from other layers

578

PitStop Pro

Example

To add all annotations to a particular layer and remove them from another layer, use the following Actions:

Add objects to layers <!-- Enter a name, e.g. AnnotationLayer and select Remove from

other layers-->

Related Actions

•

•

Select registration marks

on page 97

6.1.11 Add page box marks

Belongs to

•

Category:

Add

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to add trim marks and/or bleed marks to your document in the style of your preference (InDesign or QuarkXPress).

6.1.12 Add page number

Belongs to

•

Category:

Add

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Adds page numbers (including section and chapter numbers) to a PDF.

Note:

The Global Change

Add Page Number

provides the same functionality.

How it works

You must first create a sample piece of text, which will be used to determine the format and style used for page numbering (font, color, size etc):

• If you want to add a page number only, the sample should only be a number, e.g. "3".

• If you want to add a page number with more information (for example: include the word

"Page" and the total number of pages) add this to the sample, e.g. "Page 1 of 10".

579

PitStop Pro

How to proceed

Create an example piece of text.

Select the sample by using the PitStop Select Objects tool .

In the attributes of the Action, click the

Grab Sample from Selection

button.

The sample text appears in the Sample field.

Specify the position of the page numbers relative to the text and one of the page boxes. You can use a default offset, manually enter offset values or grab the document's offset values.

If your sample text contains numbers, the

Variable number sequence

list is activated.

This list allows you to indicate which number should be considered a variable (indicated by

"%pagenr%").

For example, if your sample text is "Page 2, Section 1", you will have three options:

• "Page 2, Section 1" will insert "Page 2, Section 1" on every page.

• "Page %pagenr%, Section 1" will insert "Page 1, Section 1" on page 1, "Page 2, Section

1" ...(Section 1 will not change)

• "Page 2, Section %pagenr%" will insert "Page 2, Section 1" on page 1, "Page 2, Section

2" ...(Page 2 will not change)

Switch to the

Options

tab and select the appropriate checkbox:

•

Remove any overlapping text

will remove existing page numbers.

•

Only number pages that already have a number

will not add page numbers to pages that currently don't have any.

•

Add white background

ensures that the page numbers are visible, even if the PDF has a dark background.

6.1.13 Add pages

Belongs to

•

Category:

Add; Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to insert either empty pages or pages from a particular PDF file.

You can choose the number of pages to add, the location of the new pages in the PDF ...

6.1.14 Add registration marks

Belongs to

•

Category:

Add

•

Type:

Changes

580

PitStop Pro

What it does

Allows you to add registration marks to your document in the style of your preference (InDesign or QuarkXPress).

Registration marks ensure that the different separations in a color document are properly aligned.

Related Actions

Check document unique IDs

6.1.15 Add separation names

Belongs to

•

Category:

Add

•

Type:

Changes

•

Since version:

12 update 2

What it does

Allows the names of color separations to be generated and positioned within a PDF file. The separation names are individually created for each page and show all separations including any spot colors.

You have several options. You can specify:

•

How

the separation names should be displayed (stacked (i.e. one per line), inline (

reflow

) or all on top of each other (

on same location

- useful for color plates); in color or with color patches, rotated, …). You can also determine the font and the font size.

•

Where

exactly they should be placed on the page (position of the color names relative to a page box).

• Whether or not

process colors

and

separations with 0% tint

should be displayed.

• If you have chosen to add color patches, whether or not they should have a border (

Add stroke on color patches

Examples

• Example 1: Layout:

Stack

and Color:

Separation names in black + color patches

are selected.

• Example 2: Layout:

Overflow

and Color:

Separation names in black + color patches

are selected. The color patches have a border, because

Add stroke on color patches

is enabled.

581

PitStop Pro

• Example 3: Layout:

Overflow

and Color:

Separation names in color

are selected.

6.1.16 Add unique document IDs

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Adds a unique document ID (generated at random) to your document.

Related Actions

6.1.17 AND

Belongs to

•

Category:

Operators

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

AND is a logical operator. This means it is used to select a single object with more than one attribute.

Example

To select text that was Helvetica AND size 12 pt, use:

Select Font Helvetica

Select Text if Point Size = 12.00 pt

AND

Note:

AND is NOT used to select two different objects!

For example,

the following is incorrect

because a font cannot be both Helvetica and Arial:

Select Font Helvetica

Select Font Arial

AND

582

PitStop Pro

6.1.18 Apply a gaussian blur to an image

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to apply a Gaussian blur to the selected images.

You can define the radius of the blur, by moving the slider. A higher radius will result in a higher amount of blur.

Applying a Gaussian blur is useful to reduce image noise and detail.

6.1.19 Apply CMYK curve

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

•

Since version:

12 update 2

What it does

This Action allows color curves to be applied to selected CMYK objects, either on all four channels, or on individual C, M, Y, or K channels.

Curves can be created by adding points, and dragging them to the preferred position, or by entering values in the

Input

and

Output

field below the curve.

583

PitStop Pro

Example

6.1.20 Apply color curve

Belongs to

•

Application:

PitStop Pro

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

•

Since version:

12 update 2

What it does

This Action allows color curves to be applied on separations of selected objects.

The default separations are C, M, Y, K, and Other (= all other separations in the file except for

CMYK), but you can also add a curve for another spot color or varnish separation, which will be used if that color appears in the processed file.

Curves can be created by adding points, and dragging them to the preferred position, or by entering values in the

Input

and

Output

field below the curve.

Note:

Apply color curve is also available as a Global Change!

Example

The

button allows you to add a curve for an additional color.

584

PitStop Pro

6.1.21 Apply DeviceLink

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to convert the color of the selected objects to Gray, CMYK or RGB using a DeviceLink profile (instead of a ICC profile).

DeviceLink Profiles are device specific profiles, converting colors from one color space to another, without converting to LAB or any other device independent color space in between.

You can convert only the stroke or fill of the objects, or both.

6.1.22 Apply Gray curve

Belongs to

•

Application:

PitStop Pro

•

Category:

Color

585

PitStop Pro

•

Type:

Changes

•

Since version:

12 update 2

What it does

This Action allows a curve to be applied to selected Gray objects.

Curves can be created by adding points, and dragging them to the preferred position, or by entering values in the

Input

and

Output

field below the curve.

Example

6.1.23 Apply Lab curve

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

•

Since version:

12 update 2

What it does

This Action allows color curves to be applied to selected Lab objects on individual lightness, a, or b channels.

Curves can be created by adding points, and dragging them to the preferred position, or by entering values in the

Input

and

Output

field below the curve.

586

PitStop Pro

Example

6.1.24 Apply page rotation

Belongs to

•

Category:

Position/Size;Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Sets the page rotate key defined in the PDF to 0 °. This may have a visual effect.

Related Actions

•

•

on page 285

•

6.1.25 Apply page scaling factor

Belongs to

•

Category:

Position/Size;Page

•

Type:

Changes

587

PitStop Pro

What it does

Apply page scaling factor removes the page scaling factor and scales the page to compensate.

A page of 10 by 10 inches and a page scaling factor 2 will be displayed and printed as a page of

20 by 20 inches. By applying the page scaling factor, the actual page size will become 20 by 20 inches.

Page scaling has been introduced in PDF 1.6. If the page scaling factor is not removed or applied, the page size can only be displayed correctly in Acrobat 7 or higher.

Related Actions

•

on page 219

•

6.1.26 Apply RGB curve

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

•

Since version:

12 update 2

What it does

This Action allows color curves to be applied to selected RGB objects, either on all three channels, or on individual R, G, or B channels.

Curves can be created by adding points, and dragging them to the preferred position, or by entering values in the

Input

and

Output

field below the curve.

Example

588

PitStop Pro

6.1.27 Apply transfer function

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress;Text;LineArt;Color;Image

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Adds a transfer function to paths, text, images or all these types of objects. You can exclude spot colors or apply the transfer function on tint values or alternate values only.

Note:

Transfer functions are not allowed in PDF/X compliant documents.

Related Actions

•

on page 231

•

on page 152

589

PitStop Pro

6.2 C (Part 1: Center - Change)

6.2.1 Center page content

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page;Position/Size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Places all objects in the center of the page.

You can:

• Center the objects horizontally, vertically or both.

• Center the content relative to a page box and set margins (left, right, top and bottom).

• Use page rotation and scaling factor as required.

• Only center the visible part of the content.

6.2.2 Change annotations print setting

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Change annotations' print setting allows you to set the selected annotations to

Printing

Non-

Printing

6.2.3 Change art box

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to create or resize an art box.

You must choose one of the following options:

590

PitStop Pro

• To create a new art box, select

Define new rectangle

and enter the required values. Note that boxes are defined from lower left to upper right.

• To resize the art box relative to the axes of the existing art box, select

Resize

and enter the required values.

• To re-use the dimensions from another box, select

Use box size

and select the appropriate page box.

• To determine the size of the art box based on a selection, select

Resize page box to fit the selection

and enter the offset values.

6.2.4 Change binding

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to redefine a document's binding; you can set binding to the right or to the left.

Most European language documents are bound on the left.

Note:

To check a document's binding, in Adobe Acrobat, go to

File

Properties

and switch to the

Advanced

tab. The document's binding property (Left Edge or Right Edge) is displayed under Reading Options.

Related Actions

•

on page 201

•

Select by binding

on page 274

6.2.5 Change bleed box

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to create or resize a bleed box.

You must choose one of the following options:

• To create a new bleed box, select

Define new rectangle

and enter the required values. Note that boxes are defined from lower left to upper right.

• To resize a bleed box relative to the axes of the existing bleed box, select

Resize

and enter the required values.

• To re-use the dimensions from another box, select

Use box size

and select the appropriate page box.

• To determine the size of a bleed box based on a selection, select

Resize page box to fit the selection

and enter the offset values.

591

PitStop Pro

6.2.6 Change blending color space

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color; Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows to change the blending color space and/or the luminosity softmask blending color space

(if defined in the PDF document).

You can:

• Change the color to CMYK, gray or RGB, or

• Remove the blending color space, by selecting "none" from the first list, or

• Leave one of the color spaces unchanged, by selecting

Do not change

About blending color spaces

blending color space

The blending color space for soft masks (masks with soft transitions) is called the

luminosity softmask blending color space

. It is usually gray.

Related Actions

•

on page 175

•

on page 247

6.2.7 Change character spacing

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the amount of space between two characters in a selected text string.

The amount of space is expressed in 'em' units. An 'em' refers to the width of the capital M in the current font.

6.2.8 Change color

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

592

PitStop Pro

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to change the fill and/or stroke colors in a PDF.

How to proceed

Define the target colors as follows:

Select the appropriate checkbox, depending on what you want to change (Fill color or Stroke color).

Select the appropriate target color in one of the following ways:

Select an object with the PitStop Select Objects tool and use the icon to grab the fill or stroke color (depending on what you're defining).

Click the color picker icon

Select the required color space:

and select the appropriate color.

• Device colors can be Gray, RGB or CMYK

• Calibrated colors can be Gray or RGB

• User Swatch (= user-defined colors)

Fine tune the color by moving the sliders.

Related Actions

on page 74

6.2.9 Change corrupt font widths

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes corrupt font widths.

Corrupt font widths may occur in a PDF, when "artificial" bold or italic was used instead of the

"bold" or "italic" version of the font concerned. For example, if "Futura" is used in your PDF, the

"Futura-Bold" and "Futura-Oblique" fonts should be used instead of applying bold and italics on the regular Futura font. Artificial font may cause problems when printing the PDF.

Related Actions

•

on page 235

593

PitStop Pro

•

6.2.10 Change crop box

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to create or resize a crop box.

You must choose one of the following options:

• To create a new crop box, select

Define new rectangle

and enter the required values. Note that boxes are defined from lower left to upper right.

• To resize a crop box relative to the axes of the existing crop box, select

Resize

and enter the required values.

• To re-use the dimensions from another box, select

Use box size

and select the appropriate page box.

• To determine the size of a crop box based on a selection, select

Resize page box to fit the selection

and enter the offset values.

6.2.11 Change dash pattern

Belongs to

•

Category:

Line Art

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the pattern of dashed lines or converts them to continuous lines.

How to proceed

To use continuous lines, click .

To create a dashed pattern, click and configure the following fields:

• In the

fields, enter the desired length of the dashes.

• In the

Off

fields, enter the desired size of the spaces between the dashes.

• In the

Phase

594

PitStop Pro

6.2.12 Change default color spaces

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

6.2.13 Change document encoding

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the PDF encoding to binary or ASCII.

About document encoding

ASCII versus Binary encoding

ASCII encoding may increase the file size, but allows you to edit the file manually.

Binary encoding makes the file smaller, but does not allow you to edit the file manually.

Related Actions

•

•

on page 258

6.2.14 Change document info

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Changes

595

PitStop Pro

What it does

Changes the document information as found in the document properties in Acrobat.

You can change, remove or replace the following details:

• Producer

• Title

• Subject

• Author

• Creator

• Keywords

If you want to replace document info, you can make use of fixed strings and/or variables, such as the user name, company, date ...

Example

To replace the current keywords in your document with the document title and the word "PDF", proceed as follows:

Run the Change document info Action to remove the current keywords:

Change document keywords

Run the Change document info Action to insert the new keywords:

Change document keywords

Related Actions

•

on page 202

•

on page 275

6.2.15 Change fill and/or stroke

Belongs to

•

Category:

LineArt;Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to turn on or off the fill and/or stroke for the selected objects.

6.2.16 Change fill type

Belongs to

•

Category:

LineArt;Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to change the fill type of the selected objects to either Non-Zero Winding (Fill) or

Even-odd (Eofill).

596

PitStop Pro

About the fill type

The fill type is an attribute of polygons and loops: compound paths with intersecting lines. To determine whether a point is part of the shape, two different rules can be applied:

• The

Non-Zero Winding

• For every edge that crosses the line from the point inside the shape in one direction, add 1 to the winding number.

• For every edge that crosses the line in the opposite direction, subtract 1.

If the winding number is not equal to zero, the shape area to which the point belongs, is filled. For more information, refer to

http://www.wikipedia.org/wiki/nonzero-rule

• The

Even-odd rule

: This rule also supposes that you draw a line between a point inside the shape outline and a point outside its outline.

• If that line crosses the line of the shape an odd number of times, the shape area to which the point belongs, is filled.

• If the number of crossings is even, the area is not filled.

Checking the fill type of line art

To see which rule is applied, check the object's fill attributes:

Select the object, using the Enfocus Select tool .

Click to display the Enfocus Inspector and select

At the bottom, check which button is selected:

•

Fill

is selected, the

Non-zero Winding rule

applies.

•

Eofill

is selected, the

Even-odd

rule applies.

6.2.17 Change flatness

Belongs to

•

Category:

LineArt;Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to set the flatness of a PostScript curve.

The flatness determines how the objects in a document are printed on a PostScript printer.

597

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

•

•

6.2.18 Change font

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to replace the current font with another one.

Choose the font that should replace the current font:

• To combine a font name with the preferred type and subtype, select

Search for a font by name

Click

Select Font Name

and select the appropriate font. Click

Select the preferred type and subtype.

Select the

Embed

checkbox as required.

• To use an existing font, select

Select an existing font

Click

Create Font Resource

Select the appropriate font.

Select

Embed

Don't embed

Embed Subset

Click

You should also indicate how the embedded composite font should be handled.

6.2.19 Change Gray to CMYK Black

Belongs to

•

Application:

PitStop Pro

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Remaps the device grayscale color space to the device CMYK color space, keeping overprint.

6.2.20 Change image brightness and contrast

Belongs to

•

Application:

PitStop Pro

•

Category:

Image

598

PitStop Pro

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to make brightness and contrast adjustments to pixel images of all color spaces (e.g.

RGB) and image types (e.g. JPEG).

Note:

This option is also available in the PitStop Inspector (by selecting

6.2.21 Change image compression

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Change image compression changes the compression of selected images.

Color and Gray images can be compressed with JPEG, JPEG2000 or ZIP compression (ZIP is lossless, JPEG lossy).

Monochrome images can be compressed with CCIT Group 3 & 4, ZIP or RunLength compression.

In addition, an ASCII Hex or 85 filter can be applied.

6.2.22 Change initial view

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Changes

•

Since version:

12 update 2

What it does

You can make a lot of changes, for example choose a particular page layout or magnification level, turn on or off certain window options, hide application toolbars or window controls ...

Note:

The attributes for this Action, correspond to the Initial View options in Adobe

Acrobat (See

File

Properties

, select the

Initial View

tab). If you do not change the attributes, these settings will be used. For a detailed overview of the meaning of each option, refer to the

Adobe help files

599

PitStop Pro

6.2.23 Change layer properties

Belongs to

•

Category:

Layers

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to change certain properties, i.e. default visibility and presence in the Layers panel

("layer configuration") of the layers selected by another Action in the same Action List.

Example

To change the properties of

all

layers in the PDF, create the following Action List:

Change layer properties

Related Actions

•

on page 197

•

on page 268

600

PitStop Pro

6.2.24 Change object order

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the layer position of an object in a PDF.

You can choose to move the object forwards, backwards, to the front, or to the back depending on where you want your object to appear in the layer stack.

6.2.25 Change line cap

Belongs to

•

Category:

LineArt;Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes how the end of a vector line looks like.

How to proceed

•

To have the line end exactly, click

•

To put a round end on the line, click

•

butt

round

To have corners projected beyond the length of the line, click

projecting square

6.2.26 Change line join

Belongs to

•

Category:

LineArt; Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes how a corner on a vector line looks like.

How to proceed

•

To have a sharp corner, click

miter

601

PitStop Pro

•

To put a round corner on the line, click

•

To flatten the corners, click

bevel

round

6.2.27 Change line weight

Belongs to

•

Category:

LineArt;Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the thickness of a selected line to the desired line weight.

Related Actions

•

on page 84

•

•

on page 199

6.2.28 Change media box

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to create or resize a media box.

You must choose one of the following options:

• To create a new media box, select

Define new rectangle

and enter the required values. Note that boxes are defined from lower left to upper right.

• To resize a media box relative to the axes of the existing media box, select

Resize

and enter the required values.

• To re-use the dimensions from another box, select

Use box size

and select the appropriate page box.

• To determine the size of a media box based on a selection, select

Resize page box to fit the selection

and enter the offset values.

6.2.29 Change miter limit

Belongs to

•

Category:

LineArt; Text

602

PitStop Pro

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the length of the extension of a corner on a vector line.

The miter limit is the limit when a join switches from mitered (pointed) to beveled (squared-off).

To allow “pointier” angles, you can increase the miter limit.

For more information on how to calculate the miter limit, refer to the topic "Stroke attributes:

Miter limit" in

the PitStop Pro Reference Guide on the Enfocus website

6.2.30 Change object order

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the layer position of an object in a PDF.

You can choose to move the object forwards, backwards, to the front, or to the back depending on where you want your object to appear in the layer stack.

6.2.31 Change objects that are close to the page edge

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes objects that are close to the page edge, but do not bleed enough.

You must specify the required distance to the trim box and the distance into the bleed.

Optionally, you can choose to treat subpaths of compound paths individually. In that case, each of the subpaths will be changed separately.

See also:

•

on page 217

•

on page 287

6.2.32 Change OPI info

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Changes

603

PitStop Pro

What it does

Updates the OPI information of the document, for example if you have changed an OPI path with the PitStop Inspector in PitStop.

Note:

This Action is mainly meant for OEMs, who can change OPI dictionaries through the PitStop Library. If an image with OPI information is encountered during processing,

PitStop Library will call the OEM's code to replace it with the OEM's values.

About OPI

Related Actions

•

•

on page 195

•

•

•

6.2.33 Change Output Intent

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color; Metadata

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes a PDF's output intent to comply with a particular PDF/X or PDF/A version, using a particular ICC profile and/or ICC characterization.

Related Actions

6.2.34 Change overprint

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the overprint for a selected object's fill and/or stroke.

604

PitStop Pro

How to proceed

Proceed as follows:

To change the Fill/Stroke overprint, select the Fill/Stroke overprint checkbox.

Note:

The checkbox only indicates

what

you want to change,

not how

you want it to change. If none of the checkboxes has been selected, the name of the Action will change into "Do not change overprint".

To enable or disable Fill/Stroke overprint, click the buttons:

•

Overprint is off.

•

Overprint is on.

Tip:

Related Actions

•

•

Select by overprint

on page 295

6.2.35 Change overprint mode

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to change the overprint mode of a selection to Standard overprint (OPM 0) or

Illustrator overprint mode (OPM 1).

About overprint modes

• In

Standard overprint mode

(OPM 0), the tint value 0 of one of the CMYK inks in the foreground object has a knockout effect on the color rendering of the underlying object.

In other words, a foreground ink with a C, M, Y or K value of 0 % erases the corresponding background ink. Here, the “foreground inks win” principle applies.

• In

Illustrator overprint mode

(OPM 1), the tint value 0 is neutral: it is ignored (as if it were

“not specified”) and has therefore no effect on the color rendering of the underlying object.

For more information and examples, refer to

the PitStop Pro Reference Guide on the Enfocus website

Related Actions

•

on page 233

605

PitStop Pro

•

6.2.36 Change page box layout

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the page box layout in a PDF to Press, Screen viewing or PDF/X Layout.

The attributes depend on the chosen layout:

•

Press layout

(typically used for print)

If you select this layout, the trim box will be derived from the first page box (out of the list below) that is present on the page. Use the

and

Down

button to move the preferred page box to the top of the list. For example, if

bleed box

is the first item in the list, and

art box

You must also define the minimum distance between the media and bleed boxes and between the bleed and trim boxes.

To get the PDF to display at the size of the media it will be printed on, select the appropriate option:

•

Crop box must equal trim box

, or

•

No crop box must be defined or the crop box equals the media box

. This means that, if the crop box is not defined yet, it will not be added by this Action; if the crop box is defined, it will get the same size and position as the media box.

•

Screen viewing

and

Down

button to move the preferred page box to the top of the list. For example, if

bleed box

is the first item in the list, the crop box/media box will be derived from the bleed box if found in the PDF; if the bleed box is not found, the second page box in the list will be searched for, ...

•

PDF/X layout

If you select this layout, a page may only contain a trim box or an art box, not both.

You must also select the preferred PDF/X version. If you have chosen PDF/X-1a:2003 or PDF/

X-3:2003, the art box or trim box shall not extend beyond the boundaries of the bleed box and the crop box.

To define the trim box relative to the media box, define the desired margins.

Related Actions

on page 222

606

PitStop Pro

6.2.37 Change page format

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Snaps the page box of your choice to a multiple of either columns or rows.

This Action is useful for newspapers or magazines with content displayed in columns and rows.

How to proceed

To configure the Change page format Action

Select the page box you wish to define.

Select

A multiple of columns

and/or

A multiple of rows

as required.

Set the preferred column or row width.

Add column/row spacing as required.

Check page format

on page 223

6.2.38 Change page orientation

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the page layout to either portrait, landscape or the orientation that is used most in the

PDF.

The page orientation is based on the selected page box. If you don't want to change the page orientation in case all pages have already the same orientation, enable the

Only apply if not all pages have the same orientation

checkbox.

Related Actions

•

on page 285

•

6.2.39 Change PDF version

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Changes

607

PitStop Pro

What it does

Changes the Acrobat and PDF version of a PDF.

The Acrobat version is the sum of the two numbers that make up the PDF version, for example:

PDF 1.4 = Acrobat 5.

Note:

Changing the PDF version will not change the attributes of a higher version PDF to those of a lower one - it only changes the version

number

. As higher versions of

Acrobat always save the PDF version number up to their version, even if nothing has changed, this Action can be useful to reset the PDF version to the one used to create the

PDF.

Example

If you configure this Action to change the PDF version to PDF 1.5, both the PDF version and the

Acrobat version will be changed. The new PDF version will be PDF 1.5; the new Acrobat version will be 6.0.

Related Actions

Select by PDF version

on page 276

6.2.40 Change PDF/A version key

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the version key tag in a PDF/A document to another version key.

The following version keys are supported:

• PDF/A-1a

• PDF/A-1b

• PDF/A-2a

• PDF/A-2b

• PDF/A-2u

About PDF/A version keys

PDF/A is a specialized subset of the PDF specification, also known as "PDF for

rchive".

The PDF/A version key identifies the version of the PDF/A standard the document complies with.

If the version key is not set correctly, the document is not PDF/A compliant. Note that changing the

key

does not change the compliance of the document! It will only allow you to continue with your workflow.

Related Actions

•

Check PDF/A version key

•

on page 212

608

PitStop Pro

6.2.41 Change PDF/X version key

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the version key tag in a PDF/X document to another version key.

The following version keys are supported:

• PDF/X-1a:2001

• PDF/X-32002

• PDF/X-1a:2003

• PDF/X-3:2003

• PDF/X-4

• PDFX/-4p

About PDF/X version keys

PDF/X is a specialized subset of the PDF specification, also known as "PDF for Exchange".

The PDF/X version key identifies the version of the PDF/X standard the document complies with.

If the version key is not set correctly, the document is not PDF/X compliant. Note that changing the

key

does not change the compliance of the document! It will only allow you to continue with your workflow.

Related Actions

•

on page 212

•

on page 115

6.2.42 Change point size

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the point size of a selection by or to a given amount.

6.2.43 Change position

Belongs to

•

Category:

Position/Size

609

PitStop Pro

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Moves selected objects to a new position.

You can define an absolute or a relative target position:

•

Move absolute to

moves either all selected objects in one go or each of the selected objects individually to a new position relative to the page they are on.

•

Move relative by

moves an object in relation to itself.

Indicate whether page rotation and/or the page scaling factor (if applicable) should be taken into account when moving the selection.

6.2.44 Change rendering intent

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress;Color

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Modifies the rendering intent of an object to one of the following:

• Absolute Colorimetric

• Relative Colorimetric

• Perceptual

• Saturation

About rendering intents

For more information and examples, refer to

the PitStop Pro Reference Guide on the Enfocus website

(See Chapter "Rendering intents to remap colors").

Related Actions

•

•

on page 178

•

6.2.45 Change rendering parameter

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

610

PitStop Pro

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the rendering parameter of your choice to the corresponding rendering parameter of the grabbed object.

Example

To apply a transfer curve from an object to the objects of your selection in the Action List

Select an object in your PDF document, by using the PitStop Select Objects tool .

In the attributes of the Change rendering parameter Action, select Change

transfer

Click

Grab Transfer From Selection

6.2.46 Change smoothness

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the value of smoothness of a selected PostScript curve.

A value of 1 is a good default.

6.2.47 Change spot color suffix

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Modifies a selected spot color's suffix to one of the following standard suffixes: CV; CVC; CVU;

CVS; CVP; C; U; or M (or None of the above).

About spot color suffixes

Suffixes represent the

apparent

color of the color when printed on different types of paper. For example, PANTONE 3258

and PANTONE 3258

refer to the same color, but when printed on

oated, respectively

ncoated paper, they will look different, although the same ink formula was used.

Suffix overview

611

PitStop Pro

Suffix

CVC

CVU

Meaning

Computer video (electronic simulation)

Computer video - coated

Computer video - uncoated

Coated paper

Uncoated paper

Matte paper

Related Actions

•

•

on page 180

6.2.48 Change stroke adjustment

Belongs to

•

Category:

LineArt; Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to enable or disable stroke adjustment.

Stroke adjustment takes care of the rendering of paths on a raster device (printing device, computer monitor, etc.).

Example

If stroke adjustment is

turned off

, the device will draw the pixel only if it covers the path for more than 50%.

This means that a 1 pixel wide line can be drawn in different ways:

• If the line is drawn nicely on top of a pixel of the screen, the line will look fine.

• If the line is spread over 2 pixels of the screen, the width will be 2 pixels on some places and

1 pixel on other places, turning the line into an ugly, jaggy line.

If stroke adjustment is

turned on

, a correction will be made in such a way that the line looks nice and has the same width (1 pixel) everywhere.

6.2.49 Change transparency

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to modify the transparency of the objects in a PDF file.

612

PitStop Pro

You can:

• Modify the alpha channel of a fill and/or stroke, by moving the sliders to the desired percentage. Note that, to gain full opacity, you should move the slider to 100%.

• Change the blending modes.

This will change the way in which the colors of a transparent object on top blend with the colors of underlying objects.

To select the blending modes you want to apply, proceed as follows:

Select a blending mode under

Available

Click

Add

to move it to the

Selected

list.

Repeat steps 1-2 as required.

The blending modes will be applied in the order as they appear in the Selected list.

• Turn on or off

Alpha is Shape

as required. This may affect anti-aliasing. (Do not turn it on, unless you really need it.)

• Turn on or off

Text Knockout

If Text Knockout is enabled, the inks of underlying objects, if any, will be cut out on the other separations. This option may be useful in case of overlapping characters.

Related Actions

•

on page 228

•

•

on page 298

•

6.2.50 Change trapped flag

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Modifies the trapped flag.

About trapping

The trapped flag indicates whether or not a file has been "trapped", i.e. has been corrected for slight color misregistrations. The trapped flag must be defined in PDF/X documents.

The flag can be set to:

•

True

: the document has been trapped, or the creator of the document has decided that it should not be trapped.

•

False

: the document has not been trapped

•

Unknown

: it's not known whether or not the document has been trapped. Note that this status should be avoided.

613

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

•

•

on page 276

•

on page 214

6.2.51 Change trim box

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to create or resize a trim box.

You must choose one of the following options:

• To create a new trim box, select

Define new rectangle

and enter the required values. Note that boxes are defined from lower left to upper right.

• To resize a trim box relative to the axes of the existing trim box, select

Resize

and enter the required values.

• To re-use the dimensions from another box, select

Use box size

and select the appropriate page box.

• To determine the size of a trim box based on a selection, select

Resize page box to fit the selection

and enter the offset values.

6.2.52 Change word spacing

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the word spacing of a selected text string to a given value (in em).

6.3 C (Part 2: Check - Crop)

6.3.1 Check access control

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

614

PitStop Pro

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks whether the document is protected in any way, for example with passwords, certificate

IDs or file permission settings.

6.3.2 Check annotations print setting

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Check annotations' print settings allows you to log annotations with a particular print setting

(print or non-printing).

6.3.3 Check annotations type

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Check annotations' type allows you to log the occurrence of particular types of annotations in a

PDF, for example: text, hyperlinks, movies,...

6.3.4 Check appearances of annotations and interactive form fields

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the document contains annotations and interactive form fields.

This is useful if you want to print the document (as annotations and interactive form fields cannot be printed) or if your output device or PDF renderer does not support form fields.

Related Actions

•

on page 205

615

PitStop Pro

•

on page 112

•

Check for annotations inside art box or trim box

•

on page 215

6.3.5 Check article threads

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks for the existence of article threads in a PDF file.

6.3.6 Check binding

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if binding is left or right.

Most European language documents are bound on the left.

Note:

To check a document's binding, in Adobe Acrobat, go to

File

Properties

and switch to the

Advanced

tab. The document's binding property (Left Edge or Right Edge) is displayed under Reading Options.

Related Actions

•

•

6.3.7 Check bookmarks

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

616

PitStop Pro

What it does

Checks if the PDF contains bookmarks.

Bookmarks are links in the left hand side bar of a PDF that take you to different sections.

6.3.8 Check Certified PDF state

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks the Enfocus Certified PDF status of a PDF.

You can log whether

The Certified Preflight Profile matches a particular Profile. You can select a Profile from the database on your computer or from your disk/network (which hasn't been imported yet in

PitStop).

The PDF being checked is Preflighted or Preflighted without errors.

All saved sessions or only the last saved session must be valid.

Note:

A session is invalid if it refers to changes made by an external program.

For more information, refer to the chapter "Working with Certified PDF documents" in

the

PitStop Pro Reference Guide on the Enfocus website

Related Actions

on page 155

6.3.9 Check CMap

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if a PDF contains an embedded CMap, and if so, whether its name is consistent with any matching external file. This is necessary for PDF/A compliance.

About CMaps

CMap (Character Map) is a mapping of character codes to an ID. This ID is used to map the characters to the correct glyphs.

CMaps can be external or embedded:

• When the CMap is external, it is referenced in the PDF by a name.

617

PitStop Pro

Note:

Some CMaps are shipped (as external files) along with PitStop.

• When the CMap is embedded, it's often also referenced inside the PDF.

6.3.10 Check color type

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if a particular color space is used for particular objects.

For example, check if the

device-specific color space

is used for

text and line-art

You can ignore process colors in DeviceN color spaces, as required. (It may not be required to check for the presence of process colors, as they are by default available on the printer.)

6.3.11 Check contents compression

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the PDF contains streams that are not compressed with some content compression method (CCITT, Flate, DCT or JBIG2). Compression allows you to make the file smaller.

6.3.12 Check corrupt font widths

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Searches a PDF for fonts that have corrupt widths. You might want to remove or replace these fonts.

Corrupt font widths may occur in a PDF, when "artificial" bold or italic was used instead of the

"bold" or "italic" version of the font concerned. For example, if "Futura" is used in your PDF, the

"Futura-Bold" and "Futura-Oblique" fonts should be used instead of applying bold and italics on the regular Futura font. Artificial font may cause problems when printing the PDF.

618

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

•

•

6.3.13 Check creation and modification date

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Check

What it does

Checks the creation and modification date.

You can indicate which metadata location should be checked, for example only the most recently changed one, or "any" metadata location (if it doesn't matter), ...

About metadata locations in a PDF file

There are two metadata locations in a PDF file:

• The

info dictionary

contains information about the file, such as the title, the author, the creation date ... and is visible through the file's Document properties. It's not in XML format.

• The

XMP metadata stream

also contains information about the file, but this information is represented as XMP metadata - XMP referring to Adobe's labeling technology

xtensible

etadata

latform. All information in the info dictionary is also represented in the XMP metadata stream dictionary, in the form of XMP properties.

Inconsistencies may occur when only one of the metadata locations has been updated.

on page 106

6.3.14 Check data format

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the data format of a PDF is either Binary (=non-ASCII) or ASCII.

ASCII-encoding increases the file size, but allows files to be sent through older network protocols that cannot handle non-alphanumeric characters.

ASCII versus Binary encoding

ASCII encoding may increase the file size, but allows you to edit the file manually.

Binary encoding makes the file smaller, but does not allow you to edit the file manually.

619

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

•

on page 258

•

on page 81

6.3.15 Check default color spaces

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks whether default color spaces are used and whether or not they are PDF/X-3 compliant.

6.3.16 Check DeviceN attributes

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the PDF's color space is DeviceN or NChannel with a particular attribute.

You can check the following attributes:

• Spot color definitions

• Process color mapping

• Mixing hints

• Solidities

• Printing order

• Dot gain

Related Actions

Select undefined DeviceN colorants

on page 253

6.3.17 Check DeviceN colorants

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the non-process colors used in the DeviceN color space are defined in the colorants dictionary, so that they can be used on other devices.

620

PitStop Pro

About the DeviceN color space

Checking the colorants dictionary

You can use the Enfocus PitStop Inspector to check whether a particular spot color has been defined in the colorants dictionary. The colorants dictionary describes the colorants used in the

DeviceN color space. Proceed as follows:

Select an object with the color you want to check (using the Enfocus Select Object Tool ).

Click to display the Enfocus Inspector and select > . Next to the Fill icons, you will see "DeviceN (Spot + process colors)". Below you will see the number of components and their names.

Click the

Actions

link (in the top right corner) and select

Color Picker

In the left part of the Color Picker dialog, navigate to the

Document Spot Colors

folder. This folder contains all spot colors used in the document (not only the ones used for the selected object).

Select the spot color you want to check. If the color is just a color name, without a color definition, the Alternate Color Space is Gray.

Related Actions

on page 257

6.3.18 Check DeviceN for process color spaces

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks whether the DeviceN process color space matches the PDF/X output intent color space, i.e. whether the DeviceN color space contains only process colors.

About the DeviceN color space

The DeviceN color space is defined as a list of names. These names can refer to the process colors (CMYK, RGB or Gray) or spot colors. Spot colors can have an alternate in CMYK for output

621

PitStop Pro devices that do not recognize their name, or they can just be a name without color definition. If the color is just a name (for example: "Silver" or "MySpot"), it cannot be used on other devices.

6.3.19 Check document info

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Searches for the requested document info in the document properties of the PDF.

You can check:

• Title

• Subject

• Author

• Keywords

• Producer

• Creator

Use the

Compare with

field to enter (part of) the name of the document info you are looking for.

Use the operator methods

equals

and

doesn't equal

if you are looking for an exact match; use

contain

doesn't contain

if the entered value is just part of the document info you are looking for.

Select the

Match case

checkbox if you want the search to take into account the lower and upper cases of the entered value.

Note:

From version 12 update 2 onwards, you can use regular expressions to define the value in the

Compare with

field (if you select

Equals/Does not equal

as operator method).

Related Actions

•

•

on page 275

6.3.20 Check document permissions

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Allows you to check the permission settings of a PDF, such as (low/high resolution) printing, copying, editing, ...

622

PitStop Pro

About document permissions

The table below gives an overview of the permissions that can be set in a PDF.

Document permission

Assembly

If enabled...

Users can insert, delete and rotate pages, and create bookmarks and thumbnails.

Accessibility software (such as a screen reader) is allowed to use the content of the document.

Users can fill in and change forms.

Content accessibility

Fill-in or changing

Annotating

Copying

Editing

Low resolution printing

High resolution printing

Printing

Users can make annotations.

Users can select and copy contents to the clipboard.

Users can make modifications to the document.

Users can print a low-resolution bitmapped image of the pages (for personal use).

Users can print the document with a high resolution output.

Users can print the document.

To view a summary of the document permissions, proceed as follows:

Open Adobe Acrobat.

Select

File

Properties

Switch to the

Security

tab. The document restrictions are displayed in the lower part of the dialog.

6.3.21 Check document security

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if a particular encryption was used to secure the PDF file.

Options:

• An Acrobat version (5-7)

• A combination of "none" and an Acrobat version (5-7)

• None

• None or Standard (= no custom security)

623

PitStop Pro

• Custom (enter a custom name in the text field)

6.3.22 Check document trapped flag

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Allows you to check the value of the trapped flag in a PDF.

About trapping

The trapped flag indicates whether or not a file has been "trapped", i.e. has been corrected for slight color misregistrations. The trapped flag must be defined in PDF/X documents.

The flag can be set to:

•

True

: the document has been trapped, or the creator of the document has decided that it should not be trapped.

•

False

: the document has not been trapped

•

Unknown

: it's not known whether or not the document has been trapped. Note that this status should be avoided.

Related Actions

•

•

on page 276

•

Add unique document IDs

on page 214

6.3.23 Check document unique IDs

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to check if the PDF has a unique document ID.

Related Actions

on page 81

624

PitStop Pro

6.3.24 Check embedded font is OpenType

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Allows you to check if the embedded font is OpenType.

About OpenType embedded fonts

OpenType is an extension of the TrueType format that can contain TrueType and/or Type 1 font data. In PDF files it can only appear as an embedded font. It has been introduced in PDF 1.6.

Related Actions

•

Select OpenType embedded fonts

on page 299

•

on page 303

6.3.25 Check encoding of name objects

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Allows you to check if the encoding of font names, separation names or structure type names is

UTF8.

This may not be the case if you receive PDFs from Japanese or Chinese designers.

Note:

This Action verifies if the name

data

is valid UTF8 data. Note that this does not necessarily mean that the name actually is UTF8 encoded. It just checks if it would be a valid string when interpreted as UTF8.

6.3.26 Check external hyperlink annotations

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the annotations in the PDF contain hyperlinks to files, applications, and/or web pages.

625

PitStop Pro

6.3.27 Check file identifiers in document XMP metadata

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks the PDF for missing file identifiers in the document metadata, for example: VersionID,

DocumentID or RenditionClass.

About XMP metadata

Document Properties in Acrobat (Click the

Additional Metadata

button, then select

Advanced

Related Actions

•

Check if date is present in document XMP metadata

on page 213

•

on page 208

•

on page 116

6.3.28 Check file specification keys

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Searches the PDF for file specification keys.

Related Actions

•

•

626

PitStop Pro

6.3.29 Check flatness

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Allows you to check the minimum or maximum flatness of a line art curve.

The default setting to produce a smooth curve is 1. A value higher than 1 can produce a jaggy edge; lower than 1 can slow down the RIP.

Related Actions

•

•

6.3.30 Check font by name

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks for the presence of a particular font.

Enter the name of the font you want to check for in the text field, or use the

FontPicker

button to select it.

Note:

From version 12 update 2 onwards, you can use a regular expression to define the font name.

6.3.31 Check font embedding

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks whether or not fonts are embedded.

About embedding fonts

Embedding fonts

in a PDF document means that every character of this font is copied and stored in the PDF document. This is useful if you create PDF documents to be displayed on

627

PitStop Pro different systems and to be printed on different devices: these are often systems that do not contain exactly the same fonts.

Embedding a font as a

subset

means that only those characters of the font that are actually used in the text are embedded. This reduces the file size by not including superfluous font information.

Related Actions

•

on page 299

•

Select fonts by license

on page 168

6.3.32 Check font license

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks which operations the font's license allows without obtaining permission from the font's owner.

These operations are:

• Embed

• Subset

• Outline

• Preview and print

Related Actions

on page 300

6.3.33 Check font metadata

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Allows you to check if the fonts in the PDF have been added correctly to the metadata.

About font metadata

Font metadata is descriptive information about the fonts used in a PDF, for example the name of the font, its type and encoding. You can find the font metadata of a file in Adobe Acrobat by selecting

File

Document Properties

and switching to the

Fonts

tab.

628

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

Add font metadata

on page 159

6.3.34 Check font subsetting

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if fonts are subsetted or complete.

If a font is subsetted, only the characters of the font that are actually used in the text are embedded in the document. This is done to to keep a file as small as possible.

Related Actions

•

Check if a subset font contains a complete CharSet or CIDSet

on page 305

•

on page 239

6.3.35 Check font type

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks for particular font types in a PDF.

You can check for:

• TrueType

• Type 1

• Type 3

• Multiple Master

• Composite TT

• Composite T1

• Composite (all types)

About types of fonts

Refer to the

PitStop Pro Reference Guide

on the Enfocus website (Chapter: Types of fonts and their usage).

Related Actions

Select fonts by type

on page 301

629

PitStop Pro

6.3.36 Check font vendor

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks to see if fonts from a particular vendor have been used in a PDF.

6.3.37 Check for action dictionaries

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if a PDF contains particular action dictionaries, i.e. action types.

About action dictionaries

Related Actions

•

Check for additional actions

on page 113

•

on page 206

6.3.38 Check for additional actions

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if a PDF contains action dictionaries, i.e. action types, other than the standard ones.

630

PitStop Pro

About action dictionaries

Related Actions

•

on page 113

•

on page 205

6.3.39 Check for alternate images

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Searches a PDF for alternate images.

Related Actions

•

•

on page 263

•

Remove black generation

on page 89

6.3.40 Check for alternate presentations

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks whether the PDF contains alternate presentations.

This mechanism is used for slideshow displays and is therefore not desired in a print document.

6.3.41 Check for annotations inside art box or trim box

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Checks

631

PitStop Pro

What it does

Searches a PDF for any annotations that appear inside the art box or trim box - an undesirable location for printing.

6.3.42 Check for annotations inside printable area

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Searches a PDF for any annotations that appear in the printable area of the PDF.

6.3.43 Check for artificial font style

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Searches a PDF for instances of artificial font style (artificial bold, italic or outline style).

About artificial font style

Some fonts consist of specific

font families

Certain design programs or word processors allow you to adapt the style of these fonts artificially. You can select text and to put it in italics or in bold by selecting the respective style within this font family. Sometimes, you can even do this by means of shortcuts, e.g. Control+b for bold or Control+i for italics. Text that has been modified in this manner uses a so-called

artificial bold or italic style

6.3.44 Check for city fonts

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Checks

632

PitStop Pro

What it does

Searches a PDF for instances of city fonts.

City fonts are bitmap fonts that tend not to produce good results when printed.

6.3.45 Check for custom black generation

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if custom black generation curves (BG) have been included in the PDF document.

Black generation (BG) is the process of adding black ink to CMY-generated black and gray, in order to achieve a clear black color and to save valuable color ink.

Related Actions

6.3.46 Check for custom halftone

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Searches a PDF for objects to which custom halftones are applied.

633

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

Remove halftone

6.3.47 Check for custom transfer function

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if a PDF contains objects to which transfer functions are applied.

Note:

Transfer functions are not allowed in PDF/X compliant documents.

Related Actions

•

on page 66

•

Remove undercolor removal

on page 152

6.3.48 Check for custom undercolor removal

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if custom undercolor removal definitions (UCR) have been included in the PDF document.

634

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

on page 155

6.3.49 Check for deprecated attributes in XMP metadata

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the XMP metadata streams in the PDF contain attributes that are outdated.

About XMP metadata

Document Properties in Acrobat (Click the

Additional Metadata

button, then select

Advanced

Related Actions

on page 211

6.3.50 Check for differences in page boxes

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Allows you to compare a certain page box's size with that of another page box.

Example

Check if the media box is x inch wider and y inch higher than the trim box.

6.3.51 Check for embedded PostScript fragments

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Searches for fragments of embedded PostScript in a PDF document.

635

PitStop Pro

Embedded PostScript fragments do not show up in the screen preview, but could change the appearance of the printed document. They are generally undesirable in a print production environment.

Related Actions

•

on page 259

•

on page 85

6.3.52 Check for empty layers

Belongs to

•

Category:

Layers

•

Type:

Checks

•

Since version:

12 update 3

What it does

Allows you to check if the selected layers are empty. The Action must be preceded by another

Action that selects the layer(s) concerned.

Example

To check if the PDF contains any empty layers:

on page 267 selects ALL layers -->

Check for empty layers

Related Actions

on page 97

6.3.53 Check for empty pages

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the PDF has pages without content.

Additionally, you can specify that elements outside of a specific page box should be ignored.

Related Actions

•

•

636

PitStop Pro

6.3.54 Check for external streams

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the PDF contains links to external data.

6.3.55 Check for file specifications

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the PDF contains URLs or links to embedded or external files in PDF streams.

You can check for either URL or file specifications, and search for embedded, non-embedded, or both types of links.

Related Actions

•

on page 188

•

6.3.56 Check for flipped objects

Belongs to

•

Category:

Position/Size

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Searches a PDF for objects that have been flipped, normally using QuarkXpress. These can slow down the RIP.

Related Actions

Flip content

on page 123

637

PitStop Pro

6.3.57 Check for garbage after the PDF End-Of-File marker %

%EOF

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks whether the PDF contains undesired characters after the end-of-file marker EOF.

If this is the case, the PDF is malformed. The last line of a PDF should only contain the EOF marker.

To solve this problem, you can do one of the following:

• Open the PDF in Adobe Acrobat and save it (using

File

Save As

• Process the PDF with PitStop Server (with the option

Full Save

enabled).

6.3.58 Check for images with 16 bits per channel

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Searches a PDF for images with 16 bits per channel.

These images have a much larger color range than standard 8 bit images. Note that not all of these colors can be accurately reproduced on press.

6.3.59 Check for invisible objects without fill and stroke

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Searches the PDF document for any objects that have no fill or stroke color associated with them.

Designers sometimes leave such objects in a document rather than deleting them.

638

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

•

on page 261

•

Make DeviceN without NChannel information

on page 157

6.3.60 Check for Javascript

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if a PDF contains instances of the JavaScript programming language.

This language is often used to add interactive functionality to PDF files. However, in a print production environment, these scripts serve no purpose and may result in increased file sizes.

Related Actions

Remove Javascript

on page 114

6.3.61 Check for NChannel colors with non-trivial process dictionary

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks whether the PDF contains NChannel colors with non-trivial process dictionary.

About NChannel

NChannel is supported from PDF 1.6 (Acrobat 7.x) onwards. If you are opening a PDF in an earlier version of Adobe Acrobat, colors can print or display incorrectly.

About process dictionaries

NChannel requires a process dictionary which maps the names used in the colorants list to device colors. This allows giving aliases for process colors.

A "trivial" process dictionary uses aliases that are easy to understand, e.g. maps "Cyan" to the process color "Cyan".

A "non-trivial" process dictionary would use custom aliases, such as "My Process color".

639

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

•

on page 73

•

Remove non-PDF/X compliant halftone

on page 253

6.3.62 Check for non-PDF/X compliant halftone

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Searches a PDF for objects with halftones that are not compliant with the PDF/X specification.

Halftoning is a method of printing shades using a single color ink. By varying the size or density of dots, the eye can see a shade somewhere between the solid color and the color of the background paper. Some of these halftones are not allowed according to the PDF/X specification.

Related Actions

on page 153

6.3.63 Check for non-standard blend modes

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks whether the PDF contains objects with a blend mode other than one of the standard blend modes.

Blend modes determine how colors on different layers blend with each other. For more information about blend modes, visit the Adobe website (

http://www.adobe.com

) or refer to the

Help or documentation of your design application (Adobe InDesign, QuarkXPress, ...)

Related Actions

Select by blend modes

on page 294

6.3.64 Check for PDF/A file structure problems

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

640

PitStop Pro

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks whether the structure of the PDF conforms to the file structure as defined by the PDF/A specification.

6.3.65 Check for pre-separated pages

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color; Page

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the PDF document contains any pages that already have been separated.

A pre-separated PDF contains pages that have been separated into their CMYK components.

This separation process is usually carried out by the RIP, and not in the source PDF document.

6.3.66 Check for reference Xobjects

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks the PDF for the presence of XObjects.

XObjects are supported as of PDF 1.4.

Related Actions

on page 263

6.3.67 Check for rotated objects

Belongs to

•

Category:

Position/Size

641

PitStop Pro

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if a PDF contains objects that have been rotated in page layout applications such as

QuarkXPress. Older RIPs may have problems with such objects.

Optionally, you can allow deviations of e.g. 7°, meaning that objects that have been rotated at angles between 0° and 7° are logged.

Related Actions

•

on page 141

•

•

6.3.68 Check for sheared objects

Belongs to

•

Category:

Position/Size

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the PDF contains objects that have been disproportionally skewed or twisted in a page layout application such as QuarkXpress.

6.3.69 Check for spot color ambiguity

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Searches for ambiguous spot colors. Spot colors are considered ambiguous if the name of the spot color refers to more than one set of color values.

You can set a number of options, to make the check less strict. You can also include a check on

DeviceN color spaces.

6.3.70 Check for sub-page navigation support

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Checks

642

PitStop Pro

What it does

Checks if the PDF supports sub-page navigation, i.e. the possibility to navigate from one layer to another layer on the same page.

Sub-page navigation support is not desired in documents for print.

About page and sub-page navigation

Page navigation allows you to navigate from one

page

to another, whereas sub-page navigation allows you to navigate from

one layer to another layer

on the same page.

Example

6.3.71 Check for transparent objects

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Searches the PDF document for any objects with transparency. You can restrict your search to transparent objects with fill overprint, strike overprint or spot color.

About transparency in PDF

Transparency can cause some problems if you view documents in Adobe Acrobat 4.0 or earlier: transparent objects can be rendered incorrectly.

A transparent layer can also cause problems when you transpose the PostScript code of your

PDF document to the halftone information of your printer (the 'ripping').

A typical example is saving graphics with transparent elements as PDF compatible with Acrobat

It can be useful to make the distinction between spot colors and CMYK colors when checking the transparency settings in your documents, because different rules govern the overprinting of spot colors.

Related Actions

•

on page 298

•

•

•

643

PitStop Pro

6.3.72 Check for unknown objects

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the PDF contains unknown objects.

Unknown objects in this context are objects that are not defined in the PDF 1.3 standard. The

PDF/X standards require all objects in the document to be “known”, or defined in the PDF 1.3

specification.

6.3.73 Check for unreadable data in front of the PDF header signature

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks for unreadable data in front of the PDF header signature.

6.3.74 Check for XFA forms

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks whether the PDF contains XFA forms.

An XFA form is a web form and is not suited for printing documents. XFA stands for XML Forms

Architecture. It's an XML specification, which is rather vague and does not specify any rendering.

Optionally, you can also check if a NeedsRendering key is present in the PDF document (

log if

NeedsRendering key is present

644

PitStop Pro

6.3.75 Check for XMP schema definitions as required by PDF/A

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks whether the PDF contains XMP schema definitions for identifying the document, as required by the PDF/A specification.

6.3.76 Check form fields

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Looks for the presence of form fields in a PDF.

Related Actions

•

on page 112

•

6.3.77 Check halftone phase

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks the PDF documents for the presence of halftone phases.

645

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

Remove halftone phase

on page 153

6.3.78 Check ICC profile version

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the ICC profile version is equal to or lower than a particular version number.

About ICC tagging

Related Actions

•

on page 77

•

on page 251

•

Check if ICC profile differs from ICC profile in PDF/X output intent

•

Select objects of which ICC profile is equal to ICC profile in PDF/X output

•

•

on page 80

6.3.79 Check ICC tagging

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks objects to see whether or not they are ICC tagged or tagged with a particular ICC profile in a particular color space. You can check if the fill and/or stroke of the objects are ICC tagged.

About ICC tagging

646

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

•

on page 77

•

on page 251

•

Check if ICC profile differs from ICC profile in PDF/X output intent

on page 80

•

Select objects of which ICC profile is equal to ICC profile in PDF/X output

•

•

6.3.80 Check if a subset font contains a complete CharSet or

CIDSet

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the subset fonts embedded in the document (if any) contain a complete character or

CID set.

CID (Character Identifier) fonts are a format of Type 1 fonts that are typically used for Chinese,

Japanese and Korean fonts.

Related Actions

•

on page 305

•

6.3.81 Check if blending color space is defined

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color; Page

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the page blending color space has been defined in the PDF document.

647

PitStop Pro

You must set the required blending color space and the required luminosity softmask blending color.

About blending color spaces

blending color space

The

page blending color space

is the blending color space assigned to a page; it is used when individual artwork does not have a blending color space.

The blending color space for soft masks (masks with soft transitions) is called the

luminosity softmask blending color space

. It is usually gray.

Related Actions

•

on page 68

•

on page 247

6.3.82 Check if compression filters are PDF/X compliant

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks whether compression filters used in the PDF are compliant with a specific PDF/X version.

Select the desired PDF/X version:

• PDF/X-1a:2001

• PDF/X-3:2002

• PDF/X-1a:2003

• PDF/X-3:2003

• PDF/X-4

• PDF/X-4p

• PDF/A-1

• PDF/A-2

6.3.83 Check if date is present in document XMP metadata

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks for the date in the XMP metadata of a PDF.

648

PitStop Pro

About XMP metadata

Document Properties in Acrobat (Click the

Additional Metadata

button, then select

Advanced

Related Actions

•

on page 183

•

on page 213

6.3.84 Check if DeviceN printing order is consistent

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Check whether the DeviceN printing order is consistent and whether all colorants are defined in the DeviceN printing order.

6.3.85 Check if document does not need repair

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks whether a PDF is damaged and needs to be repaired when it is opened.

A PDF file can be damaged, for example, if you downloaded it from the Internet and the file transfer was incomplete.

If a PDF is damaged, you can try to redistill it or save it in Adobe Acrobat, using

File

Save as

. If this doesn't solve the problem, you will have to recreate the PDF from the source file, or download it again (if the problem was caused by a corrupt download).

6.3.86 Check if document has enough high-ASCII bytes in the PDF header

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Checks

649

PitStop Pro

What it does

Checks if the PDF header contains at least 4 high-ASCII bytes.

6.3.87 Check if document is optimized for Fast Web View

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Verifies if the document is optimized for the Web.

6.3.88 Check if document is produced by PDFWriter

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if a PDF was produced by PDFWriter.

PDFs created with PDFWriter are not suitable for high-end printing.

6.3.89 Check if document metadata is consistent

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if metadata that is present in different metadata locations is identical.

How it works

There are two metadata locations in a PDF file:

• The

info dictionary

contains information about the file, such as the title, the author, the creation date ... and is visible through the file's Document properties. It's not in XML format.

• The

XMP metadata stream

also contains information about the file, but this information is represented as XMP metadata - XMP referring to Adobe's labeling technology

xtensible

650

PitStop Pro

etadata

latform. All information in the info dictionary is also represented in the XMP metadata stream dictionary, in the form of XMP properties.

Inconsistencies may occur when only one of the metadata locations has been updated.

Extra checks

Optionally you can check if metadata in one location (selected from the list) is also present in the other location; if all metadata should be present in both locations, select

any metadata location

If multiple creators are not considered an inconsistency, select the

Allow multiple creators

checkbox.

Related Actions

•

on page 112

•

on page 278

6.3.90 Check if document requires PostScript LanguageLevel 3

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks a PDF to see if it contains PostScript Level 3-specific features such as transparency or smooth shadings.

About Adobe PostScript

Adobe PostScript is a page descripting language developed by Adobe in 1985. The language has changed over the years, resulting in different versions:

• Adobe PostScript Level 1: first, original version.

• Adobe PostScript Level 2: enhanced version; added support for different page sizes and better color printing.

• Adobe PostScript LanguageLevel 3: improved handling of graphics, supports more fonts, and speeds up printing.

For more information, refer to

http://www.adobe.com/products/postscript/pdfs/PLRM.pdf

6.3.91 Check if document XMP metadata types are valid

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if metadata streams defined in a PDF conform to the XMP schema.

651

PitStop Pro

About XMP metadata streams

There are two metadata locations in a PDF file:

• The

info dictionary

contains information about the file, such as the title, the author, the creation date ... and is visible through the file's Document properties. It's not in XML format.

• The

XMP metadata stream

also contains information about the file, but this information is represented as XMP metadata - XMP referring to Adobe's labeling technology

xtensible

etadata

latform. All information in the info dictionary is also represented in the XMP metadata stream dictionary, in the form of XMP properties.

Inconsistencies may occur when only one of the metadata locations has been updated.

Related Actions

•

on page 211

•

on page 112

•

Set correct document XMP name spaces

on page 278

6.3.92 Check if document XMP name space uses correct prefix

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

The XMP metadata standard (used for labeling metadata in PDFs) defines namespaces for defined sets of core properties. This Action checks if the correct prefixes are used.

Related Actions

on page 116

6.3.93 Check if font contains all glyphs and metrics for all characters used

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Searches the PDF document for fonts that don't have the character set required to display and print the used characters correctly.

Optionally, you can include in your check the glyphs that were removed by subsetting fonts.

652

PitStop Pro

You can then replace these fonts by embedded or subset fonts that do have all required glyphs and metrics.

6.3.94 Check if ICC profile differs from ICC profile in PDF/X output intent

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks whether the fill and/or stroke ICC profile differs from the ICC profile in the PDF/X output intent.

About ICC tagging

Related Actions

•

on page 77

•

on page 251

•

•

Select objects of which ICC profile is equal to ICC profile in PDF/X output

on page 80

•

•

6.3.95 Check if invalid character (.notdef glyph) is used

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the PDF contains invalid characters.

653

PitStop Pro

on page 166

6.3.96 Check if JPEG2000 compressed images are PDF/X compliant

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Check if JPEG2000 compressed images are PDF/X compliant.

You might want to remove or replace non-compliant images.

6.3.97 Check if layer is PDF/X-4 compliant

Belongs to

•

Category:

Layers

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the layers in a PDF document comply with the PDF/X-4 specification.

About layers in PDF/X-4

The PDF/X-4 standard allows the use of layers (OCGs = Optional Content Groups) in PDF.

These layers can have different states (ON or OFF). The state of all OCGs must be defined in an

Optional Content Configuration Dictionary (OCCD). This dictionary must be used by compliant readers to switch on or off the layers.

6.3.98 Check if metadata streams do not have a compression filter

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if metadata streams do not have a compression filter.

654

PitStop Pro

on page 213

6.3.99 Check if object is close to the page edge

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks whether the selected object is situated close to the page edge and might need to be enlarged.

You must specify the required distance to the trim box and the distance into the bleed.

Optionally, you can choose to treat subpaths of compound paths individually. In that case, each of the subpaths will be checked separately.

See also:

•

on page 287

•

6.3.100 Check if object is completely outside page box

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page; Position and size

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Searches for (and optionally selects) objects that lie completely outside the selected page box.

Depending on your workflow, you may want to remove these objects before printing.

6.3.101 Check if object is set to knockout

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if a selected object is set to knockout or not. You can distinguish between the fill and stroke being 'knocked out'.

655

PitStop Pro

If an object is set to knockout, the colors of this object cut out the area underneath. The background color is erased.

6.3.102 Check if object is set to overprint

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the fill and/or stroke of a selected object is set to overprint.

Black objects and particularly smaller text objects should be set to overprint, to compensate for misregistration and to preserve the legibility of the text.

Related Actions

6.3.103 Check if page box is defined

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the selected page box (trim, crop, art or bleed box) has been defined in the PDF.

6.3.104 Check if page box is too large

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the selected page box (art, bleed, crop, or trim box) lies inside the media box.

6.3.105 Check if page scaling factor is used

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page; Position and size

•

Type:

Checks

656

PitStop Pro

What it does

Checks whether the PDF uses a page scaling factor. If so, you can optionally check if a certain page scaling factor applies.

A page with scaling factor 2 will be displayed and printed twice the original size (= scaling factor

1). Page scaling has been introduced in PDF 1.6 and allows you to extend the maximum page size beyond 200 by 200 inch.

Related Actions

•

on page 117

•

6.3.106 Check if solidities of DeviceN colorants are consistent

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Check if solidities of DeviceN colorants are consistent.

6.3.107 Check if the color spaces used match the blend colorspaces

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the color spaces used in the PDF match the blend colorspaces.

6.3.108 Check if trim marks match page box

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if trim marks found in the PDF match the trim box and/or the bleed marks match the bleed box.

657

PitStop Pro

How to proceed

Indicate which marks you want to check: trim marks, bleed marks or both.

To help PitStop detect the trim marks, specify the potential color of the marks, by choosing one or more of the following:

• 400% CMYK

• Separation All (registration)

• 100% black

• A specific color

In case of a specific color, do one of the following:

• Select a color space from the list and use the sliders to select the appropriate color.

•

Click and select the appropriate color.

•

Select an object with the Enfocus Selection tool and click color from the selection.

to grab the fill or stroke

If desired, specify how much the marks are allowed to deviate from the expected position:

• The unit is the unit set in the PitStop Preferences (Units & Guides category), for example: cm or pt

• The maximum value is 2.7 pt; if you enter a higher value, it is automatically reset to 2.7 pt or an equivalent value, if you're using a different unit.

Example

Remark

A filled path with 3 lines is accepted as a trim mark if:

• The color is as specified in the attributes of this Action.

658

PitStop Pro

• It has no dash pattern.

• The 4 points of the 3 lines are a rectangle.

• The path is closed.

• The width is between 0.1 and 2 pt.

• The length is between 8 and 40 pt.

Related Actions

•

•

6.3.109 Check if TrueType fonts are PDF/X-4 or PDF/X-4p compliant

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if TrueType fonts are PDF/X-4 or PDF/X-4p compliant.

About OpenType embedded fonts

OpenType is an extension of the TrueType format that can contain TrueType and/or Type 1 font data. In PDF files it can only appear as an embedded font. It has been introduced in PDF 1.6.

on page 302

6.3.110 Check if URLs in Link Annotations are valid

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks the validity of the hyperlinks in annotations with hyperlinks to web pages, i.e. checks if the target web page exists.

If you're using a proxy server, you should enter the proxy server address and port, and your user name and password. Otherwise, the check cannot be performed.

Related Actions

PitStop provides an Action to solve these problems:

on page 205

659

PitStop Pro

6.3.111 Check if XMP metadata is well-formed

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the XMP metadata streams in the PDF conform to the XMP specifications.

If the XMP metadata is not well-formed, the document cannot be made PDF/X-4 compliant.

Tip:

Fix non well-formed XMP metadata

on page 166.

About XMP metadata

Document Properties in Acrobat (Click the Additional Metadata button, then select Advanced).

6.3.112 Check image compression

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks image filters to ensure that the images in the PDF are not compressed using a particular compression method.

You can check for the following compression methods:

• CCITT

• JPEG

• ZIP

• LZW

• RunLength

• JBIG2

• JPEG2000

660

PitStop Pro

By default, soft-mask images are not included, unless you select the

Also check soft-mask images

checkbox.

6.3.113 Check image compression ratio

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks the compression ratio of the images in a PDF against a particular threshold.

You can check the compression ratio of images compressed with one of the following compression methods:

• CCITT

• JPEG

• ZIP

• LZW

• RunLength

• JBIG2

• JPEG2000

Example

If the JPEG images in your PDF should not be compressed at all, use the following values:

Compression ratio of JPEG images must be  equal to 1.0000

A compression ratio of "1" means "no compression"; a compression ratio of "0.5" means

"50%" , ...

6.3.114 Check image interpolation

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if images in the PDF have been resampled.

6.3.115 Check ink coverage (basic object check)

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color;Prepress

661

PitStop Pro

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks the total CMYK ink coverage of the color of the

objects

in the PDF.

You can for example check if the ink coverage is at least 300%.

6.3.116 Check ink coverage (total page check)

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color;Prepress

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks the total CMYK ink coverage of all colors on a page (inside a particular page box).

You can for example check if the total ink coverage in the media box is at least 300%.

It's also possible to ignore small areas, for example areas smaller than 1 inch.

6.3.117 Check layer properties

Belongs to

•

Category:

Layers

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks certain properties, i.e. default visibility and presence in the Layers panel ("layer configuration") of the layers selected by another Action in the same Action List.

Example

To check the properties of

all

layers in the PDF, create the following Action List:

Check layer properties

Related Actions

•

•

on page 268

662

PitStop Pro

6.3.118 Check layers

Belongs to

•

Category:

Layers

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks the layers in a PDF.

You can set a number of different checks, such as:

• Document must not have layers, i.e. optional content is not allowed.

• The document catalog dictionary must not contain OCProperties key.

• Document must not have alternate layer configurations, i.e. only one Layers panel ("layers palette") is allowed.

• Layer configuration (i.e. the Layers panel) must have a name.

• Multiple layer configurations (i.e. Layers panels) must not have the

same

name.

• Layer group must not be missing from order, i.e. the Layer group must be present in the order of the Layer panel.

• Layer configuration (i.e. the Layers panel) must not contain application specific usage entry.

About PDF layers

Layered content usually comes from applications such as InDesign, AutoCAD or Visio. When converted to PDF, the layers are retained and can be viewed and navigated in Adobe Acrobat.

However, if you print a PDF file that contains layers, only the content that is visible on-screen is printed. This may or may not be desired.

"Conventional" layers versus PDF layers

Layers in digital image editing

Layers in PDF

have a different meaning. They are used to hide or show page content:

• Turning

a layer, all objects on this layer are shown on-screen.

• Turning

off

a layer, all objects on this layer are hidden, i.e. they become invisible.

To work with layers in a PDF document in Adobe Acrobat, select

View

Show/Hide

Navigation Panes

Layers

For more information, refer to the Adobe Acrobat help.

Related Actions

•

663

PitStop Pro

•

on page 268

•

Fix layers

on page 93

6.3.119 Check line weight

Belongs to

•

Category:

LineArt; Prepress

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the line weight of the selected objects is higher or lower than a particular value.

Related Actions

•

•

•

on page 84

6.3.120 Check marked content

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Logs content that has been identified with a marked content tag in a PDF.

Marked content is content tagged with special messages so that the application that opens it can read it in a particular way.

Related Actions

Remove marked content

on page 114

6.3.121 Check maximum path length

Belongs to

•

Category:

Line Art

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks for a maximum amount of nodes in a path.

664

PitStop Pro

6.3.122 Check media box origin

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page; Position and size

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks whether the media box is set to coordinates 0,0.

Related Actions

•

•

Select page by number of paths

on page 123

6.3.123 Check number of pages

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page;Doc

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks the number of pages in a PDF.

You can for example check if there are less/more than x page(s), or if the PDF contains an odd/ even number of pages ...

6.3.124 Check number of paths on page

Belongs to

•

Category:

Line Art

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks the number of paths on one page.

You can for example log a warning if the PDF contains more than 4 paths on a page.

Related Actions

on page 271

665

PitStop Pro

6.3.125 Check number of separations

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks the number of separations that occur in a PDF file. You can set a precise number (e.g.

5 separations) or a range (e.g. less than 5) and choose whether or not to exclude certain colors

(e.g. CMYK plates, spot color All ...).

Note:

From version 12 update 2 onwards, you can use regular expressions to indicate which separations should not be counted.

Checking ICC tagged objects

6.3.126 Check number of spot colors

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks the number of spot colors in a document.

You must enter the number of spot colors the document must have.

If you select the option

Spot colors whose names differ only by their suffix are counted as one

, spot colors with the same name but with a different suffix (e.g. PANTONE 3258 C, PANTONE

666

PitStop Pro

3258 U, PANTONE 3258 M) are counted as one color instead of different (3 in this example) colors. For more information about suffixes, refer to

on page 70.

6.3.127 Check object compression

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks the compression of the PDF structure (possible as of PDF 1.5).

You can also check if the compression is compliant with PDF/X.

About object compression

Related Actions

•

•

on page 191

6.3.128 Check OPI path

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

If your document contains objects with OPI information, you can use this Action to retrieve the path to the high resolution images.

About OPI

Related Actions

•

•

on page 195

667

PitStop Pro

•

•

•

6.3.129 Check OPI type

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks which OPI types are allowed in a PDF.

You can check for the following OPI types:

• None

• 1.3

• 2.0

• both 1.3 and 2.0

About OPI

Related Actions

•

•

•

•

•

6.3.130 Check optimal compression

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the latest and most efficient compression mechanisms have been applied in the PDF document.

Previous versions of Adobe Acrobat (2.1, 3.0, 4.0) featured less advanced compression mechanisms.

668

PitStop Pro

About object compression

Related Actions

•

on page 187

•

6.3.131 Check Output Intent

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the desired color management output intent is used in a PDF document.

You can check for compliance with a particular PDF/X version and/or check if a particular ICC profile or ICC characterization is used.

Related Actions

Change Output Intent

on page 69

6.3.132 Check overprint mode

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if fill and/or stroke overprint is set to Standard overprint mode (OPM 0), or Illustrator overprint mode (OPM 1).

About overprint modes

• In

Standard overprint mode

(OPM 0), the tint value 0 of one of the CMYK inks in the foreground object has a knockout effect on the color rendering of the underlying object.

In other words, a foreground ink with a C, M, Y or K value of 0 % erases the corresponding background ink. Here, the “foreground inks win” principle applies.

• In

Illustrator overprint mode

(OPM 1), the tint value 0 is neutral: it is ignored (as if it were

“not specified”) and has therefore no effect on the color rendering of the underlying object.

For more information and examples, refer to

the PitStop Pro Reference Guide on the Enfocus website

669

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

•

•

6.3.133 Check page bleed box

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks and compares the size of the bleed box with the size of the trim or crop box.

6.3.134 Check page boxes consistency

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if different page boxes (if defined) have the same size and position.

6.3.135 Check page box layout

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks whether the page boxes comply with the selected layout (Press, Screen viewing or PDF/

X layout).

The attributes depend on the chosen layout:

•

Press layout

(typically for print)

You can define the minimum distance required between the media and bleed box and between the bleed and trim box, and you should choose one of the following options:

•

Crop box must equal trim box

, or

670

PitStop Pro

•

No crop box must be defined or the crop box equals the media box

. This means that it is OK if the crop box is not defined, but if it is defined, it should have the same size and position as the media box.

•

Screen viewing

If you select this layout, the Action checks if the page is defined solely by the crop box, which should have the same size as the media box. No other page boxes are allowed.

•

PDF/X layout

If you select this layout, the Action checks if the page box layout is compliant with the selected PDF/X version.

If you have chosen PDF/X-1a:2003 or PDF/X-3:2003, the art box or trim box shall not extend beyond the boundaries of the bleed box and the crop box.

Related Actions

Change page box layout

on page 121

6.3.136 Check page format

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Example

To set all your page boxes to a multiple of 22cm wide

Select

A multiple of columns

To have pages that are always multiples of 22 cm:

Enter 22 cm as column width.

Enter 0 as column spacing.

Related Actions

Change page format

on page 122

6.3.137 Check page orientation

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Checks

671

PitStop Pro

What it does

Checks if all the pages in a PDF have a given orientation (portrait, landscape, all the same orientation or the most used orientation).

The orientation is based on the selected page box.

Related Actions

•

on page 122

•

on page 285

6.3.138 Check page rotation angle

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page; Position and size

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks whether the page rotation angle is equal to a specific value.

You can check for a rotation angle of -90°, 0°, 90°, or180° (clockwise).

Related Actions

•

on page 285

•

6.3.139 Check page safe type zone

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks for text or objects that overlap or come close to an edge limit in a PDF.

The safe type zone is the area where you must not place any text or objects, unless these objects are intended as bleed.

How to proceed

Define the safe type zone as one of the page boxes.

Optionally define values for the left, right, top and/or bottom margin.

To make sure that even and odd pages are mirrored, select

Mirror horizontal margins

. This is recommended if the left and right margin have a different size.

Figure 5: Mirror horizontal margins illustrated

Mirror horizontal margins

is not selected. Margins of odd and even pages are the same; the left margin is larger than the right margin.

672

PitStop Pro

Mirror horizontal margins

is selected. Odd and even pages are mirrored; the outer margin is smaller than the inner margin.

To only check for text in the page safe type zone, select the

Restrict this check to text

checkbox.

6.3.140 Check page size

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Allows you to check if the size or position of a specific page box matches the desired size or position.

How to proceed

Do one of the following:

• To check the coordinates of the selected page box, select

Rectangle

• To check the height and width of the selected page box, select

Size

Select the page box of which you want to check the size or position.

Enter the required values (coordinates or width and height).

In the

Precision

field, indicate how much the actual size or position is allowed to deviate from the entered values.

673

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

Select by page size

on page 285

6.3.141 Check pages have same size

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks whether all pages in a PDF have the same size. The page size is based on the selected page box.

6.3.142 Check PDF/A version key

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks the PDF/A version key.

Related Actions

•

•

6.3.143 Check PDF/Acrobat compatibility

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Allows you to checks if a particular Acrobat or PDF version is used in a PDF document.

674

PitStop Pro

You can for example check if the Acrobat version is equal to or higher/lower than a particular version.

6.3.144 Check PDF/X version key

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks the PDF/X version key.

Related Actions

•

on page 109

•

Check if date is present in document XMP metadata

on page 115

6.3.145 Check PDF/X viewer preferences

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the PDF document complies with the viewer preferences as required by the PDF/X specifications.

PDF/X-1a:2003 and PDF/X-3:2003 require the view area, view clip, print area and print clip to be set to the media (or bleed) box.

on page 83

6.3.146 Check pdfxid prefix in XMP name space

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the pdfxid prefix in the XMP namespace is correct.

675

PitStop Pro

The namespace prefix is required for PDF/A.

6.3.147 Check presence of document metadata stream

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the PDF contains metadata, i.e. descriptive information about the file, such as the title, the author, the creation date ...

About XMP metadata

Document Properties in Acrobat (Click the

Additional Metadata

button, then select

Advanced

Related Actions

•

on page 208

•

on page 183

6.3.148 Check presence of ToUnicode map in font

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the unicode mappings of the fonts are compliant with a particular PDF/A version.

This mapping is used to override the default text extraction behavior, for example when using the Acrobat text tool to copy and paste text to another application like Notepad.

6.3.149 Check rendering intent

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color; Prepress

•

Type:

Checks

676

PitStop Pro

What it does

Allows you to check the rendering intent of particular objects (Paths, Text, Paths or Text,

Images, or all Rendering objects) in a PDF.

You can check whether or not they use rendering, and if they do, which type:

• Absolute Colorimetric

• Relative Colorimetric

• Perceptual

• Saturation

About rendering intents

For more information, refer to the chapter "Rendering intents to remap colors" in

the PitStop

Pro Reference Guide on the Enfocus website

Related Actions

•

•

on page 69

•

Snap color to color set

6.3.150 Check required color set

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks for a restrictive range of tints in a PDF.

How to proceed

Define the color set to be checked:

To allow the use of 100% black, select

Black

Note:

If only black is allowed in the PDF,

only

select the

Black

checkbox. Do not add any other color.

To add another color that is allowed in the PDF:

Click

New

A new entry appears in the text box.

To allow a spot color (optionally), select the

Spot color

checkbox and type the name of the spot color in the text field. You should define a CMYK equivalent too (see next step).

The name of the spot color is shown in the text box.

677

PitStop Pro

Enter the required values for CMYK (expressed in %) in the fields below the New/Remove button.

Your changes are shown in the text box.

If only one color should be used for images, select that color from the

Images must use only

list.

Related Actions

on page 79

6.3.151 Check resolution

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks the resolution of particular image types (color or grayscale images, 1-bit images or any images).

Note:

This Action checks for the

effective

resolution; if the image has been resized, this is the resolution after scaling.

Related Actions

Select by image resolution

on page 264

6.3.152 Check spot color by alternate color space

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Searches for spot colors with an alternate color space definition.

You can search for the following alternate color spaces:

• Device CMYK

• Device gray

• Device RGB

• ICC tagged gray

• ICC tagged RGB

• ICC tagged CMYK

• ICC tagged Lab

• Calibrated gray

• Calibrated RGB

678

PitStop Pro

• Lab

6.3.153 Check spot color by name

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if a particular spot color is present in the document.

In the text field, enter the name of the spot color to check for.

Note:

From version 12 update 2 onwards, you can use regular expressions to define the spot color name.

6.3.154 Check spot color suffix

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks whether the spot colors in the PDF have a given suffix.

You can choose one of the following suffixes: CV; CVC; CVU; CVS; CVP; C; U; or M (or None of the above).

About spot color suffixes

Suffixes represent the

apparent

color of the color when printed on different types of paper. For example, PANTONE 3258

and PANTONE 3258

refer to the same color, but when printed on

oated, respectively

ncoated paper, they will look different, although the same ink formula was used.

Suffix overview

Suffix

CVC

CVU

Meaning

Computer video (electronic simulation)

Computer video - coated

Computer video - uncoated

Coated paper

Uncoated paper

679

PitStop Pro

Suffix

Meaning

Matte paper

Related Actions

•

•

6.3.155 Check text point size

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks the text point size against a particular value.

Examples

Text point size must be equal to 5 pt.

To check the minimum text point size, select "Text point size must be more than or equal to ...

pt" and enter the appropriate value.

6.3.156 Check text x-height

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Note that the check only can work if at least one of the characters to be measured (x, u, v, w or z) is available in the PDF.

6.3.157 Check that composite TrueType CIDToGIDMap is present

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Checks

680

PitStop Pro

What it does

Checks if the PDF contains a mapping table for composite TrueType fonts to map CID (Character

IDs) to GID (Clyph IDs), and if it's correctly defined. This is required by the PDF/A specification.

CID (Character Identifier) fonts are a format of Type 1 fonts that are typically used for Chinese,

Japanese and Korean fonts.

GID (Glyph Identifier) are identifiers to identify all glyphs in a font.

6.3.158 Check thumbnails

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks if the PDF contains thumbnails.

6.3.159 Check Trapnets for PDF/X

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks whether trapnet information in a PDF is compliant with either PDF/X-1 or PDF/X-3 standards.

About trapping

In printing, even the slightest misregistration of the plates can cause gaps or color shifts between colored objects to appear.

Trapping

If the traps in a document were added before the PDF document was created, they are included in the PDF file as

trap networks

. A page may have more than one trap network, e.g. one for each intended output device, but all the different trap networks are stored in the same trap network, also called

trapnet annotation

. When printed, the trapnet annotation provides all the required trapping information for the page.

About the PDF/X Requirements for trapping

When trapnet annotations are found in the document,

PDF/X-1a:2001

requires that:

• The

trapped flag

in the document is set to either True or False (Unknown is not allowed).

• If the trapped flag is

False

, the document does not contain trapnet annotations.

681

PitStop Pro

• If the trapped flag is

True

, the document is completely trapped, and the document contains trapnet annotations.

•

Font substitution

is not used.

• The

CMYK

color space is used.

When trapnet annotations are found in the document,

PDF/X-3:2002

requires that:

• Trapping occurs only when all the

fonts in the document are embedded

• The

CMYK

color space is used.

Related Actions

•

•

on page 276

•

Remove unused destinations

6.3.160 Check TrueType font encoding according to PDF/A

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Checks whether the Truetype font used in the PDF complies with a given version of the PDF/A specification. Fonts must for example be embedded in the PDF.

6.3.161 Check unused destinations

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

This Action allows you to

verify

if there are any unused destinations in a PDF document.

The Action

allows you to

remove

them from the PDF.

6.3.162 Check XY scaling difference

Belongs to

•

Category:

Position/Size

•

Type:

Checks

682

PitStop Pro

What it does

Checks the proportional scaling of a selected object.

In some cases, a small XY scaling difference is allowed, for example in line art (e.g. a rectangle in one color); in images this may cause distortions.

6.3.163 Clean up unused resources

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes resources that are not used, for example embedded images or fonts, to reduce the file size.

6.3.164 Close path

Belongs to

•

Category:

Line Art

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Joins the connection between the first and the last anchor point of a path (as required).

6.3.165 Combine subpaths

Belongs to

•

Category:

Line Art

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Combines two selected paths.

About subpaths

683

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

•

on page 272

•

6.3.166 Convert alternate color space to CMYK

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the alternate color space for a spot to CMYK.

If you want to change all alternate color spaces except for gray, select the

Do not convert if alternate color space is gray

checkbox.

About alternate color spaces

6.3.167 Convert color

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the color space of an object to gray, RGB, CMYK or a given spot color.

You can convert the fill and/or stroke color as required.

6.3.168 Convert color to shading color space

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Converts the colors in a PDF to their shading counterparts.

684

PitStop Pro

6.3.169 Convert images to indexed color space

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color;Image

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the color of images to the indexed color space.

About the indexed color space

The indexed color space uses no more than 256 colors, and is as such particularly suited for use in Web applications. Images are typically converted to indexed color mode in order to

decrease their file sizes

6.3.170 Convert indexed color space to base color space

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the indexed color space back to the original colors.

About the indexed color space

The indexed color space uses no more than 256 colors, and is as such particularly suited for use in Web applications. Images are typically converted to indexed color mode in order to

decrease their file sizes

6.3.171 Convert PDF/X-4p output intent to PDF/X-4

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Converts PDF/X-4p output intent to PDF/X-4.

PDF/X-4p is used when the ICC profile in the output intent is supplied externally.

685

PitStop Pro

In PDF/X-4, the ICC profile in the output intent must be supplied internally, so this Action embedds the external ICC profile.

6.3.172 Convert process to DeviceN

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Converts all instances of device CMYK to DeviceN.

You must indicate what is most important to you:

• Reducing the number of color plates to a minimum, or

• Keeping the overprint settings

6.3.173 Convert shading color space to solid color

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Converts shading colors ("gradients") in the corresponding solid colors. You can convert the fill, the stroke or both as required.

Shadings represent complex mathematical functions. That's why certain output devices may not be able to correctly interpret them. Shadings can also cause problems during color conversions.

Related Actions

Select shading objects

current Action list stack. It's typically combined with the

6.3.174 Convert spot color to equivalent CMYK color

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the color of a spot color object to its CMYK equivalents (for example to save on ink).

You can do this for all spot colors, or only for spot colors of which the alternate color is CMYK or

Gray (less risk of getting small color variations).

686

PitStop Pro

6.3.175 Convert text to outlines

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to outline the text segments in your selection.

This can be useful to make sure that your text is printed exactly "as is" or, if you cannot embed the font, for example due to font licensing restrictions.

Note:

By default, invalid characters (often represented as a small box containing an X or a question mark) are not converted, unless you select the

Outline invalid characters

(.notdef glyph)

checkbox.

6.3.176 Create varnish

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Creates a varnish on top of the selected object.

This varnish is a user-defined spot color with the same shape of the selected object.

How to proceed?

Enter a name to recognize this spot color by, and indicate whether or not you wish to set it to overprint.

6.3.177 Crop images

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to crop images to match a clip mask and/or a particular page box.

687

PitStop Pro

6.4 D

6.4.1 Duplicate top of selection stack

Belongs to

•

Category:

Operator

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Duplicate top of selection stack is a logical operator. It is used to

duplicate

the top of the

Both "Duplicate top of selection stack" and

("delete")

operator.

For internal use only

are only used internally by PitStop.

6.5 E

6.5.1 Embed font

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Embeds a selected font if it is available on the system of the machine PitStop is running on.

You can include the entire font or only embed a subset.

688

PitStop Pro

About embedding fonts

Embedding fonts

Embedding a font as a

subset

means that only those characters of the font that are actually used in the text are embedded. This reduces the file size by not including superfluous font information.

Related Actions

•

on page 168

•

on page 299

•

6.6 F

6.6.1 Fix invalid characters (.notdef usage)

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Fixes invalid .notdef glyphs in a PDF.

.notdef glyphs are replacement characters for undefined characters in a PDF; they often look like a small box containing an X or a question mark and are not PDF/X compliant.

on page 240

6.6.2 Fix layers

Belongs to

•

Category:

Layers

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to perform a number of fixes to the layers in a PDF.

Options:

• Remove alternate layer configurations, only keep default configuration

689

PitStop Pro

• Add missing layer configuration names (e.g. "config_1", "config_2", ...)

• Make layer configuration names unique

• Remove order from layer configuration if layers are missing

• Remove AS (AutoState) entry from layer configurations. (AutoState entries are application specific usage entries).

Note:

Layer configuration refers to the Layers panel.

About PDF layers

Layered content usually comes from applications such as InDesign, AutoCAD or Visio. When converted to PDF, the layers are retained and can be viewed and navigated in Adobe Acrobat.

However, if you print a PDF file that contains layers, only the content that is visible on-screen is printed. This may or may not be desired.

"Conventional" layers versus PDF layers

Layers in digital image editing

Layers in PDF

have a different meaning. They are used to hide or show page content:

• Turning

a layer, all objects on this layer are shown on-screen.

• Turning

off

a layer, all objects on this layer are hidden, i.e. they become invisible.

To work with layers in a PDF document in Adobe Acrobat, select

View

Show/Hide

Navigation Panes

Layers

For more information, refer to the Adobe Acrobat help.

Related Actions

Check layers

on page 197

6.6.3 Fix non well-formed XMP metadata

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Corrects badly formed XMP metadata and optionally removes it, if it cannot be fixed, ensuring that PDF files can be made PDF/X-4 compliant.

About XMP metadata

XMP metadata is descriptive information about the file embedded in the PDF, for example the name of the author, keywords, copyright information... XMP refers to labeling technology that

690

PitStop Pro is used, i.e. Adobe's Extensible Metadata Platform. You can view the XMP metadata in a file's

Document Properties in Acrobat (Click the

Additional Metadata

button, then select

Advanced

Related Actions

on page 211

6.6.4 Fix PDF/A extension schema definitions in document XMP metadata

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Fixes issues with the PDF/A extension schema definitions in document XMP metadata.

About XMP metadata

Document Properties in Acrobat (Click the

Additional Metadata

button, then select

Advanced

About XMP schema definitions

6.6.5 Flatten annotations

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Changes

•

Since version:

12 update 3

What it does

Example

Before:

The PDF contains five annotations: a stamp, a sticky note, a sound clip, a text note and an attachment.

691

PitStop Pro

After:

The PDF does not contain any annotations anymore; the Comments List is empty.

The graphics in the PDF can be selected and removed or modified (e.g. the color, size,...) as

required. Note that the callouts are removed.

6.6.6 Flatten form fields

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to convert form fields to normal objects in a document.

This Action is useful if you have output issues with form fields as content, for example because the output device or the PDF renderer does not support form fields.

Related Actions

•

on page 205

692

PitStop Pro

•

6.6.7 Flatten layers

Belongs to

•

Category:

Layers

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes the selected layers. You can choose whether or not to remove the objects on these layers as well:

• To keep all objects, regardless of their visibility, select

Make all elements visible

. All objects

(including hidden objects) will become visible after the layers have been removed.

• To keep all objects

based on their default visibility

, select

Preserve the initial view of the

PDF

. Objects on layers with

default

visibility turned on are preserved (and remain visible). All other objects (i.e. by default hidden objects) are removed.

• To keep all objects

based on their current visibility

, select

Preserve the current view of the

PDF

. Objects on visible layers are preserved, regardless of their default visibility state. All other objects (i.e. currently hidden objects) are removed.

About PDF layers

Layered content usually comes from applications such as InDesign, AutoCAD or Visio. When converted to PDF, the layers are retained and can be viewed and navigated in Adobe Acrobat.

However, if you print a PDF file that contains layers, only the content that is visible on-screen is printed. This may or may not be desired.

"Conventional" layers versus PDF layers

Layers in digital image editing

Layers in PDF

have a different meaning. They are used to hide or show page content:

• Turning

a layer, all objects on this layer are shown on-screen.

• Turning

off

a layer, all objects on this layer are hidden, i.e. they become invisible.

To work with layers in a PDF document in Adobe Acrobat, select

View

Show/Hide

Navigation Panes

Layers

For more information, refer to the Adobe Acrobat help.

Related Actions

693

PitStop Pro

6.6.8 Flatten objects in layer

Belongs to

•

Category:

Layers

•

Type:

Changes

•

Since version:

12 update 3

What it does

Removes the selected objects from ALL layers and at the same time removes all empty layers.

You can choose whether or not to remove hidden objects:

• To keep all objects, regardless of their visibility, select

Make all elements visible

. All objects

(including hidden objects) will become visible after the layers have been removed.

• To keep all objects

based on their default visibility

, select

Preserve the initial view of the

PDF

. Objects on layers with

default

visibility turned on are preserved (and remain visible). All other objects (i.e. by default hidden objects) are removed.

• To keep all objects

based on their current visibility

, select

Preserve the current view of the

PDF

. Objects on visible layers are preserved, regardless of their default visibility state. All other objects (i.e. currently hidden objects) are removed.

About PDF layers

Layered content usually comes from applications such as InDesign, AutoCAD or Visio. When converted to PDF, the layers are retained and can be viewed and navigated in Adobe Acrobat.

However, if you print a PDF file that contains layers, only the content that is visible on-screen is printed. This may or may not be desired.

"Conventional" layers versus PDF layers

Layers in digital image editing

Layers in PDF

have a different meaning. They are used to hide or show page content:

• Turning

a layer, all objects on this layer are shown on-screen.

• Turning

off

a layer, all objects on this layer are hidden, i.e. they become invisible.

To work with layers in a PDF document in Adobe Acrobat, select

View

Show/Hide

Navigation Panes

Layers

For more information, refer to the Adobe Acrobat help.

Related Actions

on page 94

694

PitStop Pro

6.6.9 Flip content

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page;Position/Size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Flips the contents of a selected object horizontally or vertically.

You can flip the content relative to the center of one of the page boxes. Note that you can take page rotation into account as required.

Related Actions

6.7 G

6.7.1 Gather color information

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Informs

What it does

Collects information about the color spaces used in a PDF and presents it in the log.

6.7.2 Gather filters information

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Informs

What it does

Collects information about:

• The data format of the file (ASCII/binary)

• Whether or not compression is used

• The compression filters (if any), for example: ZIP, JPEG, LZW, ...

695

PitStop Pro

This information is presented in the Preflight Report under

General File Information

Compression

Related Actions

Check contents compression

on page 182

on page 182

6.7.3 Gather font information

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Informs

What it does

Collects information about fonts used in a PDF and presents it in the log.

The following information is logged:

• Font Name

• Type

• Encoding

• Embedded

• Subset

6.7.4 Gather image information

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Informs

What it does

Collects information about the images used in a PDF and presents it in the log.

The following information is logged:

• Type

• Color Space

• Physical Resolution

• Effective Resolution

• Page found

• Angle

• Skew

• Flipped

• Custom Transfer

• Custom Halftone

• Custom BG (black generation)

696

PitStop Pro

• Custom UCR (undercolor removal definitions)

6.7.5 Gather ink information

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Informs

What it does

Calculates the amount of each color separation needed to print a page, and a complete document, i.e. how much of each page is actually covered by each ink.

Inks

checkbox (at the bottom of the General section in the Preflight Profile editor). This check is off by default

(because the calculation is time consuming).

6.7.6 Gather OPI information

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Informs

What it does

Collects information about the OPI (Open Prepress Interface) used in a PDF and presents it in the log.

About OPI

Related Actions

•

•

on page 195

•

•

•

group contains the Actions to set the trim marks (using

6.7.7 Gather Output Intent information

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

697

PitStop Pro

•

Type:

Informs

What it does

Collects information about the output intents used in a PDF document and presents it in the log.

In the report, you can find the following information (if output intents are used):

• ICC profile or ICC characterization name

• Registry name

• Additional information

6.7.8 Gather page box information

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Informs

What it does

Collects information about the page boxes used in a PDF document and presents it in the log.

In the report file (under Page boxes), each page box layout is represented by 2 drawings:

• One to show the page boxes that were defined in the document ("defined" page boxes)

• One to show the actual position of the page ("effective" page boxes).

Below these drawings, an overview of all page boxes and their sizes is listed:

• The pages this page box layout applies to

• The start position of the media box

• The page rotation

• The page scaling factor

6.7.9 Gather pages information

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata; Page

•

Type:

Informs

What it does

Collects information about the pages (number of pages and range) in a PDF and presents it in the log.

6.7.10 Group Actions

Belongs to

•

Category:

Operator

698

PitStop Pro

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to group several Actions within an Action List.

This Action is useful to organize and document your Action List.

Note:

Instead of using the Group Actions Action, you can as well right-click an Action in the Action List and select

Make Group

from the context menu.

How to proceed

Double-click

Group Actions

to add it to the Action List.

Specify a meaningful name for your Action group and enter a description.

Move

Group Actions

to the desired position. You can drag and drop it, or use the options in the context menu (

Move Up

Move Down

Add the required Actions to your Action List and drag them to your group.

Example

The screenshot below shows the

Add my Printer Marks and Enlarge

Action List (by default provided with PitStop). This Action List contains 3 Action groups (preceded by an icon: if the group is expanded; if the group is collapsed):

• The

Registration marks

group contains the different Actions required to add registration marks to the top, bottom, left and right of the page.

• The

Color bars

group contains the Actions to create two color bars.

• The

Trim marks

56).

699

PitStop Pro

6.8 L

6.8.1 Log selection

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Checks

What it does

Allows you to log the selection you made with another Action in the same Action list.

How to proceed

Select a language and enter a text string that will appear in the Report as a reason for any selected objects failing.

Note:

You can configure different descriptions for different languages (for example:

JPEG images

in English versus

JPEG afbeeldingen

in Dutch). The language shown in the log file depends on the PitStop Pro language (See

Edit

Preferences

PitStop

Pro Preferences

Indicate whether or not the following information should be logged as well (if applicable):

• The type of page and document objects

• The annotation objects

Note:

By default, annotations aren't logged. Even if Log selection applies to a selection made by

, nothing will be logged, unless the

Report the annotation objects

checkbox is selected.

Select the desired log level.

Note:

In this case, it doesn't make sense to choose "Don't log", since the result of this Action is shown in the Enfocus Navigator.

Example

To check if a PDF contains red text, you could create the following Action List:

Select fill and stroke color

<!-- Add

Select color

on page 252. Select fill and stroke and determine the

color you want to check for, for example using the Grab fill and Grab stroke icon -->

Select text segments

on page 306 -->

AND

on page 279 : necessary to combine the two previous Actions -->

AND

700

PitStop Pro

Log selection

<!-- Choose "English" as language and enter "Red text" as explanation.

Select "Log as warning" -->

If you run this Action List, all red text will be selected and logged as a warning. In the Enfocus

6.9 M

6.9.1 Make DeviceN without NChannel information

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Converts the color space to DeviceN without NChannel information.

About NChannel

NChannel is supported from PDF 1.6 (Acrobat 7.x) onwards. If you are opening a PDF in an earlier version of Adobe Acrobat, colors can print or display incorrectly.

About converting NChannel to DeviceN

This Action will convert NChannel to DeviceN, so the object looks as it will be printed when using devices not supporting PDF 1.6 features.

Note that there are three options. You can convert the color space to:

•

DeviceN

•

NChannel with regular DeviceN color information only

•

NChannel with color information additional to regular DeviceN

Note:

This Action will have no visual effect if all colors are available on the target device.

PitStop provides an Action List with the same functionality: Convert NChannel Color Space to

DeviceN

Related Actions

•

Check for NChannel colors with non-trivial process dictionary

on page 171

701

PitStop Pro

•

on page 253

6.9.2 Make document metadata consistent

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Makes sure that the metadata in the different metadata locations has the same values. In case of inconsistencies, the most recent value is used.

If multiple creators are not considered an inconsistency, select the

Allow multiple creators

checkbox. In that case, the "Creator" property will not be changed, even if it is not the same in the different metadata locations.

How it works

There are two metadata locations in a PDF file:

• The

info dictionary

contains information about the file, such as the title, the author, the creation date ... and is visible through the file's Document properties. It's not in XML format.

• The

XMP metadata stream

also contains information about the file, but this information is represented as XMP metadata - XMP referring to Adobe's labeling technology

xtensible

etadata

latform. All information in the info dictionary is also represented in the XMP metadata stream dictionary, in the form of XMP properties.

Inconsistencies may occur when only one of the metadata locations has been updated.

Related Actions

•

on page 209

•

Check PDF/X viewer preferences

on page 278

6.9.3 Make mask

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Creates a mask from at least two selected objects (line art or text).

702

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

Release mask

on page 151

6.9.4 Make viewer preferences PDF/X compliant

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to change the viewer preferences of the PDF document, to make them PDF/X compliant.

PDF/X-1a:2003 and PDF/X-3:2003 require the view area, view clip, print area and print clip to be set to the media (or bleed) box.

Related Actions

on page 187

6.9.5 Match fill and stroke colors

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

•

Since version:

12 update 3

What it does

Changes the stroke color to match the fill color or vice versa.

Use case

Change the stroke color to match the fill color

Related Actions

on page 67

6.9.6 Merge into text lines

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

703

PitStop Pro

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to merge text into text lines.

This Action merges all text that occurs on one line and has the same font into one text object.

This is useful if you want to change text (e.g. the font) on a line by line basis.

Related Actions

•

on page 167

•

on page 167

6.9.7 Move media box to 0.0

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Changes the coordinates of the media box, so that the lower left corner of the media box is located at coordinates 0,0. This won't change the way the file looks.

Related Actions

•

•

6.9.8 Move objects into the page box

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page;Position/Size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Moves the selected objects into a particular page box.

You can include annotations as required.

Related Actions

•

on page 138

•

on page 124

704

PitStop Pro

6.9.9 Move objects out of the page box

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page; Position/Size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Moves the selected objects out of a particular page box.

You can can include annotations as required.

Related Actions

•

on page 138

•

on page 124

6.9.10 Move objects to corner

Belongs to

•

Category:

Position/Size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Moves the selected graphic elements to the defined corner of the selected page box.

How to proceed

Proceed as follows:

Select the anchor point of the object you want to use for positioning the object, for example

"upper left".

Select the anchor point of the specified page box you want to use for positioning, for example

"center".

Select the page box itself, for example "crop box".

Select the

Use page rotation

checkbox as required.

Example

To move the images in your document to the lower right corner of the page, without cutting off the images, use:

Select images

Move objects to corner

<!-- settings (example): Place the lower right corner of the graphic elements

relative to the lower right corner of the trim box -->

705

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

•

on page 124

•

on page 124

6.9.11 Move page box

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to move one of the page boxes to the desired position.

You can choose which page you want to move, and define the target position in one of the following ways:

• By specifying the position relative to one of the other page boxes, based on the anchor point.

• By specifying the target X and Y coordinates.

• By specifying the values by which the X and Y axis should be moved.

You can take into account page rotation and scaling factor as required.

6.9.12 Move page content

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page; Position/Size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Moves the contents of a page in the preferred direction (horizontally or vertically) by the specified distance:

• A positive value, e.g. "1 cm" will move the content to the right (horizontally) or to the top of the page (vertically).

• A negative value, e.g. "-1 cm" will move the content to the left (horizontally) or to the bottom of the page (vertically).

Note:

Remember that the unit used in Actions (in this example "cm") is defined in the

PitStop Pro Preferences (Units & Guides Category).

You can choose whether or not to take into account page rotation and scaling factor (if applicable).

6.9.13 Move page content to corner

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page; Position/Size

706

PitStop Pro

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Moves the contents of a page to a chosen corner.

This Action does not center the object on the corner but moves the closest objects to that corner and moves the other objects by the same distance towards the corner (horizontally or vertically).

Example

To move the page content to the lower left

Select Move page content horizontally to

Left Side

Select Move page content vertically to

Bottom Side

Select the page box to be used as a reference, for example the

media box

Optionally, set

margins

to be added to the media box.

Select the

Use page rotation and scaling factor

checkbox, if page rotation and scaling factor should be taken into account.

6.10 N

6.10.1 Normalize line weight

Belongs to

•

Category:

General; LineArt; Position and size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Related Actions

•

•

•

on page 199

6.10.2 Normalize page boxes

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

707

PitStop Pro

What it does

6.10.3 Normalize Page Rotate Key

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to manipulate page rotate keys in a PDF.

You can do one of the following:

• Flatten a rotate key into the page content (no visual effect)

• Introduce a rotate key for landscape pages and flatten it for portrait pages.

You can indicate which page box determines the page orientation. For example, if you select

"trim box" and the trim box is 4 units wide and 3 units tall, the page is considered to have a landscape orientation.

• Remove a rotate key without flattening it into the page content. This may have a visual effect.

Related Actions

•

•

on page 285

•

Check if text point size is equal to 10.0 pt <--

6.10.4 NOT

Belongs to

•

Category:

Operators

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

NOT is a logical operator. It is used to exclude objects according to their attributes.

Example

To select all the text in a document that was not Arial, you need to exclude Arial from your selection.

Select Text

Select Font Arial

NOT <!-- NOT only applies to the immediately preceding item in the list of selections --

AND

708

PitStop Pro

6.11 O

6.11.1 Open path

Belongs to

•

Category:

Line Art

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes the connection between the first and the last anchor point of a path.

6.11.2 Optimize document structure

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Guarantees that the underlying document structure of your PDF is efficient, for example by improving the compression of the document as required.

6.11.3 OR

Belongs to

•

Category:

Operator

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

OR is a logical operator. It is used to select objects that share attributes.

Example

To select all text that is either Helvetica or Arial, use the following:

Select Font Helvetica

Select Font Arial

Note:

Do not use OR to exclude objects!

709

PitStop Pro

For example, the following will select all 12pt AND 14pt fonts:

Select Text if point size = 12.00 pt

Select Text if point size = 14.00 pt

6.11.4 Overprint on all separations

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Ensures that if an object is set to overprint, it overprints on all separations. You can apply the overprint to the fill color and/or the stroke color.

6.11.5 Override color management settings

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color; General

•

Type:

Settings

What it does

Replaces any color management settings from the PDF Profile or general PitStop preferences with the settings defined here. These settings will be used when converting colors.

6.11.6 Override default image recompression

Belongs to

•

Category:

General; Image

•

Type:

Settings

What it does

Overrides the default recompression quality setting (used by PitStop when changing images) with the one defined in this Action.

How it works

If PitStop is used to change images (e.g. to convert the color, to resample the image...), the images are decompressed first, then changed, and afterwards recompressed according to the

710

PitStop Pro default settings (maximum for JPEG, lossless for JPEG2000). With these default settings, files may grow to an unacceptable size compared to the original input PDF file. In that case, you can use Override default image recompression to make the files smaller.

6.11.7 Override page box defaults

Belongs to

•

Category:

General; Page

•

Type:

Settings

What it does

Replaces the default order (Media > Crop > Art - Bleed - Trim) of the page boxes in a PDF document with the order defined in this Action.

6.11.8 Override rounding rules

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Settings

What it does

Replaces the default rules used for comparing text size, line weight and/or coordinates to the ones set in this Action.

You have the choice to:

• Leave text size, line weight and/or coordinates unchanged

• Use the default rules, or

• Use decimals.

Example

point.

If you don't want to log such small differences, use this Action to overrule the default behavior.

Example of such an Action List:

Select all

Override rounding rules

Check text point size

on page 241 -->

6.12 P

711

PitStop Pro

6.12.1 Put selection in form

Belongs to

•

Category:

Add

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to gather all selected objects in a form (a so-called XObject form).

Note that you can use PitStop's Edit Form tool in order to edit the form and the objects it contains.

6.13 R

6.13.1 Rasterize page content, keeping text

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to rasterize complex graphics in PDF, for example to reduce the rendering complexity for a file for viewing on the iPad.

You can set the resolution of the generated bitmap (ppi), the preferred compression (JPEG,

JPEG2000, ZIP, None), the required quality (maximum, high...), and decide whether or not to keep line art unchanged.

6.13.2 Release mask

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Changes

712

PitStop Pro

What it does

Removes a selected mask.

Related Actions

Make mask

on page 151

6.13.3 Remap alternate color space to CMYK

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Remaps the alternate color spaces of the chosen spot colors to the preferred CMYK values.

How to proceed

To add the spot colors of which you want to remap the alternate color space, do one of the following:

• To select the desired spot color from the list of spot colors (Spot color picker)

Click .

Select the preferred spot color and click

. The selected color is shown in the table, with the corresponding CMYK values.

• To define a new spot color

Click the

Add New Color

button.

In the table, in the first column (Name), replace "Color name" with the name of the new spot color.

• To select the desired spot color from the Spot library picker

Click the

Add Colors

button.

Select the preferred spot color and click

. The selected color is shown in the table, with the corresponding CMYK values.

Add or change the CMYK values as required.

To remove colors from the table

• Use the

Remove All

button, or

713

PitStop Pro

•

Select a color and click to remove only the selected color.

6.13.4 Remap color

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Remap color is a complex but powerful Action that allows the remapping of colors from one color space to another.

For each color in the document you can specify whether or not you want to map it to another color (by means of "remapping rules"), and whether or not the overprint settings should change.

Note:

• Use the

Analyze page

Analyze document

buttons to get an overview of the colors in the document being processed.

• To change a remapping rule, click

Change

and make the required changes; to add a new one, click

Add

• Keep in mind that the order of the rules is important. You can change the order by selecting a rule and clicking

Down

• You can remap colors, color spaces, color ranges and channels.

Example

Suppose you have a CMYK PDF that you want to print in a single spot color, MySpot.cv.

To remap all the colors to this spot:

Under Attributes for Remap color, select the row that mentions

All other

and click

Change

In the

Color Remap Rule

popup, under

To:

, select

Color

Select the repository color MySpot.cv. You should have specified this color earlier in PitStop.

Select the desired overprint setting:

•

Keep

the overprint settings as they are, do not change.

• Enable overprint:

• Disable overprint:

Off

Click

To remap everything except, for example, 100% black text and objects to the selected target color MySpot.cv, you need a slightly more elaborated action:

Click

Add

Under

Remap

, select

Color

and

Device CMYK

714

PitStop Pro

Set the values to: C 0% M 0% Y 0% K 100%.

Under

To:

, select

Keep

Select the desired overprint setting.

Click

Select

Add

In the

Color Remap Rule

popup, under

Remap

, select

Device CMYK

Under

To:

, select

Color

10.

Select the repository color MySpot.cv. You should have specified this color earlier in PitStop.

11.

Click

The above Actions must be performed in the correct order. Under

Attributes for Remap color

, you should have three lines:

• The rule for "keep 100% Black" at the top

• Then the rule for "remap to MySpot.cv"

• "All other" at the bottom

6.13.5 Remap spot color

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to remap all spot colors in a document, or one particular spot color to:

• Gray

• The color's CMYK equivalent

• A custom CMYK equivalent

• Another spot color

You can apply the Action to either the fill or stroke color, or to both.

Note:

From version 12 update 2 onwards, you can use regular expressions to define the color that should be remapped.

6.13.6 Remove action dictionaries

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes action dictionaries ("actions") from a PDF.

715

PitStop Pro

About action dictionaries

You may want to remove these actions, as they are not allowed in a PDF/X file. The Remove action dictionaries Action will only remove the

action

; the object (the bookmark, annotation) the actions are linked to will not be removed. For example, if you remove the action from a bookmark, the bookmark is still visible, but not clickable anymore.

Related Actions

on page 205

6.13.7 Remove alternate images

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes alternate images from a PDF.

If you are working with PDFs that contain very high resolution images and render slowly on screen, you can speed up rendering by adding alternate images and then clicking the PitStop

Speed Up Image Display

button (available in the Enfocus View Modes toolbar (Acrobat 8 and 9) or the PitStop View Panel (Acrobat X and XI)).

As these alternate images are not necessary for print, you may use this Action to remove them and only keep one version. You can choose between:

• Default for printing

• Lowest resolution

• Highest resolution

Related Actions

•

on page 192

•

on page 263

•

Check for custom black generation

6.13.8 Remove art box

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes the art box from a PDF.

716

PitStop Pro

The art box delimits the size a PDF will display in a page layout application like QuarkXPress. An art box is not essential to a PDF's structure and may be removed.

6.13.9 Remove black generation

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to remove black generation settings.

Related Actions

on page 230

6.13.10 Remove bleed box

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes the bleed box from a PDF.

6.13.11 Remove Certified PDF workflow information

Belongs to

•

Category:

Remove

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes Certified PDF workflow information from a PDF.

717

PitStop Pro

For more information and examples, refer to

the PitStop Pro Reference Guide

(Chapter: Working with Certified PDF documents).

Related Actions

Check Certified PDF state

on page 181

6.13.12 Remove crop box

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes the crop box from a PDF.

The crop box is the PDF page box that defines the frame of a PDF as it is displayed on screen. If you remove this box, the PDF will display at Media Box size.

6.13.13 Remove custom transfer function

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Remove a custom transfer function applied to an object in a PDF.

Note:

Transfer functions are not allowed in PDF/X compliant documents.

Related Actions

•

on page 66

•

on page 152

6.13.14 Remove empty layers

Belongs to

•

Category:

Remove; Layers

•

Type:

Changes

718

PitStop Pro

What it does

Removes empty layers selected by another Action in the same Action List.

Example

The following Action List will remove

all

empty layers in the PDF:

Remove empty layers

To remove Layer1 and 2, if they are empty:

Select layers by name <!--

on page 268 - Choose "equals Layer

[12]" and "Use regular expressions" -->

Remove empty layers

About PDF layers

Layered content usually comes from applications such as InDesign, AutoCAD or Visio. When converted to PDF, the layers are retained and can be viewed and navigated in Adobe Acrobat.

However, if you print a PDF file that contains layers, only the content that is visible on-screen is printed. This may or may not be desired.

"Conventional" layers versus PDF layers

Layers in digital image editing

Layers in PDF

have a different meaning. They are used to hide or show page content:

• Turning

a layer, all objects on this layer are shown on-screen.

• Turning

off

a layer, all objects on this layer are hidden, i.e. they become invisible.

To work with layers in a PDF document in Adobe Acrobat, select

View

Show/Hide

Navigation Panes

Layers

For more information, refer to the Adobe Acrobat help.

Related Actions

on page 97

6.13.15 Remove empty page

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Deletes any pages in a PDF document that contain no objects.

719

PitStop Pro

Tip:

When you’ve removed the empty pages, check whether the page numbering is still consistent. If necessary, you can correct the page numbering using

Add page number

Related Actions

•

•

6.13.16 Remove file specification from streams

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes links to embedded or external files from PDF streams.

Related Actions

•

on page 188

•

6.13.17 Remove form fields

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes any PDF form fields from a document.

You may lose data if you do this.

Related Actions

•

on page 205

720

PitStop Pro

•

Check for custom halftone

on page 112

6.13.18 Remove halftone

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes any custom halftone information from a document.

Related Actions

on page 230

6.13.19 Remove halftone phase

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes all halftone phases from a PDF document.

Note:

It may be interesting to remove halftone phases, because halftone curves, when defined, overrule general transfer curves.

721

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

Check halftone phase

6.13.20 Remove ICC tag

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes the ICC tags either from the selected objects or from the whole document (if no selection is defined). You can remove the ICC tags from fill and/or stroke colors as required.

About ICC tagging

In some workflows, e.g. without color management, ICC profiles are unwanted and may cause inconsistent color reproduction. In that case, you can use this Action to remove the ICC tags.

Related Actions

•

•

on page 251

•

Check if ICC profile differs from ICC profile in PDF/X output intent

on page 80

•

Select objects of which ICC profile is equal to ICC profile in PDF/X output

•

•

Check for invisible objects without fill and stroke

6.13.21 Remove invisible objects without fill and stroke

Belongs to

•

Category:

Remove

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes objects that have no fill or stroke color associated with them.

722

PitStop Pro

Designers sometimes leave such objects in a document rather than deleting them.

Related Actions

•

on page 190

•

on page 261

6.13.22 Remove Javascript

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes JavaScript code (which might perform unwanted actions) from a PDF.

This language is often used to add interactive functionality to PDF files. However, in a print production environment, these scripts serve no purpose and may result in increased file sizes.

Related Actions

Check for Javascript

on page 207

6.13.23 Remove marked content

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Strips PDF generator defined content from a PDF.

Marked content is content tagged with special messages so that the application that opens it can read it in a particular way.

Related Actions

Check marked content

6.13.24 Remove metadata

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Changes

723

PitStop Pro

What it does

Removes the selected metadata from a PDF.

You can remove the following types of metadata:

• Annotations

• Thumbnails

• Article threads

• Page labels

• Acrobat capture info

• Bookmarks

• Structural information

• Job ticket

• Named destinations (includes annotations and bookmarks)

6.13.25 Remove non-PDF/X compliant halftone

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes any instances of halftones that are not compliant with the PDF/X specification.

Halftoning is a method of printing shades using a single color ink. By varying the size or density of dots, the eye can see a shade somewhere between the solid color and the color of the background paper. Some of these halftones are not allowed according to the PDF/X specification, which is why you might want to remove them.

6.13.26 Remove object compression

Belongs to

•

Category:

Remove

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes the object compression from a PDF.

About object compression

724

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

•

on page 187

•

on page 191

6.13.27 Remove OPI

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes OPI (Open Prepress Interface) information from a PDF.

About OPI

Related Actions

•

•

on page 195

•

•

•

6.13.28 Remove page scaling factor

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page; Position and size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes the page scaling factor an reverts the page to its original size.

A page of 10 by 10 inches and a page scaling factor 2 will be displayed and printed as a page of

20 by 20 inches. By removing the page scaling factor, the page size will be at 10 by 10 inches again.

725

PitStop Pro

Page scaling has been introduced in PDF 1.6. If the page scaling factor is not removed or applied, the page size can only be displayed correctly in Acrobat 7 or higher.

Related Actions

•

on page 219

•

on page 117

6.13.29 Remove PDF/A version key

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

This Action removes the PDF/A version key from the PDF file.

Related Actions

•

•

6.13.30 Remove PDF/X version key

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

This Action removes the PDF/X version key from the PDF file.

Related Actions

•

on page 109

•

on page 212

6.13.31 Remove PostScript

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Changes

726

PitStop Pro

What it does

Removes all fragments of embedded PostScript in a PDF document.

Embedded PostScript fragments do not show up in the screen preview, but could change the appearance of the printed document. They are generally undesirable in a print production environment.

Related Actions

See also

•

on page 189

•

on page 259

6.13.32 Remove rendering intent

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color; Prepress

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Strips rendering intents from color managed objects in a PDF.

About rendering intents

For more information and examples, refer to

the PitStop Pro Reference Guide on the Enfocus website

(See Chapter "Rendering intents to remap colors").

Related Actions

•

•

on page 178

•

on page 69

6.13.33 Remove objects from layers

Belongs to

•

Category:

Layers

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to remove objects from the selected layers in a PDF document.

727

PitStop Pro

About PDF layers

Layered content usually comes from applications such as InDesign, AutoCAD or Visio. When converted to PDF, the layers are retained and can be viewed and navigated in Adobe Acrobat.

However, if you print a PDF file that contains layers, only the content that is visible on-screen is printed. This may or may not be desired.

"Conventional" layers versus PDF layers

Layers in digital image editing

Layers in PDF

have a different meaning. They are used to hide or show page content:

• Turning

a layer, all objects on this layer are shown on-screen.

• Turning

off

a layer, all objects on this layer are hidden, i.e. they become invisible.

To work with layers in a PDF document in Adobe Acrobat, select

View

Show/Hide

Navigation Panes

Layers

For more information, refer to the Adobe Acrobat help.

How to proceed

Add a first "select" Action to the Action List, to select the

layer

from which you want to remove objects.

Add a second "select" Action to the Action List, to select the

objects

to be removed.

Note:

You don't have to specify operators in between the two "select" Actions.

However, you can also use

combined

"select" Actions to specify the layer or the objects concerned (see example 2).

Add

Remove objects from layers

Examples

Example 1:

The following Action List will remove all objects from Layer1:

Select layers by name <!--

on page 268 and set the layer name to

Layer1 -->

Select all <!--

on page 283 -->

Remove objects from layers

Example 2:

The following Action List will remove XObjects and annotations from LayerA and

LayerB:

Select layers by name <!--

on page 268 and set the layer name to

equals [AB]; enable "Use regular expressions" -->

Select XObjects <!--

Remove objects from layers

Related Actions

•

•

728

PitStop Pro

6.13.34 Remove selection

Belongs to

•

Category:

Remove

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes any currently selected object in a PDF.

6.13.35 Remove top of selection stack

Belongs to

•

Category:

Operator

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Deletes

the top of the current Action list stack. It's typically combined with the

operator.

For internal use only

Both "Remove top of selection stack" and

are only used internally by PitStop.

6.13.36 Remove transparency

Belongs to

•

Category:

Remove; Prepress

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes transparency from the objects in a PDF file.

You can remove transparency from

all

objects in the PDF, or from objects for which:

• Fill is set to overprint, and/or

• Stroke is set to overprint, and/or

• Spot colors are used.

729

PitStop Pro

About transparency in PDF

Transparency can cause some problems if you view documents in Adobe Acrobat 4.0 or earlier: transparent objects can be rendered incorrectly.

A transparent layer can also cause problems when you transpose the PostScript code of your

PDF document to the halftone information of your printer (the 'ripping').

A typical example is saving graphics with transparent elements as PDF compatible with Acrobat

It can be useful to make the distinction between spot colors and CMYK colors when checking the transparency settings in your documents, because different rules govern the overprinting of spot colors.

Related Actions

•

on page 228

•

•

on page 298

•

Check for custom undercolor removal

6.13.37 Remove trim box

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes the trim box from a PDF document. The trim box defines the final cut size of a printed

PDF document.

6.13.38 Remove undercolor removal

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes any custom undercolor removal information from a PDF.

Related Actions

on page 231

730

PitStop Pro

6.13.39 Remove unused destinations

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

See also:

Check unused destinations

on page 215

6.13.40 Rename layer

Belongs to

•

Category:

Layers

•

Type:

Changes

•

Since version:

12 update 3

What it does

Allows you to change the name of the layers in a document.

Note:

You can also use regular expressions to define the source and target layer name.

Example

Suppose you want to rename the layers that are visible in your document, in this example

Layer1 and Layer3 (but not Layer2, Layer12 or any other layer).

731

Proceed as follows:

Select the

Rename Layer

Action.

Under Attributes for Rename layer, configure the source and target layer as follows:

•

From

: Layer([13])

•

: VisibleLayer$1

Select the

Use regular expessions

checkbox.

Click

Run the Action List.

Result:

PitStop Pro

6.13.41 Rename spot color

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to change the name of spot colors in a document.

Note:

"Varnish([0-9])+" to "Varnish".

How to proceed

To rename one or more spot colors in a document

Select

Rename spot color

Optionally, select the

Use regular expressions

checkbox.

Click

Add

732

PitStop Pro

In the Rename

Spot Color Rule

dialog:

• In the left part (under

From

), enter the name of the spot color that should be renamed.

• In the right part (under

), enter a new name for the selected spot color.

Click

To create another rule (i.e. to rename another spot color), repeat steps 3-5.

Example

The above rule will rename

Pantone

Separation

in spot color names like Pantone 0123 U

(which will then become Separation 0123 U).

6.13.42 Replace page content by bitmap

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Converts the page content to a bitmap. You can choose the resolution of the generated bitmap

(ppi), the compression method (JPEG, JPEG2000, ZIP, none) and the quality level.

733

PitStop Pro

6.13.43 Resample image

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Resamples, i.e. changes the resolution of the selected image(s).

How to proceed

Select the preferred resampling or interpolation method:

•

Average Resampling

: computes the average pixel color of the pixels in the sample area, and replaces the entire area with this average.

•

Bicubic resampling

: calculates the values of the new dots on the basis of a weighted average of the pixels in the same area.

•

Bicubic B-Spline resampling

: is a modified bicubic interpolation with more sharpening effects and is recommended for upsampling.

•

Bilinear resampling

: uses weighted interpolation between 4 pixels in the original image.

Note:

Bicubic gives the best result for photographs (but takes the longest to compute).

Enter the preferred resolution, for example 72 ppi for screen viewing.

To only resample images with a resolution below a particular threshold, select the

Resample above ... ppi

checkbox and enter a value.

For example, if you enter 150 ppi, only images with a resolution above 150 ppi will be resampled.

6.13.44 Restore previous color management settings

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color; General

•

Type:

Settings

What it does

Allows you to revert to the previous color management settings (if you have changed them before, in the same Action List).

734

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

on page 307

6.13.45 Rotate content

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page; Position/Size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Rotates the page content at a particular angle around a particular point.

You could for example rotate the page content at an angle of 90° relative to the center of the media box.

You can choose whether or not to take into account page rotation.

Related Actions

•

on page 227

•

on page 141

•

6.13.46 Rotate object

Belongs to

•

Category:

Position/Size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Rotates an object at a certain amount of degrees around a particular point.

Related Actions

•

on page 227

•

•

6.13.47 Rotate objects as group

Belongs to

•

Category:

Position/Size

•

Type:

Changes

735

PitStop Pro

What it does

Rotates a selection of objects at a particular angle around a particular point.

You could for example rotate the selection around the center of the media box at an angle of 90 degrees.

Note:

Rotating objects as a group means that all of the selected objects act as one large object during the rotation.

How to proceed

Select what specific place in the page box you want to use as the rotation point (center, lower left ...).

Specify the page box of your choice.

Define the rotation angle.

Select the

Use page rotation

checkbox as required.

Related Actions

•

on page 227

•

•

on page 141

6.13.48 Rotate page

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to set page rotation to -90, 0, 90 or 180 degrees (clockwise).

Related Actions

on page 128

6.14 S

6.14.1 Save color management settings

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color; General

•

Type:

Settings

736

PitStop Pro

What it does

Allows you to save the current color management settings (changed in the Action List).

6.14.2 Scale page boxes

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page; Position and size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to scale all page boxes simultaneously.

Specify X and Y scaling percentages. You can anchor the page boxes at a certain corner in the

PDF, for instance at the lower left corner of the media box. You can also choose whether or not to use the page rotation.

Note:

If you want to scale the page boxes proportionally, you need to specify the same values for X and Y.

Related Actions

•

•

•

on page 130

•

on page 133

6.14.3 Scale page content

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page;Position/Size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Scales page content along the X and/or Y axis by a certain percentage.

Note:

If you want to scale the page content proportionally, you need to specify the same values for X and Y.

Example

Suppose you have an A4-size PDF document (210 x 297 mm). You want to keep the page size “as is”, but need to make the page content narrower. You also wish to move the page content to the upper right corner of the crop box.

737

PitStop Pro

How to proceed

Enter the preferred scaling percentage for the X and Y axis.

Do one of the following:

• To define an anchor point, select

Anchored at

• To define the target position of the page contents, select

Moving page content to

Define the anchor point or target position, for example (anchored at/moving to) the upper right of the crop box.

Related Actions

•

•

•

•

on page 133

6.14.4 Scale page content to fit

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page; Position/Size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Scales the page content to fit the size of a particular page box. You can add extra margins, if necessary.

You should also define the target position of the page content inside the page box, e.g. "page content should move to the upper right".

You can choose whether or not to take into account the page rotation and scaling factor.

Example

In the example below, the page content is scaled to fit the size of the trim box (A).

738

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

•

on page 130

•

•

•

on page 133

6.14.5 Scale to fit page size

Belongs to

•

Category:

Position/Size; Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Scales all page boxes (and optionally all page content as well) until the specified page box fits the target size.

The target size can be specified by defining the target width and height or a percentage for the X and Y axis.

Note:

If you want to scale the page boxes proportionally, you need to specify the same values for X and Y.

You can choose what proportions to keep into account when performing this scaling:

• The proportions of both the page content and the page boxes

• The proportions of the page content only

• No proportions should be taken into account: both the page content and the page boxes can be scaled non-proportionally to match the target page size.

Related Actions

•

•

on page 130

•

739

PitStop Pro

•

on page 133

6.14.6 Select all

Belongs to

•

Category:

Operator

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select every object in a PDF document.

Example

To delete every object in a PDF:

Select all

Remove selection

Remark

Note that objects that are clipped away (hence are invisible) are selected as well. If you don't want this, we recommend removing them first. You can use

on page 293 and

on page 158 to do so.

6.14.7 Select annotations

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects annotations of a particular type in a PDF document.

Example

To delete all annotations of the type "Movie" and "Sound" in a PDF, configure the following

Action List:

Select annotations

Remove selection

6.14.8 Select annotations appearance streams contents according to annotation selection

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Selections

740

PitStop Pro

What it does

Allows you to select content based on the selected annotations.

About annotation appearance streams

An appearance stream determines the visual appearance of an annotation (e.g. borders, colors,...). Different from

on page 273 (which only selects the annotation

content

This Action has two options:

•

Select the annotation content if the annotation is selected

: If the annotation is selected, all the PDF objects in the appearance stream will be selected too.

•

Select everything except the annotation content of annotations that are not selected

: This is the inverse of the first option; everything in the PDF is selected, except for the objects inside appearance streams of unselected annotations.

Example

To select all annotations of the type "Text" and change their color, configure the following Action

List:

Select annotations <!-- select Text only - See

Change color <!-- Pick the desired fill/stroke color - See

Select annotations' appearance streams contents according to annotation selection <!--

choose first option -->

To select and change the color of the whole document, including text annotations but excluding video, sound, ... configure the following Action List:

Select annotations <!-- select Text only - See

Change color <!-- Pick the desired fill/stroke color - See

on page 273-->

Select annotations' appearance streams contents according to annotation selection <!--

choose the second option -->

Change annotations print setting

6.14.9 Select annotations by print setting

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects annotations based on their print setting.

Example

To select all printing annotations and remove them

Select annotations by print setting

Remove selection

To select all printing annotations and set them to non-printing

Select annotations by print setting

Change annotations' print setting

741

PitStop Pro

See also:

on page 106

6.14.10 Select by alternate images

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects either

all images with alternates

all images with alternates that are default for printing

An alternate can be a high resolution version of an image that is used in the PDF to preview the image on screen. If you want to make sure that the correct image is set to print, choose

all images with alternates that are default for printing

Related Actions

•

•

on page 192

•

on page 89

6.14.11 Select by binding

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows the selection of a PDF based on its binding (left-edge or right-edge binding).

Most European language documents are bound on the left.

Note:

To check a document's binding, in Adobe Acrobat, go to

File

Properties

and switch to the

Advanced

tab. The document's binding property (Left Edge or Right Edge) is displayed under Reading Options.

Related Actions

•

on page 201

•

Change binding

Check for non-standard blend modes

6.14.12 Select by blend modes

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

742

PitStop Pro

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select objects with or without one or more specific blending modes.

Blend modes determine how colors on different layers blend with each other. For more information about blend modes, visit the Adobe website (

http://www.adobe.com

) or refer to the

Help or documentation of your design application (Adobe InDesign, QuarkXPress, ...)

Related Actions

on page 232

6.14.13 Select by blending color space

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color; Page

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Makes a selection based on the blending color space.

You must set the required blending color space and the required luminosity softmask blending color (or select the option

Undefined

About blending color spaces

blending color space

The blending color space for soft masks (masks with soft transitions) is called the

luminosity softmask blending color space

. It is usually gray.

Related Actions

•

on page 68

•

on page 175

6.14.14 Select by color space

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects line art (fill and/or stroke) and/or other objects according to their color space.

743

PitStop Pro

Example

To select all ICC line art, proceed as follows:

Select by color space

<!-- Options:

1. Select both Fill and stroke color space.

2. For both, select "ICC tagged". Optionally, indicate the preferred number of color

components.

3. Make sure the checkbox under Other objects is cleared

-->

Log selection

6.14.15 Select by color space in PDF/X Output Intent

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to make a selection based on the color space in the PDF/X Output Intent.

You can choose one of the following color spaces:

• CMYK

• RGB

• Gray

• Unknown

6.14.16 Select by document encoding

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects a document based on its encoding (binary or ASCII).

About document encoding

ASCII versus Binary encoding

ASCII encoding may increase the file size, but allows you to edit the file manually.

Binary encoding makes the file smaller, but does not allow you to edit the file manually.

Related Actions

•

744

PitStop Pro

•

on page 81

6.14.17 Select by document info

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Note:

From version 12 update 2 onwards, you can use regular expressions to define the value in the

Compare with

field (if you select

Equals/Does not equal

as operator method).

Example

Suppose you want to select a document of which the author is Anne Banks. It doesn't matter where this information is taken from.

Attributes:

• Document info: author

• Read value from: any metadata location

Note:

If you select

Both metadata locations

, the name of the author will be searched for in both the XMP metadata stream and the info dictionary; if you select

Most recent metadata location

, only the most recently changed metadata location will be checked.

• Operator method: equals

• Compare with: Anne Banks

If you are not sure about the spelling of the name

Anne

(spelled Ann or Anne?), you could select the

Use regular expressions

checkbox and enter "Ann(e)? Banks" in the

Compare with

field.

Related Actions

•

•

Check for non-PDF/X compliant halftone

on page 202

6.14.18 Select by graphic state attributes

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Selections

745

PitStop Pro

What it does

Allows you to select objects based on their graphic state attributes.

You can select one of the following object types:

• Objects with non-PDF/X-1 compliant halftone info

• Objects with transfer function info

• Objects with halftone info

• None

Viewing the graphic state attributes of an object

Proceed as follows:

Select the object, using the PitStop Select Objects tool .

Click to display the Enfocus Inspector.

Select (

Prepress

) > (General) or (

Halftone

Related Actions

•

•

on page 231

6.14.19 Select by ICC tag subtype

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows to make a distinction between ICC-based RGB, ICC-based gray and ICC-based Lab.

and

Related Actions

•

on page 248

•

on page 169

6.14.20 Select by image resolution

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Selections

746

PitStop Pro

What it does

Makes a selection of images based on their resolution, for example all images with a resolution between 320 and 400 ppi.

You can select all images, or limit your selection to color or gray scale images, or to monocolor images only.

Note:

This Action checks for the

effective

resolution; if the image has been resized, this is the resolution after scaling.

Related Actions

Check resolution

on page 196

6.14.21 Select by image size

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select images by their width or height (expressed in pixels).

You can for example select images with a width or height equal to (or more or less than) 64 pixels.

6.14.22 Select by ink coverage (basic object check)

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color; Prepress

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Makes a selection of all objects that meet your ink coverage criteria.

You can for example select objects only if the ink coverage is at least 300%.

747

PitStop Pro

on page 176

6.14.23 Select by line weight

Belongs to

•

Category:

Line Art

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects objects with a particular line weight.

For example, select objects with line weight

less than 0.0123

inch.

Related Actions

•

on page 84

•

•

on page 199

6.14.24 Select by media box origin

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select pages of which the lower left corner is not located at coordinates 0,0.

Related Actions

•

•

Change Gray to CMYK Black

on page 123

6.14.25 Select by number of color plates

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Selections

748

PitStop Pro

What it does

Selects objects that occur on a certain number of color plates (separations). You can make the selection based on the object's fill and/or stroke.

Example

You could for example search for objects with 4 color plates (dark gray), and afterwards change gray to CMYK Black. This will reduce the number of plates from 4 plates to 1 plate.

Select by number of color plates

Change Gray to CMYK Black <!--

on page 68 -->

6.14.26 Select by overprint

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects objects based on the overprint mode of their fill and/or stroke.

How to proceed

Proceed as follows:

To select objects based on their fill/stroke overprint, select the corresponding checkbox.

For example, to select object based on the overprint mode of their stroke, select

Stroke overprint

Indicate whether overprint must be enabled or disabled for the options selected in step 1, by clicking the buttons.

•

Overprint is off.

•

Overprint is on.

Tip:

Related Actions

•

•

6.14.27 Select by overprint mode

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

749

PitStop Pro

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select objects based on the overprint mode of their fill and/or stroke color.

About overprint modes

• In

Standard overprint mode

(OPM 0), the tint value 0 of one of the CMYK inks in the foreground object has a knockout effect on the color rendering of the underlying object.

In other words, a foreground ink with a C, M, Y or K value of 0 % erases the corresponding background ink. Here, the “foreground inks win” principle applies.

• In

Illustrator overprint mode

(OPM 1), the tint value 0 is neutral: it is ignored (as if it were

“not specified”) and has therefore no effect on the color rendering of the underlying object.

For more information and examples, refer to

the PitStop Pro Reference Guide on the Enfocus website

Related Actions

•

•

on page 233

6.14.28 Select by page orientation

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select pages by orientation.

Choose either Portrait, Landscape, Same orientation or Most used orientation to select all pages with this orientation, and select the page box the orientation must be based on.

Related Actions

•

on page 122

•

6.14.29 Select by page rotation angle

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page; Position and Size

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects pages with a certain rotation angle.

You can choose a rotation angle of -90°, 0°, 90°, or 180° (clockwise).

750

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

•

•

6.14.30 Select by page size

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select pages based on the size of one of the page boxes.

You can for example select pages with a trim box of 21x29 cm.

The precision indicates how much the actual size is allowed to differ from the specified size. A precision of 0 means that no deviation is allowed: the size needs to match exactly the entered values.

Related Actions

Check page size

on page 225

6.14.31 Select by PDF version

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to make a selection based on the PDF's Acrobat or PDF version.

The Acrobat version is the sum of the two numbers that make up the PDF version, for example:

PDF 1.4 = Acrobat 5.

Example

To select PDFs with Acrobat version higher than 7.0, proceed as follows:

Select by PDF version

751

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

Change PDF version

on page 108

6.14.32 Select by rendering intent

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color;Prepress

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects color managed objects based on a particular rendering intent.

You can select paths, text, images, or all rendering objects, with one of the the following rendering intents:

• Absolute Colorimetric

• Relative Colorimetric

• Perceptual

• Saturation

About rendering intents

For more information and examples, refer to

the PitStop Pro Reference Guide on the Enfocus website

(See Chapter "Rendering intents to remap colors").

Related Actions

•

on page 69

•

on page 178

•

•

6.14.33 Select by spot color suffix

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects spot colors with a given suffix.

You can choose one of the following suffixes: CV; CVC; CVU; CVS; CVP; C; U; or M (or None of the above).

752

PitStop Pro

About spot color suffixes

Suffixes represent the

apparent

color of the color when printed on different types of paper. For example, PANTONE 3258

and PANTONE 3258

refer to the same color, but when printed on

oated, respectively

ncoated paper, they will look different, although the same ink formula was used.

Suffix overview

Suffix

CVC

CVU

Meaning

Computer video (electronic simulation)

Computer video - coated

Computer video - uncoated

Coated paper

Uncoated paper

Matte paper

Related Actions

•

on page 180

•

6.14.34 Select by tagged ICC Profile

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select objects which have (not) been tagged with an ICC profile, or objects with a specific color space and a specific ICC profile.

You can distinguish between stroke and fill color, for example select objects of which the stroke color is ICC tagged.

About ICC tagging

753

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

•

•

on page 251

•

Check if ICC profile differs from ICC profile in PDF/X output intent

on page 80

•

Select objects of which ICC profile is equal to ICC profile in PDF/X output

•

•

6.14.35 Select by trapped flag

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows the selection of a PDF based on the value of the trapped flag.

About trapping

The trapped flag indicates whether or not a file has been "trapped", i.e. has been corrected for slight color misregistrations. The trapped flag must be defined in PDF/X documents.

The flag can be set to:

•

True

: the document has been trapped, or the creator of the document has decided that it should not be trapped.

•

False

: the document has not been trapped

•

Unknown

: it's not known whether or not the document has been trapped. Note that this status should be avoided.

Related Actions

•

•

on page 276

•

on page 214

6.14.36 Select clipping and non-clipping text

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

754

PitStop Pro

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects all text segments, even if they have been clipped and are not visible anymore.

Tip:

If you want to select non-clipping text only, you can use

6.14.37 Select clipping objects

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects clipping objects, i.e. objects of which the shape masks other artwork. Only areas inside the clipping objects are visible.

You could use this Action to select clip text of which you want to change the font.

on page 293

6.14.38 Select color

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects objects by their fill or stroke color, or both.

How to proceed

Define the colors you want to select as follows:

Select the appropriate checkbox, depending on what you want to define (Fill color or Stroke color).

Select the appropriate color in one of the following ways:

Select an object with the PitStop Select Objects tool and use the icon to grab the fill or stroke color (depending on what you're defining).

Click the color picker icon

Select the required color space:

and select the appropriate color.

755

PitStop Pro

• Device colors can be Gray, RGB or CMYK

• Calibrated colors can be Gray or RGB

• User Swatch (= user-defined colors)

Fine tune the color by moving the sliders.

6.14.39 Select color bars

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select color bars with a certain color patch border and patch size.

Note:

PitStop provides an Action List to add color bars.

Example

You could combine this Action with another Action to, for example, delete all color bars at once:

Select color bars

Remove selection <!--

on page 158 -->

6.14.40 Select color range

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select objects with a specific color, by specifying the color range of the fill and/or stroke color.

The available options depend on the chosen color space:

• Gray, CMYK or RGB:

search in converted values of other color spaces

(If selected, the result of the conversion is calculated in advance.)

• Separations: You can decide to select either all spot colors or only the spot colors with a particular name. You can type the name or click the

Load Spot Color

button to select it.

756

PitStop Pro

• DeviceN process colors:

allow spot colors in DeviceN color space

Example

To catch all gray objects (either fill or stroke) with a brightness between 0% and 40 %, and turn them into CMYK objects with 100% Cyan color, you can do the following:

Select gray fill or stroke color

<!-- This is the "Select color range" Action with the options Fill and Stroke selected.

Select "Color space is gray", and in the Gray from field, enter values between 0% and

40% -->

Change fill and stroke color

<!-- This is the "Change color" Action with Fill and Stroke selected.

Select "Device CMYK" and set Cyan to 100% -->

6.14.41 Select corrupt font widths

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select all text with a corrupt font width.

Corrupt font widths may occur in a PDF, when "artificial" bold or italic was used instead of the

"bold" or "italic" version of the font concerned. For example, if "Futura" is used in your PDF, the

"Futura-Bold" and "Futura-Oblique" fonts should be used instead of applying bold and italics on the regular Futura font. Artificial font may cause problems when printing the PDF.

Related Actions

•

on page 235

•

PitStop also provides an Action to

6.14.42 Select default color spaces

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select default color spaces or default color spaces that are not defined by PDF/

X-3.

Default color spaces are defined on page level. They are used to systematically remap devicespecific colors to device-independent colors.

Note:

change

default color spaces

757

PitStop Pro

6.14.43 Select DeviceN with attributes

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select the fill and/or stroke of DeviceN and/or NChannel objects.

You must specify which attributes must be present to select the object:

• Spot color definitions

• Process color mapping

• Mixing hints

• Solidities

• Printing order

• Dot gain

Related Actions

Check DeviceN attributes

on page 169

6.14.44 Select document

Belongs to

•

Category:

Doc

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select the whole document.

6.14.45 Select document if document XMP metadata contains invalid types

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects the document if metadata streams defined in the PDF do not conform to the XMP schema.

758

PitStop Pro

About XMP metadata streams

There are two metadata locations in a PDF file:

• The

info dictionary

contains information about the file, such as the title, the author, the creation date ... and is visible through the file's Document properties. It's not in XML format.

• The

XMP metadata stream

also contains information about the file, but this information is represented as XMP metadata - XMP referring to Adobe's labeling technology

xtensible

etadata

latform. All information in the info dictionary is also represented in the XMP metadata stream dictionary, in the form of XMP properties.

Inconsistencies may occur when only one of the metadata locations has been updated.

on page 209

6.14.46 Select document if XMP file identifiers are not present

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects document if XMP file identifiers are not present.

Related Actions

•

on page 116

•

on page 183

6.14.47 Select embedded fonts

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select all embedded or unembedded fonts in a PDF document.

The selection of embedded fonts includes OpenType embedded fonts.

About embedding fonts

Embedding fonts

759

PitStop Pro

Embedding a font as a

subset

means that only those characters of the font that are actually used in the text are embedded. This reduces the file size by not including superfluous font information.

About OpenType embedded fonts

OpenType is an extension of the TrueType format that can contain TrueType and/or Type 1 font data. In PDF files it can only appear as an embedded font. It has been introduced in PDF 1.6.

Related Actions

•

•

on page 168

•

on page 235

6.14.48 Select embedded PostScript fragments

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects all fragments of embedded PostScript in the PDF document.

Embedded PostScript fragments do not show up in the screen preview, but could change the appearance of the printed document. They are generally undesirable in a print production environment.

Related Actions

•

on page 189

•

on page 85

6.14.49 Select empty pages

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects pages in a PDF document that contain no objects.

You can specify that elements outside of a specific page box should be ignored.

Related Actions

•

760

PitStop Pro

•

You can check the validity of the links with

6.14.50 Select external hyperlink annotations

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects annotations with external links to other files, applications and/or web Pages embedded in a PDF document.

Tip:

on page 205.

6.14.51 Select flatness

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select objects with a flatness setting equal to or higher/lower than a certain value.

The default setting to produce a smooth curve is 1. A value higher than 1 can produce a jaggy edge; lower than 1 can slow down the RIP.

Example

If the curves in a PDF are showing visible line segments, try the following to solve the problem:

Select flatness

Change flatness

Related Actions

•

•

6.14.52 Select fonts by license

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Selections

761

PitStop Pro

What it does

Allows you to select fonts that allow certain operations without obtaining permission from the font's owner.

These operations are:

• Embed

• Subset

• Outline

• Preview and print

Related Actions

Check font license

on page 236

6.14.53 Select fonts by name

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select all the fonts with a particular name.

Note:

From version 12 update 2 onwards, you can use regular expressions to define the font name.

Example

To select all the Times, Arial, Helvetica and Courier fonts in a PDF, you could use the following sequence of Actions:

Select font Times

Select font Arial

Select font Helvetica

Select font Courier

6.14.54 Select fonts by type

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects text using a particular font type.

You can select one of the following font types:

762

PitStop Pro

• TrueType

• Type1

• Type3

• Multiple Master

• Composite TT

• Composite T1

• Composite (all types)

About types of fonts

Refer to the

PitStop Pro Reference Guide

(Chapter: Types of fonts and their usage), available on the Enfocus website.

Example

For example, to unembed TrueType fonts without unembedding any other font types, do the following:

Select TrueType fonts

Unembed font <!-- See

on page 168 -->

Related Actions

Check font type

on page 237

6.14.55 Select fonts that can be emulated

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects fonts that can be emulated.

Example

To select fonts and then unembed them:

Select fonts that can be emulated

Unembed font <!-- See

on page 168 -->

6.14.56 Select form contents according to form selection

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

763

PitStop Pro

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select or deselect the content of selected forms.

Forms are rectangular frames in a PDF wich contain objects, for example an image or a placed

PDF.

For more information, refer to

the PitStop Pro Reference Guide on the Enfocus website

(See

Chapter "Editing forms").

Related Actions

Select objects inside or outside region

6.14.57 Select form if content is selected

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select forms based on selected objects. Note that by selecting the forms, the objects themselves are no longer selected.

You can choose whether or not to select nested forms, i.e. forms included inside other forms.

For example, in the example below, the object is part of Form1 and Form2.

• If

Also selected nested forms

is cleared, only Form1 (= highest level) will be selected.

• If

Also selected nested forms

is selected, both forms will be selected.

About forms

Forms are rectangular frames in a PDF, wich contain objects, for example an image or a placed

PDF.

For more information about forms, refer to

the PitStop Pro Reference Guide on the Enfocus website

(See Chapter "Editing forms").

764

PitStop Pro

Example

The following example Action List consists of 2 Actions:

• The first Action selects all objects inside the art box.

• The second Action selects all forms of which the objects are selected by the first Action, and deselects the objects. Forms inside another form are not selected.

on page 292

Select form if content is selected

Related Actions

•

•

on page 259

6.14.58 Select forms

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select all forms in a PDF document.

Forms are rectangular frames in a PDF wich contain objects, for example an image or a placed

PDF.

For more information, refer to

the PitStop Pro Reference Guide on the Enfocus website

(See

Chapter "Editing forms").

Example

To select all forms and log them as an error:

Select forms

Log selection <!-- enter "Forms were found in this document" and select "Log as error"

at the bottom -->

Related Actions

•

Log selection

on page 191

•

on page 259

6.14.59 Select gray

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Selections

765

PitStop Pro

What it does

Allows you to make a selection based on the gray color of the fill and/or stroke color of the objects in the PDF.

You can specify how much the actual gray in the document is allowed to deviate from "true" gray

(i.e. gray which doesn't have tones of any other color; for RGB this means that the percentage of

Red, Gray and Blue is the same; for CMYK, this holds for Cyan, Magenta and Yellow).

6.14.60 Select if document metadata is inconsistent

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects if document metadata is inconsistent, i.e. if the metadata values are not identical in the different metadata locations.

How it works

There are two metadata locations in a PDF file:

• The

info dictionary

contains information about the file, such as the title, the author, the creation date ... and is visible through the file's Document properties. It's not in XML format.

• The

XMP metadata stream

also contains information about the file, but this information is represented as XMP metadata - XMP referring to Adobe's labeling technology

xtensible

etadata

latform. All information in the info dictionary is also represented in the XMP metadata stream dictionary, in the form of XMP properties.

Inconsistencies may occur when only one of the metadata locations has been updated.

Extra checks

Optionally you can make the selection only if metadata in one location (selected from the list) is also present in the other location; if all metadata should be present in both locations, select

any metadata location

If multiple creators should not be considered an inconsistency, select the

Allow multiple creators

checkbox.

Related Actions

•

on page 209

•

on page 112

6.14.61 Select if document XMP contains an invalid name space prefix

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

766

PitStop Pro

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects if document XMP contains an invalid namespace prefix.

About XMP metadata

Document Properties in Acrobat (Click the Additional Metadata button, then select Advanced).

on page 208

6.14.62 Select image by filter type

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select images according to the compression type they use.

You can choose one or more of the following filters:

• ASCII hex

• CCITT

• ZIP

• RunLength

• JPEG2000

• ASCII 85

• JPEG

• LZW

• JBIG2

Optionally, you can also include soft-mask images (of the chosen filter types) in your selection

(i.e. the images that mask an image). These are not included by default.

6.14.63 Select image type

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Selections

767

PitStop Pro

What it does

Allows you to select a particular type of images.

You can select one of the following image types:

• 1-Bit images

• Grayscale images

• Color images

• Stencil mask

• Indexed images

Example

The following will convert color images to Grayscale but will not alter Black & White images:

Select image type

Convert color

6.14.64 Select images

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects all the images in a PDF document.

Example

The following selects everything in a PDF except for the images:

Select all

Select images

NOT

AND

6.14.65 Select images with OPI info

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects all the images in a PDF document that contain OPI (Open Prepress Interface) information.

OPI images are treated special as they are assumed to be preview images. They will for example not be preflighted as other images would be.

768

PitStop Pro

About OPI

Example

The following finds any such images and logs them as a caution:

Select images with OPI info

Log selection <!-- In the field, type your message (ex. 'Images with OPI comments were

found in this PDF'), then select Log as warning at the bottom -->

Related Actions

•

•

on page 195

•

Select objects that use neither stroke nor fill

•

•

6.14.66 Select incorrectly defined process color spaces in DeviceN

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select objects that use a DeviceN color space containing a process color space which does not match the PDF/X Output intent.

on page 171

6.14.67 Select invisible objects without fill and stroke

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects objects that have no fill or stroke color associated with them. Even though these objects are not visible in the document, you might want to remove them.

769

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

•

on page 270 (same functionality)

•

Check for invisible objects without fill and stroke

on page 190

•

on page 157

6.14.68 Select last added objects

Belongs to

•

Category:

Operator

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects the objects that were added recently (in the same Action List).

This Action must be preceded by an Action of the type "Add".

Example

The following Action List will first add graphics to the PDF. The added graphics will then be selected and used by the third Action.

Add copied graphics <!--

Check XY scaling difference <!--

on page 56 -->

Select last added objects

Check XY scaling difference

on page 227 -->

6.14.69 Select layers

Belongs to

•

Category:

Layers

•

Type:

Selections

•

Since version:

12 update 3

What it does

Selects ALL layers in a PDF document.

Related Actions

on page 268

6.14.70 Select layers by name

Belongs to

•

Category:

Layers

•

Type:

Selections

770

PitStop Pro

•

Since version:

12 update 3

What it does

Allows you to select layers with a particular layer name.

Note:

You can use regular expressions to define the layer name (if you select

Equals/

Does not equal

as operator method).

Example

To select "Layer1" and "Layer3" but not e.g. "Layer2", "Layer12" or any other layer, choose the following attributes:

Select layers where name equals [13]

Select Match case

Select Use regular expressions <!-- to make sure [13] is considered a regular expression

instead of a string -->

6.14.71 Select line art

Belongs to

•

Category:

Line Art

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select objects that are drawn as line art (i.e. vector and not raster).

6.14.72 Select non-compliant Output Intent

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects the whole document if the output intent is:

•

Not compliant

with a particular PDF/X or PDF/A version, OR

•

Compliant

with a particular PDF/X or PDF/A version,

but the ICC profile or ICC characterization is not as specified

You can check the compliance with the following PDF/X versions:

• PDF/X-1a:2001

• PDF/X-3:2002

• PDF/X-1a:2003

• PDF/X-3:2003

• PDF/X-4

• PDF/X-4p

771

PitStop Pro

• PDF/A-1

• PDF/A-2

6.14.73 Select non-PDF/X-4 compliant TrueType fonts

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select a TrueType font that is not PDF/X-4 compliant, for example a symbol font.

After this selection, you might want to remove or replace this font.

About OpenType embedded fonts

OpenType is an extension of the TrueType format that can contain TrueType and/or Type 1 font data. In PDF files it can only appear as an embedded font. It has been introduced in PDF 1.6.

on page 240

6.14.74 Select objects close to the page edge

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects objects close to the page edge.

You must specify the distance to the trim box and the distance into the bleed.

Optionally, you can choose to treat subpaths of compound paths individually. In that case, each of the subpaths will be selected separately.

See also:

•

on page 217

•

6.14.75 Select objects if page is selected

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

772

PitStop Pro

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select all objects on the selected page(s).

6.14.76 Select objects in layers by layer properties

Belongs to

•

Category:

Layers

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select content based on the layer properties of the layer it's placed on.

You can select content that is:

•

Optional

: placed on a layer

•

Not optional

: not placed on a layer

•

By default visible

: visible when the document is first opened (applies to both layered and

"normal" content)

•

By default invisible

: invisible when the document is first opened

•

Visible

: set to "visible" e.g. by the user or by an application such as PitStop (regardless of the initial visibility state)

•

Invisible

: set to "invisible" e.g. by the user or by an application such as PitStop (regardless of the initial visibility state)

Example

The following Action List allows you to select layered content that is by default visible. Normal content (that is visible by default) is not selected.

Select objects in layers by layer properties <!-- Choose "Select content that is

optional" -->

Select objects in layers by layer properties <!-- Choose "Select content that is

visible" -->

AND <!-- This operator makes sure that only content is selected that is optional and

visible at the same time -->

Related Actions

•

•

6.14.77 Select objects in layers by name

Belongs to

•

Category:

Layers

•

Type:

Selections

773

PitStop Pro

What it does

Allows you to select objects inside layers with a certain name.

How to proceed

Select whether the layer name should (not) be equal to or (not) contain the value you specify.

Optionally, enable

Match case

Use regular expressions

Note:

The option

Use regular expression

is available as of PitStop 12 update 2, if you select

equals

does not equal

. This option allows you to define the layer name using a regular expression (e.g Layer[1-3] will match the following layer names:

Layer1, Layer2 and Layer3).

Related Actions

•

on page 269

•

on page 268

6.14.78 Select objects in selected layers

Belongs to

•

Category:

Layers

•

Type:

Selections

•

Since version:

12 update 3

What it does

Selects objects in the layer(s) selected by another Action in the same Action List.

Example

To select the objects on

all

layers of the PDF, create the following Action List:

Select objects in selected layers

Related Actions

•

•

on page 268

6.14.79 Select objects inside or outside region

Belongs to

•

Category:

Position and Size

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Makes a selection across pages defined by a user-defined area or by PDF page boxes.

774

PitStop Pro

This is useful to select (and afterwards remove or move) objects that lay outside the trim box, hence will not be printed.

How to proceed

Define the area inside or outside which the objects should be selected. Choose on of the following options:

•

Define the region relative to the lower left of the media box

: You can manually enter the values of the X and Y axis (the anchor point) and the height and with (the size) of the area, or grab them by clicking the icon .

•

Use

(one of the page boxes): You can choose one of the page boxes, the printing area or either the art or trim box, depending on what's defined (option

the art box (if defined) or trim box

•

Use region relative to page box

: You can specify the exact location of the area to check, for example "place the center left of the region relative to the center right of the bleed box with a particular offset, height and width".

Indicate which objects relative to the defined area should be selected, for example the objects inside or overlapping the region.

Indicate whether or not annotations and clipping paths should be included in the selection.

If applicable, choose whether or not to take into account page rotation and scaling factor.

Example

To select any objects that lay outside of the trim box and delete them, you could use the following:

Select objects inside or outside region <!-- Select "Use trim box" and "Select objects

outside region" -->

Remove selection

6.14.80 Select objects of which ICC profile is equal to ICC profile in

PDF/X output

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects objects of which the ICC profile is equal to the ICC profile in PDF/X output. Choose either fill, stroke or both.

About ICC tagging

ICC color profiles are used to avoid this. An ICC color profile is a mathematical description of the color space used by a specific device. In other words, the color profile describes how the colors

775

PitStop Pro produced by the device relate to the reference CIE LAB color space (a device-independent color space). As such, they allow you to set up a workflow in which all devices use color management to compensate for their individual color reproduction characteristics, based on the information in the ICC profiles.

Related Actions

•

on page 77

•

on page 251

•

Check if ICC profile differs from ICC profile in PDF/X output intent

•

•

on page 80

•

6.14.81 Select objects that are completely clipped away

Belongs to

•

Category:

Position and Size

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select objects that are hidden ("clipped away") by other objects of which the shape masks the artwork.

Optionally, you can include invisible objects that belong to this form.

Related Actions

on page 259

6.14.82 Select objects that have a clipping path

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects objects of which the shape (partly) masks other artwork. Only areas inside the clipping objects are visible.

Related Actions

•

on page 259

•

on page 293

776

PitStop Pro

6.14.83 Select objects that use neither stroke nor fill

Belongs to

•

Category:

LineArt;Text

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects vector or path objects that contain no stroke or fill color value in a PDF.

on page 261 (same functionality)

6.14.84 Select OpenType embedded fonts

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects all embedded fonts that are OpenType, or alternatively, all embedded fonts that are not

OpenType.

About embedding fonts

Embedding fonts

Embedding a font as a

subset

means that only those characters of the font that are actually used in the text are embedded. This reduces the file size by not including superfluous font information.

About OpenType embedded fonts

OpenType is an extension of the TrueType format that can contain TrueType and/or Type 1 font data. In PDF files it can only appear as an embedded font. It has been introduced in PDF 1.6.

Example

To search for all OpenType fonts and then unembed them, proceed as follows:

Select embedded fonts that are OpenType

Unembed font

Related Actions

•

on page 235

777

PitStop Pro

•

Check number of paths on page

on page 168

6.14.85 Select overlapping objects

Belongs to

•

Category:

Position and Size

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects the objects defined by a first selection, that overlap the objects defined by a second selection (within the same Action List).

In order to define the first and second selection, the Select overlapping objects Action needs to be preceded by 2 other selection Actions.

Example

To do so, proceed as follows:

Select color

Select color

Select overlapping objects

Log selection <!-- Choose user-defined text, for example: Magenta objects overlapping

yellow objects have been found -->

6.14.86 Select page by its page box properties

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select a number of pages based on one of the following criteria:

• Whether or not a certain page box is defined.

• The fact that the crop or art box differs from the trim box.

• The fact that a certain page box lies (partially) outside of the media box.

• The fact that the size of the bleed box is not sufficient compared to the trim or crop box.

This allows you to detect pages of which the page boxes are not well defined.

6.14.87 Select page by number of paths

Belongs to

•

Category:

Line Art

778

PitStop Pro

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to make a selection based on the number of paths on a page.

You could for example select all pages with less than 4 pages.

Related Actions

on page 199

6.14.88 Select page if content is selected

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select a page if the content is selected.

You can select or both the page object and the entire page content.

How to proceed

Specify

what

you want to select:

• The page object only, or

• Both the page object and the entire page content.

Specify on what

condition

you want to select it, for example if more than one objects are selected.

6.14.89 Select pages

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select a particular page, a set of pages, or a page range, for example the first or last page of a PDF, all odd pages, pages from 1 to 5, ...

You can also make a selection based on the number of pages, for example: Select if number of pages is not a multiple of 10.

Example

To select every page but the first page of a PDF, and then add a copied graphic to that page, proceed as follows:

Select all pages

779

PitStop Pro

Select first page

NOT

AND

Add copied graphics <!-- See

on page 56 -->

6.14.90 Select pages with PieceInfo

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Searches for pages containing PieceInfo.

This can for example apply to pages coming from Illustrator, containing Illustrator PieceInfo.

If a PDF contains PieceInfo, it was saved with editing capabilities from applications such as

Illustrator, which may be lost if you edit the PDF with another application.

Removing PieceInfo will make the file smaller, but it won't be possible anymore to import the document in Illustrator.

6.14.91 Select pages with transparent objects

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects pages containing transparency.

About transparency in PDF

Transparency can cause some problems if you view documents in Adobe Acrobat 4.0 or earlier: transparent objects can be rendered incorrectly.

A transparent layer can also cause problems when you transpose the PostScript code of your

PDF document to the halftone information of your printer (the 'ripping').

A typical example is saving graphics with transparent elements as PDF compatible with Acrobat

It can be useful to make the distinction between spot colors and CMYK colors when checking the transparency settings in your documents, because different rules govern the overprinting of spot colors.

Related Actions

•

on page 228

•

780

PitStop Pro

•

on page 298

•

6.14.92 Select parent content object

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select parent content objects, for example the page the object belongs to.

6.14.93 Select registration marks

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select potential registration marks with a certain color.

How to proceed

Specify the potential color of the registration marks, by choosing one or more of the following:

• 400% CMYK

• Separation All (registration)

• 100% black

• A specific color

In case of a specific color, do one of the following:

• Select a color space from the list and use the sliders to select the appropriate color.

•

Click and select the appropriate color.

•

Select an object with the Enfocus Selection tool and click color from the selection.

to grab the fill or stroke

781

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

Add registration marks

on page 59

6.14.94 Select rendering objects

Belongs to

•

Category:

LineArt;Text;Image

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects all objects with a rendering intent.

This includes paths, text and images with any of the following rendering intents:

• Absolute Colorimetric

• Relative Colorimetric

• Perceptual

• Saturation

Note:

This Action does not allow you to make a selection based on

one particular

rendering intent. To select objects by

one

on page 249.

About rendering intents

For more information and examples, refer to

the PitStop Pro Reference Guide on the Enfocus website

(See Chapter "Rendering intents to remap colors").

Related Actions

•

on page 69

•

on page 178

•

•

Convert alternate color space to CMYK <!-- (See

6.14.95 Select shading objects

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects all shading objects.

782

PitStop Pro

Shadings represent complex mathematical functions. That's why certain output devices may not be able to correctly interpret them. Shadings can also cause problems during color conversions.

Note:

As of PitStop 7, shadings can be color converted.

on page 72

6.14.96 Select single image page images

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects single image page images, i.e. images that cover the entire page.

6.14.97 Select size

Belongs to

•

Category:

Position/Size

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select any object in a PDF of which the height or width is less than, equal to, or greater than a certain size.

You can choose whether or not to take into account page rotation and scaling factor.

6.14.98 Select spot color

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select either all spot colors in a PDF file, or a particular color, based on its name.

783

PitStop Pro

Note:

From version 12 update 2 onwards, you can use regular expressions to define the spot color name.

6.14.99 Select spot color by alternate color space

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects spot colors based on their alternate color space.

For example, select a spot color if its alternate color space is ICC tagged RGB or Device RGB.

Example

To convert a spot color's alternate color space to another color space, for example CMYK, proceed as follows:

Select spot color by alternate color space <!-- select the appropriate alternate color

space(s) -->

Convert alternate color space to CMYK

on page 70) -->

6.14.100 Select standard 14 fonts

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects the standard 14 PostScript fonts.

The 14 fonts are automatically installed with Adobe Acrobat and embedded by default (since

PDF 1.5).

Example

To save on file size, you could select these fonts and unembed them. Proceed as follows:

Select standard 14 fonts

Unembed font <!--

on page 168-->

6.14.101 Select subpaths

Belongs to

•

Category:

Line Art

•

Type:

Selections

784

PitStop Pro

What it does

Selects the subpaths if the entire path is selected.

About subpaths

Related Actions

•

on page 104

•

6.14.102 Select subset fonts

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects fonts that are subsetted.

If a font is subsetted, only the characters of the font that are actually used in the text are embedded in the document. This is done to to keep a file as small as possible.

Example

If you have the original font on your system, you could choose the subsetted fonts and embed them completely for later editing. To do so, proceed as follows:

Select subset fonts

Embed font

Related Actions

•

Check if a subset font contains a complete CharSet or CIDSet

•

on page 239

6.14.103 Select text by key phrase

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select text objects containing a particular key word or phrase.

785

PitStop Pro

To take into account the case of the key phrase (uppercase/lowercase as entered in the text field), select the

Case sensitive

checkbox.

Tip:

To only select a particular key word (and not the entire text object it belongs to), you

could first split the text objects, using

to select clipping text as well, you can use

on page 167.

6.14.104 Select text by point size

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects text in a font that is below, above or equal to a certain size (expressed in points).

This Action is useful to select text that is too small to print correctly.

6.14.105 Select text by x-height

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Note that this Action only can work if at least one of the characters to be measured (x, u, v, w or z) is available in the PDF.

6.14.106 Select text segments

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects all text objects in a PDF.

Tip:

This Action does not select clipping text, which is not visible in the PDF. If you want

Select clipping and non-clipping text

299.

786

PitStop Pro

6.14.107 Select thin objects

Belongs to

•

Category:

Line Art

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select objects based on the maximum thickness of the fill or stroke.

If desired, you can indicate that for objects of which stroke and fill have the same color, the width of the fill and stroke should be added together.

This Action is typically used to select and afterwards remove thin white lines that may be visible on small screens (e.g. on an iPad screen).

Example

If you choose the following options:

Select objects with width of

Filled rectangle

smaller than

0.0353 cm

Calculate whole thickness when stroke and fill have the same color

Following objects will be included in the selection:

• Objects with different stroke and fill color, must have a

fill

smaller than 0.0353 cm.

• Objects with the same stroke and fill color, must have a

fill

and

stroke

(added together) smaller than 0.0353 cm.

6.14.108 Select tiling pattern contents according to parent object selection

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select the tiling pattern content depending on whether or not the parent object

(e.g. text or line art) is selected.

There are two options:

• Select the tiling pattern content if the parent object is selected.

787

PitStop Pro

• Select everything except the tiling pattern content of parent objects that are not selected.

6.14.109 Select transparent objects

Belongs to

•

Category:

Prepress

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Allows you to select transparent objects.

You can check the transparency of different elements, such as the fill or stroke, the blend modes, ... For the whole list of options, check the attributes of the Action in PitStop.

You can select all transparent objects or restrict your selection to objects that have

all

at least one

of the following properties:

• Fill is set to overprint

• Stroke is set to overprint

• Graphic element uses a spot color

About transparency in PDF

Transparency can cause some problems if you view documents in Adobe Acrobat 4.0 or earlier: transparent objects can be rendered incorrectly.

A transparent layer can also cause problems when you transpose the PostScript code of your

PDF document to the halftone information of your printer (the 'ripping').

A typical example is saving graphics with transparent elements as PDF compatible with Acrobat

It can be useful to make the distinction between spot colors and CMYK colors when checking the transparency settings in your documents, because different rules govern the overprinting of spot colors.

Related Actions

•

on page 228

•

•

•

6.14.110 Select trim marks

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Selections

788

PitStop Pro

What it does

Allows you to select potential trim or bleed marks with a certain color.

How to proceed

Indicate which marks you want to select: trim marks, bleed marks or both.

To help PitStop detect the trim marks, specify the potential color of the marks, by choosing one or more of the following:

• 400% CMYK

• Separation All (registration)

• 100% black

• A specific color

In case of a specific color, do one of the following:

• Select a color space from the list and use the sliders to select the appropriate color.

•

Click and select the appropriate color.

•

Select an object with the Enfocus Selection tool and click color from the selection.

to grab the fill or stroke

If desired, specify how much the marks are allowed to deviate from the expected position:

• The unit is the unit set in the PitStop Preferences (Units & Guides category), for example: cm or pt

• The maximum value is 2.7 pt; if you enter a higher value, it is automatically reset to 2.7 pt or an equivalent value, if you're using a different unit.

Example

789

PitStop Pro

Remark

A filled path with 3 lines is accepted as a trim mark if:

• The color is as specified in the attributes of this Action.

• It has no dash pattern.

• The 4 points of the 3 lines are a rectangle.

• The path is closed.

• The width is between 0.1 and 2 pt.

• The length is between 8 and 40 pt.

Related Actions

•

•

Check DeviceN colorants

6.14.111 Select undefined DeviceN colorants

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects objects which use a DeviceN color space (including NChannel) that contains spot colors that are not defined in the colorants dictionary.

About the DeviceN color space

Checking the colorants dictionary

You can use the Enfocus PitStop Inspector to check whether a particular spot color has been defined in the colorants dictionary. Proceed as follows:

Select an object with the color you want to check (using the Enfocus Select Object Tool ).

Click to display the Enfocus Inspector and select > . Next to the Fill icons, you will see "DeviceN (Spot + process colors). Below you will see the number of components and their names.

Click the

Actions

link (in the top right corner) and select

Color Picker

In the left part of the Color Picker dialog, navigate to the

Document Spot Colors

folder. This folder contains all spot colors used in the document (not only the ones used for the selected object).

Select the spot color you want to check. If the color is just a color name, without a color definition, the Alternate Color Space is Gray.

790

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

on page 170

6.14.112 Select XObjects

Belongs to

•

Category:

General

•

Type:

Selections

What it does

Selects any XObject in the PDF file.

XObjects are supported as of PDF 1.4.

Example

To log the presence of XObjects, use:

Select XObjects

Log Selection

Related Actions

Check for reference Xobjects

on page 190

6.14.113 Set correct document XMP name spaces

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

791

PitStop Pro

on page 210

6.14.114 Set page size to the largest in document

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Increases the size of smaller pages in a PDF document, so they are all equal to the size of the largest page.

If a PDF contains pages of different sizes, this may cause problems during the printing process.

You can use this Action to fix this problem.

on page 132

6.14.115 Set page size to the smallest in document

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Decreases the size of larger pages in a PDF document, so that they are all equal to the size of the smallest page.

If a PDF contains pages of different sizes, this may cause problems during the printing process.

You can use this Action to fix this problem.

on page 132

6.14.116 Set XMP file identifiers

Belongs to

•

Category:

Metadata

•

Type:

Changes

792

PitStop Pro

What it does

Adds missing file identifiers to the PDF's XMP metadata stream, for example: the Version ID, the

DocumentID, the RenditionClass.

6.14.117 Sharpen an image with unsharp mask

Belongs to

•

Category:

Image

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to sharpen edges in pixel images by applying the unsharp mask filter.

This filter:

• Compares adjacent pixels (specified by

Radius

and

Threshold

) to determine which pixels to correct.

• Increases the contrast of these pixels (specified by

Amount

You can modify the amount of contrast to be applied when correcting pixels (Amount), the distance (Radius) and the brightness difference (Threshold) between adjacent pixels.

The effects of the unsharp mask filter are far more pronounced on-screen than in highresolution output. For print, experiment to determine which options work best for your image.

Note:

This option is also available in the PitStop Inspector (by selecting

6.14.118 Shrink page content to fit

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page; Position/Size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

You can choose whether or not to take into account page rotation and scaling factor.

793

PitStop Pro

Related Actions

•

•

•

on page 130

•

6.14.119 Snap color to color set

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to remap any colors that vary a little from your desired colors back to the desired color. This Action can also remap images to Black or CMYK.

Snap color to color set can be useful to keep tight control over the range of colors in a document.

How to proceed

Define the color set to which the colors in the PDF must be changed as follows:

To remap variants of black to 100% black, select

Black

Note:

If you want to remap

all colors

in your document to black,

only

select the

Black

checkbox. Do not add any other color.

To add another color the colors in the document should be remapped to if they are close to it:

Click

New

. A new entry appears in the text box.

If you want to use a spot color (optionally), select the

Spot color

checkbox and type the name of the spot color in the text field. You should define a CMYK equivalent too (see next step). The name of the spot color is shown in the text box.

Enter the required values for CMYK (expressed in %) in the fields below the New/Remove button. Your changes are shown in the text box.

From the

Map images to

list, select the preferred color space for images. You can choose between black, CMYK, and (if applicable) the spot color(s) defined in the previous step.

6.14.120 Split in characters

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to split text objects in a PDF in separate characters.

794

PitStop Pro

This allows you to change for example the font or format of single characters (e.g. increase the size of capital letters).

Related Actions

•

on page 167

•

6.14.121 Split in subpaths

Belongs to

•

Category:

Line Art

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to split any compound path into separate paths, for example to give them a different color.

Splitting compound paths in PitStop Pro

In PitStop Pro, you can as well split compound paths. Proceed as follows:

Select the compound path (by using the PitStop Select Objects tool ).

Right-click it.

Click

Path

Compound Path

Release Compound Path

Related Actions

•

on page 104

•

on page 272

6.14.122 Split in words

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to split the text objects in a PDF in separate words, for example to modify the spacing.

Related Actions

•

on page 167

•

795

PitStop Pro

6.14.123 Split pages in half

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Splits pages in half in a certain direction (horizontally, vertically, or orientation dependent), based on the desired page box.

Orientation depending means that the landscape pages are split vertically and portrait pages are split horizontally.

Note:

PitStop provides three Actions Lists, allowing you split A4, A5 and US Letter documents in half.

6.14.124 Strip OpenType embedded fonts

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to remove the font's OpenType

info

from the PDF.

An OpenType embedded font is a PDF font resource that has its font embedded in the 'FontFile3' key with as 'SubType' the value 'OpenType'. This is not supported by older software. Running this

Action will convert the PDF font resource to a format that is supported by older software as well.

6.15 T

6.15.1 Tag object with an ICC profile

Belongs to

•

Category:

Color

•

Type:

Changes

796

PitStop Pro

What it does

Tags objects with a Gray, RGB, CMYK or Lab color space with a chosen ICC profile.

You can only tag the stroke or fill color or both. If an object is tagged already, the ICC tag will not be modified, unless you select the

Change ICC profile if object is already tagged

checkbox.

About ICC tagging

Related Actions

•

on page 77

•

on page 251

•

Check if ICC profile differs from ICC profile in PDF/X output intent

•

Select objects of which ICC profile is equal to ICC profile in PDF/X output

•

•

6.16 U

6.16.1 Unembed font

Belongs to

•

Category:

Text

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Removes embedded fonts from a document.

This can make the PDF lighter for internet distribution but risks messing up formatting if the font is not present on the end user's machine.

Optionally, you can choose not to execute this Action if the resulting font is unsafe.

About embedding fonts

Embedding fonts

in a PDF document means that every character of this font is copied and stored in the PDF document. This is useful if you create PDF documents to be displayed on

797

PitStop Pro different systems and to be printed on different devices: these are often systems that do not contain exactly the same fonts.

Embedding a font as a

subset

means that only those characters of the font that are actually used in the text are embedded. This reduces the file size by not including superfluous font information.

Related Actions

Embed font

on page 165

6.16.2 Use trim marks to set page box

Belongs to

•

Category:

Page; Position and size

•

Type:

Changes

What it does

Allows you to set the trim box and/or the bleed box based on the trim or bleed marks found in the PDF.

Note:

• Crop marks with a

dash pattern

cannot be used to set the page box.

• Crop marks generated with Illustrator, InDesign and QuarkXpress are supported.

How to proceed

Indicate which page box you want to set: the trim box, the bleed box or both.

Specify the color of the trim marks by choosing one or more of the following:

• 400% CMYK

• Separation All (registration)

• 100% black

• A specific color.

If desired, specify how much the marks are allowed to deviate from the expected position:

• The unit is the unit set in the PitStop Pro Preferences (Units & Guides category), for example: cm or pt

• The maximum value is 2.7 pt; if you enter a higher value, it is automatically reset to 2.7 pt or an equivalent value (if you're using a different unit).

Example

798

Related Actions

•

•